DevExpress.XtraEditors.v24.1

Contains utility classes used by DevExpress controls and components.

Contains classes that are used to implement context menus in DevExpress controls.

A menu item that allows you to embed an editor in a .

Initializes a new instance with the default settings.

Initializes a new class instance with the specified settings.

A string value that specifies the item’s caption. This parameter initializes the DXMenuItem.Caption property. A descendant that determines the editor’s type and contains its properties. This parameter initializes the DXEditMenuItem.Edit property. An event handler that will be invoked when the editor’s value is changed. This value is assigned to the DXEditMenuItem.EditValueChanged event. An item’s image. This parameter initializes the DXMenuItem.Image property. An item’s image to be displayed when the item is disabled. This parameter initializes the DXMenuItem.ImageDisabled property. An integer value that is the editor’s width. This parameter initializes the DXEditMenuItem.Width property. An integer value that is the editor’s height. This parameter initializes the DXEditMenuItem.Height property.

Initializes a new class instance with the specified settings.

A string value that specifies the item’s caption. This parameter initializes the DXMenuItem.Caption property.

Gets or sets the object that determines the editor’s type and contains its properties.

A descendant that determines the editor’s type and contains its properties.

Specifies the editor’s value.

An object that is the editor’s value.

Occurs after the DXEditMenuItem.EditValue property’s value has been changed.

Gets or sets the editor’s height.

An integer value that is the editor’s height.

Gets or sets the editor’s width.

An integer value that is the editor’s widhth.

Provides data for the event.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Gets or sets whether the event is handled. If the event is handled, the browser does not open.

true if the event is handled; otherwise, false.

Contains the classes that maintain the AlertControl’s infrastructure.

Represents a button within an alert window.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified image and button style.

A object that specifies the image to be displayed in a button. This value is assigned to the AlertButton.Image property. An value that specifies the button style. This value is assigned to the AlertButton.Style property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified image.

A object that specifies the image to be displayed in a button. This value is assigned to the AlertButton.Image property.

Gets or sets the bounds of the button.

A structure specifying the button’s rectangle.

Disposes of the current object and releases all the allocated resources.

Gets or sets the pressed state of the button, This option is in effect when the button functions as a check button (the AlertButton.Style property is set to AlertButtonStyle.CheckButton).

A Boolean value that specifies the button’s pressed state.

Returns the button’s size.

A System.Drawing.Size structure that specifies the button’s size.

Gets or sets the button’s hint.

A string that specifies the button’s hint.

Gets or sets an image displayed within the button

A object that specifies the button’s image.

Gets or sets an image displayed when the current button functions as a check button and it’s in the pressed state.

A object that specifies the image representing the button’s pressed state.

Gets or sets the index of an image in the AlertControl.Images collection, referring to the image displayed when the button functions as a check button and it’s in the pressed state.

An integer value that specifies the index of an image in the AlertControl.Images collection.

Gets or sets the index of an image in the AlertControl.Images collection, referring to the image displayed by the button.

An integer value that specifies the index of an image in the AlertControl.Images collection.

Provides access to settings that allow you to set up raster and vector icons for this .

An DevExpress.XtraBars.Alerter.AlertButtonImageOptions object that stores image-related options.

Gets the source of images for buttons in alert windows.

An object representing the source of images for buttons in alert windows.

Gets or sets the button’s name.

A string that specifies the button’s name.

The method is called when the button is clicked.

Gets the alert window that displays the current button.

An AlertFormCore object that displays the current button.

Gets whether the current button is one of the predefined buttons (Close, Pin or Dropdown).

true if the current button is one of the predefined buttons; otherwise, false.

Emulates changing a button’s check state, as if the button were clicked by the mouse.

true to check the button; false to uncheck the button.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the button’s state.

An AlertButtonState value that specifies the button’s state.

Gets or sets the button’s style.

An value that specifies the button’s style.

Returns the textual representation of the button.

A string representation of the button.

Gets or sets the button’s visibility.

A Boolean value that specifies the button’s visibility.

Represents a collection of buttons for alert windows.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified owner.

An owner of the current collection.

Adds a new button to the collection.

An to be added to the collection. An integer value that specifies the index of this button in the current collection.

Provides access to the settings of the Close Button, used to close an alert window.

An object that contains corresponding settings.

Gets the number of custom buttons in the current collection.

An integer value that specifies the number of custom buttons in the current collection.

Disposes of the current object and releases all the allocated resources.

Locates the button in the collection that has the specified hint.

A string that specified the hint of a button to be located. An object that has been located; null if no button with the specified hint has been located.

Provides indexed access to the buttons in the collection.

An integer value that specifies the index of the button to be returned from the collection. An object stored at the specified index in the collection.

Provides access to the buttons in the collection by their names.

A string that specifies the name of the button to be located. An object with the specified name.

Provides access to the settings of the Pin Button, used to pin an alert window.

An object that contains corresponding settings.

Gets the number of predefined buttons in the current collection.

An integer value that specifies the number of predefined buttons in the current collection.

Contains values that specify the style of custom buttons in alert windows.

A button functions as a regular button, producing the AlertControl.ButtonClick event when clicked.

A button functions as a check button, producing the AlertControl.ButtonDownChanged event when its pressed state is changed.

Contains values that specify the position of the control buttons in alert windows.

The control buttons are displayed at the right edge of an alert window.

The control buttons are displayed at the top edge of an alert window.

Contains values that specify the appearance speed of alert windows.

The alert window’s appearance speed is fast.

The alert window’s appearance speed is moderate.

The alert window’s appearance speed is slow.

Contains values that specify the position on screen at which alert windows are displayed.

An alert window appears at the bottom left corner of the screen.

An alert window appears at the bottom right corner of the screen.

An alert window appears at the top left corner of the screen.

An alert window appears at the top right corner of the screen.

Enumerates alert window animation effects.

For ShowAnimationType and HideAnimationType properties, the “Default” value means alerts should be displayed or hidden according to the value of the FormShowingEffect property. For the FormShowingEffect property itself, the “Default” value corresponds to the “FadeIn” effect.

An alert window is displayed and/or hidden with a fade-in effect.

An alert window is displayed and/or hidden by sliding horizontally onto the screen.

An alert window is displayed and/or hidden by sliding vertically onto the screen.

Alerts are displayed and/or hidden with no animation effects.

Alerts show be shown on-screen and (or) hidden using the Reveal animation (a combination of fade in and zoom in/out effects).

An alert window is displayed (or hidden) by gradually increasing its width from 0 to 100% (or vice versa).

An alert window is displayed (or hidden) by gradually increasing its height from 0 to 100% (or vice versa).

Contains information to be displayed in an alert window.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A String value that is the alert window caption. A String value that is the alert window text. true if the alert window should be closed on click; otherwise, false.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the window caption, text and image.

A string that specifies the caption of an alert window. This value is assigned to the AlertInfo.Caption property. A string that specifies the text of an alert window. This value is assigned to the AlertInfo.Text property. An image to be displayed in an alert window. This value is assigned to the AlertInfo.Image property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A String value that is the alert window caption. A String value that is the alert window text. A String value that is the alert window text, displayed only when hovered (see the AlertInfo.HotTrackedText property). An Image that is the alert window icon. An object that is the unique ID associated with this . true if the alert window should be closed on click; otherwise, false.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A string that specifies the caption of an alert window. This value is assigned to the AlertInfo.Caption property. A string that specifies the text of an alert window. This value is assigned to the AlertInfo.Text property. A string that specifies the text of an alert window, which is in effect when the text is hot-tracked. This value is assigned to the AlertInfo.HotTrackedText property. An image to be displayed in an alert window. This value is assigned to the AlertInfo.Image property. Any custom data to be associated with the current object. This value is assigned to the AlertInfo.Tag property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified window caption, text, image and the text that is to be displayed when the text area is hot-tracked.

A string that specifies the caption of an alert window. This value is assigned to the AlertInfo.Caption property. A string that specifies the text of an alert window. This value is assigned to the AlertInfo.Text property. A string that specifies the text of an alert window, which is in effect when the text is hot-tracked. This value is assigned to the AlertInfo.HotTrackedText property. An image to be displayed in an alert window. This value is assigned to the AlertInfo.Image property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified window caption, text, and the text that is to be displayed when the text area is hot-tracked.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified window caption and text.

Gets or sets whether or not an alert window associated with this object is automatically closed on click.

true if an alert window associated with this object is automatically closed on click; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the caption of an alert window.

A string that specifies the caption of an alert window.

Gets or sets the text of an alert window, displayed when the text is hot-tracked.

A string that specifies the hot-tracked text for an alert window.

Gets or sets an image to be displayed in an alert window.

A object that specifies an image to be displayed in an alert window.

Provides access to properties that allow you to set up raster and vector images for this class descendant.

An DevExpress.XtraBars.Alerter.AlertInfoImageOptions object that provides access to image-related settings.

Gets or sets the notification vector icon for this notification.

The notification’s vector icon.

Gets or sets custom data associated with the current object.

An object that represents custom data associated with the current object.

Gets or sets the text of an alert window.

A string that specifies the text of an alert window.

Contains classes that implement docking functionality.

Lists values specifying the position of the tabs in a tab container.

The tabs are located across the bottom of the tab container.

The tabs are located along the left side of the tab container.

The tabs are located along the right side of the tab container.

The tabs are located across the top of the tab container.

Contains editor classes that implement the functionality for corresponding controls.

The Area view of the chart range control client.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A Single value that specifies the newly created object’s scale factor.

Specifies the opacity (0-255) of the chart range control client area view.

A value from 0 (transparent) to 255 (opaque).

Allows you to create messages and dialogs that automatically close when a timer expires. See the XtraBaseArgs.AutoCloseOptions property for examples.

Creates a new instance of the AutoCloseOptions class with default settings.

Gets or sets the timer (in milliseconds) that automatically closes the dialog when it expires. See the XtraBaseArgs.AutoCloseOptions property for examples.

The timer duration (in milliseconds).

Gets the hash code (a number) that corresponds to the value of the current object.

The hash code for the current object.

If the AutoCloseOptions.Delay timer was set to a value different from zero, the ShowTimerOnDefaultButton property allows you to display the remaining timer duration on the default dialog button. See the XtraBaseArgs.AutoCloseOptions property for examples.

true, to display the remaining time on the default button; otherwise, false.

Displays a bar code.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets a value that specifies whether the BarCodeControl.Module property value should be calculated automatically based upon the bar code’s size.

true if the bar code’s module is calculated automatically; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the byte array to be coded into the PDF417 or ECC200 bar code.

An array of System.Byte values to be coded using the bar code’s symbology.

Creates an image of the bar code in the PNG format with a resolution of 96 DPI.

A object, specifying the currently displayed bar code as an image.

Creates an image of the bar code with the specified image format and resolution.

A object specifying the image format, such as PNG, BMP, or GIF, in which the bar code should be returned. An integer value specifying the horizontal and vertical resolution, in dots per inch, for the image to return. A object specifying the currently displayed bar code as an image.

Creates an image of the bar code with the specified image format and a resolution of 96 DPI.

A object specifying the image format, such as PNG, BMP, or GIF, in which the bar code should be returned. A object specifying the currently displayed bar code as an image.

Saves the bar code as an image to a stream with the specified image format and resolution.

The where the image will be saved. A object specifying the format, such as PNG, BMP, GIF, of the saved image. An integer value specifying the horizontal and vertical resolution, in dots per inch, of the saved image

Gets or sets the BarCodeControl‘s foreground color.

The BarCodeControl‘s foreground color.

Gets or sets the bar code’s horizontal alignment.

A enumeration value that specifies the bar code’s horizontal alignment.

Gets or sets the text’s horizontal alignment.

A enumeration value that specifies the text’s horizontal alignment.

Gets or sets the width of the narrowest bar or space, in pixels.

The width of the narrowest bar or space, in pixels.

Gets or sets the bar code’s orientation.

A enumeration value that specifies the bar code’s orientation.

Gets or sets whether or not the control’s Text is displayed along with the bar code.

true if the text is displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the symbology (code type) for the bar code and the text.

A class descendant that defines the symbology for the current control.

Indicates whether or not the bar code is correctly rendered.

A enumeration value, identifying the error (BarCodeError.None if the bar code validation succeeds).

Gets or sets the bar code’s vertical alignment.

A enumeration value that specifies the bar code’s vertical alignment.

Gets or sets the text’s vertical alignment.

A enumeration value that specifies the text’s vertical alignment.

Serves as a base for button controls.

Creates an instance of the class.

Provides access to the appearance settings applied when the current button is disabled.

An object that specifies the appearance settings applied when the current button is disabled.

Provides access to the appearance settings applied when the mouse pointer passes over the current button.

An object that specifies the appearance settings applied when the current button is hovered over with the mouse pointer.

Provides access to the appearance settings applied when the current button is clicked.

An object that specifies the appearance settings applied when the current button is clicked.

Gets or sets the button’s background color.

A structure which specifies the button’s background color.

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command in the source and bind it to this .

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. An Action that specifies whether this is currently enabled. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this .

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command in the source and bind it to this .

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An Action that specifies whether this is currently enabled. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this .

Binds the specific parameterized command to this .

An Object that is the command to be bound to this . A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An Action that uses the boolean function to specify whether or not this is currently enabled. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this .

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command of the target type in the source and bind it to this .

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. An Action that specifies whether this is currently enabled. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. The type of a ViewModel that stores a bindable command. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this .

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command of the target type in the source and bind it to this .

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An Action that specifies whether this is currently enabled. The type of a ViewModel that stores a bindable command. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this .

This member is not supported.

A enumeration member specifying the border style of the button.

Gets or sets the style of the button control.

A enumeration member specifying the button style.

Calculates the button’s size needed to fit its content.

A System.Drawing.Graphics object used to paint. A System.Drawing.Size object representing the button’s size that will best fit its content.

Calculates the button size required to fit its content, but not exceeding the specified maximum width.

The value that limits the width. A System.Drawing.Size object representing the button size that best fits its content, but whose width does not exceed the specified value.

Gets or sets the whose Execute(Object) method will be called when the Click event is invoked.

The command.

Occurs when the CanExecute(Object) status of the has changed.

Occurs after the value of the property has changed.

Gets or sets the parameter that is passed to the command specified by the Command property.

The parameter.

Occurs after the value of the property has changed.

Gets or sets a value that is returned to the parent form when the button is clicked.

A DialogResult enumeration member specifying the value that is returned to the parent form when the button is clicked.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

true if the button should behave as the default button; otherwise false.

Gets or sets the button’s paint style.

The button’s paint style.

Responds to button clicks.

Resets the BaseButton.BackColor property back to its default value.

Gets or sets whether the tooltip is anchored relative to the mouse pointer or the button.

A DevExpress.Utils.ToolTipAnchor value that specifies whether the tooltip is anchored relative to the mouse pointer or the button.

The base class for and .

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets whether the editor’s width is changed to display the editor’s content in its entirety. This property is in effect when the editor resides within a .

true if auto-size mode is enabled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the style used to draw the check editor’s border.

A enumeration value identifying the style used to draw the check editor’s border.

Calculates the minimum size the control needs to be to contain its contents.

A System.Drawing.Size object representing the minimum size of the control that will best fit its content.

Gets the editor’s class name.

A System.String object identifying the class name of the current editor.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Retrieves the size of a rectangular area into which the control will fit.

The custom-sized area for the control. A System.Drawing.Size value.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets the size of a rectangular area into which the control can fit.

A System.Drawing.Size structure specifying the control’s minimum size.

Gets an object containing properties, methods and events specific to a check editor.

A object instance containing settings for the control.

Gets or sets the text label associated with a check editor.

A System.String value representing the text label associated with a check editor.

Changes the state of a check editor.

Serves as the base for the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Gets or sets whether check items in the checked list box should support three check states rather than two.

true if the check items are able to display three check states; otherwise, false.

Checks all the items in the list box.

Gets the collection of indexes corresponding to checked items.

A CheckedIndexCollection object representing the collection of indexes corresponding to checked items.

Gets the collection of checked item values.

A CheckedItemCollection object representing the collection of checked item values.

Returns the number of checked items in the BaseCheckedListBoxControl.Items collection.

An integer value that specifies the number of checked items.

Gets or sets the name of the data source field that provides check states for listbox items.

A string value specifying a field name in the data source.

Occurs when the BaseCheckedListBoxControl.CheckMember property value is changed.

Gets or sets whether one or two mouse clicks are required to toggle the check state of an unfocused (unselected) item.

true if a single mouse click is required to toggle the check state of an unfocused (unselected) item; false if two mouse clicks are required.

Checks all selected (highlighted) items.

Gets or sets a value that determines the look and feel of the check boxes. This property is not supported when listbox items are rendered based on Item Templates

A enumeration value specifying the look and feel of the check box.

Occurs when the field value is fetched from the data source and then posted back.

Enables you to sort list items in custom order.

Gets a value indicating whether the item is checked.

An integer value representing the zero-based index of the item. true if the item is checked; false if unchecked or in the indeterminate state.

Gets the check state of the item specified by its index.

An integer value representing the zero-based index of the item. A CheckState enumeration member representing the item’s check state. CheckState.Unchecked if the item’s index is negative or exceeds the last available index.

Enables you to disable specific items, in bound mode.

Inverts the check state for each item in the BaseCheckedListBoxControl.Items collection.

Returns whether all selected (highlighted) items are checked.

true if all selected items are checked; otherwise, false.

Fires after an item’s check state changes.

Fires before an item’s check state changes and allows you to cancel the action.

Access the item collection, when the control is not bound to a data source.

A object representing the items collection displayed within the CheckedListBoxControl.

Gets or sets a custom image representing check boxes in the checked state. This property is in effect if the BaseCheckedListBoxControl.CheckStyle property is set to CheckStyles.UserDefined.

An Image representing check boxes in the checked state.

Gets or sets a custom image representing check boxes in the intermediate state. This property is in effect if the BaseCheckedListBoxControl.CheckStyle property is set to CheckStyles.UserDefined.

An Image representing check boxes in the intermediate state.

Gets or sets a custom image representing check boxes in the unchecked state. This property is in effect if the BaseCheckedListBoxControl.CheckStyle property is set to CheckStyles.UserDefined.

An Image representing check boxes in the unchecked state.

Gets or sets whether or not users can check or uncheck control items. Items remain selectable even when the ReadOnly property is set to true.

Specifies whether users are allowed to check and uncheck items.

Forces the control to invalidate its client area and immediately redraw itself and any child controls.

Occurs when the items collection or data source changes.

Sets the specified item’s state to checked or unchecked.

An integer value that specifies the zero-based index of the item whose check state should be changed. true, if the item is checked; false, if the item is unchecked.

Sets the check state of the item.

An integer value representing the zero-based index of the item. A CheckState enumeration member specifying the new check state of the item.

Toggles the state of the item at the specified index.

An zero-based integer value which represents the index of the item whose state should be toggled.

Inverts the check states of selected items.

Unchecks all the items.

Unchecks all selected (highlighted) items.

Implements the functionality common for all controls in the library.

Creates an instance of the class.

Gets or sets whether HTML formatting is allowed in the control’s regular tooltips.

, to enable HTML formatting in regular tooltips; , to disable; , to use the ToolTipController.AllowHtmlText setting.

When a control is added to a , this property specifies whether the control’s width is changed to display its content in its entirety. This member is supported by individual descendant of the class.

true if auto-size mode is enabled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the control’s border style.

A enumeration value specifying the control’s border style.

Calculates the minimum size sufficient to fit the content.

A Size structure that specifies the minimum size sufficient to fit the content.

Returns an object which implements the accessibility information.

A BaseAccessibility object.

Returns the object which contains the internal information used to render the control.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.ViewInfo.BaseControlViewInfo descendant which contains the internal information used to render the control.

Gets a value indicating whether the control is currently in design mode.

true if the control is in design mode; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the control is being initialized.

true if the control is being initialized; otherwise, false.

Provides access to the object containing the control’s look and feel settings.

A object containing the control’s look and feel settings.

Forces the control to invalidate its client area and immediately redraw itself and any child controls.

Removes the object that has been assigned to the current control.

Returns scale multipliers that are currently applied to a control’s original width and height.

A value that specifies scale multipliers.

Gets or sets whether a tooltip should be displayed when the mouse pointer is over the control.

true to display tooltips; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the style controller component that provides style settings for this control.

An object that implements the DevExpress.XtraEditors.IStyleController interface which provides style settings for the current control.

Gets or sets a for the current control.

A object associated with the control.

Gets or sets a regular tooltip’s text content.

A string which specifies the text content of a regular tooltip.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the tooltip controller component that controls the appearance, position and content of hints displayed for this control.

The component controlling the appearance and behavior of hints displayed for this control.

Gets or sets the type of the tooltip icon.

A enumeration value.

Gets or sets a regular tooltip’s title.

A value which specifies a regular tooltip’s title.

The base class for controls that implement the ability to edit date-time values.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Serves as the base for all editors that can be used for inplace (such as within the XtraGrid) editing.

Creates an instance of the class.

Displays the XtraEditors library’s about box.

Gets or sets the default action description of the editor for use by accessibility client applications.

A string which specifies the default action description of the editor for use by accessibility client applications.

Gets or sets the object’s description used by accessibility client applications.

The object’s description used by accessibility client applications.

Gets or sets the object’s name used by accessibility client applications.

The object’s name used by accessibility client applications.

Gets or sets the object’s accessible role.

The object’s accessible role.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

A System.Windows.Forms.Control object representing the control containing the current editor. A System.Drawing.Point object representing the coordinates of a mouse click. true, a mouse click is allowed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the background color of an enabled editor.

A object specifying the editor’s background color when it is not disabled.

This event is not supported by the class.

Gets the BindingManagerBase object.

A BindingManagerBase object managing all binding controls that are bound to the same data source and data member. null (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no data source is bound.

Gets or sets the editor’s border style.

A enumeration value specifying the editor’s border style.

Calculates the minumum height of the editor.

The minimum height of the editor, in pixels.

This member supports the internal infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

For internal use.

Gets or sets the context menu for the editor.

A System.Windows.Forms.ContextMenu object representing the context menu for the editor.

Enables custom display text to be provided for an editor.

Gets or sets the default error icon.

A object that specifies the default error icon.

Gets or sets the location of the default error icon in relation to the editor.

An enumeration value that specifies the location of the default error icon in relation to the editor.

Gets a set of options that allow you to assign and customize the default icon displayed when an error is associated with the editor.

A object that stores properties that allow you to assign and customize the default icon displayed when an error is associated with the editor.

Clears selection within the editor.

Performs editor value validation.

true if the editor value has been validated; otherwise, false.

Validates the editor.

A enumeration value that specifies how a dropdown editor’s popup window was closed. true if the editor’s value is valid; otherwise, false.

Tests whether the editor or its popup window has focus.

true if the editor or its popup window has focus; otherwise false.

Gets the editor’s class name.

A string value identifying the editor’s class name.

Gets or sets the editor’s value.

An object representing the editor’s value.

Fires immediately after the edit value has been changed.

Fires when the editor’s value is about to change.

Gets or sets whether focus is moved to the next control (according to the tab order) when an end-user presses ENTER.

true if focus is moved to the next control (according to the tab order) when an end-user presses ENTER; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets an icon displayed when an error is associated with the editor.

A object that specifies the error icon.

Gets or sets the alignment of the icon displayed when an error is associated with the editor.

An value that specifies the error icon’s alignment.

Gets a set of options that allow you to assign and customize an icon displayed when an error is associated with the editor.

A object that stores properties that allow you to assign and customize an icon displayed when an error is associated with the editor.

Gets or sets the tooltip displayed when the mouse pointer hovers over the error icon.

A string value that specifies the tooltip displayed when the mouse pointer hovers over the error icon.

Gets or sets the font used to display editor contents.

A object specifying the font used to display editor contents.

This event is not supported by the class.

Gets or sets the editor content’s foreground color.

A structure specifying the editor content’s foreground color.

This event is not supported by the class.

Enables you to format the editor’s value (change the editor’s value when the formatting mechanism is invoked).

Retrieves the size of a rectangular area into which the control can be fitted.

The custom-sized area for the control. A System.Drawing.Size value.

Gets or sets the inplace type of an editor.

A enumeration member specifying the editor inplace type.

Enables an appropriate response to be provided when invalid values are entered.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets whether the editor is active.

true if the editor is active; otherwise, false.

Gets a value indicating whether the editor is being loaded.

true if the editor is being loaded; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the editor’s value has been modified since the editor last received focus or since it was last validated.

true if the editor’s value has been modified; otherwise, false.

Returns a value indicating whether a particular key will be processed by the editor or passed to its container.

A object specifying the key to process. true if the pressed key will be processed by the editor; otherwise, false.

This member supports the internal editors library infrastructure and is not intended to be used from your code.

true if a container control needs to focus the editor; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the specified value is the “Non-loaded Value”. This property is in effect when asynchronous data binding is used.

A value to be tested. true if the specified value is the “Non-loaded Value”; otherwise, false.

Checks whether a control is a text editor.

The current control. true if the current control is a text editor; otherwise, false.

Gets an object containing the editor’s look and feel settings.

A object containing the editor’s look and feel settings.

Gets or sets an object that controls the look and feel of the popup menus.

An object that controls the look and feel of the popup menus.

Fires when the user starts to modify the edit value.

Gets the last successfully validated value.

An object representing the last value that was successfully validated.

This property is not supported by the class.

A Padding value.

Converts an input value (the one that is entered by an end-user or assigned in code) to the value to be stored by the editor.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets an object containing properties, methods and events specific to the editors.

A object containing settings relating to all editors.

Fires immediately after any editor’s property value has changed.

Fires when the help is provided to accessibility applications.

Provides ability to specify whether the key pressed in the editor is processed by the editor or a container control (, , etc.) that displays this editor.

Gets or sets whether the editor’s value cannot be changed by end-users.

true if end-users cannot modify the editor’s value; otherwise, false.

Resets the editor’s selection and cursor position.

Resets the BaseEdit.BackColor property back to its default value.

Resets the BaseEdit.ForeColor property back to its default value.

In descendant classes, clears the selection.

Selects the editor’s entire content.

Sends the specified message to the active editor.

A to be sent. A KeyPressEventArgs object that will be passed to the editor’s KeyPress event.

Raises the KeyDown event.

A object providing data for the event.

Raises the KeyUp event.

A object providing data for the event.

Raises the RepositoryItem.MouseDown event.

A structure specifying the mouse pointer coordinates. A bitwise combination of enumeration values specifying the pressed mouse buttons.

Raises the RepositoryItem.MouseDown event.

A object providing data for the RepositoryItem.MouseDown event.

Raises the RepositoryItem.MouseUp event.

A structure that specifies the mouse pointer coordinates. A enumeration value that specifies which mouse button was pressed.

This method is used internally when using editors inplace and is not intended to be called in your code.

An object supporting the IPopupServiceControl interface.

This member supports the internal .NET Framework infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

This method supports the internal .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets whether to suppress the specified keyboard key for the editor.

Suppressed modifier keys.

Gets or sets whether an end-user can focus this control using the TAB key.

true if an end-user can focus the control using the TAB key; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the text displayed by the editor.

A string value representing the text displayed by the editor.

Gets or sets whether the tooltip is anchored relative to the mouse cursor or relative to the editor. This property is not in effect if you handle the ToolTipController.GetActiveObjectInfo event.

A DevExpress.Utils.ToolTipAnchor value that specifies whether the tooltip is anchored relative to the mouse cursor or relative to the editor. By Default, the behavior depends on the ToolTipController.ToolTipAnchor property.

Contains a set of options that allow you to specify and customize an error icon.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Gets or sets the alignment of the error icon relative to the editor.

A value that specifies the alignment of the error icon relative to the editor.

Serves as a base for class.

Gets the image displayed within the specified item.

An integer value representing the zero-based index of the item. A object value specifying the image displayed within the specified item. -1 if no item is found.

Gets the index of the image displayed within the specified item.

An integer value representing the zero-based index of the item. An integer value representing the zero-based index of the image displayed within the specified item. -1 if no item is found.

Returns the image options of the item with the specified index.

An integer value that specifies the zero-based index of the item whose image options will be obtained. An ImageOptions object that specifies the image options of the item with the specified index.

Returns the image size of the item with the specified index.

An integer value that specifies the zero-based index of the item whose image will be obtained. A Size structure that specifies the image size of the item with the specified index.

Specifies the alignment of the image displayed within the item.

A enumeration member specifying the image alignment.

Gets or sets the name of the data source field that provides image indexes for listbox items. This property is not supported when listbox items are rendered based on Item Templates.

A string value specifying the name of the data source field whose contents represent image indexes.

Occurs after the BaseImageListBoxControl.ImageIndexMember property value has been changed.

Gets or sets the source of images to be displayed within the items.

An object which is the source of images.

Gets or sets the name of the data source field that provides images for listbox items. This property is not supported when listbox items are rendered based on Item Templates.

A string value specifying the name of the data source field whose contents represent images.

Occurs after the BaseImageListBoxControl.ImageMember property value has been changed.

Accesses the item collection, when the control is not bound to a data source.

An object representing the items collection.

Serves as the base for , , , and classes.

Creates a new object.

Adds new items that represent elements of the specified enumeration to the control, allowing you to specify whether enumeration constant names or integer values are assigned to the item values.

The type of the required enumeration. true if enumeration underlying integer values are assigned to the item values; otherwise, false.

Adds new items that represent elements of the specified enumeration to the control.

The type of the required enumeration.

Adds new items that represent elements of the specified enumeration to the control.

Adds new items that represent elements of the specified enumeration to the control. Allows you to customize item descriptions and specify whether underlying integer values are assigned to the item values.

A System.Converter delegate that generates item descriptions to be displayed. true, if values for generated items should store numeric enumerator values; false, if these values should store constant enumerator names instead. The type of the required enumeration.

Adds new items that represent elements of the specified enumeration to the control, allowing you to customize item descriptions.

A System.Converter delegate that generates item descriptions.

Gets or sets whether HTML tags can be used to format the text of the control’s items.

A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text of the control’s items.

Provides access to the appearance settings used to paint list items when the control is disabled.

A object that specifies the appearance settings used to paint list items when the control is disabled.

Provides access to the appearance settings used to paint hot tracked list items.

An object specifying the appearance settings used to paint hot tracked list items.

Provides access to the appearance settings used to paint list items in the selected state.

An object that specifies the appearance settings used to paint list items in the selected state.

Gets or sets the control’s background color.

A value that specifies the control’s background color.

Locks the object by preventing visual updates of the object and its elements until the EndUpdate method is called.

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command of the target type in the source and binds it to this HTML element.

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. The ID of the HTML element to which the found command should be bound. A Func delegate that passes an Object to the command as a parameter. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from its target HTML element.

Binds the specific parameterized command to the target HTML element.

An Object that is the command to be bound to this HTML element. The ID of the HTML element to which the target command should be bound. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from its target HTML element.

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command of the target type in the source and bind it to the HTML element.

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. The ID of the HTML element to which the target command should be bound. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. The type of a ViewModel that stores a bindable command. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this HTML element.

Unlocks the object after it has been locked by the BeginUpdate method, without causing an immediate visual update.

Gets or sets column width when the BaseListBoxControl.MultiColumn setting is enabled.

An integer value representing column width in pixels. 0 if the column width is automatically calculated.

Fires when a context button is clicked.

Provides access to the settings applied to the context buttons displayed in the control.

A DevExpress.Utils.SimpleContextItemCollectionOptions object that comprises settings applied to the context buttons displayed in the control.

Provides access to the collection of context buttons displayed in the control.

A ContextItemCollection object that represents the collection of context buttons.

Fires when the CheckContextButton.Checked, TrackBarContextButton.Value or RatingContextButton.Rating property value changes.

Allows you to specify a tooltip shown when the mouse pointer hovers over a context button. This event is only raised for and objects.

Allows you to draw custom content within the empty list box.

Allows you to draw custom scrollbars, or highlight specific positions on the scrollbars.

Enables custom display text to be provided for control items.

Allows you to assign custom templates to listbox items.

Allows you to customize the context buttons for individual items.

Allows you to customize templated items dynamically.

Gets or sets the data source that provides items to display in the control.

A data source object whose data is displayed by the ListBox control.

Occurs immediately after the BaseListBoxControl.DataSource property value has been changed.

The default value for the BaseListBoxControl.ShowToolTipForTrimmedText property. Returns false.

Gets or sets the name of the data source field that specifies display text for listbox items. This property is not supported when listbox items are rendered based on Item Templates.

A string value specifying a field name in a data source.

Occurs immediately after the list box control display member has been changed.

Provides the ability to custom paint items displayed within the list box control.

Unlocks the object after a call to the BeginUpdate method and causes an immediate visual update.

Searches for the first list box item in the specified direction from the specified index, using a cusom algorithm.

An integer value providing the zero-based index of the start item. true to search to the end of the item list; false to search to the beginning of the item list. A delegate that is called when searching for a list box item. An integer value representing the zero-based index of the first item found. -1 if no item is found.

Returns the index of the specified item.

An object which represents an item whose index is returned. An integer value which specifies the item’s position within the collection. -1 if the item isn’t found.

Searches for the first list box item in the specified direction from the specified index, and starting with a specific string.

A string value representing the search text. An integer value providing the zero-based index of the start item. true to search to the end of the item list; false to search to the beginning of the item list. An integer value representing the zero-based index of the first item found. -1 if no item is found.

Finds the first item in the list box control which starts with the specified string. The search starts at a starting index specified by the parameter.

A string value providing the search text. An integer value providing the zero-based index of the start item. An integer value representing the zero-based index of the first item found. -1 if no item is found.

Finds the first item in the list box control starting with the specified string.

A string value representing the search text. An integer value representing the zero-based index of the first item found. -1 if no item is found.

Finds the first item which matches the specified string exactly.

A string value specifying the search text. An integer value representing the zero-based index of the first item to be searched. An integer value representing the zero-based index of the first item found. -1 if no item is found.

Finds the first item in the list box control which matches the specified string exactly.

A string value specifying the search text. An integer value representing the zero-based index of the first item found. -1 if no item is found.

Forces the control to finish its initialization.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets an item’s display value.

A zero-based integer specifying the item by its position within the collection. An object representing the item’s value. The String.Empty value if the item index provided is invalid.

Gets an item at the specified position.

An integer value representing the zero-based index of an item to be returned. An object representing an item at the specified position. null (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no item is found.

Gets the boundaries of the specified item.

A zero-based integer value which specifies the item’s index. A structure which represents the specified item’s boundaries.

Gets the text string displayed by the item.

An integer value representing the zero-based index of the item. A string value representing the text displayed within the item. String.Empty if no item is found.

Gets the specified item’s value.

An integer value representing the zero-based index of the item whose value is returned. An object representing the specifyed item’s value. null (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no item is found.

Gets or sets the paint mode for the selected and hot-tracked items.

A value that specifies the paint mode for the selected and hot-tracked items.

Gets or sets whether a horizontal scroll bar is enabled when the control’s items are displayed in a single column and some of them exceed the control’s width.

true if horizontal scrolling is enabled in single column display mode; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the offset by which the control is scrolled horizontally when the scrollbar buttons are clicked. This property is in effect in single column display mode, when the BaseListBoxControl.HorizontalScrollbar property is set to true.

An integer value specifying the horizontal scrolling step in pixels.

Gets the zero-based index of the currently hot-tracked item.

The zero-based index of the currently hot-tracked item.

Gets or sets whether list box items are hot-tracked when the mouse pointer moves over them.

true if the items are hot-tracked; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets how items are selected when item hot-tracking is enabled.

A value that specifies how items are selected.

Occurs when a user clicks an element within an HTML-CSS template.

Occurs when mouse pointer is over an element of an HTML-CSS template, and a mouse button is pressed.

Occurs when a mouse pointer moves while over an element of an HTML-CSS template.

Occurs when a mouse pointer leaves the bounds of an element within an HTML-CSS template.

Occurs when a mouse pointer enters the bounds of an element within an HTML-CSS template.

Occurs when a mouse button pressed over an element of an HTML-CSS template is released.

Gets or sets a collection of images that can be inserted into item captions using the image tag.

An image collection (DevExpress.Utils.ImageCollection or DevExpress.Utils.SvgImageCollection).

Stores HTML and CSS-based templates used to render listbox items.

A collection of HTML and CSS-based templates used to render listbox items.

Gets or sets whether incremental searching for items is enabled.

true to activate incremental search; otherwise, false.

Returns the index of an item at specified coordinates.

A structure containing the coordinates used to obtain the item index. An integer value representing the zero-based index of an item at specified coordinates. -1 if no item is found.

Gets a value indicating whether the list box control is being loaded.

true if the list box control is being loaded; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the current is locked by the BaseListBoxControl.BeginUpdate method.

true if the is locked; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether item height is automatically calculated to fit item contents. In auto-height mode, different items may have different heights.

true if item height is automatically calculated; otherwise, false.

Gets the number of elements contained in the collection of the list box control.

An integer value representing the number of elements contained in the collection.

Gets or sets an item’s height.

An integer value representing an item’s height in pixels.

Gets or sets padding within list items.

A structure representing list item internal spacing characteristics.

Gets or sets the horizontal scroll position.

A zero-based integer value that specifies the horizontal scroll position.

Makes the specified item visible on-screen if it is currently invisible.

An integer value representing the item’s zero-based index.

Provides the ability to change an individual item’s height.

Gets or sets whether to arrange items across multiple columns if the ListBox cannot fit all items vertically.

true to arrange items across multiple columns; otherwise, false.

Fires when a related fires a query to the current List Box. Allows you to create a filter condition based on the query and specify how to highlight results in the control.

Selects all items when multiple item selection is enabled.

Gets or sets the index of the currently selected item.

An integer value representing the zero-based index of the item in the list box control. -1 if no item is selected.

Allows you to respond to item selection.

Gets a collection containing the indexes of all currently selected items in the list box control.

A SelectedIndexCollection object representing the collection of all currently selected items in the control.

Gets or sets the currently selected item.

An object representing the list box control’s currently selected item.

Gets currently selected items.

A SelectedItemCollection object containing currently selected items.

Gets or sets the currently selected item’s value.

An object representing the currently selected item’s value. null (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no item is selected.

Occurs after a value of the selected item has been changed.

Gets or sets whether a single or multiple items can be selected.

A SelectionMode enumeration member specifying the list box control’s selection behavior.

Assigns a new value to the specified item.

An object representing a new value to be assigned to the specified item. An integer value representing the zero-based index of the item to which a new value is assigned.

Sets the specified item’s selection state.

The zero-based index of the item whose selection state will be changed. true to select the item; false to unselect the item.

Gets or sets whether hovering over items selects the item being hovered over (modifies the control’s BaseListBoxControl.SelectedIndex property).

true if item being hovered over is automatically selected; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the dotted focus rectangle is displayed around the focused item.

true if the dotted focus rectangle is displayed around the focused item; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether tooltips are displayed for items whose text is trimmed.

A value that specifies whether tooltips are displayed for items whose text is trimmed.

Raises the CustomSort event.

Gets or sets the sort order.

A SortOrder enumeration member that specifies the sort order.

Stores regular item templates used to render listbox items.

The item template collection.

This property is not supported by the class.

A string value.

Gets or sets the index of the first visible item in the list box control.

An integer value specifying the zero-based index of the top visible item.

Unselects all items when multiple item selection is enabled.

Gets or sets whether the control is painted grayed out when it’s in the disabled state.

true if the control is painted grayed out, when it’s in the disabled state; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the field name in the bound data source whose contents are assigned to item values.

A string value specifying a field name in the data source.

Occurs after the BaseListBoxControl.ValueMember property value has been changed.

Serves as the base for editors with spin buttons used to modify edit values.

Creates a new object.

Closes the pop-up associated with the current -derived control without saving the current value.

Occurs when the -derived control’s pop-up was successfully closed.

Saves the current value and closes the pop-up associated with the -derived control.

Occurs when the -derived control’s pop-up is about to close.

Gets the editor’s class name.

A System.String object identifying the editor’s class name.

Occurs each time a control’s pop-up was displayed.

Gets an object containing properties and methods specific to the spin editor.

A object instance containing settings specific to the spin editor.

Occurs when the control’s pop-up window is to be closed.

Occurs each time a control’s pop-up is to be displayed.

This method is not supported for -derived controls.

Attempts to display the control’s pop-up window.

Serves as the base for controls that cannot be used as in-place editors and supports a common style management mechanism.

Initializes an instance of the class.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the control’s contents.

A object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the control’s contents.

Gets or sets the background color of the control’s client region.

A structure specifying the background color of the control’s client region.

This event is not supported by the class.

Gets or sets the font used to display the control’s content.

A object specifying the font used to display the control’s content.

This event is not supported by the class.

Gets or sets the control’s foreground color.

A structure specifying the color used to display the control’s text.

This event is not supported by the class.

Resets the BaseStyleControl.BackColor property back to its default value.

Resets the BaseStyleControl.ForeColor property to its default value.

Resets the painter associated with this to its default state.

Resets the View Info object associated with this .

The base class for editors that work with binary large object (BLOB) data.

Creates a new instance of the PopupBaseEdit class.

Gets the current editor’s class name.

A object identifying the class name of the current editor.

Allows you to hide the default OK and Cancel buttons shown in the editor’s popup menus.

Gets an object containing settings specific to the BLOB editor.

A object instance containing settings for the BLOB editor.

The Microsoft Windows Explorer-inspired navigation bar that allows end users to navigate through a hierarchical tree of nodes.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Returns information on elements located at the target position.

A Point structure that is the target location to be tested. A DevExpress.XtraEditors.ViewInfo.BreadCrumbEditHitInfo object containing information on elements located at the target position.

Returns information on elements located at the target position.

An Int32 value that is the X-axis coordinate of the tested location. An Int32 value that is the Y-axis coordinate of the tested location. A DevExpress.XtraEditors.ViewInfo.BreadCrumbEditHitInfo object containing information on elements located at the target position.

Tests whether or not calling the BreadCrumbEdit.GoBack method will have an effect.

true if calling the BreadCrumbEdit.GoBack method will have an effect; otherwise, false.

Tests whether or not calling the BreadCrumbEdit.GoForward method will have an effect.

true if calling the BreadCrumbEdit.GoForward method will have an effect; otherwise, false.

Tests whether or not calling the BreadCrumbEdit.GoUp method will have an effect.

true if calling the BreadCrumbEdit.GoUp method will have an effect; otherwise, false.

Returns whether this can store navigation history. To access this journal, use the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.History property (does not store records for navigation performed by mouse, touch gestures, or in code) or call the BreadCrumbEdit.GetNavigationHistory method (a complete history).

true if this can store navigation history; otherwise, false.

Returns the editor type name.

Returns the “BreadCrumbEdit” string value.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code. Please use the BreadCrumbEdit.Path property instead.

Gets the object that stores the complete navigation history for this Breadcrumb Edit Control.

A object that stores the complete navigation history for this control.

Gets the current node path’s index within a navigation journal, retrieved by the BreadCrumbEdit.GetNavigationHistory method.

An Int32 value that is the current node path’s index within a complete navigation journal.

Returns the control’s popup window.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.BreadCrumbPopupForm object that represents the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

Navigates back to the previous entry in the navigation journal.

Navigates to next navigation journal entry.

Navigates to the currently selected node’s parent node.

Gets whether this currently has an expanded node.

true if this currently has an expanded node; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the current nodes path within this , starting from a root to the last node visible.

A String value that is the textual representation of the current nodes path.

Occurs each time the current path changes.

Provides access to the main settings.

A object that stores settings that specify the look and behavior.

Clears the navigation journal, retrieved by the BreadCrumbEdit.GetNavigationHistory method.

Selects the entire path when this is in Edit mode.

Gets or sets the last item currently selected in this .

A object that is the last item currently selected in this .

Fires when this ‘s BreadCrumbEdit.SelectedNode changes.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Sets the current node path’s index within a navigation journal, retrieved by the BreadCrumbEdit.GetNavigationHistory method.

An Int32 value that is the current node path’s index within a complete navigation journal.

Invokes the pop-up menu that shows recently visited nodes. See the following help article for more information: History.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Stores the navigation history and allows you to navigate through these records.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A object that specifies the newly created ‘s settings.

Adds the target to this collection.

The to be added.

Adds multiple s to this collection.

s to be added.

Adds multiple history items to this collection.

An IEnumerable containing history items to be added to this collection.

Occurs each time the is modified.

Determines whether this collection contains the target .

A to be checked. true if this collection contains the target ; otherwise, false.

Releases all resources used by the current object.

Searches this collection for a , related to the target path.

A String value that is the path to be checked. A whose BreadCrumbHistoryItem.Path property value equals the path parameter.

Gets the position within this collection.

A BreadCrumbHistoryItem whose index is to be obtained. An Int32 value that is the target ‘s index within this collection.

Adds the to this collection and places it at a specific position within this collection.

An Int32 value that specifies the newly added item’s index within this collection. A to be added.

Gets whether this collection is currently empty.

true if this collection is currently empty; otherwise, false.

Gets a that occupies a specific position within this collection.

An Int32 value that is the index of a within this collection. A that occupies a specific position within this collection.

Moves a containing the specific path to the end of this collection.

A Sting value that specifies the node path. A node whose BreadCrumbNode.Path value equals this parameter value will be re-arranged.

Provides access the a object, assigned to this collection.

A object, assigned to this collection.

Removes the specific item from this collection.

A to be removed.

An object that stores the previously viewed path.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A String value that is the BreadCrumbHistoryItem.Path property value for the newly created .

Duplicates the target .

A object that is the target object’s clone.

Compares this with a specific object.

An Object to be compared with this . true if the compared object is a with the same BreadCrumbHistoryItem.Path property value as this ; otherwise, false.

Gets the integer hash code that corresponds to the current object’s value.

An Int32 value that is the ‘s hash code.

Gets this ‘s position within its parent collection.

An Int32 value that is the position within its parent collection.

Moves the to the top of its parent collection.

Gets or sets the path within a control to which this relates.

A String value that is the path within a control to which this relates.

Gets the textual representation of this .

A String value that represents this object’s BreadCrumbHistoryItem.Path property value.

Exposes members used to label corresponding modes.

The ‘s path is represented as plain editable text. End users can use a keyboard to modify this path and navigate within the .

The ‘s path is represented as a sequence of click-able visual elements. Each element represents a and has a drop-down button that displays a drop-down list with all child nodes owned by this node.

A node within a control.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A String value that is the newly created node’s caption. A String value that is the newly created node’s value. true if this node should raise the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.QueryChildNodes event when an end-user clicks its drop-down button; otherwise, false.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A String value that is the newly created node’s caption. A String value that is the newly created node’s value.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A String value that is the newly created ‘s caption.

Locks the object and prevents any visual updates until the EndUpdate method is called.

Unlocks the node that was previously locked by the BeginUpdate method, without causing an immediate visual update.

Gets or sets this ‘s caption.

A String value that is this ‘s caption.

Gets the child nodes collection for this .

A BreadCrumbNodeCollection that contains child for this .

Copies this .

A that is the target ‘s clone.

Copies this with or without its child nodes.

true if the newly created should contain same nodes in its BreadCrumbNode.ChildNodes collection as the source ; otherwise, false. A that is this ‘s clone.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Unlocks the node that was previously locked by the BeginUpdate method and causes an immediate visual update.

Gets whether this equals the target object.

An Object to compare with this . true if this equals the target object; otherwise, false.

Returns a that is the child of this and is located at the specific path.

A String value that specifies the path to the target child node, starting from this object. A String value that specifies the path to the target child node, starting from the root node. A that is this object’s child, located at a specific path.

Gets the integer hash code that corresponds to the current object’s value.

An Int32 value that is this ‘s hash code.

Gets the image currently displayed as this ‘s glyph.

An Image currently displayed as this ‘s glyph.

Gets the current value.

A String value that is the current value.

Gets or sets the image.

An Image that is the glyph.

Gets or sets the index of an image from the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.Images collection that should be used as this ImageIndex glyph.

An Int32 value that is the index of an image from the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.Images collection that should be used as this ImageIndex glyph.

Gets this ‘s position within its parent node collection.

An Int32 value that is this ‘s position within its parent node collection.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets whether this object is a parent node for the target object.

A object to be checked. true if this object is a parent node for the target object; otherwise, false.

Gets whether this node is a top-level node.

true if this node is a top-level node; otherwise, false.

Gets the that follows this in its parent node collection.

A that follows this in its parent node collection.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets this ‘s parent .

A that contains this in its BreadCrumbNode.ChildNodes collection.

Gets this ‘s path.

A String value that is this ‘s path.

Gets or sets whether this is constantly visible at runtime.

true if this is constantly visible at runtime; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether this can raise the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.QueryChildNodes event.

true if this can raise the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.QueryChildNodes event; otherwise, false.

Gets a that precedes this in its node collection.

A that precedes this in its node collection.

Provides access to the main settings.

A RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit object that stores the main settings.

Applies properties stored within the target to this .

A whose property values should be copied to this .

Gets or sets whether this ‘s caption is visible.

true if this ‘s caption is visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the tag associated with this .

An Object associated with this .

Gets the textual representation of this .

A String value that is this ‘s textual representation.

Gets or sets this ‘s value.

A String value that is the ‘s value.

A collection.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A that will own the newly created .

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit object related with the newly created .

Adds the specific node to this .

A to be added to this .

Adds multiple nodes to this .

s to be added to this .

Adds multiple nodes to this .

An IEnumerable that stores objects to be added to this .

Locks the by preventing visual updates of the collection and its elements until the BreadCrumbNodeCollection.EndUpdate method is called.

Occurs each time a was added or removed to (from) the .

Gets whether the target is contained within this or any of its items’ BreadCrumbNode.ChildNodes collections.

A to search for. true if the search should be extended to the items’ child collections; otherwise, false. true if the target was found; otherwise, false.

Gets whether this contains the target node.

A to be checked. true if this contains the target node; otherwise, false.

Unlocks the that was previously locked by the BreadCrumbNodeCollection.BeginUpdate method.

Unlocks the that was previously locked by the BreadCrumbNodeCollection.BeginUpdate method and specifies whether the BreadCrumbNodeCollection.CollectionChanged event should be fired.

true if the BreadCrumbNodeCollection.CollectionChanged event should be fired; otherwise, false.

Returns the with a specific value, if such a node exists within this , or within any BreadCrumbNode.ChildNodes collection of collection’s items.

A String value that is the searched node’s BreadCrumbNode.Value property value. true if the method should check not only items, but their BreadCrumbNode.ChildNodes collections as well; otherwise, false. A BreadCrumbNode with the specific value.

Gets the first node contained within this .

A that is the first node in this .

Returns the index within this .

A whose position within this is to be obtained. An Int32 value that is the index within this .

Gets whether this contains a at the specific position.

An Int32 value that is a node position to be checked. true if this contains a at the specific position; otherwise, false.

Adds a target to this and puts it to a specific position.

An Int32 value that specifies the position within this where the target node should be arranged. A object to be added to this .

Gets or sets whether this is currently empty.

true if this is currently empty; otherwise, false.

Gets a node from this that has the specific index within this collection.

An Int32 value that is the node index. A that occupies the specific position within this .

Gets the last node within this .

A that is the last node within this .

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Removes the specific node from this .

A object to be removed from this .

Removes all nodes from this starting from the specific position.

An Int32 value that specifies the node index within this , starting from which all nodes should be removed from the collection.

Contains data for the event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Gets button bounds.

Button bounds.

Draws the button background in its default appearance.

Draws the button image in its default appearance.

Draws button text in its default appearance.

Gets information about the drawn button.

Information about the drawn button.

The text editor that displays buttons in the edit box.

Initializes a new ButtonEdit control instance.

Occurs when a button editor’s button is clicked.

Occurs when pressing an editor button.

Gets the class name of the current editor.

The string identifying the class name of the current editor.

Gets a value indicating whether a container needs to set focus to the editor when it works as an inplace control.

true if a container needs to set focus to the editor; otherwise, false.

For internal use.

Simulates the Click event for the specified button.

An object to be clicked.

Gets an object containing properties, methods and events specific to the control.

A object containing settings for the control.

Allows you to edit numeric values using a dropdown calculator.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Validates the editor.

A enumeration value that specifies how a dropdown editor’s popup window was closed. true if the editor’s value is valid; otherwise, false.

Gets the current editor’s class name.

The string identifying the class name of the current editor.

Gets or sets the editor’s value.

An object representing the editor’s value.

Returns the control’s popup window.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.PopupCalcEditForm object that represents the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

Gets a object containing properties specific to the editor.

The object containing properties specific to the calc editor.

Gets or sets the text displayed in the edit box.

The string displayed in the edit box.

Gets or sets the editor’s decimal value.

The editor’s decimal value.

Occurs after the value of the CalcEdit.Value property has been changed.

Contains classes implementing the control’s drop-down calendar functionality.

Contains information about a specific point within a calendar control.

Initializes a new instance of the class for the specified point.

A structure that defines a point in a plane. This value is assigned to the CalendarHitInfo.HitPoint property. An ObjectState enumeration value that specifies the state of visual element under the hit point. This value is assigned to the CalendarHitInfo.HitInfoType property.

Initializes a new instance of the class for the specified point.

A structure that defines a point in a plane.

Gets or sets the bounding rectangle of the visual element. Not applicable for the control.

Empty System.Drawing.Rectangle structure.

Gets the object which contains the information used to render the visual element located under the test point.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Calendar.CalendarObjectViewInfoBase class descendant providing view information on the visual element located under the test point.

Gets the object which contains the information used to render the calendar cell located under the test point.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Calendar.CalendarCellViewInfo class descendant providing view information on the calendar cell located under the test point.

Sets the properties to default values which indicate that the hit information is undefined.

Returns whether the specified bounds contain the current test point.

A structure that specifies the bounds. A type of visual element to assign to the CalendarHitInfo.HitTest property if the specified bounds contain the current test point. true if the specified bounds contain the current test point; otherwise, false.

Gets the object which contains the information used to render the calendar footer.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Controls.CalendarFooterViewInfoBase class descendant providing view information on the calendar footer.

Gets the object which contains the information used to render the calendar header.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Controls.CalendarHeaderViewInfoBase class descendant providing view information on the calendar header.

Gets or sets the calendar date located under the test point.

A structure that specifies the calendar date located under the test point.

Gets or sets whether the visual element located under the test point is in Normal, Hot, Pressed, Disabled or Selected state.

An DevExpress.Utils.Drawing.ObjectState enumeration value that specifies the state of visual element located under the test point.

Gets or sets the object being hit.

A DevExpress.XtraScheduler.Drawing.DateNavigatorDayNumberCellInfo object if the day or weeknumber cell of the DateNavigator control is hit; otherwise, null.

Gets or sets the test point.

A structure that specifies the coordinates of the test point relative to the control’s top left corner.

Gets a value which identifies the type of the visual element located under the test point.

A enumeration value that identifies the type of the visual element located under the test point.

Gets or sets the type of information the contains.

A enumeration member.

Indicates whether the specified object is equal to the current object.

A object to be compared with the current object. true if the specified object equals the current object; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the test point is located in the calendar header.

true if the test point is located in the calendar header; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the test point is located in a calendar cell.

true if the test point is located in a calendar cell; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the test point is located in the calendar footer.

true if the test point is located in the calendar footer; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the test point is located in the calendar header.

true if the test point is located in the calendar header; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the test point is located in the calendar navigation button.

true if the test point is located in the calendar footer; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the test point is located in the time portion area.

true if the test point is located in the time portion area; otherwise, false.

Gets the point being hit.

A structure that is the point within the control with coordinates relative to the control’s top-left corner.

Gets the object which contains the information used to render the clock area.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Controls.CalendarAreaViewInfoBase class descendant providing view information on the clock area.

Sets the specified cell as the object being hit.

View information about the calendar cell being hit.

Gets the object which contains the information used to render the calendar.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Controls.CalendarViewInfoBase class descendant providing view information on the calendar.

Lists values that identify a visual element of the Date Editor and Calendar control and its descendants.

For internal use.

The type of the visual element is undefined.

Provides data for the DateEdit.DrawItem event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

Allows you to paint custom shapes on a cell surface. A value to initialize the CustomDrawDayNumberCellEventArgs.ViewInfo property. A value to initialize the CustomDrawDayNumberCellEventArgs.BackgroundElementInfo property.

Gets or sets the skin element that is used to paint the background of the currently processed cell.

A SkinElementInfo object that specifies the skin element that is used to paint the background of the currently processed cell.

Gets the painted element’s bounding rectangle.

A structure specifying the boundaries of the painted element.

Gets the bounds of the cell’s content (text).

The bounds of the cell’s content (text).

Gets the painted cell’s value.

A object representing the painted day number’s cell value.

Gets whether the painted cell is disabled.

true if the painted cell is disabled; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the currently processed cell is under the mouse cursor.

true if the processed day number cell is hovered over by the mouse cursor; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the painted cell corresponds to Saturday or Sunday.

true if the painted cell corresponds to Saturday or Sunday; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the painted cell belongs to the previous or next month.

true if the painted cells belongs to the previous or next month; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the cell is currently pressed.

true if the cell is currently pressed; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the cell corresponds to a “special” date.

true if the cell corresponds to a “special” date; otherwise, false.

Gets a value indicating whether the processed day number cell is selected.

true if the processed cell is selected; otherwise, false.

Gets the current cell’s state.

The Normal, Hot, Pressed, Disabled or Selected state, or a combination of these states.

Gets the painted date cell’s appearance settings.

A object that provides the painted cell’s appearance settings.

Gets whether the painted cell corresponds to Today’s date.

true if the cell corresponds to Today’s date; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the current View of data in the dropdown window.

A DateEditCalendarViewType value that specifies the current View of data in the dropdown window.

Contains information used for painting the current cell.

An object that contains information used for painting the current cell.

Represents a method that will handle the RepositoryItemDateEdit.DrawItem event.

The event sender. A object that contains data related to the event.

Provides types that support processing a video stream received from a video capture device.

Displays a video stream captured from a video input device, such as a webcam.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets whether the control, when displayed for the first time, automatically starts showing the video stream from the default device.

true if the control, when displayed for the first time, automatically starts showing the video stream from the default device; otherwise, false.

Fires when a context button is clicked.

Allows you to customize the context buttons.

Provides access to the settings applied to the context buttons displayed in the control, and the panels containing these buttons.

A ContextItemCollectionOptions object that comprises settings applied to the context buttons displayed in the control, and the panels containing these buttons.

Provides access to the collection of context buttons displayed in the control.

A ContextItemCollection object that represents the collection of context buttons displayed in the control.

Occurs before the ‘s frame is drawn. Subscribe to customize the video stream’s frame.

Gets or sets the video capture device currently used by the control.

A object that describes the video capture device currently used by the control.

Occurs when the camera device used by the control is changed.

Gets or sets the notification displayed by the control if no capture device is found.

A String value that specifies the notification displayed by the control if no capture device is found.

Fires when the orientation is about to be changed due to display rotation, allowing you to override the rotate angle.

Returns the video capture device used by default.

A object that the control uses by default.

Returns the new object created based on the specified information. This is a static method.

A object. A object.

Returns the list of the objects containing information about the available video capture devices. This is a static method.

A list of the objects containing information about the available video capture devices.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Loads the video settings stored in the system registry by the specified path.

A value that specifies the registry path from which to restore the video settings.

Loads the video settings stored in the system registry by the specified stream.

A Stream descendant from which the video settings are loaded.

Loads the video settings stored in the specified XML file.

A value that specifies the file from which to restore the video settings.

Gets or sets the rotation angle of the control’s output.

A value that specifies the rotation angle of the control’s output.

Saves the video settings of the currently used capture device to the system registry.

A value specifying the system registry path to which the video settings are saved. true if the operation is successfully completed; otherwise, false.

Saves the video settings of the currently used capture device to the specified stream.

A Stream descendant to which the video settings are written.

Saves the video settings of the currently used capture device to the specified file in XML format.

A value that specifies the name of file to save the video settings.

Gets or sets whether the context button that invokes the Camera Settings form is displayed in the top far corner of the control.

true if the context button that invokes the Camera Settings form is displayed; otherwise, false.

Invokes the form that contains the camera device settings.

Starts showing the video stream from the currently used device.

Starts showing the video stream from the specified device.

A object from which to capture and show the video stream.

Stops showing the video stream from the currently used device.

Returns the video frame currently captured by the device being used.

A object that is the video frame currently captured by the device being used.

Gets or sets whether the uses the DirectX Hardware Acceleration.

A DefaultBoolean enum value that specifies whether this control employs the DirectX Hardware Acceleration. The DefaultBoolean.Default value is equivalent to DefaultBoolean.True if the static WindowsFormsSettings.ForceDirectXPaint method was called, or to DefaultBoolean.False otherwise.

Provides access to the video settings (brightness, contrast, etc.) on the currently used device.

A object that comprises the video settings (brightness, contrast, etc.) on the currently used device.

Gets or sets how the video frame fits the control.

A enumeration value that specifies how the video frame fits the control.

Describes a video capture device, operates the device, and processes the received video stream.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A object that comprises system information about a video capture device.

Gets the frame currently captured by the device.

A Bitmap object that is the frame currently captured by the device.

For internal use.

Enumerates camera resolution modes.

The default resolution of the selected camera device.

The most recently used resolution.

The resolution is specified by the ManualResolution property (TakePictureDialogShowingEventArgs.ManualResolution and TakePictureDialog.ManualResolution).

The maximum resolution supported by the camera device.

The modal dialog to take pictures from a camera device.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets the dialog’s caption.

The dialog’s caption.

Fires when the dialog is closed. Allows you to get the dialog result and captured image, and replace this image.

Gets or sets the camera device.

The camera device.

Gets the snapshot that a user has captured using the camera device.

The captured image.

Gets or sets a camera resolution that is applied when the TakePictureDialog.ResolutionMode property is set to Manual.

A custom camera resolution.

Gets or sets the camera resolution mode.

The camera resolution mode.

Displays the Take Picture dialog.

The dialog’s result

Displays the Take Picture dialog with the specified caption.

The dialog’s caption. The dialog’s result.

Fires when the dialog is about to be displayed. Allows you to customize the form, and specify the camera device and resolution.

Provides data for the PictureEdit.TakePictureDialogShowing, RepositoryItemPictureEdit.TakePictureDialogShowing and TakePictureDialog.Showing events.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

The form that encapsulates the dialog.

Gets or sets the camera device.

The camera device.

Gets the form that encapsulates the dialog.

The form that encapsulates the dialog.

Gets or sets a camera resolution that is applied when the TakePictureDialogShowingEventArgs.ResolutionMode property is set to Manual.

A custom camera resolution.

Gets or sets the camera resolution mode.

The camera resolution mode.

Provides members that specify how the video frame is stretched to fit the .

The default mode. This value is equivalent to the ZoomInside value.

The video frame is not stretched.

The video frame is stretched to fill the available client area.

Zooms the video frame proportionally, so that it is displayed in the client area in its entirety.

Zooms the video frame proportionally, making its smaller side (width or height) displayed in its entirety. The frame is centered, so the larger side (height or width) is not displayed in its entirety.

The base class for all chart clients of the range control.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified sparkline scale type, grid options, and range.

A SparklineScaleType representing the scale type (date-time or numeric) of the sparkline. A object that contains properties to customize the grid of the chart range control client. A object representing the range of the chart range control client.

Occurs before a series of the chart range control client is drawn in the range control’s viewport.

Gets a data provider to bind a chart range control client to regular data sources.

A object that is a data provider for a chart range control client.

Provides access to the grid options of the chart range control client.

A object containing grid options for the chart client of the range control.

Gets or sets the name of the palette currently used to draw the chart range control client’s elements.

A value which is the palette name.

Gets the collection of predefined palettes.

A collection of objects.

Provides access to the auto range option of the chart range control client.

A object that contains the auto range option of the chart range control client.

Gets or sets the associated with the current .

A System.ComponentModel.ISite object associated with the current .

The class that is used to supply data to a chart range control client.

Gets or sets the name of the data field that contains the arguments of the chart range control client’s points.

A value that specifies the data field name.

Gets or sets the chart range control client provider’s data source.

An object that represents the data source from which the chart range control client retrieves its data.

Disposes of the current object and releases all the allocated resources.

Reloads data from the underlying data source and repaints the viewport area of the range control.

Gets or sets the name of the data field whose values are used to automatically generate and populate the series of a chart range control client.

A value that specifies the data field’s name.

Specifies a chart client template view type for the range control.

A object descendant that is the chart client view type.

Returns the textual representation of the current object.

A string that specifies the textual representation of the current object.

Gets or sets the name of the data field that contains the point values of a chart range control client.

A value that specifies the data field name.

The base class for grid settings of the date-time and numeric chart clients of the range control.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets a value that specifies whether the grid properties are calculated automatically.

true if the grid is calculated automatically; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a value that specifies the interval between grid lines.

A value which specifies the numeric grid step.

Gets or sets the string used to format chart argument values.

A string used to format chart argument values.

Gets or set the format provider to format the values displayed by argument labels of the chart range control client.

A object that supplies specific formatting information to the values displayed by argument labels.

Gets or sets a value which specifies whether to show the grid lines error message in the range control’s viewport.

true, to show the grid lines error message in the range control’s viewport; otherwise,false.

Gets or sets the numeric snap step.

A value that is the snap step.

Returns the textual representation of the current object.

A string that specifies the textual representation of the current object.

The base class for defining the range for all chart clients (date-time and numeric chart clients) of the range control.

Gets or sets a value that specifies whether the range of the chart range control client is calculated automatically.

true if the chart client range is calculated automatically; otherwise, false.

Returns the textual representation of the current object.

A string that specifies the textual representation of the current object.

The base class for all chart views of the chart range control client.

Initializes a new instance of the class with a sparkline view type.

A object representing a sparkline view type.

Gets or sets a color that fills the view of the chart range control client.

A value.

Returns the textual representation of the current object.

A string that specifies the textual representation of the current object.

A button that supports two states - elevated and depressed. It is possible to prevent the button from receiving focus on click. Multiple buttons can be combined into a radio group, in which only one button is checked at a time.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified check state.

A Boolean value that specifies the button’s check state. This value is assigned to the CheckButton.Checked property.

Gets or sets whether a checked button that belongs to a logical group can be unchecked by clicking this button.

true if a checked button that belongs to a logical group can be unchecked by clicking this button.

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command in the source and bind it to this .

Binds the specific parameterized command to this .

An Object that is the command to be bound to this . A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An Action that uses the boolean function to specify whether or not this is currently checked. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this .

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command of the target type in the source and bind it to this .

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An Action that specifies whether this is currently checked. The type of a ViewModel that stores a bindable command. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this .

Gets or sets the button’s check state.

true if the button is checked (in the depressed state); false if the button is unchecked (in the elevated state).

Allows you to respond to the button’s check state being changed.

Gets or sets the button’s group index. Within a group, only one button may be checked at a time. When users click another button in a group, the checked state moves from the current button to the clicked one.

A non-negative integer value that specifies the button’s group index. -1 to exclude the button from groups.

Swaps the button’s check state.

An editor that displays a list of check boxes in a drop-down menu. Users can select multiple items.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Checks all the control’s items.

Enables you to sort items in custom order.

Validates the editor.

A enumeration value that specifies how a dropdown editor’s popup window was closed. true if the editor’s value is valid; otherwise, false.

Occurs whenever this has to display a child list box item. Allows you to manually paint these items.

Gets the editor’s class name.

A object identifying the class name of the current editor.

Gets or sets an object that specifies the values of the items selected in the drop-down list. Depending on the option, this property returns a object that contains these values, or a object that contains the string representations of these values, separated by a comma (or a custom separator) and a space character.

An object that specifies the editor’s value.

Returns the index of the first item that matches the custom criteria implemented in the predicate delegate method.

An Int32 value that is a item index, starting from which the method should seek the matching item. true, to search from the collection’s beginning to its end; otherwise, false. A delegate that implements the search criteria. An Int32 value that is the index of the found item within the RepositoryItemCheckedComboBoxEdit.Items collection. If no items were found, returns -1.

Searches for the first item that starts with the target text. The search is performed in the specific direction and starts from the required item.

A String value that is the text to find. An Int32 value that is a item index, starting from which the method should seek the matching item. true to search from the collection’s beginning to its end; otherwise, false. An Int32 value that is the found item’s index within this . If no item was found, returns -1.

Searches for the first item that starts with the target text. The search starts from the required item.

A String value that is the text to find. An Int32 value that is a item index, starting from which the method should seek the matching item. An Int32 value that is the found item’s index within this . If no item was found, returns -1.

Searches for the first item that starts with the target text.

A String value that is the text to find. An Int32 value that is the found item’s index within this . If no item was found, returns -1.

Searches for a item whose caption is equal to the target string. The search is performed starting from the desired item.

A String value that is the text to find. An Int32 value that is a item’s index, starting from which the method should seek the matching item. An Int32 value that is the found item’s index within this . If no item was found, returns -1.

Searches for a item whose caption is equal to the target string.

A String value that is the text to find. An Int32 value that is the found item’s index within this . If no item was found, returns -1.

Enables you to disable specific items.

Returns the control’s popup window.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.CheckedPopupContainerForm object that represents the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

Returns a that displays check items in the control’s dropdown.

A CheckedListBoxControl embedded in the control’s dropdown.

Checks if the item is the Select All item.

The list box item that needs to be checked. True if the item is the Select All item, otherwise false.

Fires after an item’s check state was changed.

Fires before an item’s check state changes and allows you to cancel the action.

Provides the capability to change the height of an individual item.

Gets an object which contains properties, methods and events specific to the control.

A object that contains a control’s settings.

This event is not supported by the class.

Synchronizes the editor’s edit value with check items in the dropdown, checking and unchecking corresponding items.

Assigns the value to the CheckedComboBoxEdit.EditValue property, and checks editor items that have related values.

An object that identifies checked items in the editor’s dropdown window.

Raises the CustomSort event.

Allows an end user to select among the unchecked, checked, and indeterminate state (optional). Multiple check boxes can be combined into a radio group.

Initializes a new control instance with default settings.

Gets or sets whether the check editor is in the checked state.

true if the editor is checked; otherwise, false.

Fires after the CheckEdit.Checked property value has been changed.

Gets or sets the editor’s check state.

The check editor’s state.

Fires after the CheckEdit.CheckState property value has been changed.

Allows you to choose the order in which this CheckEdit cycles through its “Checked”, “Unchecked”, and “Indeterminate” states. The “Indeterminate” state is available if the RepositoryItemCheckEdit.AllowGrayed property is enabled.

Specifies the state order.

Gets the editor’s class name.

A object identifying the class name of the current editor.

Gets or sets the editor’s edit value.

The editor’s edit value.

Gets an object containing properties, methods and events specific to a check editor.

A object instance containing settings for the control.

Allows for custom conversion from the edit value to a check state (checked, unchecked and indeterminate).

Allows for custom conversion from a check state (checked, unchecked and indeterminate) to an edit value.

Values of this enumeration specify the order in which a CheckEdit cycles through its “Checked”, “Unchecked”, and “Indeterminate” states.

CheckEdit editors cycle through their states in the “Indeterminate - Checked - Unchecked” order.

CheckEdit editors cycle through their states in the same order as for the Unchecked value (“Indeterminate - Unchecked - Checked”).

CheckEdit editors cycle through their states in the “Indeterminate - Unchecked - Checked” order.

Changes the state of a check editor.

The checked list box control, in which each item can be checked, unchecked or set to the grayed state. The control can be populated with items from a data source.

Creates a new object with default settings.

Gets or sets whether single or multiple items can be checked simultaneously.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.CheckMode enumeration value, such as Single or Multiple, that specifies whether single or multiple items can be checked simultaneously.

Provides data for the ChartRangeControlClientBase.CustomizeSeries event.

Gets the value from a datasource assigned to the ChartRangeControlClientDataProvider.DataSource property of the chart range control client (numeric or date-time).

An object representing the value contained in the specified datasource. Null if the value is not found in the datasource.

Gets or sets the view type for the chart range control client.

A object descendant that is the chart client view type.

Allows you to customize options provided by the “Select Color” dialog.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets whether the dialog’s UI allows users to select a transparent color (set the transparency level).

true if the dialog’s UI allows users to set the color transparency level; otherwise, false.

Copies settings from the object passed as the parameter.

A object whose settings are copied to the current object.

Disposes of the object.

Gets or sets the icon applied to the “Select Color” dialog.

An Icon object displayed in the “Select Color” dialog.

Provides access to the object’s settings that allow you to assign raster and vector images (instead of traditional .ico images) to the editor’s “More Colors…” dialog.

Provides access to the current color dialog’s icon options.

Resets all settings to their default values.

Gets or sets whether the “Select Color” dialog contains titled arrows along the sides of color boxes.

A ShowArrows value that specifies whether the “Select Color” dialog contains titled arrows along the sides of color boxes.

Gets or sets whether the “Select Color” dialog contains the “Make Web-Safe” button.

true if the “Select Color” dialog contains the “Make Web-Safe” button; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the dialog contains a preview box.

true if the “Select Color” dialog contains a preview box; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the RGB, HSB or both tabs (color models) are available.

A ShowTabs value that specifies which tabs are displayed within the “Select Color” dialog.

The editor that allows you to select a color from a dropdown window.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Gets or sets the currently selected color.

A structure representing the currently selected color.

Occurs after the value of the ColorEdit.Color property has been changed.

Gets the class name of the current editor.

The string identifying the class name of the current editor.

Gets or sets the selected color.

An object representing the currently selected color.

Returns the control’s popup window.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.PopupColorEditForm object that represents the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

Gets settings specific to the color editor.

The object storing settings specific to the current editor.

Gets the text displayed in the edit box.

The text displayed in the edit box.

An advanced drop-down color picker that supports multiple palettes (a predefined Web and System color palette) from which to choose colors.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Returns the control’s popup window.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.PopupColorPickEditForm object that represents the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

Gets whether the “Automatic” color is selected by an end-user in the Custom tab in the dropdown window.

true if the “Automatic” color is selected by an end-user in the Custom tab; otherwise, false.

The base class for the control.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Fires after the “Select Color” dialog has been closed.

Fires when the “Select Color” dialog is about to be displayed.

Gets the editor’s class name.

A object identifying the class name of the current editor.

Provides access to the editor’s settings.

A object that holds the control’s settings.

Allows you to customize tooltips displayed when hovering over colors in the Custom and Web-Safe palettes.

Contains data for the RepositoryItemColorPickEdit.TooltipShowing event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A Color value used to initialize the ColorPickEditTooltipShowingEventArgs.Color property. A string value used to initialize the ColorPickEditTooltipShowingEventArgs.TitleText property. A string value used to initialize the ColorPickEditTooltipShowingEventArgs.ContentText property. A value used to initialize the ColorPickEditTooltipShowingEventArgs.Format property.

Gets the color for which a tooltip will be displayed.

The Color value for which a tooltip will be displayed.

Gets or sets the content for the current tooltip.

A string that is the content for the current tooltip.

Gets the display format of the current color’s value displayed in the tooltip.

A value that is the display format of the current color’s value.

Gets or sets the title for the current tooltip.

A string that is the tooltip’s title.

Contains values that specify how the values of colors are presented on-screen.

A color’s value is presented in the ARGB format.

A color’s value is presented in hexadecimal format.

A combo box editor that enables users to edit values by selecting items from a drop-down list.

Creates and initializes a new combo box editor.

A text editor that allows a user to select predefined items (typically, strings) from a drop-down list. The drop-down item list cannot be populated from a data source. Use lookup editors to display data source items in the drop-down list—, , , and .

Creates and initializes a new instance of the class.

Provides the ability to custom paint the items displayed within the combo box editor’s drop down.

Occurs when drawing a specific item in the dropdown list.

Gets the class name of the current editor.

The string identifying the class name of the current editor.

Allows you to select an item with the specific value, or to read the currently selected item’s value. You can also use the ComboBoxEdit.SelectedItem property to do the same. Additionally, EditValue allows you to specify a custom editor value.

The edit value.

Returns the control’s popup window.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.ComboBoxPopupListBoxForm object that represents the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

Gets settings specific to the combo box editor.

A object containing settings for the current editor.

Resets the selection and caret position in the editor.

Gets or sets the index of the selected ComboBox item. This index specifies the item position inside the RepositoryItemComboBox.Items collection.

The zero-based index of the edit value in the RepositoryItemComboBox.Items collection; otherwise, -1.

Occurs when the selection moves from one ComboBoxEditor item to another.

Specifies the editor’s value.

The editor’s value.

Occurs when changing the index of the selected value in the combo box editor.

Contains base classes for container controls and components provided by DevExpress. Such controls and components manage in-place editors and control the appearance and behavior of tooltips.

Serves as the base for components that provide visual elements at runtime, manage editor repositories providing inplace editors for their visual elements and support the common tooltip control mechanism.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Notifies the component that the initialization has started.

Occurs when a key is pressed within an in-place editor that belongs to the container component.

Occurs when a character key is pressed within an in-place editor that belongs to the container component.

Occurs when a pressed key is released within an in-place editor that belongs to the container component.

Notifies the component that the initialization has been completed.

Gets or sets the external editors repository.

A component holding a collection of repository items that can be used to create inplace editors.

Returns the actual tooltip controller that controls the behavior and appearance of hints for a container component’s elements.

A object providing tooltip functionality for the container component.

Gets whether the component is being initialized.

true if the component is being initialized; otherwise, false.

Provides access to the component’s internal repository.

A object containing repository items whose settings can be used to create inplace editors.

Gets or sets the component that controls the behavior and appearance of hints displayed for the container component’s visual elements.

A component specifying hint settings.

Serves as the base for container controls that manage editor repositories providing inplace editors for their visual elements and support for a common tooltip control mechanism.

Initializes a new instance with default settings.

Gets or sets whether the allows touch gestures when the app runs on touch-enabled devices.

A enumeration value that specifies whether the should process user gestures when the app runs on touch-enabled devices.

Gets or sets the control’s background color.

A structure that represents the control’s background color.

Notifies the control that the initialization has started.

Returns whether the descendant is active.

true if the descendant is active; otherwise, false.

Occurs when a key is pressed within an in-place editor that belongs to the container control.

Occurs when a character key is pressed within an in-place editor that belongs to the container control.

Occurs when a pressed key is released within an in-place editor that belongs to the container control.

Notifies the control that the initialization has been completed.

Gets or sets the external repository of in-place editors.

A component holding a collection of in-place editors (repository items).

Gets or sets the control’s foreground color.

A structure that represents the control’s foreground color.

Returns the actual tooltip controller that controls the behavior and appearance of hints for the container editor.

A object providing tooltip functionality for the container editor.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets whether the control is being initialized.

true if the control is being initialized; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets an object that controls the look and feel of the popup menus.

An object that controls the look and feel of the popup menus.

Provides access to the control’s internal repository of in-place editors.

A object containing repository items whose settings are used to create in-place editors.

For internal use.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the control’s text.

A string which specifies the control’s text.

Gets or sets the component that controls the behavior and appearance of hints displayed for a container control’s visual elements.

A component specifying hint settings.

Provides a graphical interface for navigating data-aware controls that implement the INavigatableControl interface (this interface is implemented by all DevExpress data-aware container controls).

Creates a new object with default settings.

Provides access to the navigator’s built-in and custom buttons.

A object which is the navigator’s buttons.

Gets or sets the control which is navigated by the ControlNavigator.

An object implementing the INavigatableControl interface which is navigated by the ControlNavigator.

Returns the text representation of the current object.

A string that specifies the text representation of the current object.

The ControlNavigator‘s button collection.

Creates a new object.

A object representing the buttons dispalyed within the ControlNavigator.

A collection of buttons displayed in the ControlNavigator.

Creates a new object.

An object implementing the INavigatorOwner interface to which the object belongs. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonsBase.Owner property.

Gets the button used to append a new record.

A object representing the navigator’s Append button.

Gets the button used to cancel editing the current record.

A object representing the navigator’s CancelEdit button.

Gets the control which is bound to the ControlNavigator.

An object implementing the INavigatableControl interface which is navigated by the ControlNavigator.

Gets the button used to set the dataset to the edit state.

A object representing the navigator’s Edit button.

Gets the button used to post the edited record to the associated data source.

A object representing the navigator’s EndEdit button.

Gets the button used to set the current record to the first record in a data source.

A object representing the navigator’s First button.

Gets the button used to set the current record to the last record in a data source.

A object representing the navigator’s Last button.

Gets the button used to set the current record to the next record in a data source.

A object representing the navigator’s Next button.

Gets the button used to increment the current record position in a data source by the number of visible records.

A object representing the navigator’s NextPage button.

Gets the button used to set the current record as the data source’s previous record.

A object representing the navigator’s Prev button.

Gets the button used to decrement the current record position in a data source by the number of visible records.

A object representing the navigator’s PrevPage button.

Gets the button used to delete the current record.

A object representing the navigator’s Remove button.

Contains classes that provide editor functionality and specify editor appearance.

Provides data for the RepositoryItemMRUEdit.AddingMRUItem event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

An item being added to the editor. A value that identifies the reason that caused the AddingMRUItem event.

Creates a new class instance.

A representing an item being added to an MRU editor. Initializes the Item property.

Gets the reason that caused the AddingMRUItem event.

A value.

Represents a method that will handle the RepositoryItemMRUEdit.AddingMRUItem event.

The event sender (typically an MRU edit control). A object containing data related to the event.

Provides data for events that allow you to validate cell values.

Creates a object.

An object representing the validated editor’s value. This value is assigned to the BaseContainerValidateEditorEventArgs.Value property.

Gets or sets the error description.

A string value specifying the error description.

Gets or sets whether the value is valid.

true to indicate that the value is valid; otherwise false.

Gets or sets the value being validated.

An object representing the validated editor’s value.

Represents the method for handling events which take a object as a parameter.

The source of the event. A object that contains event data.

Contains values that specify “best-fit” modes for lookup editors.

The “best-fit” functionality is invoked when opening the dropdown window for the first time, changing the proportional widths of the columns to best fit their contents.

The “best-fit” functionality is invoked when opening the dropdown window for the first time, changing the proportional widths of the columns according to their contents and resizing the dropdown window to fit all the columns. The dropdown window cannot be reduced to a size less than the minimum size specified by the editor’s RepositoryItemPopupBase.PopupFormMinSize property.

The “best-fit” functionality is not invoked.

Provides data for the RepositoryItemButtonEdit.ButtonPressed and RepositoryItemButtonEdit.ButtonClick events.

Creates and initializes a new object of the class.

The object used to initialize the ButtonPressedEventArgs.Button property.

Gets the button being pressed/clicked.

The object specifying the currently pressed/clicked button.

Represents a method for handling the RepositoryItemButtonEdit.ButtonPressed and RepositoryItemButtonEdit.ButtonClick events of a control.

The event source. A that contains event data.

Displays a monthly calendar and allows an end-user to select a date or date range(s).

Initializes a new instance of the class.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Imitates a click on the Today button.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Fires when the Today button is clicked.

The base class for controls that incorporate calendars.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Adds the specified date range to the selection.

The range to be added to the selection. The object specifies dates that lie in the range between the DateRange.StartDate (including this date) and the DateRange.EndDate (excluding this date).

Adds the specified date range to the selection.

The first date of a range (this date is included in the range) The last date of a range (this date is NOT included in the range).

Adds the specified date to the selection.

The date to be added to the selection.

Gets or sets whether animation effects are applied when switching between calendar views.

true if calendar views are switched using animation effects; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether a click on an inactive date (see CalendarControlBase.InactiveDaysVisibility) navigates to the corresponding (previous or next) month.

true if a click on an inactive date navigates to the corresponding (previous or next) month; otherwise, false.

This property is obsolete. Use the CalendarControlBase.CalendarAppearance property instead.

Gets or sets whether the calendar automatically adjusts its size depending on the calendar display mode.

true if auto-size mode is enabled; otherwise, false.

This member is not supported by the class.

Gets or sets the style of buttons within this control.

A enumeration value that specifies the style applied to this control’s buttons.

Contains appearance settings used to paint the Calendar’s elements and date cells in various states. When a Skin is active, only day cell-related appearance settings are in effect.

The calendar appearance settings.

Gets or sets whether an end-user can select a date in the calendar. Disable this setting to allow end-users to enter only the time portions of date-time values (see CalendarControlBase.CalendarTimeEditing).

true if an end-user can select a date in the calendar; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the horizontal indent between adjacent months, in pixels.

The horizontal indent between adjacent months, in pixels.

Gets or sets the vertical and horizontal indent between adjacent months, in pixels.

The vertical and horizontal indent between adjacent months, in pixels

Gets or sets whether an end-user can edit the time portion of a date value via the calendar. This functionality is supported in the CalendarView.Vista and CalendarView.Classic display modes.

A value that specifies whether an end-user can edit the time portion of a date value via the calendar.

Contains settings related to time editing within the calendar.

Time editing settings.

Gets or sets the vertical indent between adjacent months, in pixels.

The vertical indent between adjacent months, in pixels.

Gets or sets the calendar display mode.

The calendar display mode.

Returns whether or not this object’s popup can be closed at the moment.

true if the popup can be closed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the text case of month names.

The text case of month names.

Gets or sets the text case of days of the week abbreviations.

The text case of days of the week abbreviations.

Gets or sets the amount of space in pixels between a cell’s borders and its content (text).

Calendar cell padding

Gets or sets calendar cell size.

The calendar cell size.

Gets or sets the ICalendarCellStyleProvider object that allows you to customize the appearance of certain dates.

The object that allows you to customize the appearance of certain dates.

Gets or sets the number of months displayed horizontally.

The number of months displayed horizontally.

Allows you to respond to a context button click.

Allows you to customize context buttons in certain calendar cells.

Provides access to the settings applied to context buttons displayed in calendar cells.

An object that contains settings applied to the context buttons.

Provides access to the collection of context buttons displayed in each calendar cell.

The collection of context buttons.

Fires when the CheckContextButton.Checked, TrackBarContextButton.Value or RatingContextButton.Rating property value changes.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Allows you to specify a tooltip shown when the mouse pointer hovers over a context button. This event is only raised for and objects.

Occurs when drawing each day cell in the calendar.

Allows you to provide custom week day abbreviations.

Allows week numbers to be customized.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the edit value (current date). This value is in sync with the CalendarControlBase.EditValue property.

The edit value.

Fires when the CalendarControlBase.DateTime property value changes.

Fires when the CalendarControlBase.DateTime property value changes as a result of actions performed by an end-user.

Allows you to disable certain dates to prevent them from being selected by an end-user.

Allows you to assign an ICalendarDisabledDateProvider object that can disable certain dates to prevent them from being selected by an end-user.

An object that can disable certain dates to prevent them from being selected by an end-user.

Gets or sets whether to draw lines between calendar cells.

true if lines between calendar cells are visible; otherwise, false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the edit value (current date).

The current date.

Fires when the CalendarControlBase.EditValue property value changes.

Gets or sets the first day of the week.

A enumeration value specifying the first day of the week.

This member is not supported by the class.

Allows you to convert the EditValue to the DateTime format.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Returns the last date of the last month currently displayed in the calendar.

A structure that specifies the last date of the last month currently displayed in the calendar.

Obtains information on the calendar control’s element located at the specified point.

A structure which specifies the test point coordinates relative to the calendar control’s top-left corner. A object which comprises information about a specific point in the calendar control.

Retrieves information on the calendar control element located at a specific point.

An object that comprises the test point coordinates relative to the calendar control’s top-left corner. A object which comprises information about a specific point in the calendar control.

Returns the culture information used to display culture-specific data in the calendar.

A CultureInfo used to display culture-specific data in the calendar.

Retrieves the size of a rectangular area into which the control can be fitted.

The custom-sized area for the control. A System.Drawing.Size value.

Returns the first date of the first month currently displayed in the calendar.

A structure that specifies the first date of the first month currently displayed in the calendar.

Gets or sets the amount of space around the calendar header displaying the current month and year. This property is in effect for the Classic calendar view.

A structure that specifies the amount of space around the calendar header displaying the current month and year. The default is Padding(2,5,2,5).

Gets or sets whether Saturdays and Sundays are highlighted. You can customize the appearance of these days using the CalendarControlBase.CalendarAppearance property.

true if Saturdays and Sundays are highlighted; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the selection is highlighted.

true if the selection is highlighted; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether Today’s date is highlighted.

A value that specifies if Today’s date is highlighted

Gets or sets how the cell that displays today date should be painted upon selection. You may choose between the ‘Today cell’ and ‘selected cell’ highlight styles.

true, to apply the ‘today cell’ appearance; otherwise, false.

Gets the hot-tracked date.

The date that is hovered over.

Gets or sets the visibility of dates that do not belong to the current month.

The visibility of dates that do not belong to the current month.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Get or sets whether the control is being drawn. For internal use.

true if the control is being drawn; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the maximum date displayed by the calendar.

The maximum date displayed by the calendar.

Gets or sets the minimum date displayed by the calendar.

The minimum date displayed by the calendar.

Gets or sets the padding around month names when several months are displayed simultaneously.

A structure that specifies the padding around month names when several months are displayed simultaneously.

This property is obsolete. Use the CalendarControlBase.SelectionMode property instead.

Gets or sets the date assigned to the CalendarControlBase.DateTime property when the Clear button is clicked, or when the CalendarControlBase.EditValue property is set to null or any value that cannot be converted to the DateTime type.

The value regarded as the Null date.

A DirectX-compatible event that replaces the standard Control.Paint event.

Allows you to parse a new value that is about to be assigned to the CalendarControlBase.EditValue property.

Called when a key is pressed.

A object that comprises data related to the key event.

Gets or sets whether the Calendar is read-only, and thus an end-user is not able to change the date selection (CalendarControlBase.SelectedRanges) and edit value (CalendarControlBase.EditValue/CalendarControlBase.DateTime).

true if the Calendar is read-only; otherwise, false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Nullifies the object that handles the control events.

Gets or sets whether the control’s visual elements are aligned to support locales using right-to-left fonts.

A enumeration value that specifies whether the control’s visual elements are aligned to support locales using right-to-left fonts. The DefaultBoolean.Default value is equivalent to DefaultBoolean.False.

Gets or sets the number of months displayed vertically.

The number of months displayed vertically.

Gets or sets the selected date ranges (DateRange objects). Each DateRange object identifies dates that are EQUAL OR GREATER THAN the DateRange.StartDate and LESS THAN the DateRange.EndDate. Thus the last date is excluded from the range.

A collection of selected date ranges.

This property is obsolete. Use the CalendarControlBase.SelectedRanges property instead.

Gets or sets whether calendar date ranges are selected strictly from day to day being clicked, or through the entire weeks containing those days.

A enumeration value that specifies how an end-user selects date ranges.

Fires when the selection changes.

Gets the ending date of the selection. The SelectionEnd date is excluded from the selection.

The ending date of the selection.

Gets or sets whether a single date, or multiple dates can be simultaneously selected.

The selection mode.

Gets the first date of the selection.

The first date of the selection.

Clears the selection and sets the selection to the specified date range.

The range to be selected. The object specifies dates that lie in the range between the DateRange.StartDate (including this date) and the DateRange.EndDate (excluding this date).

Clears the selection and sets the selection to the specified date range.

The first date of a range (this date is included into the selection) The last date of a range (this date is NOT included in the selection).

Clears the selection and sets the selection to the specified date.

The date to be selected.

Gets whether the Cancel button is displayed.

A enumeration value that specifies whether the Cancel button is displayed.

Gets or sets the visibility of the Clear button, which clears the current selection, sets the CalendarControlBase.EditValue property to null and the CalendarControlBase.DateTime property to the CalendarControlBase.NullDate value.

true if the Clear button is visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the calendar footer is displayed.

True, to show the calendar footer; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the calendar header is displayed.

True, to show the calendar header; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the visibility of month names for each month.

true if the month name is displayed above each month; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the visibility of buttons that let you navigate between months.

The visibility of buttons that let you navigate between months. The DefaultBoolean.Default value is equivalent to True.

Gets whether the OK button is displayed.

Always DefaultBoolean.False.

Gets or sets the visibility of the Today button.

The visibility of the Today button.

Gets or sets whether to display week numbers in the calendar.

The visibility of week numbers in the calendar.

Gets or sets the visibility of buttons that let you navigate between years.

The visibility of buttons that let you navigate between years.

Allows you to mark certain dates as “special” dates. These dates will be painted using the dedicated settings provided by the CalendarControlBase.CalendarAppearance object.

Allows you to assign an ICalendarSpecialDateProvider object that can mark certain dates as “special” to highlight them in a custom manner, as specified by the dedicated appearance settings of the CalendarControlBase.CalendarAppearance object.

An object that marks certain dates as “special”.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets whether changing the CalendarControlBase.DateTime/CalendarControlBase.EditValue property updates the current selection.

true if the current selection is automatically set to the edit date (CalendarControlBase.DateTime/CalendarControlBase.EditValue) once the edit date is changed; otherwise false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code. This property is not relevant for this class.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the width, in pixels, of the edit box that allows end-users to edit the time portion of the edit value.

An integer value that specifies the width, in pixels, of the time portion edit box.

Gets or sets the date that is regarded as Today’s date.

The date that is regarded as Today’s date.

Gets or sets the border color of the Today cell.

The border color of the Today cell.

Gets or sets whether the same day (as in the current month) is selected in another month when you navigate from the current month to that month.

true if the same day is selected in another month when you navigate from the current month to that month; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the same range of days (as in the current month) is automatically selected in another month when you navigate from the current month to that month. The CalendarControlBase.SyncSelectionWithEditValue property must be set to false to support this feature.

true if the same range of days is automatically selected in another month when you navigate from the current month to that month; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the DirectX Hardware Acceleration is enabled for the Calendar Control.

A enumeration value that specifies whether or not the calendar employs the DirectX rendering. The DefaultBoolean.Default value is equivalent to DefaultBoolean.False.

Gets or sets the current date grouping View. This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets which date grouping Views are available in Vista display mode.

A value that specifies which date grouping Views are available in Vista display mode.

Gets or sets the length of days of the week abbreviations.

The length of days of the week abbreviations.

Gets or sets a rule which determines the first week of the year.

The rule that determines the first week of the year.

Lists modes for displaying dates which do not belong to a current month but are displayed to fill in the first or last row.

If the calendar displays several months, only dates before the first month and after the last month shown are visible.

Lists modes which determine what dates become selected when selection extends.

Selects entire weeks

Does not automatically extend the selection to the week’s start and end.

Contains data for the ImageSlider.CanGetNextPrevImage event.

Creates a new instance of the class with a specific sliding direction.

true for sliding forward; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether an image in the current sliding direction can be displayed. If not - corresponding navigation button will be disabled.

true if an image in the current sliding direction can be displayed; otherwise, false.

Specifies the image sliding direction (true for sliding forward, false for sliding backwards).

true for an image sliding forward; otherwise, false.

Provides data for the RepositoryItem.EditValueChanging event.

Creates a new object.

An object representing the editor’s value. This value is assigned to the ChangingEventArgs.OldValue property. An object representing the value about to be assigned to the editor. This value is assigned to the ChangingEventArgs.NewValue property. true if the event should be canceled; otherwise, false.

Creates a new object.

For internal use.

Gets whether a user changed the value.

true if a user changed the value; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the value which is about to be assigned to the editor. Setting the NewValue property is not supported if the editor uses masked input (RepositoryItemTextEdit.Mask).

An object representing the editor’s potential value.

Gets the editor’s value.

An object representing the editor’s value.

Represents a method that will handle the RepositoryItem.EditValueChanging event.

The event sender (typically the descendant). A object containing data related to the event.

Represents an item within the and controls.

Creates a new object with default settings.

Creates a new object and instantiates the ListBoxItem.Value and CheckedListBoxItem.CheckState properties.

An object representing the item’s value. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Value property. true if the item is checked; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the CheckedListBoxItem.CheckState property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

An object representing the item’s value. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Value property. A string representing the item’s display text. This value is assigned to the CheckedListBoxItem.Description property. A enumeration member representing the item’s state. This value is assigned to the CheckedListBoxItem.CheckState property. true if the item is enabled; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the CheckedListBoxItem.Enabled property. Custom data associated with the item. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Tag property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

An object representing the item’s value. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Value property. A string representing the item’s display text. This value is assigned to the CheckedListBoxItem.Description property. A enumeration member representing the item’s state. This value is assigned to the CheckedListBoxItem.CheckState property. true to enable the item; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the CheckedListBoxItem.Enabled property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

An object representing the item’s value. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Value property. A string representing the item’s display text. This value is assigned to the CheckedListBoxItem.Description property. A enumeration member representing the item’s state. This value is assigned to the CheckedListBoxItem.CheckState property. Custom data associated with the item. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Tag property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified value, description and check state.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified value and description.

Initializes a new instance of the class with custom settings.

An object which represents the item’s value. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Value property. A enumeration member specifying the item’s state. This value is assigned to the CheckedListBoxItem.CheckState property. true if the item is enabled; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the CheckedListBoxItem.Enabled property.

Creates a new object and instantiates the ListBoxItem.Value and CheckedListBoxItem.CheckState properties.

An object representing the item’s value. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Value property. A enumeration member representing the item’s state. This value is assigned to the CheckedListBoxItem.CheckState property.

Creates a new object and instantiates the ListBoxItem.Value property.

An object representing the item’s value. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Value property.

Gets or sets the item’s state.

A enumeration member specifying the item’s state.

Gets or sets the item’s display text.

A string that specifies the item’s display text.

Gets or set whether an end-user can change the item’s state.

true if the item is enabled and an end-user can change its state; otherwise, false.

Converts a value of the Nullable Boolean type to the System.Windows.Forms.CheckState type.

A Nullable Boolean value to be converted. A value converted to the System.Windows.Forms.CheckState type.

Converts a check state to a Nullable<Boolean> value. This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

A CheckedState enumeration value to be converted. A Nullable<Boolean> value.

Inverts the item’s check state.

Returns the text representation of the current item.

A string that specifies the text representation of the current object.

Represents the CheckedListBoxControl‘s item collection.

Creates a new object.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified capacity.

A value to initialize the collection’s Capacity property.

Creates a new item with the specified value and state and appends it to the collection.

An object which represents the item’s value. true if the item is checked; otherwise, false . A zero-based integer value representing the new item’s index.

Creates a new item with the specified value and state and appends it to the collection.

An object which represents the item’s value. A Nullable Boolean value that represents the item’s check state. A zero-based integer value representing the new item’s index.

Adds a new item with the specified settings to the collection.

An object that represents the item’s value. This value is used to initialize the ListBoxItem.Value property. A string representing the item’s display text. This value is used to initialize the CheckedListBoxItem.Description property. A enumeration member which specifies the item’s state. This value is used to initialize the CheckedListBoxItem.CheckState property. A Boolean value that specifies whether the created item must be enabled. This value is used to initialize the CheckedListBoxItem.Enabled property. A zero-based integer value that specifies the new item’s index.

Adds a new item with the specified value and description to the collection.

Creates a new item with the specified settings and appends it to the collection.

An object which represents the item’s value. A enumeration member which specifies the item’s state. true if the item is enabled; otherwise, false. A zero-based integer value representing the new item’s index.

Creates a new item with the specified value and check state and appends it to the collection.

An object which represents the item’s value. A enumeration member which specifies the item’s state. A zero-based integer value representing the new item’s index.

Adds a new item with the specified value to the collection.

An object that represents the item’s value. A zero-based integer value that specifies the new item’s index.

Adds an array of items to the collection.

An array of objects to be added to the collection.

Returns whether the specified item belongs to the current collection.

The item to locate in the collection. true if the specified item belongs to the collection; otherwise false.

Returns a list of checked items’ values.

A list of checked items.

Returns the zero-based index of the specified in the collection, or, if the specified value is not a object, returns the index of the item that contains this value in its CheckedListBoxItem.Value property.

A object whose index in the collection needs to be returned. Or, a value (CheckedListBoxItem.Value) of the item whose index needs to be returned. A zero-based index of the required item.

Gets or sets an item at the specified position within the collection.

An integer value representing the zero-based index of the required item. If the index is negative or exceeds the last available index, an exception is thrown. An object representing the item at the specified position within the collection.

Returns an item that has the specified value.

An object that represent’s the value of the item to be retrieved. A object whose value matches the specified object.

Provides data for the RepositoryItemPopupBase.Closed event.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

A value specifying how an editor’s dropdown window is closed. This value is assigned to the ClosedEventArgs.CloseMode property.

Gets a value that specifies why the popup editor’s dropdown window was closed.

A value specifying the reason the dropdown window was closed.

Represents a method for handling the RepositoryItemPopupBase.Closed event of the control descendants.

The event source. A object that contains event data.

Provides data for the RepositoryItemPopupBase.CloseUp event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

An Object assigned to the CloseUpEventArgs.Value property. true if the CloseUpEventArgs.Value is accepted; otherwise, false. A enumeration value that indicates available methods to close the popup editor’s dropdown window. A BlobSimpleButtonType enumeration value that specifies a button associated with this object.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified values.

An object representing the value to assign to the editor’s edit value. This value is assigned to the CloseUpEventArgs.Value property. true if the value must be accepted; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the CloseUpEventArgs.AcceptValue property. A enumeration value which specifies how a dropdown editor’s popup window was closed. This value is assigned to the CloseUpEventArgs.CloseMode property.

Creates a new instance of the class and initializes its properties based upon specified parameters.

An object to initialize the CloseUpEventArgs.Value property value. A value to initialize the CloseUpEventArgs.AcceptValue property.

Creates a new instance of the class.

An object to initialize the CloseUpEventArgs.Value property.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether CloseUpEventArgs.Value should be accepted or discarded.

true if the value must be accepted; otherwise, false.

Gets a value indicating how the popup editor’s dropdown window was closed.

A enumeration value which specifies how the dropdown editor’s popup window was closed.

Returns which popup button has been pressed by an end-user.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.BlobSimpleButtonType object that specifies the button that has been pressed by an end-user.

Gets or sets a value to assign to the editor’s edit value.

The value to assign to the editor’s BaseEdit.EditValue property.

Represents a method that will handle the RepositoryItemPopupBase.CloseUp event of a popup editor.

The event source. This identifies the editor whose popup window is closed. A object containing data related to the event.

Specifies the style used to represent the selected color in a control.

The selected color is represented as an integer value in the edit box. The following image shows a color editor with the RepositoryItemColorEdit.ColorText property set to Integer.

The selected color is represented as a human-readable string in the edit box. If the selected color is one of predefined colors, display text specifies its common name (such as Aquamarine, Highlight or WindowText). Otherwise, the string consists of the ARGB (alpha, red, green, and blue) components. The following screenshots show color editors when the RepositoryItemColorEdit.ColorText property is set to Native.

Serves as the base for the class representing image combo box items.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class and sets its ComboBoxItem.Value to the specified parameter.

An object to initialize the ComboBoxItem.Value property.

Gets or sets the item value. This value is assigned to the editor’s edit value when users select the item.

The item value.

Represents a collection of items within a combo box editor.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Creates and initializes a new instance of the class.

The object for which the item collection should be created.

Adds a new item to the current collection.

The object representing the new item in the collection. The position to which the new element was inserted.

Adds the items from the specified collection to the current collection.

An object which implements the interface.

Adds an array of items to the collection.

An array of objects representing items for the combo box editor.

Copies items from the source collection to the current collection.

The source collection whose items are copied to the current collection.

Locks the by preventing change notifications from being fired, preventing visual updates until the EndUpdate method is called.

Occurs when changing the item collection.

Gets a value indicating whether the specified object is an element of the current collection.

An object to locate in the collection. true if the specified object belongs to the collection; otherwise, false.

Unlocks the object after a call to the BeginUpdate method and causes an immediate visual update.

Gets the textual representation of the specified item.

The item for which to return its text representation. The string representing the specified item.

Gets the zero-based index of the specified object in the item collection.

The item to locate in the collection. The zero-based index of the specified item in the current collection, if found; otherwise, -1.

Inserts a new element at the specified position.

The zero-based index specifying the position at which the item should be inserted. The item to insert.

Gets or sets an item at the specified position.

The zero-based index of the item to return. The item at the specified position.

Removes the specified object from the collection.

The item to remove from the collection.

Provides data for the RepositoryItem.FormatEditValue and RepositoryItem.ParseEditValue events.

Creates a new object with default settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Creates a new object and initializes its ConvertEditValueEventArgs.Value property.

An object representing the editor’s new value. This value is assigned to the ConvertEditValueEventArgs.Value property.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether default edit value conversion/formatting is required.

true to prohibit default edit value conversion/formatting; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets either the edit or the display value of an editor.

An object specifying either the edit or the display value of an editor.

Represents a method that will handle the RepositoryItem.ParseEditValue and RepositoryItem.FormatEditValue events.

The event sender (typically a descendant). A object containing data related to the event.

Provides data for the RepositoryItem.CustomDisplayText event.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

An object that represents an editor’s value. This value is assigned to the CustomDisplayTextEventArgs.Value property. A string that represents an editor’s display text. This value is assigned to the CustomDisplayTextEventArgs.DisplayText property.

Gets or sets an editor’s display text.

A string value that represents an editor’s display text.

Gets an editor’s current value.

An object that represents an editor’s current value.

Represents the method for handling events which take a object as a parameter.

The event source. This identifies the editor which fires the event. A object that contains data for the event.

Specifies the response of a editor to an invalid value.

Invalid data is replaced with the value of the RepositoryItemDateEdit.NullDate property.

Invalid data is replaced with the current date.

Invalid data is replaced with the previously validated date.

Contains values specifying the editor drawing detail level.

Specifies the full detail level of editor drawing. In this case editors display their buttons.

Specifies the minimum detail level of editor drawing. In this case, editor’s buttons are not displayed.

An editor button displayed in a control or its descendant.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class

A enumeration value that specifies the button’s image type. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Kind property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Image property. A object that represents a tooltip that supports multiple text and image regions. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.SuperTip property.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

A enumeration value that specifies the button’s image type. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Kind property. A string value which specifies the button’s tool tip. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ToolTip property. A object that represents a tooltip that supports multiple text and image regions. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.SuperTip property.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

A enumeration value that specifies the button’s image type. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Kind property. A value which specifies the button’s caption. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Caption property. An integer value specifying the button’s width. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Width property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Enabled property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Visible property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.IsLeft property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.ImageAlignment property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Image property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Shortcut property. A object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Appearance property. A value which specifies the button’s tool tip. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ToolTip property. A value which identifies the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Tag property. A object that represents a tooltip that supports multiple text and image regions. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.SuperTip property. A Boolean value that specifies whether specific pixels in the button’s image are displayed transparent. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.EnableImageTransparency property.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

A enumeration value that specifies the button’s image type. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Kind property. A value which specifies the button’s caption. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Caption property. An integer value specifying the button’s width. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Width property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Enabled property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Visible property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.IsLeft property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.ImageLocation property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Image property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Shortcut property. A object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Appearance property. A value which specifies the button’s tool tip. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ToolTip property. A value which identifies the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Tag property. A object that represents a tooltip that supports multiple text and image regions. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.SuperTip property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

Initializes a new instance with the specified property values.

The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Kind property. A value which specifies the button’s caption. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Caption property. An integer value specifying the button’s width. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Width property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Enabled property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Visible property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.IsLeft property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.ImageLocation property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Image property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Shortcut property.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

A enumeration value that specifies the button’s image type. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Kind property. A value which specifies the button’s caption. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Caption property. An integer value specifying the button’s width. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Width property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Enabled property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Visible property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.IsLeft property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.ImageAlignment property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Image property. The value to initialize the button’s image. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Shortcut property. A object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Appearance property. A value which specifies the button’s tool tip. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ToolTip property. A value which identifies the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Tag property. A object that represents a tooltip that supports multiple text and image regions. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.SuperTip property. A Boolean value that specifies whether specific pixels in the button’s image are displayed transparent. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.EnableImageTransparency property.

Initializes a new instance with the specified property values.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A value that specifies the predefined image for the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Kind property. A value which specifies the button’s caption. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Caption property. An integer value specifying the button’s width. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Width property. true if the editor button is enabled and an end-user can perform actions on it; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Enabled property. true if the button is visible; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Visible property. true, if the button is aligned to the editor’s left edge; false, if the button is aligned to the editor’s right edge. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.IsLeft property. An EditorButtonImageOptions object that specifies image options. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ImageOptions property. A object which represents the button’s shortcut. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Shortcut property. An object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Appearance property. An object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button in hovered state. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.AppearanceHovered property. An object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button in pressed state. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.AppearancePressed property. An object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button in disabled state. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.AppearanceDisabled property. A value which specifies the button’s tool tip. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ToolTip property. An object to be associated with the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Tag property. A object that represents a tooltip that supports multiple text and image regions. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.SuperTip property. A ToolTipAnchor enumeration value that specifies how the tooltip is anchored. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ToolTipAnchor property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A value that specifies the predefined image for the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Kind property. A value which specifies the button’s caption. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Caption property. An integer value specifying the button’s width. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Width property. true if the editor button is enabled and an end-user can perform actions on it; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Enabled property. true if the button is visible; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Visible property. true if the button is aligned to the editor’s left edge; false if the button is aligned to the editor’s right edge. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.IsLeft property. An value that specifies the position of the button’s image relative to the text. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ImageLocation property. A object which represents the image displayed on the button’s surface. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Image property. A object which represents the button’s shortcut. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Shortcut property. An object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Appearance property. An object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button in hovered state. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.AppearanceHovered property. An object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button in pressed state. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.AppearancePressed property. An object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button in disabled state. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.AppearanceDisabled property. A value which specifies the button’s tool tip. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ToolTip property. An object to be associated with the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Tag property. A object that represents a tooltip that supports multiple text and image regions. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.SuperTip property. A Boolean value that specifies whether specific pixels in the button’s image are displayed transparent. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.EnableImageTransparency property.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

A enumeration value that specifies the button’s image type. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Kind property. A value which specifies the button’s caption. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Caption property. An integer value specifying the button’s width. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Width property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Enabled property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Visible property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.IsLeft property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.ImageLocation property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Image property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Shortcut property. A object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Appearance property. A value which specifies the button’s tool tip. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ToolTip property. A value which identifies the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Tag property. A object that represents a tooltip that supports multiple text and image regions. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.SuperTip property. A Boolean value that specifies whether specific pixels in the button’s image are displayed transparent. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.EnableImageTransparency property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A enumeration value that specifies the button’s image type. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Kind property. A value which specifies the button’s caption. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Caption property. An integer value specifying the button’s width. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Width property. true if the editor button is enabled and an end-user can perform actions on it; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Enabled property. true if the button is visible; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Visible property. true if the button is aligned to the editor’s left edge; false if the button is aligned to the editor’s right edge. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.IsLeft property. An value that specifies the position of the button’s image relative to the text. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ImageLocation property. A object which represents the image displayed on the button’s surface. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Image property. A object which represents the button’s shortcut. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Shortcut property. A value which specifies the button’s tool tip. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ToolTip property. An object to be associated with the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Tag property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A value that specifies the predefined image for the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Kind property. A value which specifies the button’s caption. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Caption property. An integer value specifying the button’s width. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Width property. true if the editor button is enabled and an end-user can perform actions on it; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Enabled property. true if the button is visible; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Visible property. true if the button is aligned to the editor’s left edge; false if the button is aligned to the editor’s right edge. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.IsLeft property. An value that specifies the position of the button’s image relative to the text. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ImageLocation property. A object which represents the image displayed on the button’s surface. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Image property. A value that specifies the uniform resource identifier of the image in the DX Image Gallery to be displayed on the button’s surface. A object which represents the button’s shortcut. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Shortcut property. An object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Appearance property. An object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button in hovered state. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.AppearanceHovered property. An object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button in pressed state. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.AppearancePressed property. An object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button in disabled state. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.AppearanceDisabled property. A value which specifies the button’s tool tip. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ToolTip property. An object to be associated with the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Tag property. A object that represents a tooltip that supports multiple text and image regions. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.SuperTip property. A Boolean value that specifies whether specific pixels in the button’s image are displayed transparent. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.EnableImageTransparency property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A enumeration value that specifies the button’s image type. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Kind property. A value which specifies the button’s caption. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Caption property. An integer value specifying the button’s width. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Width property. true if the editor button is enabled and an end-user can perform actions on it; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Enabled property. true if the button is visible; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Visible property. true if the button is aligned to the editor’s left edge; false if the button is aligned to the editor’s right edge. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.IsLeft property. An value that specifies the position of the button’s image relative to the text. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ImageLocation property. A object which represents the image displayed on the button’s surface. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Image property.

Initializes a new instance with the specified property values.

The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Kind property. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.ToolTip property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with a button type.

A type value representing the kind of button to create.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

An EditorButtonImageOptions object that specifies image options. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.ImageOptions property. A value that specifies the predefined image for the button. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.Kind property. A object that represents a tooltip that supports multiple text and image regions. This value is assigned to the EditorButton.SuperTip property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified property values.

The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Tag property with. The value to initialize the button’s EditorButton.Kind property with.

Provides access to the button’s appearance settings.

A object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the button.

Provides access to the appearance settings applied when the current button is disabled.

An object that specifies the appearance settings applied when the current button is disabled.

Provides access to the appearance settings applied when the mouse pointer passes over the current button.

An object that specifies the appearance settings applied when the current button is hovered over with the mouse pointer.

Provides access to the appearance settings applied when the current button is clicked.

An object that specifies the appearance settings applied when the current button is clicked.

Copies all properties of the specified button to the current object.

The source object whose properties must be copied.

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command in the source and bind it to this .

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this .

Binds the specific parameterized command to this .

An Object that is the command to be bound to this . A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this .

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command of the target type in the source and bind it to this .

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. The type of a ViewModel that stores a bindable command. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this .

Gets or sets the caption text of the editor button.

A string specifying button caption text.

Occurs when the properties defining the button’s look and feel are changed.

Occurs when the current editor button is clicked.

Gets the buttons collection that owns the current button.

An object which represents a collection of editor buttons.

Gets or sets the whose Execute(Object) method will be called when the Click event is invoked.

The command.

Occurs when the CanExecute(Object) status of the has changed.

Occurs after the value of the property has changed.

Gets or sets the parameter that is passed to the command specified by the Command property.

The parameter.

Occurs after the value of the property has changed.

Releases all unmanaged resources used by an .

Gets or sets whether a selected is highlighted when the mouse interacts with the button.

true, to highlight a selected ; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the Boolean value that determines whether a user can perform actions on the current editor button.

true if an editor button is enabled and a user can perform actions on it; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether specific colors in the button’s image are transparent, when displayed.

true if specific colors in the button’s image are transparent, when displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the glyph alignment relative to its caption.

The value of the type specifies the alignment of the glyph relative to the button’s caption.

Gets or sets a custom image to display on the button.

A object that specifies the image displayed on the button surface.

Gets or sets the alignment of the image displayed within the button.

A enumeration member which specifies the image’s alignment.

Specifies the position of the button’s image relative to the text.

A value that specifies the alignment of the button’s image relative to the text.

Provides access to all properties that allow you to assign and customize an icon for this .

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Controls.EditorButtonImageOptions object that stores all properties that allow you to assign and customize an icon for this .

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the uniform resource identifier of the image in the DX Image Gallery displayed in the current button. A specific version of the addressed image is automatically chosen based on the app context (the current skin and required image size).

A object that specifies the uniform resource identifier of the image to be displayed in the current button.

Gets the button’s position within the owning collection.

A zero-based integer representing the button’s position.

Gets or sets whether the button is the default button.

true if the button is the default button; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the location of the button within the current control.

true if the button is aligned to the left; false if the button is aligned to the right.

Gets or sets the type of image to display within the button.

A enumerator value that specifies the type of image to display within the button.

Raises the EditorButton.Click event.

Reverts the button’s properties to its default values.

Removes the object that has been assigned to the editor button.

Gets or sets a shortcut used to activate the button’s functionality.

The object specifying the shortcut for the current button.

Gets or sets a for the current button.

A object associated with the button.

Gets or sets a value that identifies the current button.

A that identifies the current instance.

Gets or sets the button’s regular tooltip.

A string which specifies the button’s regular tooltip.

Gets or sets whether the tooltip is anchored relative to the mouse pointer or the button.

A DevExpress.Utils.ToolTipAnchor value that specifies whether the tooltip is anchored relative to the mouse pointer or the button. By Default, the behavior depends on the ToolTipController.ToolTipAnchor property.

Returns the text representation of the current object.

A string that specifies the text representation of the current object.

Gets or sets the visibility status of the current button.

true if the button is visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the button’s width.

The button’s width in pixels. Setting it to -1 enables auto width.

Represents a collection of editor buttons in a control or its descendant.

Creates and initializes a new instance of the class.

Adds the specified button to the button collection.

The object specifying the button to insert into the collection. The zero-based index of the button within the collection.

Adds an array of buttons to the current button collection.

An array of objects to add to the current button collection.

Copies buttons from the specified object to the current button collection.

The source button collection.

Occurs when changing the current button collection.

Gets a value indicating whether the specified button belongs to the current collection.

The button object to locate in the collection. true if the button belongs to the current button collection; otherwise, false.

Gets the position of the specified button in the current button collection.

The object to locate in the collection. The zero-based index of the button in the collection.

Inserts the specified button at a given position.

The zero-based index at which the button is inserted. The button to insert to the collection.

Gets a button at the specified position.

The zero-based index of the button to return. An object at the specified position in the current collection.

Removes the specified button from the current collection.

A button to remove from the collection. true if removed from the collection; otherwise, false.

Returns the text representation of the current object.

A string that specifies the text representation of the current object.

Gets the number of visible buttons in the collection.

The number of visible buttons in the collection.

Lists values that specify when the editor’s RepositoryItem.EditValueChanged event should be raised.

The RepositoryItem.EditValueChanged event fires after an end-user has stopped editing (typing text) and a specified amount of time (RepositoryItem.EditValueChangedFiringDelay/RepositoryItem.EditValueChangedDelay) has passed.

The RepositoryItem.EditValueChanged event fires immediately after the editor’s value has been changed by an end-user. For the , and controls, the event fires after you move focus between date/time placeholders.

Represents the base class for arguments passed to exception handling events.

Creates a new object.

A string value specifying the error description. This value is assigned to the ExceptionEventArgs.ErrorText property. A object representing the exception that raised the event. This value is assigned to the ExceptionEventArgs.Exception property.

Creates a new object.

A string value specifying the error description. This value is assigned to the ExceptionEventArgs.ErrorText property. A string value specifying the error message box caption. This value is assigned to the ExceptionEventArgs.WindowCaption property. A object representing the exception that raised the event. This value is assigned to the ExceptionEventArgs.Exception property. A enumeration value specifying the response to entering an invalid value. This value is assigned to the ExceptionEventArgs.ExceptionMode property.

Gets or sets the error description to be displayed in the message box/tooltip.

A string value specifying the text to display in the message box/tooltip.

Gets the exception that caused the event.

A object representing the exception that caused the event.

Gets or sets the type of response to supplying invalid values.

A enumeration value specifying the response type.

Gets or sets the caption of the error message box.

A string value specifying the caption of the error message box.

Represents the method for handling events which take an object as a parameter.

The source of the event. A object that contains event data.

Specifies how an exception should be handled.

A control displays a tooltip or message box with an error description specified by the ExceptionEventArgs.ErrorText property. A tooltip is displayed for invalid cells. A message box is displayed for invalid rows (records).

Discards new data and reverts to an old value.

A control suppresses an error message box/tooltip and exceptions. Values remain unchanged.

A control throws an exception specified by the ExceptionEventArgs.Exception property.

Lists the values that determine the display mode for column filter.

Filter buttons are rendered as buttons. They are displayed when a column is filtered or when the mouse cursor hovers over the column header.

The same as the FilterButtonShowMode.SmartTag option.

Filter buttons are rendered as small tags. They are displayed when a column is filtered or when the mouse cursor hovers over the column header.

Contains data for the ImageSlider.GetImage event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with custom settings.

true if the image query is the result of a forward image slide; otherwise, false. true if the image query is the result of a backward image slide; otherwise, false. true if the image required is the very first to be uploaded; otherwise, false. true if a new image was successfully displayed within the current ; otherwise, false.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

true if the first image within the needs to be displayed; otherwise, false. true if the last image within the needs to be displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the currently displayed image was successfully changed.

true if the currently displayed image was successfully changed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets an image that is be displayed within the current .

An Image object that is to be displayed within the current .

Gets or sets if the image to be displayed is the first image within the .

true if the image to be displayed is the first image within the ; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets if the image to be displayed is the last image within the .

true if the image to be displayed is the last image within the ; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the image query is the result of an image sliding forward.

true if whether the image query is the result of an image sliding forward; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the image query is the result of an image sliding backward.

true if the image query is the result of an image sliding backwards; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the image required is the very first to be uploaded by the current .

true if the image required is the very first to be uploaded; otherwise, false.

Provides data for the RepositoryItemLookUpEdit.GetNotInListValue event.

Creates an instance of the class.

The field to initialize the GetNotInListValueEventArgs.FieldName property. The value for the RecordIndex property.

Gets the field for which you should provide the value for the specified record.

The field name for which to return the value.

Gets or sets a field value.

A field value.

Represents a method that will handle the RepositoryItemLookUpEdit.GetNotInListValue event.

The control which fires the event. A object that contains event data.

Lists values that specify which functionality is invoked as a result of a click on a column header within the lookup editor’s dropdown list.

Clicking a column’s header selects this column for incremental searching.

Clicking a column’s header sorts the data by that column.

Contains values specifying the manner in which the hour portion is displayed.

The hour format obtained from the operation system time settings.

The hour portion varies from 00 to 12. A time suffix is displayed.

The hour portion varies from 00 to 24.

Represents an individual item in controls.

Creates a new instance of the class and sets all its properties to their default values.

Creates a new instance of the class and initializes the item’s ImageComboBoxItem.ImageIndex property.

The value to initialize the ImageComboBoxItem.ImageIndex property.

Creates a new instance of the class and initializes the item’s value and image index.

The object to initialize the item’s ComboBoxItem.Value property. The value to initialize the item’s ImageComboBoxItem.ImageIndex property.

Creates a new instance of the class and initializes the item’s value.

The object to initialize the item’s ComboBoxItem.Value property.

Creates a new instance of the class and initializes the item’s caption and image index.

The string to initialize the item’s ImageComboBoxItem.Description property. The value to initialize the ImageComboBoxItem.ImageIndex property.

Creates a new instance of the class and initializes its properties to the specified values.

The string to initialize the item’s ImageComboBoxItem.Description property. The object to initialize the item’s ComboBoxItem.Value property. The value to initialize the item’s ImageComboBoxItem.ImageIndex property.

Creates a new instance of the class and initializes the item’s value and caption.

The string to initialze the item’s ImageComboBoxItem.Description. The value to initialize the item’s ComboBoxItem.Value.

Creates a new instance of the class and initializes the item’s caption.

The string to initialize the ImageComboBoxItem.Description property.

Copies all properties of the specified object to the current item.

The source item whose properties must be copied to the current item.

Gets or sets the item’s display text.

The string that specifies the item’s display text.

Gets or sets the index of the image associated with the item.

The index of the image associated with the item.

Gets the source that provides images for image combo box items.

An which represents the source of images.

Returns the textual representation of the item.

The string representing the current item.

Represents a collection of items displayed within the dropdown list of editors.

Creates a new instance of the class.

The object for which the collection is created.

Adds a new item to the current collection.

A new item to insert into the collection. The position into which the new element was inserted.

Adds a new item to the current collection.

A value that specifies the new item’s caption. This value is assigned to the item’s ImageComboBoxItem.Description property. A that specifies the value associated with the new item. This value is assigned to the item’s ComboBoxItem.Value property. An integer value that specifies the index of the image linked to the new item. This value is assigned to the item’s ImageComboBoxItem.ImageIndex property. The position to which the new element was inserted.

Adds new items to the collection that will represent elements of the specified enumeration. Allows you to assign integer values to the items’ Value property.

A object which is the required enumeration. true if values for generated items should store numeric enumerator values ; false if these values should store constant enumerator names instead.

Adds new items to the collection that will represent elements of the specified enumeration.

A object which represents the required enumeration.

Adds new items to the collection that will represent elements of the specified enumeration.

Adds new items to the collection that will represent elements of the specified enumeration. The display captions of the items are generated by the specified converter.

A System.Converter delegate that will generate item display captions.

Retrieves images from the target image list, assigned to either the RepositoryItemImageComboBox.SmallImages or RepositoryItemImageComboBox.LargeImages property.

An Object that stores images to be added.

Adds an array of items to the collection.

An array of objects representing items for the image combo box editor.

Returns the item in the current collection that contains the specified value.

A ComboBoxItem value. The object within the current collection containing the specified value.

Gets the text representation of the specified item.

The item for which to return its text representation. The string representing the specified item.

Gets or sets an item at the specified position.

The zero-based index of the item to return. The item at the specified position.

Represents a single item in the collection.

Creates a new object.

Creates a new object and instantiates its ListBoxItem.Value and ImageListBoxItem.ImageIndex properties.

An object representing the item’s value. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Value property. An integer value representing the zero-based index of the image displayed in the item. This value is assigned to the ImageListBoxItem.ImageIndex property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

An object representing the item’s value. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Value property. A string that specifies the item’s display text. This value is assigned to the ImageListBoxItem.Description property. An object that stores image-related options. This value is assigned to the ImageListBoxItem.ImageOptions property. Custom data associated with the item. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Tag property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

An object representing the item’s value. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Value property. A string that specifies the item’s display text. This value is assigned to the ImageListBoxItem.Description property. An integer value representing the zero-based index of the image displayed in the item. This value is assigned to the ImageListBoxItem.ImageIndex property. Custom data associated with the item. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Tag property. An image displayed by the item. This value is assigned to the ImageListBoxItem.Image property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

An object representing the item’s value. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Value property. A string that specifies the item’s display text. This value is assigned to the ImageListBoxItem.Description property. An integer value representing the zero-based index of the image displayed in the item. This value is assigned to the ImageListBoxItem.ImageIndex property. Custom data associated with the item. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Tag property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

Creates a new object and instantiates its ListBoxItem.Value property.

An object representing the item’s value. This value is assigned to the ListBoxItem.Value property.

Gets or sets the item’s display text.

A string that specifies the item’s display text.

Gets or sets an image displayed by this item. This property has a lower priority than the ImageListBoxItem.ImageIndex property.

A object specifying an image displayed by this item.

Specifies the index of the item’s image.

An integer value representing the zero-based index of the item’s image.

Provides access to settings that allow you to set up raster and vector icons for this .

An DevExpress.XtraEditors.Controls.ImageListBoxItemImageOptions object that stores image-related options.

Gets the source of images which provides images for image list box items.

An which represents the source of images.

Returns the textual representation of the item.

The string representing the current item.

Represents the collection of items displayed in the ImageListBoxControl.

Creates a new object.

Creates a new item with the specified settings and appends it to the collection.

An object which represents the item’s value. A zero-based integer specifying the index of the item’s image. A zero-based integer value representing the new item’s index.

Adds a new item with the specified value to the collection.

An object that represents the item’s value. A zero-based integer value that specifies the new item’s index within the collection.

Adds an array of items to the collection.

An array of objects to be added to the collection.

Returns the zero-based index of the specified in the collection, or, if the specified value is not a object, returns the index of the item that contains this value in its ImageListBoxItem.Value property.

A object whose index in the collection needs to be returned. Or, a value (ImageListBoxItem.Value) of the item whose index needs to be returned. A zero-based index of the required item.

Gets or sets an item at the specified position.

An integer value representing the item’s zero-based index within the collection. If negative or exceeds the maximum available index, an exception is raised. An object representing the item at the specified position within the collection.

The control that allows your end-users to browse through a collection of images using two navigation buttons. Supports animation effects when navigating between images.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Gets or sets whether sliding from the last to the first image and vice versa is enabled.

true if sliding from the last to the first image and vice versa is enabled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the control automatically slides images in the forward or backward direction.

An DevExpress.XtraEditors.Controls.AutoSlide enumeration value, such as None, Forward or Backward, that specifies whether the control automatically slides images in the forward or backward direction.

Gets or sets the show duration per slide, in milliseconds, in the auto slide mode.

An integer value that specifies the show duration per slide, in milliseconds, in the auto slide mode.

Returns information on the image slider elements located at the specified point.

A System.Drawing.Point structure specifying the test point coordinates relative to the top-left corner of the control. An ImageSliderHitInfo object containing information about the image slider elements located at the test point.

Occurs when an is ready to slide to the next/previous image and navigation buttons are to be displayed.

Fires when a context button is clicked.

Provides access to the settings applied to the context buttons displayed in the image slider, and panels containing these buttons.

A ContextItemCollectionOptions object that comprises settings applied to the context buttons displayed in the image slider, and panels containing these buttons.

Provides access to the collection of context buttons displayed in the image slider.

A ContextItemCollection object that represents the collection of context buttons displayed in the image slider.

Gets a currently displayed image within the object.

An that is the currently displayed image within the specified .

Gets or sets the index of the image currently displayed in the control.

An integer value that specifies the zero-based index of the image currently displayed in the control.

Occurs when the ‘s currently displayed image is about to change.

Gets the index of the currently displayed image within the current .

An Int32 value that is the index of the currently displayed image within the current .

Occurs when an needs to change the currently displayed image to another image.

Fires when the ImageSlider.CurrentImage property value changes.

Gets or sets the source of images to be displayed in the control.

A that represents an image collection providing images for the control.

Gets a collection of images presented by an object.

A object specifying images within an object.

Gets whether the control is currently being initialized.

true if the control is currently being initialized; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the way an image is aligned within the container.

An object defining the way an image is aligned within the container.

Gets an image that follows the ImageSlider.CurrentImage within the specified object.

An object that follows the ImageSlider.CurrentImage within the specified object.

Forces the control to invalidate its client area and immediately redraw itself and any child controls.

Gets or sets whether the buttons that slide images back and forward are displayed.

Default or True if the buttons that slide images back and forward are displayed; otherwise, False.

Sets the index of the image currently displayed within the current . The method’s parameter specifies whether to use the slide animation.

An integer value that specifies the zero-based index of the image to be displayed. true, to use the slide animation; otherwise, false.

Sets the index of the image currently displayed within the current .

An Int32 value that is the index of the image to be displayed.

Starts animation of the image currently displayed.

Stops animation of the image currently displayed.

Updates the currently displayed image.

Gets or sets whether images are painted grayed out when the control is disabled.

true if images are painted grayed out when the control is disabled; otherwise, false. Default is true.

Gets or sets whether the current operates in the Virtual Mode.

true if the current operates in the Virtual Mode; otherwise, false.

Contains values specifying the inplace editor types.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used in your code.

Provides data for events that occur when assigning an invalid value to a container control cell.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

A string to initialize the ExceptionEventArgs.ErrorText property. A object to initialize the ExceptionEventArgs.Exception property. An object to initialize the InvalidValueExceptionEventArgs.Value property.

Creates a new object.

A string value specifying the error’s description. This value is assigned to the ExceptionEventArgs.ErrorText property. A string value specifying the error message box caption. This value is assigned to the ExceptionEventArgs.WindowCaption property. A object representing the exception that raised the event. This value is assigned to the ExceptionEventArgs.Exception property. A enumeration value specifying the response to entering an invalid value. This value is assigned to the ExceptionEventArgs.ExceptionMode property. An object representing the invalid value. This value is assigned to the InvalidValueExceptionEventArgs.Value property.

Gets an invalid value that caused the exception.

An object representing the invalid value.

Represents the method for handling events which take an object as a parameter.

Event source. An object that contains event data.

Provides data for the BaseCheckedListBoxControl.ItemCheck event of check list box controls.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

The position of the item in the check list box item collection, whose state has changed. This value is assigned to the ItemCheckEventArgs.Index property. A value representing the new state for the item. This value is assigned to the ItemCheckEventArgs.State property.

Gets the index of the item whose state was changed.

An integer value specifying the item’s position in the item collection.

Gets the state of the item.

A value representing the checked state of the item.

Represents a method for handling the BaseCheckedListBoxControl.ItemCheck event of a check list box control.

The event source. This represents the check list box control. An object containing event data.

Provides data for the BaseCheckedListBoxControl.ItemChecking event of check list box controls.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

The position of the item whose state is about to be changed in the check list box item collection. A value representing the new checked value for the item. A value representing the old checked value for the item.

Gets the index of the item whose checked state is about to be changed.

The position of the item in the BaseCheckedListBoxControl.Items collection.

Gets or sets a new checked state for the item.

A value representing the new checked state for the item.

Gets the item’s previous checked state.

A value representing the previous checked state of the item.

Represents a method for handling the BaseCheckedListBoxControl.ItemChecking event of a check list box control.

The event source. This represents the check list box control. An object containing event data.

Represents a single item in the collection.

Gets or sets custom data associated with the current object.

Custom data associated with the current object.

Returns an item’s equivalent string representation.

A value representing the current item.

Gets or sets the item’s value.

An object representing the item’s value.

Represents the collection of items displayed in the ListBoxControl.

Creates a new object.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified capacity.

A value to initialize the collection’s Capacity property.

Adds the specified item to the end of the collection.

An object which represents the item to append. A zero-based integer representing the item’s position within the collection.

Populates this with items generated from values of the specific enumeration. Allows generated items to store numeric enumeration values instead of enumeration constant names. This overload should be used only for the class descendants.

A type of enumeration whose values should be used to generate items. true if values for generated items should store numeric enumerator values ; false if these values should store constant enumerator names instead. This parameter is not in effect when the method is called for objects, since their child items do not have the Value-Description property pair.

Populates this with items generated from values of the specific enumeration.

A Type of enumeration whose values should be used to generate items.

Populates this with items generated from values of the specific enumeration.

Populates this with items generated from values of the specific enumeration and replaces default item descriptions. This overload should be used only for the class descendants.

A Delegate that encapsulates a method which replaces generated items’ captions. This parameter is not in effect when the method is called for objects, since their child items do not have the Value-Description property pair.

Adds an array of items to the collection.

An array of objects to be added to the collection.

Locks the by preventing change notifications from being fired, preventing visual updates until the EndUpdate method is called.

Returns whether the specified item belongs to the current collection.

The item to locate in the collection. true if the specified item belongs to the collection; otherwise false.

Gets the number of items in the collection.

An integer value that specifies the number of items in the collection.

Unlocks the object after a call to the BeginUpdate method and causes an immediate visual update.

Returns the position of the specified item within the collection.

The object representing the item to locate within the collection. An integer value representing the zero-based index of the specified item within the collection. -1 if the specified item is not found.

Creates a new item and adds it to the specified position within the collection.

An integer value representing the zero-based index at which the created item should be inserted. If negative or exceeds the number of elements within the collection an exception is thrown. An object representing the inserted item.

Gets or sets an item at the specified position within the collection.

An integer value representing the zero-based index of the item. If negative or exceeds the number of elements, an exception is raised. An object representing the item at the specified position.

Occurs after the item collection has been changed.

Removes the specified item from the collection.

An object representing the item to be removed from the collection.

Represents an object providing a means to localize editor interface elements.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Gets or sets a localizer object providing localization of the editors’ interface at runtime.

A Localizer descendant which is used to localize the editors’ interface at runtime.

Creates and returns an EditResLocalizer object containing resources for the thread’s language and regional settings (culture).

An EditResLocalizer object containing resources for the thread’s culture.

Returns an XtraLocalizer object representing resources based on the thread’s language and regional settings (culture).

An object representing resources based on the thread’s culture.

Gets the string, localized by the current , for the specified user interface element.

A String value specifying the UI element whose localized text content is to be obtained. A String value that is the localized text content of the specific UI element.

A column for a lookup editor.

Creates an instance of the class and sets its properties to default values.

Creates an instance of the class and initializes its field name, caption and width.

The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.FieldName property. The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.Width property. The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.Caption property.

Creates an instance of the class and sets its field name and width to the specified values.

The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.FieldName property. The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.Width property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A string representing the field name whose values are displayed in the column. This value is used to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.FieldName property. A string representing the column’s caption. This value is used to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.Caption property. An integer value specifying the width of the current column. This value is used to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.Width property. A value specifying the type of formatting applied when displaying column values. This value is used to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.FormatType property. A string specifying the pattern used to format column values. This value is used to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.FormatString property. A Boolean value specifying the visibility of the current column. This value is used to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.Visible property. A value specifying the horizontal alignment of the column’s values. This value is used to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.Alignment property. A value specifying the sort order for the column. This value is used to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.SortOrder property. A value that specifies whether data sorting is enabled for the column. This value is used to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.SortOrder property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

Creates an instance of the class and sets all its properties to specified values.

The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.FieldName property. The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.Caption property. The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.Width property. The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.FormatType property. The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.FormatString property. The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.Visible property. The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.Alignment property.

Creates an instance of the class and initializes its field name, caption and width.

The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.FieldName property. The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.Caption property. The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.Width property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified field name and caption.

The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.FieldName property. The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.Caption property.

Creates an instance of the class and sets its field name to the specified value.

The value to initialize the LookUpColumnInfo.FieldName property.

Gets or sets the horizontal alignment of column values within the current column.

A value specifying the alignment of the column’s contents.

Gets or sets whether the column supports data sorting.

A value that specifies whether data sorting is enabled for the current column.

Copies properties of the source column to the current instance.

The source column whose properties must be copied.

Gets or sets the column’s caption.

The string representing the column’s caption.

Gets or sets the field name whose values are displayed in the column.

The name of the field whose values are displayed in the column.

Specifies the pattern used to format column values when the LookUpColumnInfo.FormatType is not set to FormatType.None.

The pattern used to format column values.

Gets or sets the type of formatting applied when displaying column values.

The value specifying the format type.

Returns the LookUpEdit control that owns the collection containing the current object.

The owner of the collection containing the current object.

Gets or sets the sort order applied to the current column.

A value specifying the column’s sort order.

Returns the textual representation of the current object.

A string that specifies the textual representation of the current object.

Gets or sets the visibility of the current column.

true if the column is visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the width of the current column.

The width of the current column.

A collection of columns for a lookup editor.

Creates an instance of the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified owner.

An owner of the created collection.

Adds a new column to the current collection.

A column to add to the collection. The position into which the new element was inserted.

Adds an array of columns to the collection.

An array of objects representing columns for the lookup editor.

Copies columns from the source collection to the current one.

The source collection whose columns are copied to the current collection.

Occurs on changing the column collection

Creates a new column for a lookup editor.

A object that has been created.

Determines whether the specified is equal to the current .

The to compare with the current . true if the specified is equal to the current ; otherwise, false.

Returns a visible lookup column at the specified visible index.

An integer which specifies the zero-based visible index of the column which should be returned. A object which represents the visible lookup column at the specified index.

Gets the zero-based index of the specified column in the item collection.

The column to locate in the collection. The zero-based index of the specified column in the current collection, if found; otherwise, -1.

Gets a column at the specified position.

The zero-based index of the column to return. A column at the specified position.

Gets a column by its field name.

The field name of the column to return. The first column encountered whose LookUpColumnInfo.FieldName property matches the specified field name.

Removes the specified column from the collection.

The column to remove from the collection.

Gets the number of visible lookup columns.

An integer which represents the number of visible lookup columns.

Gets the zero-based index of the specified visible column.

The column found. The zero-based index of the specified visible column.

Provides arguments for the LookUpEdit.AutoSearch and GridLookUpEdit.AutoSearch events.

Allows you to change how the lookup editor searches for items in its drop-down panel.

If a text entered into the editor text box contains whitespaces, the editor splits this string into separate logical blocks. This parameter specifies how these blocks are combined into a search query. The condition according to which the editor searches for the string entered into its text box.

Allows you to change how the lookup editor searches for items in its drop-down panel.

A text to compare with data source records. If a text entered into the editor text box contains whitespaces, the editor splits this string into separate logical blocks. This parameter specifies how these blocks are combined into a search query. The condition according to which the editor searches for the string entered into its text box.

Allows you to change how the lookup editor searches for items in its drop-down panel.

The name of a field whose values should be compared with the search text. A text to compare with data source records. If a text entered into the editor text box contains whitespaces, the editor splits this string into separate logical blocks. This parameter specifies how these blocks are combined into a search query. The condition according to which the editor searches for the string entered into its text box.

Allows you to change how the lookup editor searches for items in its drop-down panel.

Names of fields whose values should be compared with the search text. A text to compare with data source records. If a text entered into the editor text box contains whitespaces, the editor splits this string into separate logical blocks. This parameter specifies how these blocks are combined into a search query. The condition according to which the editor searches for the string entered into its text box.

Provides data for the LookUpEdit.AutoSuggest and GridLookUpEdit.AutoSuggest events.

An object that cancels the Task assigned to the GetSuggestions method. This object is generated when you call the Cancel method.

Cancels the Task that should retrieve lookup items.

Clears the editor drop-down menu, removing all items returned by the GetSuggestions task.

true, to remove drop-down menu items; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a System.Threading.Tasks.Task object that returns the collection of items, which match the current user text. These items are displayed in the editor drop-down menu.

A Task that returns the collection of items for the editor’s drop-down menu.

Sets the minimum duration for the loading indicator that plays while the GetSuggestion task is ongoing. This allows you to prevent this animation from flickering when the task completes too quickly.

The minimum display duration (in milliseconds).

Sets the minimum duration for the loading indicator that plays while the GetSuggestion task is ongoing. This allows you to prevent this animation from flickering when the task completes too quickly.

A TimeSpan object that specifies the minimum duration for the loading indicator.

Sets a that defines the items the or display in AutoSuggest mode.

A that returns a list of database entries for the editor’s drop-down menu. The type of entries the processes.

A base class for the AutoSearch and AutoSuggest event parameters.

Cancels the Task assigned to the QuerySuggestions parameter.

true to cancel the QuerySuggestions task, false to run it.

Removes any active highlight pattern from lookup items.

This member supports internal infrastucture and is not intended to be used in code.

Highlights any part of a record that matches the text entered by a user.

A CompareOptions enumeration value that specifies the string comparison mode.

Highlights any part of a record that matches the given text.

A text that should be highlighted. A CompareOptions enumeration value that specifies the string comparison mode.

Highlights any part of a record that belongs to the specific data field and matches the given text.

A data field whose values can be highlighted. A text that should be highlighted. A CompareOptions enumeration value that specifies the string comparison mode.

Highlights any part of a record that belongs to certain data fields and matches the given text.

A list of data fields whose values should be highlighted. A text that should be highlighted. A CompareOptions enumeration value that specifies the string comparison mode.

In every data field value, selects the first found text portion that matches the user text.

A CompareOptions enumeration value that specifies the string comparison mode.

In every data field value, selects the first found text sequence if it matches the user text.

A Text that should be highlighted if it matches the user text. A CompareOptions enumeration value that specifies the string comparison mode.

Selects the first found text sequence if it matches the user text and belongs to the specific data field.

A Field whose values can be highlighted. A Text that should be highlighted if it matches the user text. A CompareOptions enumeration value that specifies the string comparison mode.

Selects the first found text portion that matches the user text and belongs to any of the given data fields.

Fields whose values can be hightlighted. A Text that should be highlighted if it matches the user text. A CompareOptions enumeration value that specifies the string comparison mode.

If a record starts with the user text, this text portion is highlighted.

A CompareOptions enumeration value that specifies the string comparison mode.

If a record starts with the given text, this text portion is higlighted.

A text that should be highlighted. A CompareOptions enumeration value that specifies the string comparison mode.

If a record belongs to the given data field and starts with the specific text, this text portion is highlighted.

A field whose values can be highlighted. A text that should be highlighted. A CompareOptions enumeration value that specifies the string comparison mode.

If record belongs to any of the given data fields and starts with the specific text, this text portion is higlighted.

Fields whose values can be highlighted. A text that should be highlighted. A CompareOptions enumeration value that specifies the string comparison mode.

Sets a specific highlight range.

A function that must return a highlight range. A highlight range is a structure that contains the first hightlighted char position, and the length of highlighted charecters’ sequence.

Sets a specific highlight range.

A function that must return a highlight range. A highlight range is a structure that contains the first hightlighted char position, and the length of highlighted charecters’ sequence.

Sets specific highlight ranges.

A function that must return a highlight ranges’ array. A highlight range is a structure that contains the first hightlighted char position, and the length of highlighted charecters’ sequence.

Returns the current user text.

The current user text.

Contains values that identify how an item has beed added to the control.

A new item has been added by an end-user.

For internal use.

Provides data for the RepositoryItemHyperLinkEdit.OpenLink event.

Creates an instance of the class.

The value to initialize the OpenLinkEventArgs.EditValue property.

Gets or sets the object representing the command to execute.

The object representing the command to execute.

Gets or sets whether default execution of the hyperlink command is required.

true if the event is handled and no default processing is required; false, if the editor should execute the command after performing your RepositoryItemHyperLinkEdit.OpenLink event handler.

Represents a method for handling the RepositoryItemHyperLinkEdit.OpenLink event of a control.

The event source. A object that contains event data.

Enumerates output formats for the Image Editor dialog.

PNG image format.

The output and original image format match.

Represents an individual item within an image combo box editor.

Creates an image combobox item and sets all its properties to their default values.

Creates an image combobox item and sets its image index to the specified value.

The value to initialize the ImageComboBoxItem.ImageIndex property.

Creates an image combobox item and initializes the item’s value and image index.

The object to initialize the item’s ComboBoxItem.Value property. The value to initialize the item’s ImageComboBoxItem.ImageIndex property.

Creates an image combo box item and initializes the item’s value.

The object to initialize the item’s ComboBoxItem.Value property.

Creates an image combobox item and initializes the item’s caption and image index.

The string to initialize the item’s ImageComboBoxItem.Description property. The value to initialize the ImageComboBoxItem.ImageIndex property.

Creates an image combobox item and initializes its properties to the specified values.

Creates an image combobox item and initializes the item’s value and caption.

The string to initialze the item’s ImageComboBoxItem.Description. The value to initialize the item’s ComboBoxItem.Value.

Creates an image combobox item and initializes the item’s caption.

The string to initialize the ImageComboBoxItem.Description property.

Contains values that specify how a mask is aligned relative to an image in the control.

A mask is aligned at the center of the bottom side of the image.

A mask is aligned to the bottom left corner of the image.

A mask is aligned to the bottom right corner of the image.

The same as ZoomInside.

A mask is aligned to the middle of the image.

A mask is aligned at the center of the left side of the image.

A mask is aligned at the center of the right side of the image.

A mask is stretched to fit the image’s boundaries.

A mask is aligned at the center of the top side of the image.

A mask is aligned to the top left corner of the image.

A mask is aligned to the top right corner of the image.

A mask is stretched proportionally within the image’s boundaries.

Enumerates mask types for the control.

A circle mask.

Enables the use of a custom mask, assigned to the PictureEditOptionsMask.CustomMask property.

No mask is applied.

A rounded rectangle mask. Use the PictureEditOptionsMask.RectCornerRadius property to specify the radius of rounded corners.

Contains settings that customize the Image Editor dialog.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Copies settings from the specified object to the current object.

The object whose settings are copied to the current object.

Gets or sets the output image format for the Image Editor dialog.

Resets the object’s properties to their default values.

Contains settings that enable masked mode and allow you to customize the masked mode behavior.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

The owner of the created object.

Copies all settings from the options object passed as the parameter and assigns them to the current object.

A descendant whose settings are assigned to the current object.

For internal use.

Gets or sets a custom mask, applied to the target image in PictureEditMaskType.Custom mode.

A custom mask.

Gets or sets the outer margin of the mask.

The outer margin of the mask.

Gets or sets how a mask is aligned relative to the target image.

A value that specifies how a mask is aligned relative to the target image. The Default value is equivalent to ZoomInside.

Gets or sets which mask type is applied.

A value that specifies the mask type applied to the image.

Gets or sets the offset of the mask relative to the image.

The offset of the mask relative to the image.

Gets or sets the radius of rounded corners for the RoundedRect mask type (see PictureEditOptionsMask.MaskType).

The radius of rounded corners for the RoundedRect mask type.

Gets or sets a custom size for the mask.

A custom size for the mask.

Specifies the size mode of the image contained within a or editor.

A picture is not stretched.

An image is displayed as is if its actual size is smaller than the size of the container. If the image size is larger than the container’s size, the image is shrunk proportionally to fit the container’s bounds.

A picture is stretched in order to fit within the area of an editor (or editor’s dropdown window).

A picture is stretched horizontally. Its height remains unchanged.

A picture is stretched vertically. Its width remains unchanged.

A picture is stretched proportionally. The picture fits within the area of an editor (or editor’s dropdown window) at least in one direction.

Lists values that specify how the control stores images pasted via the editor’s context menu

A pasted image is stored to the editor’s edit value as an array of bytes.

A pasted image is stored either as an object or as an array of bytes to the editor’s edit value, depending upon the type of the current edit value. If the editor’s EditValue currently stores an object, the newly pasted image will be stored as an as well. Otherwise, the new image will be stored as an array of bytes.

A pasted image is stored to the editor’s edit value as an object.

Contains styles for popup window borders.

Borders are flat. This style is reserved for future use. Currently, the Default style is the same as the PopupBorderStyles.Flat style.

Borders are flat.

There are no borders.

Borders are thin and drawn using a single line.

Borders are three-dimensional.

Contains data for the event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

The item’s index. The value in the data source.

Gets or sets whether to select the item.

true to select the item; otherwise, false.

Gets the value in the data source.

The value in the data source.

Contains data for the event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

The item’s index. The value posted to the data source. The item’s selection state.

Gets whether the item is selected.

true if the item is selected; otherwise, false.

Gets the value in the data source.

The value in the data source.

Gets or sets the value posted to the data source.

The value posted to the data source.

Contains data for the event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

The item’s index. The item’s selection state.

Gets whether the item is selected.

true if the item is selected; otherwise, false.

Contains data for the event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

The item’s index. The item’s selection state.

Gets or sets whether to cancel the change selection operation.

true to cancel the change selection operation; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the item is selected.

true if the item is selected; otherwise, false.

Provides data for the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.ProcessNewValue event.

Creates an instance of the class.

The value to initialize the ProcessNewValueEventArgs.DisplayValue property.

Gets or sets the value entered by the end-user.

An object representing the value entered by the end-user.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the lookup editor must locate the newly inserted record.

true if the editor must locate the newly inserted record; otherwise false.

Represents a method that will handle the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.ProcessNewValue event.

The control which fires the event. A object that contains event data

Lists values specifying the control’s direction.

Sets progress direction to horizontal.

Sets progress direction to vertical.

Contains values specifying the style of the progress bar’s indicator.

Presents the progress indicator as a series of small blocks. Not supported in Office2003, WindowsXP and skin paint themes, which always use the Solid indicator style.

Presents the progress indicator as a solid bar.

Provides data for the RepositoryItemCheckEdit.QueryCheckStateByValue event.

Creates an instance of the class.

A expression representing the check editor’s edited value. This value is assigned to the QueryCheckStateByValueEventArgs.Value property.

Use this property to set the check state that corresponds to the current edit value.

The check state.

Gets the current edit value.

A expression representing an editor’s edit value.

Represents a method that will handle the RepositoryItemCheckEdit.QueryCheckStateByValue event.

The event sender (typically the check edit control). A object containing data related to the event.

Serves as the base for classes providing data for RepositoryItemCheckEdit.QueryCheckStateByValue and RepositoryItemCheckEdit.QueryValueByCheckState events.

Creates an instance of the class.

A expression representing the check editor’s edited value. A enumeration value representing the editor’s check state.

Gets or sets whether the event is handled and no default processing is required.

true if default event processing is not required; false if default processing is required.

Provides data for the RepositoryItemPopupContainerEdit.QueryDisplayText and RepositoryItemPopupGalleryEdit.QueryDisplayText events.

Creates a new object.

An object representing the editor value whose textual representation is to be specified. This value is assigned to the QueryDisplayTextEventArgs.EditValue property. A string value representing the editor’s value within the text box. This value is assigned to the QueryDisplayTextEventArgs.DisplayText property.

Gets or sets the text to display in the edit box.

A string value specifying the editor’s formatted display text.

Gets the current edit value.

An object representing the editor’s value.

Represents a method that will handle the RepositoryItemPopupContainerEdit.QueryDisplayText and RepositoryItemPopupGalleryEdit.QueryDisplayText events.

The event source. This identifies the popup container editor for which the event is fired. A object containing data related to the event.

Provides data for the RepositoryItemPopupContainerEdit.QueryResultValue event.

Creates a new object.

An object specifying the editor value. This value is assigned to the QueryResultValueEventArgs.Value property.

Gets or sets the editor value.

An object specifying editor value.

Represents a method that will handle the PopupContainerEdit.QueryResultValue event of a popup container editor.

The event source. This identifies the popup container editor for which the event is fired. A object containing data related to the event.

Provides data for the RepositoryItemCheckEdit.QueryValueByCheckState event.

Creates an instance of the class.

A enumeration value representing the current check state of the check editor. This value is assigned to the QueryValueByCheckStateEventArgs.CheckState property.

Gets the editor’s current check state.

The editor’s check state.

Use this property to set the edit value that corresponds to the current check state.

The edit value.

Represents a method that will handle the RepositoryItemCheckEdit.QueryValueByCheckState event.

The event sender (typically the check edit control). A object containing data related to the event.

Represents a single item in the collection.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A value identifying the item. This value is assigned to the RadioGroupItem.Value property. A value that specifies the item’s display text. This value is assigned to the RadioGroupItem.Description property. A Boolean value that specifies whether the item is enabled. This value is assigned to the RadioGroupItem.Enabled property. An Object that contains custom data. This value is assigned to the RadioGroupItem.Tag property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class and sets its RadioGroupItem.Value and RadioGroupItem.Description to the specified parameters.

An object to initialize the RadioGroupItem.Value property. An object to initialize the RadioGroupItem.Description property.

Gets or sets the object’s name used by accessibility client applications.

The object’s name used by accessibility client applications.

Occurs when any item property is changed.

Returns a copy of the current object.

A representing a clone of the current object.

Gets or sets the item’s caption.

The string identifying the item’s caption.

Gets or sets whether the item is enabled.

A Boolean value that specifies whether the item is enabled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets an object that contains custom data for the current object.

An Object that contains custom data for the current .

Returns the text representation of the item.

The string representing the current item.

Gets or sets the value associated with the current item.

An object representing the value associated with the current item.

Represents a collection of items within a radio group editor.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Adds a new item to the current radio group collection.

The object representing the new item in the collection.

Adds items that represent elements of the specified enumeration to the current collection. Enumeration values are converted to string values using the specified method to represent item descriptions.

A System.Type object that is an enumeration whose elements should be added to the current collection. A method that converts enumeration values to string values. The returned string representation for each enumeration value is assigned to the RadioGroupItem.Description property of the corresponding added to the current collection.

Adds items to the collection that represent elements of the specified enumeration.

A System.Type object that is an enumeration whose elements are to be added to the RadioGroup control.

Adds items that represent elements of the specified enumeration to the current collection.

Adds items that represent elements of the specified enumeration to the current collection. Enumeration values are converted to string values using the specified method to represent item descriptions.

A method that converts enumeration values to string values. The returned string representation for each enumeration value is assigned to the RadioGroupItem.Description property of the corresponding added to the current collection.

Adds an array of items to the collection.

An array of objects representing items for the radio group editor.

Copies properties of the source repository item to the current object.

A object whose settings are assigned to the current object.

Locks the by preventing change notifications from being fired, preventing visual updates until the EndUpdate method is called.

Occurs when changing the item collection.

Unlocks the object after a call to the BeginUpdate method and causes an immediate visual update.

Gets a radio group item by its value.

The value to search. The object with the value specified.

Gets the index of a radio group item by its value.

The value to search. The integer value that specifies the item’s index.

Gets the zero-based index of the specified object in the item collection.

The item to locate in the collection. The zero-based index of the specified item in the current collection, if found; otherwise, -1.

Inserts a new element at the specified position within the collection.

The position at which the item should be inserted. The RadioGroupItemCollection.Item to insert.

Gets or sets an item at the specified position.

The zero-based index of the item to return. The item at the specified position.

Removes the specified item from the collection.

The to remove from the collection.

Enumerates search modes for a lookup edior.

Enables the automatic completion feature. In this mode, when the dropdown is closed, the text in the edit box is automatically completed if it matches a RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember field value of one of dropdown rows. When the dropdown is open, the automatic completion feature is disabled but the editor allows you to perform an incremental search in the same manner as when SearchMode.OnlyInPopup mode is active. The found value is immediately applied to the editor as a user types a query.

Enables the incremental filtering feature. When you type within the edit box, the editor automatically opens the dropdown window and displays only records whose RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember field value starts with the characters typed. Other records are not displayed. If you enter a value that does not match any record, the dropdown window will not contain any rows. The found value is immediately applied to the editor as a user types a query.

The editor unlocks its text box and allows users to type in text. Data source records that match this text are shown in the drop-down panel. The user must highlight the required row to select a new value. Handle the AutoSearch event to fine-tune the search: ```csharp void LookUpEdit_AutoSearchComplete(object sender, LookUpEditAutoSearchCompleteEventArgs e) { LookUpEdit le = sender as LookUpEdit; var popupForm = le.GetPopupEditForm(); if(popupForm != null) { } } ```

The editor fires the AutoSuggest event that you should handle to assign an asynchronous Task. The task must check the user text currently entered into the editor’s text box, and return a list of matching items. This list is then assigned to the editor’s DataSource property.

The incremental search is enabled only when the dropdown window is open. If the window is closed, the user can modify the text in the edit box. However these changes are ignored. When the dropdown is open the incremental search is performed against the column whose index is specified by the RepositoryItemLookUpEdit.AutoSearchColumnIndex property. The header of this column contains the search icon (binoculars). The user can click a specific column header to perform the search against this column.

Determines the behavior of a popup control when a user clicks within its text region.

A popup window is activated when a user double-clicks within the text region of a control. Note: the value is in effect when the RepositoryItemButtonEdit.TextEditStyle property is set to TextEditStyles.Standard as well.

Clicking within the text region does not activate the popup window. A popup window appears only when pressing the RepositoryItemPopupBase.CloseUpKey key or Alt + DownArrow key, or calling the editor’s PopupBaseEdit.ShowPopup method.

A popup window is activated when a user clicks within the text region of a control.

Provides a base class for objects.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Gets or sets the time required to switch to another image.

An integer value that specifies the time, in milliseconds, required to switch to another image.

Gets or sets the time of the fade-in animation effect for scroll buttons.

An integer value that specifies the time of the fade-in animation effect for scroll buttons.

Slides to the first image within the .

Slides to the last image within the .

Shifts to an image that follows the ImageSlider.CurrentImage.

Shifts back to an image that precedes the ImageSlider.CurrentImage.

Gets the period of time that it takes for an object to switch from one image to another.

An Int64 value, indicating how many ticks it takes to switch to another image.

An image collection for an control.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

An ImageSlider that owns the newly created .

Adds an item to the current collection and returns its index.

An Image object to be added to the current . An integer value indicating an index of the item added.

Returns whether the current contains a specified image object.

An Image object to check as to whether it belongs to the current . true if the current contains a specified image object; otherwise, false.

Returns an index of the specified Image object within the current .

An Image object, whose index is to be obtained. An integer value that defines an index of the specified Image object within the current .

Places an image object at the specified position in the current .

An integer value indicating a position within the current to which an image will be placed. An Image object to be added to a specified position in the current .

Provides indexed access to images stored within the .

An integer value, specifying a position of the required Image object within the current An Image object contained within the current at the specified position.

Removes the specified image from the current .

An Image object to be removed from the current .

Gets an that owns the current .

An that owns the current .

Provides data for the RepositoryItemTextEdit.Spin event

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A Boolean value that indicates whether the Up Arrow key or Up Spin button has been pressed, or the mouse wheel has been rotated up. This value is used to initialize the SpinEventArgs.IsSpinUp property.

Gets or sets whether the event has been handled, and no default processing is required.

A Boolean value that specifies that the event has been handled, and no default processing is required.

A Boolean value that specifies whether the Up Arrow key or Up Spin button (in a control) has been pressed, or the mouse wheel has been rotated up.

true if the Up Arrow key or Up Spin button (in a control) has been pressed, or the mouse wheel has been rotated up; otherwise, false.

Represents the method for handling events which take a object as a parameter.

The event source. This identifies the editor which fires the event. A object that contains data for the event.

Enumerates values that specify whether spin buttons in the , , and controls are oriented vertically or horizontally.

Spin buttons are oriented horizontally.

Spin buttons are oriented vertically.

Contains classes that contain style settings for scrollbars and progress bar items.

Contains values that specify the progress styles of items

The same as Range mode.

Highlights the selected item (SelectedItem), the previous items and the connectors between them.

Highlights the selected item (SelectedItem) only.

Contains values that specify the scrollbar’s styles.

The application’s default scrollbar. The scrollbar is visible if the items don’t fit inside the step progress bar. Use the ScrollUIMode property to change the application’s scroll bar style.

The same as Fluent scroll mode.

The Fluent Design-inspired scroll bar.

Hides the scrollbar.

This member is not supported.

The application’s default scrollbar. The scrollbar is always visible. Use the ScrollUIMode property to change the application’s scroll bar style.

Contains values corresponding to strings that can be localized.

The caption of the Apply button displayed within the filter drop-down window within a PivotGrid control. Return value: Apply

Represents the caption of the button used to delete the last digit of the displayed number in the editor. Return value: Back

Represents the caption of the button used to clear the current calculation in the editor. Return value: C

Represents the caption of the button used to clear the displayed number in the editor. Return value: CE

Represents the caption of the button used to clear any number stored in memory of the editor. Return value: MC

Represents the caption of the button used to recall the number stored in memory of the editor. Return value: MR

Represents the caption of the button used to store the display number in memory of the editor. Return value: MS

Represents the caption of the button used to add the displayed number to any number already in memory in the editor. Return value: M+

Represents the caption of the button used to calculate the square root of the displayed number in the editor. Return value: sqrt

The string displayed in the edit box of the editor if an expression cannot be evaluated (division by zero, for instance). Return value: Calculation Error

The notification displayed by the at design time. Return value: Rendering is disabled at design time.

The notification displayed by the if the device is already in use in another application. Return value: Cannot use the device, as it is already in use in another application.

The notification displayed by the if no capture device is found. Return value: No webcam found. Check the webcam connection or the device settings.

The caption of the combo box that selects the active capture device in the Camera Settings form of the . Return value: Active device:

The caption of the track bar that adjusts the brightness in the Camera Settings form of the . Return value: Brightness:

The caption of the Camera Settings form of the . Return value: Camera Settings

The caption of the track bar that adjusts the contrast in the Camera Settings form of the . Return value: Contrast:

The caption of the Reset to defaults button in the Camera Settings form of the . Return value: Reset to defaults

The caption of the check box that specifies the saturation setting in the Camera Settings form of the . Return value: Desaturate:

The caption of the combo box that adjusts the resolution in the Camera Settings form of the . Return value: Resolution:

The caption of the button to discard changes and close the dropdown window of a and editors. Return value: Cancel

The default caption for the error message box. Return value: Error

Returns “The interval between grid lines is too small to be represented in the range control.”

Returns “Max should be greater than or equal to min”.

Specifies the string corresponding to the checked state of the check edit. This string is displayed, for instance, in the filter dropdown of the Grid Control (or other) control. Return value: Checked

Specifies the string corresponding to the indeterminate state of the check edit. This string is displayed, for instance, in the filter dropdown of the Grid Control (or other) control. Return value: Indeterminate

Specifies the string corresponding to the unchecked state of the check edit. This string is displayed, for instance, in the filter dropdown of the Grid Control (or other) control. Return value: Unchecked

Returns “Blue component should be in range 0..255”.

Returns “Brightness”.

Returns “Brightness component should be in range 0..100”.

Returns “Invalid hexadecimal value”.

Returns “Green component should be in range 0..255”.

Returns “Hue”.

Returns “Hue component should be in range 0..359”.

Returns “Luminance”.

Returns “Opacity”.

Returns “Opacity component should be in range 0..255”.

The caption of the Automatic button in the control. Return value: Automatic

Returns “More Colors…”

Returns “Recent Colors”.

Returns “Standard Colors”.

Returns “Theme Colors”.

Returns “Red component should be in range 0..255”.

Returns “Saturation”.

Returns “Saturation component should be in range 0..100”.

Returns “Blue - White - Red”.

Returns “Emerald - Azure - Blue”.

Returns “Green - White - Red”.

Returns “Green - Yellow - Red”.

Returns “Purple - White - Azure”.

Returns “White - Azure”.

Returns “White - Green”.

Returns “White - Red”.

Returns “Yellow - Green”.

Returns “Yellow - Orange - Coral”.

Specifies the caption of the editor’s tab page displaying predefined custom colors. Return value: Custom

Specifies the caption of the editor’s tab page displaying predefined system colors. Return value: System

Specifies the caption of the editor’s tab page displaying predefined web colors. Return value: Web

Returns “Web-Safe”.

Represents the text which identifies the name of an in-place editor within a container control. The string which is identified by this enumeration value is used to initiliaze an editor’s BaseEdit.AccessibleName property when this editor is activated for in-place editing within container controls (eg. XtraGrid, XtraTreeList, etc).

Returns “Blue Data Bar”.

Returns “Blue Data Bar Gradient”.

Returns “Coral Data Bar”.

Returns “Coral Data Bar Gradient”.

Returns “Green Data Bar”.

Returns “Green Data Bar Gradient”.

Returns “Light Blue Data Bar”.

Returns “Light Blue Data Bar Gradient”.

Returns “Mint Data Bar”.

Returns “Mint Data Bar Gradient”.

Returns “Orange Data Bar”.

Returns “Orange Data Bar Gradient”.

Returns “Raspberry Data Bar”.

Returns “Raspberry Data Bar Gradient”.

Returns “Violet Data Bar”.

Returns “Violet Data Bar Gradient”.

Returns “Yellow Data Bar”.

Returns “Yellow Data Bar Gradient”.

Specifies the text string displayed in the and editors when no image is loaded. Return value: Data empty

Returns “Changed”.

Returns “Decreased”.

Returns “Increased”.

The caption of the Clear button used to set the editor’s edit value to the RepositoryItemDateEdit.NullDate property value (null-date). Return value: Clear

The caption of the Today button used to assign the current day to the edit value of the editor. Return value: Today

Identifies the days item in controls in a Touch UI. Return value: days

Returns “Default”

Returns “False”

Returns “True”

Returns “Add”.

Returns “Cancel”.

Returns “Properties”.

Returns “Items({0})”.

Returns “OK”.

Returns “Preview”.

Returns “Remove”.

Returns “Add {0}”.

Returns “Edit Formatting Rule”.

Returns “Field List ({0})”.

Returns “Advanced date and time operators”.

Returns “Avg”.

Returns “Count”.

Returns “Exists”.

Returns “Max”.

Returns “Min”.

Returns “Sum”.

Represents the caption of the AnyOf filter clause. Return value: Is any of

Represents the caption of the BeginsWith filter clause. Return value: Begins with

Represents the caption of the Between filter clause. Return value: Is between

Represents the caption of the BetweenAnd filter clause. Return value: and

Represents the caption of the Contains filter clause. Return value: Contains

Represents the caption of the DoesNotContain filter clause. Return value: Does not contain

Represents the caption of the DoesNotEqual filter clause. Return value: Does not equal

Represents the caption of the EndsWith filter clause. Return value: Ends with

Represents the caption of the Equals filter clause. Return value: Equals

Represents the caption of the Greater filter clause. Return value: Is greater than

Represents the caption of the GreaterOrEqual filter clause. Return value: Is greater than or equal to

Returns “Is in date range”.

Returns “Is in range”.

Returns “from”.

Returns “to”.

Represents the caption of the IsNotNull filter clause. Return value: Is not blank

Returns “Is not blank”.

Represents the caption of the IsNull filter clause. Return value: Is blank

Returns “Is blank”.

Represents the caption of the Less filter clause. Return value: Is less than

Represents the caption of the LessOrEqual filter clause. Return value: Is less than or equal to

Represents the caption of the Like filter clause. Return value: Is like

Represents the caption of the NoneOf filter clause. Return value: Is none of

Represents the caption of the NotBetween filter clause. Return value: Is not between

Returns “Is not in date range”.

Returns “Is not in range”.

Represents the caption of the NotLike filter clause. Return value: Is not like

Specifies an error message that may occur when parsing an expression Return value: The specified expression contains invalid symbols (line {0}, character {1}).

Specifies an error message that may occur when parsing an expression Return value: The specified expression is invalid..

Specifies the textual representation of the Between operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Between

Specifies the textual representation of the binary bitwise AND operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: &

Specifies the textual representation of the binary bitwise OR operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: |

Specifies the textual representation of the binary bitwise XOR operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: ^

Specifies the textual representation of the binary Divide operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: /

Specifies the textual representation of the binary Equal to operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: =

Specifies the textual representation of the binary Greater than operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: >

Specifies the textual representation of the binary Greater than or equal to operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: >=

Specifies the textual representation of the binary Less than operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: <

Specifies the textual representation of the binary Less than or equal to operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: <=

Specifies the textual representation of the binary Like operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Like

Specifies the textual representation of the binary Minus operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: -

Specifies the textual representation of the binary Modulo operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: %

Specifies the textual representation of the binary Multiply operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: *

Specifies the textual representation of the binary Not Equal operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: <>

Specifies the textual representation of the binaryPlus operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: +

Returns “Abs”

Returns “Acos”

Returns “Add days”

Returns “Add hours”

Returns “Add milliseconds”

Returns “Add minutes”

Returns “Add months”

Returns “Add seconds”

Returns “Add ticks”

Returns “Add time span”

Returns “Add years”

Returns “Ascii”

Returns “Asin”

Returns “Atn”

Returns “Atn2”

Returns “Big Mul”

Returns “Ceiling”

Returns “Char”

Returns “Char index”

Returns “Concat”

Returns “Contains”.

Returns “Cos”

Returns “Cosh”

Specifies a string which represents the FunctionOperatorType.Custom function type in filter display text. Return value: Custom

Returns “Custom non deterministic”

Returns “Date diff day”

Returns “Date diff hour”

Returns “Date diff millisecond”

Returns “Date diff minute”

Returns “Date diff month”

Returns “Date diff second”

Returns “Date diff tick”

Returns “Date diff year”

Returns “Create date”.

Returns “Ends with”.

Returns “Exp”

Returns “Floor”

Returns “Get date”

Returns “Get day”

Returns “Get day of week”

Returns “Get day of year”

Returns “Get hour”

Returns “Get millisecond”

Returns “Get minute”

Returns “Get month”

Returns “Get second”

Returns “Get time of day”

Returns “Get year”

Specifies the textual representation of the Iif function used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Iif

Returns “In date range”.

Returns “In range”.

Returns “Insert”

Returns “Is April”.

Returns “Is August”.

Returns “Is December”.

Returns “Is February”.

Returns “Is January”.

Returns “Is July”.

Returns “Is June”.

Returns “Is last month”.

Returns “Is last year”.

Returns “Is March”.

Returns “Is May”.

Returns “Is next month”.

Returns “Is next year”.

Returns “Is November”.

Specifies the textual representation of the Is Null function, which takes one or two arguments, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: IsNull

Returns “Is null or empty”

Returns “Is October”.

Specifies the textual representation of the IsBeyondThisYear function, which takes one argument, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: BeyondThisYear

Specifies the textual representation of the IsEarlierThisMonth function, which takes one argument, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: EarlierThisMonth

Specifies the textual representation of the IsEarlierThisWeek function, which takes one argument, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: EarlierThisWeek

Specifies the textual representation of the IsEarlierThisYear function, which takes one argument, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: EarlierThisYear

Specifies the textual representation of the IsLastWeek function, which takes one argument, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: LastWeek

Specifies the textual representation of the IsLaterThisMonth function, which takes one argument, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: LaterThisMonth

Specifies the textual representation of the IsLaterThisWeek function, which takes one argument, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: LaterThisWeek

Specifies the textual representation of the IsLaterThisYear function, which takes one argument, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: LaterThisYear

Specifies the textual representation of the IsNextWeek function, which takes one argument, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: NextWeek

Specifies the textual representation of the IsPriorThisYear function, which takes one argument, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: PriorThisYear

Specifies the textual representation of the IsToday function, which takes one argument, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Today

Specifies the textual representation of the IsTomorrow function, which takes one argument, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Tomorrow

Specifies the textual representation of the IsYesterday function, which takes one argument, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Yesterday

Returns “Is same day”.

Returns “Is September”.

Return value: Is This Month

Return value: Is This Week

Return value: Is This Year

Returns “Is the year-to-date period”.

Specifies the textual representation of the Len function used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Len

Specifies the textual representation of the DayAfterTomorrow function, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: DayAfterTomorrow

Returns “Last month”.

Specifies the textual representation of the LastWeek function, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: LastWeek

Returns “Last year”.

Specifies the textual representation of the NextMonth function, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: NextMonth

Specifies the textual representation of the NextWeek function, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: NextWeek

Specifies the textual representation of the NextYear function, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: NextYear

Specifies the textual representation of the Now function, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Now

Specifies the textual representation of the ThisMonth function, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: ThisMonth

Specifies the textual representation of the ThisWeek function, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: ThisWeek

Specifies the textual representation of the ThisYear function, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: ThisYear

Specifies the textual representation of the Today function, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Today

Specifies the textual representation of the Tomorrow function, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Tomorrow

Returns “Two months away”.

Specifies the textual representation of the TwoWeeksAway function, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: TwoWeeksAway

Returns “Two years away”.

Returns “One year ago”.

Specifies the textual representation of the Yesterday function, used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Yesterday

Returns “Log”

Returns “Log10”

Specifies the textual representation of the Lower function used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Lower

Returns “Max”

Returns “Min”

Specifies the string which represents the FunctionOperatorType.None function type in filter display text. Return value: None

Returns “Not in date range”.

Return “Not in range”.

Returns “Now”

Returns “Pad left”

Returns “Pad right”

Returns “Power”

Returns “Remove”

Returns “Replace”

Returns “Reverse”

Returns “Rnd”

Returns “Round”

Returns “Sign”

Returns “Sin”

Returns “Sinh”

Returns “Sqr”

Returns “Starts with”.

Specifies the textual representation of the Substring function used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Substring

Returns “Tan”

Returns “Tanh”

Returns “Today”

Returns “To decimal”.

Returns “To double”.

Returns “To float”.

Returns “To int”.

Returns “To long”.

Returns “To str”

Specifies the textual representation of the Trim function used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Trim

Specifies the textual representation of the Upper function used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Upper

Returns “Utc now”

Specifies the textual representation of the Boolean And operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: And

Specifies the textual representation of the Boolean Or operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Or

Specifies the textual representation of the In function used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: In

Specifies the textual representation of the Is not null operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Is Not Null

Specifies the textual representation of the Not like operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Not Like

Specifies the textual representation of the unary bitwise Not operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: ~

Specifies the textual representation of the unary Is null operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Is Null

Specifies the textual representation of the unary Minus operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: -

Specifies the textual representation of the unary Not operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: Not

Specifies the textual representation of the unary Plus operator used when constructing a display string of filter criteria. Return value: +

Returns “Custom functions”.

Specifies the textual representations of date-time functions shown in filter popup windows. Return value: “Show all|Filter by a specific date:|Beyond|||Next week|Today|This week|This month|Earlier|{0:yyyy}, {0:MMMM}”

Specifies the caption of a submenu that contains date-time constants used to filter data Return value: DateTime constants

Specifies the caption of a submenu that contains date-time operators used to filter data Return value: DateTime operators

Returns “Text”

Returns “Visual”

Return value: enter a value

Returns “Field name”.

Return value: <enter a parameter>

Return value: empty

Returns “Edit Expression…”

Returns “Functions”

Return value: And

Return value: Not And

Return value: Not Or

Return value: Or

Return value: <Add a new parameter …>

Return value: Clear All

Return value: Add Condition

Returns “Add Custom Expression”.

Return value: Add Group

Return value: Remove Row

Returns “Enter a value…”.

Returns “Enter a parameter name…”.

The text displayed within a tooltip invoked when hovering over the Incremental Search filter popup toolbar button. Return value: Incremental Search

The text displayed within a tooltip invoked when hovering over the Invert Filter filter popup toolbar button. Return value: Invert Filter

The text displayed within a tooltip invoked when hovering over the Multi-Selection filter popup toolbar button. Return value: Multi-Selection

The text displayed within a tooltip invoked when hovering over the Radio Mode filter popup toolbar button. Return value: Radio Mode

The text displayed within a tooltip invoked when hovering over the Show New Field Values filter popup toolbar button. Return value: Show New Field Values

The text displayed within a tooltip invoked when hovering over the Show Only Available Items filter popup toolbar button. Return value: Show Only Available Items

Return value: (Show All)

Return value: Adds a new item to the list.

Return value: (Use the Insert or Add button on the keyboard)

Return value: (Use the Delete or Subtract button on the keyboard)

Return value: Actions.

Return value: Adds a new condition to this group.

Return value: Removes this condition.

Return value: Compare to a value / other field’s value.

Returns “Bold Text”.

Returns “Green Bold Text”.

Returns “Green Fill”.

Returns “Green Fill with Green Text”.

Returns “Green Text”.

Returns “Italic Text”.

Returns “Red Bold Text”.

Returns “Red Fill”.

Returns “Red Fill with Red Text”.

Returns “Red Text”.

Returns “Strikeout Text”.

Returns “Yellow Fill with Yellow Text”.

Returns “Format cells that are ABOVE AVERAGE”.

Returns “Apply formatting to an entire row”.

Returns “Apply formatting to an entire record”.

Returns “Format cells that are BELOW AVERAGE”.

Returns “Format cells that are BETWEEN”.

Returns “Format cells that rank in the BOTTOM”.

Returns “Format cells that match the following condition”.

Returns “Format cell whose values”.

Returns “Format cells that contain a date matching these conditions”.

Returns “Format cells that are DUPLICATE VALUES”.

Returns “Format cells that are EQUAL TO”.

Returns “<enter an expression>”.

Returns “for this column with”.

Returns “for this row with”.

Returns “Format cells that are GREATER THAN”.

Returns “Format cells that are LESS THAN”.

Returns “Above Average”.

Returns “Below Average”.

Returns “Between”.

Returns “Bottom 10 Items”.

Returns “Bottom 10 %”.

Returns “Clear Rules from All Columns”.

Returns “Clear Rules from This Column”.

Returns “Clear Rules”.

Returns “Apply a color gradient to a range of\r\ncells in this column. The color indicates\r\nwhere each cell falls within that range.”

Returns “Color Scales”.

Returns “Custom Condition”.

Returns “Add a colored data bar to represent\r\nthe value in a cell. The higher the\r\nvalue, the longer the bar.”

Returns “Data Bars”.

Returns “Data Update Rules”.

Returns “A Date Occurring”.

Returns “Duplicate Values”.

Returns “Equal To”.

Returns “Gradient Fill”.

Returns “Greater Than”.

Returns “Highlight Cell Rules”.

Returns “Use this icon set to classify column\r\nvalues into the following ranges:”.

Returns “Icon Sets”.

Returns “Less Than”.

Returns “Manage Rules…”

Returns “Solid Fill”.

Returns “Text that Contains”.

Returns “Top 10 Items”.

Returns “Top 10 %”.

Returns “Top/Bottom Rules”.

Returns “Unique Values”.

Returns “Unique/Duplicate Rules”.

Returns “No Cell Icon”.

Returns “Format cells that contain the text”.

Returns “Format cells that rank in the TOP”.

Returns “Format cells that are UNIQUE VALUES”.

Returns “with”.

Identifies the hours item in and controls in a Touch UI. Return value: hours

Returns “Directional”.

Returns “Indicators”.

Returns “Positive/Negative”.

Returns “Ratings”.

Returns “Shapes”.

Returns “Symbols”.

Returns “3 Arrows (Colored)”.

Returns “3 Arrows (Gray)”.

Returns “4 Arrows (Colored)”.

Returns “4 Arrows (Gray)”.

Returns “5 Arrows (Colored)”.

Returns “5 Arrows (Gray)”.

Returns “5 Boxes”.

Returns “3 Flags”.

Returns “Arrows (Colored)”.

Returns “Arrows (Gray)”.

Returns “Triangles”.

Returns “5 Quarters”.

Returns “4 Ratings”.

Returns “5 Ratings”.

Returns “Red To Black”.

Returns “3 Signs”.

Returns “3 Stars”.

Returns “3 Symbols (Circled)”.

Returns “3 Symbols (Uncircled)”.

Returns “3 Traffic Lights (Rimmed)”.

Returns “3 Traffic Lights (Unrimmed)”.

Returns “4 Traffic Lights”.

Returns “3 Triangles”.

Returns “Image Editor”.

Specifies the text string displayed within the editor’s edit region when no image is loaded if the RepositoryItemBlobBaseEdit.ShowIcon property is set to false (the identification icon is not displayed). Return value: (Empty)

Specifies the text string displayed within the editor’s edit region when the image is loaded if the RepositoryItemBlobBaseEdit.ShowIcon property is set to false (the identification icon is not displayed). Return value: (Picture)

Return value: The number must be between 1 and 32767.

Represents the default error description displayed in a message box/tooltip if the editor’s validation has failed. Return value: Invalid Value

Represents the initial value of the LookUpColumnInfo.FieldName property when the object is created without parameters. Return value: Name

Specifies the text string displayed in the edit box of the when the edit value is null (Nothing in Visual Basic).

Reserved for future use.

Returns “Above Average”.

Returns “(All)”.

Returns “Above”.

Returns “Below”.

Returns “Equal Or Above”.

Returns “Equal Or Below”.

Returns “Format values that are:”.

Returns “the average of column values”.

Returns “the average of row values”.

Returns “Below Average”.

Returns “Conditional Formatting Rules Manager”.

Returns “Between”.

Returns “Equal To”.

Returns “Greater Than”.

Returns “Greater Than Or Equal To”.

Returns “Less Than”.

Returns “Less Than Or Equal To”.

Returns “Not Between”.

Returns “Not Equal To”.

Returns “Graded Color Scale”.

Returns “2-Color Scale”.

Returns “3-Color Scale”.

Returns “Midpoint”.

Returns “Automatic”.

Returns “Color:”

Returns “Maximum”.

Returns “Minimum”.

Returns “Number”.

Returns “Percent”.

Returns “Preview:”

Returns “Type:”

Returns “Value:”

Returns “Format Style:”

Returns “Data Bar”.

Returns “Axis Color:”

Returns “Bar Appearance:”

Returns “Bar Direction:”

Returns “Border:”

Returns “Context”.

Returns “Draw Axis”.

Returns “Fill:”

Returns “Gradient Fill”.

Returns “Left-to-Right”.

Returns “No Border”.

Returns “Right-to-Left”.

Returns “Solid Border”.

Returns “Solid Fill”.

Returns “Use Negative Bar”.

Returns “Data Update”.

Returns “Following the month in 2 months time”.

Returns “Following this year”.

Returns “Prior to the month 6 months ago”.

Returns “This month, prior to previous week”.

Returns “This week, prior to yesterday”.

Returns “This year, prior to this month”.

Returns “Last Week”.

Returns “This month, beyond next week”.

Returns “This week, beyond tomorrow”.

Returns “This year, beyond this month”.

Returns “Next Month”.

Returns “During the month in 2 months time”.

Returns “Last Month”.

Returns “During the month 2 months ago”.

Returns “During the month 3 months ago”.

Returns “During the month 4 months ago”.

Returns “During the month 5 months ago”.

Returns “During the month 6 months ago”.

Returns “Next Week”.

Returns “Prior to this year”.

Returns “This Month”.

Returns “This Week”.

Returns “Today”.

Returns “Tomorrow”.

Returns “Yesterday”.

Returns “Delete Rule”.

Returns “Down”.

Returns “Edit Rule…”

Returns “Equal to or Above Average”.

Returns “Equal to or Below Average”.

Returns “Background Color:”.

Returns “Bold”.

Returns “Format Cells”.

Returns “Clear”.

Returns “Effects:”.

Returns “Fill”.

Returns “Font”.

Returns “Font color”.

Returns “Font Size Delta:”.

Returns “Font style”.

Returns “Italic”.

Returns “None”.

Returns “Predefined Appearance”.

Returns “Regular”.

Returns “Strikethrough”.

Returns “Underline”.

Returns “Formula”.

Returns “Format values where this formula is true:”

Returns “Apply to the record”.

Returns “Apply to the row”.

Returns “Column”.

Returns “Column Apply To”.

Returns “Format”.

Returns “Row”.

Returns “Row Apply To”.

Returns “Rule”.

Returns “Stop If True”.

Returns “Icon Set”.

Returns “Display each icon according to these rules:”

Returns “Reverse Icon Order”.

Returns “value is”.

Returns “When”.

Returns “ms”.

Returns “New Rule…”

Returns “No Format Set”.

Returns “Bottom”.

Returns “Format values that rank in the:”

Returns “% of column values”.

Returns “% of row values”.

Returns “Top”.

Returns “Show formatting rules for:”.

Returns “Format…”

Returns “Beginning With”.

Returns “Containing”.

Returns “Ending With”.

Returns “Not Containing”.

Returns “Blanks”.

Returns “Cell Value”.

Returns “Dates Occurring”.

Returns “Errors”.

Returns “Format only cells with:”

Returns “No Blanks”.

Returns “No Errors”.

Returns “Specific Text”.

Returns “Duplicate”.

Returns “Format all:”

Returns “Unique”.

Returns “column values”.

Returns “row values”.

Returns “Up”.

Returns “values for”.

Specifies the exception message raised when the editor’s entered value specified by the mask is incomplete. Return value: The entered value is incomplete. Do you want to correct it?\r\n\r\nYes - return to the editor and correct the value.\r\nNo - leave the value as is.\r\nCancel - reset to the previous value.\r\n

Returns “millisecs”.

Identifies the minutes item in and controls in a Touch UI . Return value: mins

Specifies the default hint of the ‘s button used to insert a new blank record after the last one in the data source. Return value: Append

Specifies the default hint of the ‘s button used to cancel edits to the current record. Return value: Cancel Edit

Returns “Edit”.

Specifies the default hint of the ‘s button used to post edited record value to the associated data source. Return value: End Edit

Specifies the default hint of the ‘s button used to set the current record to the first record in the dataset. Return value: First

Specifies the default hint of the ‘s button used to set the current record to the last record in the data source. Return value: Last

Specifies the default hint of the ‘s button used to set the current record to the next record in the data source. Return value: Last

Specifies the default hint of the ‘s button used to change the current record position in the data source by the DataNavigatorButtons.PageRecordCount property value upwards. Return value: Next Page

Specifies the default hint of the ‘s button used to the current record to the previous one in the data source. Return value: Previous

Specifies the default hint of the ‘s button used to change the current record position in the data source by the DataNavigatorButtons.PageRecordCount property value backwards. Return value: Previous Page

Specifies the default hint of the ‘s button used to delete the current record. Return value: Delete

Specifies the format of the text string which can be displayed in the to display the current record and the total number of records in the associated data source. Return value: Record {0} of {1}

Returns “Edit the Rule Description:”

Returns “Format all cells based on their values”.

Returns “Format only cells that contain”.

Returns “Format only changing values”.

Returns “Format only top or bottom ranked values”.

Returns “Format only unique or duplicate values”.

Returns “Format only values that are above or below average”.

Returns “Select a Rule Type:”

Returns “Use a formula to determine which cells to format”.

Returns “New Formatting Rule”.

Specifies the default hint for the ‘s custom button. Return value: “” (empty string)

Returns “(None)”.

Reserved for future use. Return value: Not valid array length.

Returns “Navigation Options”.

The caption of the Ok button displayed within the dropdown window of a and editors. Return value: Ok

An error displayed when an image cannot be copied to the Clipboard by the control. Return value: Could not copy image

Applied to image editors ( and are customized to display images). The string represents the caption of the menu item to copy the contents of an editor. Return value: Copy

Applied to image editors ( and are customized to display images). The string represents the caption of the menu item to copy and delete the contents of an editor. Return value: Cut

Applied to image editors ( and customized to display images).The string represents the caption of the menu item to delete the contents of an editor. Return value: Delete

Returns “Edit”.

Returns “Fit Image”.

Returns “Full Size”.

Applied to image editors ( and are customized to display images).The string represents the caption of the menu item to load an image from an external file. Return value: Load

Applied to image editors ( and are customized to display images).The string represents the caption of the menu item to replace the contents of an editor with an image from the Clipboard. Return value: Paste

Applied to image editors ( and are customized to display images). The string represents the caption of the menu item to save an editor’s image to an external file. Return value: Save

Returns “Zoom”.

Returns “Zoom In”.

Returns “Zoom Out”.

Returns “Zoom to:”.

Returns “{0}%”.

Specifies the error message displayed when specifying an invalid image for a or editors. Return value: Wrong picture format

The caption of the error message displayed when specifying an invalid image for a or . This string is followed by detail information on the error. Return value: Open error

The title of the Open File dialog used to load the image into the or editor.. Return value: Open

Specifies the file masks (filters) for the Save As dialog used to save the image displayed in a or editor to an external file. Return value: Bitmap Files (*.bmp)|*.bmp|Graphics Interchange Format (*.gif)|*.gif|JPEG File Interchange Format (*.jpg)|*.jpg|Portable Network Graphics Format (*.png)|*.png|Scalable Vector Graphics Format (*.svg)|*.svg

The title of the Save File dialog used to save the image displayed in the or editor to an external file. Return value: Save As

Return value: Busy

Return value: Door Open

Return value: Driver Update Needed

Return value: Error

Return value: Initializing

Return value: IO Active

Return value: ManualFeed

Return value: Not Available

Return value: No Toner

Return value: Offline

Return value: Out Of Memory

Return value: Output Bin Full

Return value: Page Punt

The caption of print preview windows. Return value: Preview:

Return value: PaperJam

Return value: PaperOut

Return value: PaperProblem

Return value: Paused

Return value: Pending Deletion

Return value: Power Save

Return value: Printing

Return value: Processing

Return value: Ready

Return value: Server Offline

Return value: Server Unknown

Return value: Toner Low

Return value: User Intervention

This field is obsolete (use DevExpress.XtraPrinting.Localization).

Return value: Warming Up

Returns “Cancel”.

Returns “Cancel pending”.

Returns “Copying”.

Returns “Creating document”.

Returns “Exporting”.

Returns “Loading data”.

The ‘s default caption. Return value: Please Wait

The ‘s default description. Return value: Loading …

Returns “Pasting”.

Returns “Printing”.

Returns “XML files (.xml)|.xml|All files|.“.

Returns “Restore Layout”.

Returns “XML files (.xml)|.xml”.

Returns “Save Layout”.

Specifies the text displayed by the when it is not focused and has no search request. Return value: Enter text to search…

Returns “Any”.

Returns “Search for a column…”

Returns “Search for a field…”

Identifies the seconds item in and controls in a Touch UI. Return value: secs

Returns “Clear search”.

Returns “Close”.

Returns “Toggle to switch between find and replace modes”.

Returns “Find…”.

Returns “Find Next”.

Returns “Find Previous”.

Returns “Replace…”.

Returns “Replace All”.

Returns “Replace”.

Returns “Show dropdown”.

Specifies the default hint for the tab control’s Close button. Return value: Close

Returns “Scroll Down”.

Specifies the default hint for the tab control’s Next button which is used to scroll forwards through the tab pages. Return value: Next

Returns “Pin”.

Specifies the default hint for the tab control’s Previous button which is used to scroll backwards through the tab pages. Return value: Previous

Returns “Unpin”.

Returns “Scroll Up”.

Returns “Show Window List”.

The caption of the Capture button in the dialog window that takes a picture from a webcam. Return value: Capture

The caption of the Save button in the dialog window that saves a picture taken from a webcam. Return value: Save

The caption of the dialog window that takes a picture from a webcam. Return value: Take Picture

The caption of the Try Again button in the dialog window that takes a picture from a webcam. Return value: Try Again

Applied to image editors ( and are customized to display images). The string represents the caption of the menu item that takes an image from a webcam. Return value: Take Picture from Camera

Represents the caption of the menu item used to copy the selected contents of an editor. Return value: Copy

Represents the caption of the menu item used to cut the selected contents of an editor. Return value: Cut

Represents the caption of the menu item used to delete the selected contents of an editor. Return value: Delete

Represents the caption of the menu item used to replace the contents of an editor with the text held in the Clipboard. Return value: Paste

Represents the caption of the menu item used to select the editor’s content. Return value: Select All

Represents the caption of the menu item used to undo the last edit operation in the text box. Return value: Undo

Returns “day”.

Returns “days”.

Returns “d”.

Returns “fractional”.

Returns “f”.

Returns “hour”.

Returns “hours”.

Returns “h”.

Returns “millisecond”.

Returns “milliseconds”.

Returns “ms”.

Returns “minute”.

Returns “minutes”.

Returns “m”.

Returns “second”.

Returns “seconds”.

Returns “s”.

The error message displayed when trying to assign a translucent background color to a control that doesn’t support transparency. Return value: This control does not support transparent background colors

Return value: Unknown picture format

Returns “Version”.

Represents the caption of the Abort button in the XtraMessageBox. Return value: Abort

Represents the caption of the Cancel button in the XtraMessageBox. Return value: Cancel

Returns “Do not show this message again”.

Represents the caption of the Ignore button in the XtraMessageBox. Return value: Ignore

Represents the caption of the No button in the XtraMessageBox. Return value: No

Represents the caption of the Ok button in the XtraMessageBox. Return value: Ok

Represents the caption of the Retry button in the XtraMessageBox. Return value: Retry

Represents the caption of the Yes button in the XtraMessageBox. Return value: Yes

Contains values that specify how the text case of strings is changed.

The text case of a string is modified by the control automatically, based on the control’s display mode and other settings.

All alphabetic characters are in lowercase.

The first letter of the first word is capitalized.

If a text string is obtained from the system, it is displayed as is, without text case modifications.

All alphabetic characters are in uppercase.

Specifies how a value is displayed and edited in the button editor’s edit box.

A button editor is displayed in its normal way. However, editing and selecting text is not allowed. If you want to enable a user to select text but disable text modifications, you can set the text editing style to Standard and set the RepositoryItem.ReadOnly property to true.

The text editing region is not visible and the editor displays only buttons contained in the current button editor. If no buttons can be displayed (for instance because of setting the EditorButton.Visible property to False), the editor displays an empty region in this case.

A button editor works in its normal way. Editing and selecting text is allowed.

Contains values specifying the formats of time editor values.

Hours are displayed within the time editor.

Hours and minutes are displayed within the time editor.

Hours, minutes and seconds are displayed within the time editor.

Lists rules used to determine the first week of the year.

The rule specified by the System.Globalization.DateTimeFormatInfo.CalendarWeekRule property which defines a calendar week for a specific culture.

Indicates that the first week of the year starts on the first day of the year and ends before the following designated first day of the week.

Indicates that the first week of the year is the first week with four or more days before the designated first day of the week.

Indicates that the first week of the year begins on the first occurrence of the designated first day of the week on or after the first day of the year.

Contains classes that allow custom editors to be embedded in container controls.

Allows you to embed a , or any custom control into cells of a container control (, , etc.).

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Copies settings from the repository item specified as a parameter.

An object whose settings are to be copied to the current object.

Gets or sets the editor’s border style.

A value specifying the editor’s border style.

Gets or sets the control displayed by the current object.

The control displayed by the current object.

Creates an editor whose type corresponds to the repository item’s type.

A descendant representing the editor whose type corresponds to this repository item’s type.

Gets the class name of the edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

A System.String object identifying the class name of the corresponding editor.

Returns the text representation of the specified edit value.

The value whose text representation is to be returned. The text representation of the specified edit value.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.PrintCellHelperInfo object that provides information on the editor’s state and appearance settings that will be used when the editor is printed. An object that contains information on how to print the editor.

Gets the editor that owns the repository item.

The editor that owns the current repository item.

Updates the control that uses the current object.

Adds registration information on the and a corresponding editor to the default repository.

Contains data for the BaseListBoxControl.CustomizeItem event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

The owner ListBox control. The value to initialize the CustomizeTemplatedItemEventArgs.Index property. The object to initialize the CustomizeTemplatedItemEventArgs.TemplatedItem property.

Gets the current item’s underlying data object. For a bound ListBoxControl, the DataItem property returns the corresponding record in the data source.

The item’s data object.

Returns the HtmlElement (tag) associated with the current event.

The HtmlElement (tag) associated with the current event.

Gets the current item’s visual position. For a bound ListBoxControl, this property’s value matches the index of a corresponding record in the data source.

The item’s zero-based visual position.

Gets the template used to render the current item. Customize this template when handling the BaseListBoxControl.CustomizeItem event.

The template used to render the current item.

Gets the item’s value.

The item’s value.

The control that enables navigation through records in a data source and provides common record operations.

Creates a new object.

Provides access to the navigator’s built-in and custom buttons.

A object which is the navigator’s buttons.

Gets or sets the data source member whose data is manipulated by the DataNavigator control.

A string value representing the data source member.

Gets or sets a data source for the DataNavigator control.

A data source object whose data is managed by the data navigator.

Gets or sets the position which the data navigator points to in the underlying data source.

A zero-based integer which specifies a position in the underlying data source.

Occurs after a position in the underlying data source has been changed.

The DataNavigator‘s button collection.

Creates a new object.

A object representing buttons displayed within the DataNavigator control. This value is assigned to the DataNavigator.Buttons property.

Holds settings for buttons displayed in a control.

Creates a new object.

An object implementing the INavigatorOwner interface to which the object belongs. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonsBase.Owner property.

The button used to insert a new record.

The navigator’s Append button.

The button used to cancel modifications to the current record.

The navigator’s Cancel Edit button.

Gets the object which manages a list of binding objects.

A object used to keep data-bound controls synchronized with each other.

This method supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be called in your code.

The button used to post modifications to the data source.

The navigator’s End Edit button.

The button that moves the current position to the first record in the data source.

The navigator’s First button.

The button that moves the current position to the last record in the data source.

The navigator’s Last button.

The button that moves the current position to the next record.

The navigator’s Next button.

The button that moves the current position to the next page.

The navigator’s Next Page button.

Gets or sets the number of records by which the current position moves when a user presses the Previous Page or Next Page button.

The number of records in a page.

The button that moves the current position to the previous record.

The navigator’s Previous button.

The button that moves the current position to the previous page.

The navigator’s Previous Page button.

The button used to delete the current record.

The navigator’s Remove button.

The base class for controls that allow users to edit date-time values.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Gets or sets a value which specifies whether the Today button is visible.

true to show the Today button; otherwise, false.

The editor with a dropdown calendar used to display and edit date/time values.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Occurs when drawing day cells in the dropdown calendar.

Occurs after the value of the DateEdit.DateOnly property is changed.

Gets or sets the value in the control.

The selected value.

Gets or sets the date/time value in the control.

A object representing selected date/time value.

Occurs after the value of the DateEdit.DateTime property has been changed.

Allows specific dates or date ranges to be disabled in the editor’s drop-down to prevent them from being selected by an end-user.

Provides the ability to custom paint day cells in the dropdown calendar.

Gets the class name of the current editor.

The string identifying the class name of the current editor.

Gets or sets the edit value (current date).

The current date.

Gets settings specific to the date editor.

The object containing settings specific to the date editor.

A collection of selected date ranges.

Fires when the selection changes.

Gets or sets whether changing the DateEdit.DateTime/DateEdit.EditValue property updates the current selection.

true, if the current selection is automatically set to the edit date (DateEdit.DateTime/DateEdit.EditValue) once the edit date is changed; otherwise false.

Gets or sets the text displayed within the edit box.

The text displayed in the edit box.

Gets or sets whether the same range of days (as in the current month) is automatically selected in another month when you navigate from the current month to that month. The DateEdit.SyncSelectionWithEditValue property must be set to false to support this feature.

true if the same range of days is automatically selected in another month when you navigate from the current month to that month; otherwise, false.

The ‘s client that renders a lightweight chart with a date-time horizontal axis.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Provides access to the grid options of the date-time chart range control client.

A object containing grid options for the date-time chart client of the range control.

Provides access to the range settings of the date-time chart range control client.

A object that contains settings to customize the range of the date-time chart range control client.

Contains specific settings which define the representation of grid lines and labels in the date-time chart range control client.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets the date-time measure unit to which the chart’s gridlines and labels should be aligned.

A enumeration value that represents the measurement unit to which the chart’s gridlines and labels should be aligned.

Specifies the measurement unit to which selection thumbs of the range control are snapped.

A enumeration value representing the selection thumbs alignment interval.

Contains the common settings that define the range displayed by a date-time chart client of the range control.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets the end bound of a date-time chart client range.

A value that is the range end bound.

Gets or sets the start bound of a date-time chart client range.

A value that is the range start bound.

Enumerates modes that specify whether to show specific date-time functions in the filter control menus.

Shows the advanced date-time functions such as Is Same Day, Is Yesterday.

Advanced if Version Compatibility is set to version 19.1 or newer; otherwise, Standard.

Do not show date-time functions.

Shows the standard date-time functions, such as Is Later This Year, Is Next Week.

The editor that manages values of the System.DateTimeOffset type.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Closes the editor’s drop-down menu and discards all changes a user has made in this menu. To accept changes, call the DateTimeOffsetEdit.ClosePopup() method instead. See the PopupBaseEdit.CancelPopup() method for more information.

Occurs when the editor drop-down menu is closed. Allows you to identify what caused the menu to close.

Accepts a user’s edits in the editor drop-down menu and closes this menu. To close the menu without accepting changes, call the DateTimeOffsetEdit.CancelPopup() method instead. See the PopupBaseEdit.ClosePopup() method for more information.

Fires when the editor drop-down menu is closing and allows you to decide whether changes made by a user should be accepted. See the PopupBaseEdit.CloseUp event for an example.

Gets or sets the current editor value.

The current editor value.

Returns the “DateTimeOffsetEdit” string.

The editor class name.

Gets or sets the current editor value. Use this property to bind an editor to a data source field. To manually set the editor value in code, use the DateTimeOffsetEdit.DateTimeOffset property instead.

The current editor value.

Allows you to access the editor drop-down menu. Returns nothing if this menu has not yet been opened. See the PopupBaseEdit.GetPopupEditForm() method for more information.

The editor drop-down menu.

Occurs after the editor shows its drop-down menu. Do not invoke any message boxes within this event handler.

Provides access to a object that stores core editor settings.

Stores core editor settings.

Fires when the editor drop-down menu is about to close. Allows you to set the Cancel property to true to keep this menu open. Does not occur when a user clicks outside the editor or switches to another application. See the RepositoryItemPopupBase.QueryCloseUp event for more details.

Fires when the editor is about to open its drop-down menu. Allows you to set the Cancel property to true to keep this menu closed. See the RepositoryItemPopupBase.QueryPopUp event for more information.

This is an internal method that should not be called directly in code.

Attempts to open the editor drop-down menu. The editor first fires the DateTimeOffsetEdit.QueryPopUp event. If the QueryPopUp event was not canceled, the DateTimeOffsetEdit.Popup event occurs and the editor opens its drop-down menu.

Gets the editor’s display text. Do not modify this property, use the DateTimeOffsetEdit.DateTimeOffset property instead.

The editor’s display text.

A ‘s client that supports date-time range selection.

Initializes a new DateTimeRangeControlClient class instance.

Provides access to a drawing surface. Allows you to draw a label manually.

Allows you to provide a custom label text.

Returns the culture settings for month names, day abbreviations, and the first day of the week.

An object that specifies the culture settings for month names, day abbreviations, and the first day of the week.

Gets or sets culture-specific information about the date-time format of labels.

An object that contains culture-specific information about the format of date and time values.

Gets or sets a string expression that specifies the date-time format of labels.

A string expression that specifies the date-time format of labels.

Gets or sets the maximum available value.

A structure that specifies the maximum available value.

Gets or sets the minimum available value.

A structure that specifies the minimum available value.

Provides access to a collection of date-time rulers displayed in the client.

An object that contains date-time rulers.

Contains values that specify whether and how a dropdown arrow is displayed within the control.

Identical to the DropDownArrowStyle.SplitButton option.

The dropdown arrow is hidden. A dropdown control is invoked on clicking the button unless the DropDownButton.ActAsDropDown is set to false.

The dropdown arrow is merged into the button. A dropdown control is invoked on clicking the button unless the DropDownButton.ActAsDropDown is set to false.

The dropdown arrow is displayed as a separate button. A dropdown control is invoked on clicking the dropdown arrow button unless the DropDownButton.ActAsDropDown is set to false.

The button that can be associated with a popup control or a context menu. It is possible to prevent the button from receiving focus on a click.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Gets or sets whether a click on the button opens the dropdown control. This option is in effect when the DropDownButton.ShowArrowButton property is set to false.

true if a click on the button opens the dropdown control; otherwise, false.

Provides access to the appearance settings used to paint the drop-down button.

An object that specifies the appearance settings used to paint the drop-down button.

Provides access to the appearance settings applied to the drop-down button when the current control is disabled.

An object that specifies the appearance settings applied to the drop-down button when the current control is disabled.

Provides access to the appearance settings applied to the drop-down button when it is hovered over with the mouse pointer.

An object that specifies the appearance settings applied to the drop-down button when it is hovered over with the mouse pointer.

Provides access to the appearance settings applied to the drop-down button when it is clicked.

An object that specifies the appearance settings applied to the drop-down button when it is clicked.

Allows you to respond to clicking the drop-down arrow.

This member is not supported by the class.

null.

Gets or sets whether and how a dropdown arrow is displayed within the .

A enumeration value.

Gets or sets the interior spacing of the separate button displaying the drop-down arrow. This property is in effect if DropDownButton.DropDownArrowStyle is set to SplitButton.

A representing the interior spacing of the separate button displaying the drop-down arrow.

Gets or sets the popup control for the button.

A popup control object.

Hides the opened popup control.

Gets or sets whether the drop-down arrow’s region contains the point with the specified coordinates.

A structure representing the point to test. true if the drop-down arrow’s region contains the point with the specified coordinates; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the associated popup control is currently open.

true if the popup control is open; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets an object that manages the display of the associated popup control .

An object implementing the IDXMenuManager interface.

Gets or sets whether the drop-down arrow is displayed as a part of the control.

true if the drop-down arrow is visible; otherwise,false.

Opens the associated popup control.

Fires when an attempt is made to open the associated popup control.

Contains classes that support the error handling mechanism.

Provides error management for DevExpress bound and unbound editors.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified container.

An object which implements the interface.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified control container.

A parent of controls whose errors are monitored by the . This value is used to initialize the DXErrorProvider.ContainerControl property.

Sets the data source to be monitored for errors.

A data set to be monitored for errors. This value is used to initialize the DXErrorProvider.DataSource property. The name of the specified data set member. This value is used to initialize the DXErrorProvider.DataMember property.

Gets a value indicating whether a control can be extended.

The control to be extended. true if the control can be extended; otherwise, false.

Visually clears all error icons that have been displayed by the current .

Gets or sets a control which owns the controls monitored for errors.

The that contains the controls monitored for errors by the .

Gets or sets a data source member monitored for errors.

A string value representing the data source member.

Gets or sets the data source to be monitored for errors.

An object which represents the data source.

Gets a list of the controls with which errors are associated.

A list of the controls with which errors are associated.

Gets a list of the controls with which errors of the specified type are associated.

An value that specifies the type of error that editors to be returned must contain. A list of the controls with which errors are associated.

Gets an error text associated with the specified control.

A control whose error text is returned. A value that represents the error text associated with the specified control.

Allows you to provide custom error icons for editors.

This method supports the internal infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets the type of error associated with the specified control.

The control whose error type should be obtained. A value that specifies the error type.

Returns the alignment of the error icon associated with the specified control.

A control whose error icon alignment is returned. A value that specifies the alignment of the control’s error icon.

Creates an image from the specified manifest resource.

The case-sensitive name of the manifest resource being requested. An SvgBitmap object specifying the required image.

Gets whether there is any error that is set via the ‘s methods or on the data source level.

true if there is any error; otherwise, false.

Returns whether there is any error of the specified type.

An value that represents the error type to be located. true if there is an error of the specified type; otherwise, false.

Updates error information for the specified editor.

The editor whose error information is to be updated.

Updates error information for all editors managed by the .

Sets an error icon next to a control. When a user hovers over this icon, a tooltip with an error message appears on-screen.

A control in which an error occurred. The error text. An value that represents the error type, and the type of error icon that will be displayed.

Sets the default error icon next to a control. When a user hovers over this icon, a tooltip with an error message appears on-screen.

A control where an error occurred. The error text.

Sets the type of error associated with the specified control.

The control whose error type is specified. An value that specifies the error type.

Specifies the alignment of an error icon for a control.

The control for which the error icon alignment is specified. A value that specifies the alignment of the control’s error icon.

Gets or sets the ISite for the object.

The ISite for the object.

Updates the binding and display error information, to reflect errors that could have been set on the data store level.

Provides data validation management for DevExpress bound and unbound editors.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified container control.

An object that implements the interface, and owns the created object.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified container control.

A object that owns the created object.

Indicates whether a control can be extended.

The control to be extended. true if the control can be extended; otherwise, false.

Retrieves the alignment of an error icon for the specified control.

A target control. An value.

Gets the collection of the controls whose values are invalid.

The collection of the controls whose values are invalid.

Returns a validation rule associated with the specified descendant.

A descendant. A DevExpress.XtraEditors.DXErrorProvider.ValidationRuleBase descendant that represents the validation rule associated with the editor. null (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no validation rule is associated with the specified editor.

Gets the collection of the controls whose values are invalid.

The collection of the controls whose values are invalid.

Removes an error associated with the specified control.

A control whose error must be removed.

Sets the alignment of an error icon for the specified control.

A target control. An value that specifies the alignment to be set for the control.

Associates a validation rule with the specified descendant.

A descendant that represents the editor. A DevExpress.XtraEditors.DXErrorProvider.ValidationRuleBase descendant that represents the validation rule.

Validates all the editors associated with the .

true if all the editors are successfully validated; false if one or more editors are not validated.

Validates the specified editor associated with the .

A object or descendant that represents the editor to be validated. true if the editor is successfully validated; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether hidden editors are validated when calling the DXValidationProvider.Validate method.

true if validation of hidden editors is enabled; otherwise, false

Allows you to perform actions when a control’s validation fails.

Gets or sets the validation mode.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.DXErrorProvider.ValidationMode enumeration value that specifies the validation mode.

Occurs after the validation was successfully passed and allows you to perform certain post-validation actions.

Allows users to build filter criteria and apply them to controls and data sources.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets the currently active editor used to edit operand value(s).

A descendant that represents the currently active editor. null (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no operand value is currently being edited.

Fires when the active editor in the FilterControl is being validated.

Gets or sets whether filters can be created against properties that are List objects.

A value that specifies if filters can be created against properties that are List objects.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets whether the Filter Control allows you to display, create, and edit custom expressions—expressions that cannot be converted to Filter Control nodes.

A value that specifies whether the Filter Control allows you to display, create, and edit custom expressions.

Gets or sets the color used to paint text in the FilterControl when it is disabled.

The color used to paint text in the disabled FilterControl.

Gets or sets the color of empty values.

A structure that specifies the color of empty values.

Gets or sets the color of field names.

A structure that specifies the color of field names.

Gets or sets the color of group operators.

A structure that specifies the color of group operators.

Gets or sets the color of logical operators.

A structure that specifies the color of logical operators.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint tree lines.

A object that provides the appearance settings used to paint tree lines.

Gets or sets the color of values.

A structure that specifies the color of values.

Applies the filter criteria to the source control.

Fires before creating an editor used to edit operands in the FilterControl.

Fires before the Filter Control displays editors for operands.

Clears the filter criteria.

Creates empty criteria for the default column (FilterControl.GetDefaultColumn).

A Node object that specifies the created empty criteria for the default column.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Allows you to assign a custom editor used to display and edit an operand.

Allows you to specify a custom editor used to edit an operand. Handle the FilterControl.CustomValueEditor event to specify an editor used to display and edit the operand.

Fires before an editor used to edit operands is disposed of.

Occurs after filter criteria in the have been modified.

Gets a filter column collection.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Filtering.FilterColumnCollection object that represents the collection of filter columns.

Gets or sets the total filter expression.

A descendant that represents the total filter expression.

Gets or sets the total filter expression.

A value that specifies the total filter expression.

Fires after a value of the FilterControl.FilterString property has been changed.

Gets the object which contains information used to render the Filter Control.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Filtering.FilterControlViewInfo object.

Gets the default column used to create a new filter in the Filter Control.

The default filter column.

Allows you to customize a node’s settings when it is initialized.

Fires after any element (logical operator, operand value, field name, etc.) of the Filter Control has been clicked.

Fires after any element (logical operator, operand value, field name, etc.) of the Filter Control has been double clicked.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets a value which specifies the width of level indents (horizontal tree lines).

An integer value that specifies the indent, in pixels.

Gets or sets the maximum number of atomic operands simultaneously displayed within a group operand. If there are more atomic operands in display mode, the group operand’s text representation will be trimmed. In edit mode, the group operand’s values will be edited via a control. This feature is supported when the FilterControl is bound to XtraGrid.

An integer value that specifies the maximum number of atomic operands simultaneously displayed within a group operand.

Gets or sets the menu manager which controls the look and feel of the context menus.

An object which implements the DevExpress.Utils.Menu.IDXMenuManager interface.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the distance between logical expressions.

An integer value which specifies the distance between logical expressions, in pixels.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Fires when any popup menu in a FilterControl is about to be displayed, and allows you to customize these menus.

Allows you to add custom-function-based filters (for example, ‘discount is more than 15%’) to Excel-style pop-up filter menus and/or the filter editor.

Gets or sets whether users can edit filter criteria.

true if users can edit filter criteria; otherwise, false.

Specifies the filter column which is used by default when a new logical expression is created.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Filtering.FilterColumn object or a descendant which represents the filter column used by default when a new logical expression is created.

Creates filter columns.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Filtering.FilterColumnCollection object that represents the collection of filter columns. An object which represents the menu manager which controls the look and feel of the context menus.

Creates filter columns.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Filtering.FilterColumnCollection object that represents the collection of filter columns.

Gets or sets a value that specifies whether the Filter Control always displays action buttons (for example, add or remove a condition) or displays the buttons on hover.

A ShowActionButtonMode enumeration value that specifies when the Filter Control displays action buttons.

Gets or sets whether to show custom function-based filters.

True to show custom function-based filters; False to not show them; Default to enable/disable custom function-based filters depending on the global setting.

Gets or sets whether date-time constants (functions) are available in the second operand’s dropdown field list. Supported when the first operand is a date-time field.

true if date-time functions/constants are available in the second operand’s field list; otherwise, false

Gets or sets whether to show the standard and advanced date-time functions (BeyondThisYear, LaterThisYear, Tomorrow, Today, Yesterday, LastWeek, etc.) for date-time fields.

A DateTimeFunctionsShowMode enumaration value that specifies whether to show the standard and advanced date-time functions for date-time fields.

Gets or sets whether date-time specific operators are available for date-time fields.

true if date-time specific operators are available for date-time fields; otherwise, false

Allows the FilterControl’s context menus to be customized.

Gets or sets whether the group commands icon is displayed.

true to display the group commands icon; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the IsNull operator is available for string values.

true if the IsNull operator is available for string values; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether date-time functions/constants are available in the second operand’s value box for date-time fields.

true if date-time functions/constants are available in an operand value box for date-time fields; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether a user can swap the second operand’s type (between the Value box and Field list). The Field list allows users to compare the first operand (field) with another field.

true, to allow end-users to swap the second operand’s type; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether column captions appear sorted in the ‘s menus.

true to sort column captions; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the control/data source to which the FilterControl provides filter criteria.

An object that represents the source control for the Filter Control.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

null (Nothing in Visual Basic)

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets whether a menu or combobox editor is used to select operands and operators in a .

true if a menu is used to select operands and operators in a ; false if a combobox editor is used.

Fires after an operand’s editor has been displayed.

Contains values that specify how a Filter Editor Control’s criteria can be edited.

The Filter Editor’s filter can be solely edited in text form, using a dedicated text editor.

A Filter Editor displays two pages: Text and Visual, allowing an end-user to build filters in text and visual forms respectively.

The Filter Editor’s filter can be solely edited in a visual form, using a dedicated tree view.

A Filter Editor displays two pages: Visual and Text, allowing an end-user to build filters in visual and text forms respectively.

Contains classes that implement a filtering functionality for DevExpress Windows Forms controls.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Provides access to the object, which allows you to customize the ‘s “Text” tab.

An object that allows you to customize the ‘s “Text” tab.

Gets the FilterControl (in Visual view mode) or embedded FilterControl (in VisualText, TextVisual and Text view modes).

The FilterControl or embedded FilterControl.

Provides access to the currently used Filter Control (FilterControl or FilterEditorControl) via an interface.

The Filter Control (as an IFilterControl object).

Gets or sets whether to display the Filter Editor (the form that embeds the Filter Editor).

true, to display the Filter Editor; otherwise, false.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Serves as a base class for classes providing data for events that allow you to customize filter conditions in the Excel-style filter dropdowns.

Adds the specified data value by which the column being processed can be filtered, and the corresponding text to be displayed in the filter popup.

The data value by which the column can be filtered. The text of the filter condition to be displayed in the filter popup. true, to enable HTML formatting for the text parameter; otherwise, false. An ExcelFilterDataItem object specifying the filter item.

Adds the specified filter condition by which the column being processed can be filtered, and the corresponding text to be displayed in the filter popup.

The display text for the filter condition. The filter condition. true, to enable HTML formatting for the text parameter; otherwise, false. An ExcelFilterItem object specifying the filter item.

Adds the specified filter condition by which the column being processed can be filtered, and the corresponding text to be displayed in the filter popup.

The display text for the filter condition. The filter condition. true, to enable HTML formatting for the text parameter; otherwise, false. An ExcelFilterItem object specifying the filter item.

Changes the display text in the filter popup for the specified data value.

The data value for which to change the display text. The text to be displayed in the filter popup for the specified data value. true if the display text is successfully changed; otherwise, false.

Removes all items from the collection of data values by which the column being processed can be filtered.

true if the items are successfully removed; otherwise, false.

Provides access to the collection of data values by which the column being processed can be filtered, and the corresponding display texts.

An object that specifies the collection of data values by which the column being processed can be filtered.

Provides acces to the collection of the texts to be displayed in the filter popup for the corresponding data values by which the column being processed can be filtered.

A [] object specifying the collection of the display texts.

Provides access to the collection of custom filter conditions by which the column being processed can be filtered.

A <DevExpress.XtraEditors.Filtering.ExcelFilterItem,> object specifying the collection of custom filter conditions by which the column being processed can be filtered.

Returns an array of strings representing captions for filters in the popup.

An array of strings representing captions for filters in the popup.

Returns the collection of custom filter conditions by which the column being processed can be filtered.

The collection of custom filter conditions by which the column being processed can be filtered.

Returns an array of objects representing data values by which the column being processed can be filtered.

An array of objects representing data values by which the column being processed can be filtered.

Gets or sets a collection of images to be inserted into filter item captions using HTML tags. This property is in effect when the HTML formatting feature is enabled for filter item captions.

An image collection (DevExpress.Utils.ImageCollection or DevExpress.Utils.SvgImageCollection).

Gets or sets the alignment of images fetched from the column’s image combo box editor to the filter menu. For internal use.

A enumeration value that specifies the image alignment.

Provides access to the collection of images fetched form the column’s image combo box editor to the filter menu. For internal use.

An object specifying the image collection.

Gets whether these event arguments contain data values.

true if these event arguments contain data values; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the data is not yet loaded during asynchronous data loading.

true if the data is not yet loaded; otherwise, false.

Event arguments used when actual data is not yet loaded asynchronously.

Removes the specified data value by which the column being processed can be filtered from the filter popup.

The data value to remove from the filter popup. true if the specified data value is successfully removed from the filter popup; otherwise, false.

Provides access to the collection of data values by which the column being processed can be filtered.

An [] specifying the collection of data values by which the column being processed can be filtered.

Provides data for events that allow you to customize filter conditions in the Excel-style filter dropdowns.

Gets the column being processed.

The column being processed.

Enumerates available menu types.

Not supported.

The menu to choose operators in aggregate nodes (represent collection properties). This menu is available when you edit a collection property and the FilterControl.AllowAggregateEditing property is set to Aggregate or AggregateWithCondition.

The menu to choose a field in field-based operators in aggregate nodes (represent collection properties). This menu is available when you edit a collection property and the FilterControl.AllowAggregateEditing property is set to Aggregate or AggregateWithCondition

The menu to choose the operation type.

The menu to choose the field (column) name.

The menu that displays comparison fields (columns) and date-time constants. This menu is available when FilterControl.ShowOperandTypeIcon is set to true. The FilterControl.ShowDateTimeConstants property specifies the availability of the date-time constants in the menu.

The menu to choose group operations.

The menu to manage conditions (available when the FilterControl.ShowGroupCommandsIcon option is enabled).

Provides data for the FilterControl.InitNode event.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

The property name. The property type. true, if the node is new; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the node is newly created.

true, if the node is newly created; false, if the node already existed.

Gets or sets the property (field) name.

The property (field) name.

Sets the operation type for the current node.

The operation type.

Sets the operation type for the current node.

The operation type.

Applies a registered custom function to the current node.

The name of the registered custom function.

Provides data for the FilterControl.PopupMenuShowing event.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

The current node. A value that identifies the type of the Filter Control’s element where the menu is to be displayed. The type of the FilterControl’s menu to be invoked. The menu to be invoked The position where the menu is to be invoked.

Gets the node where the menu is to be displayed.

A Node object that identifies the clicked node.

Gets the type of the Filter Control’s element where the menu is to be displayed.

An ElementType enumeration value that identifies the type of the Filter Control’s element where the menu is to be displayed.

Gets the menu that will be invoked.

A object that is the menu to be invoked.

Gets the type of the FilterControl’s menu to be invoked.

A FilterControlMenuType enumeration value that specifies the type of the FilterControl’s menu to be invoked.

Gets the position where the menu is to be invoked.

A Point value that specifies the position where the menu is to be invoked.

Gets or sets whether the current menu should be restored to its default state, after it has been displayed on-screen.

A Boolean value that specifies whether the current menu should be restored to its default state after it has been displayed on-screen.

Represents a method that will handle the FilterControl.PopupMenuShowing event.

The event source. This parameter identifies the which raised the event. A object which contains event data.

Provides data for the FilterControl.BeforeShowValueEditor event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

An editor that is about to be invoked. This value is assigned to the object’s Editor property. An object that identifies the current node in the FilterControl’s tree. This value is assigned to the ShowValueEditorEventArgs.CurrentNode property. A DevExpress.Data.Filtering.OperandValue object that is the current value. This value is assigned to the ShowValueEditorEventArgs.OperandValue property. The index of an operand value. This value is assigned to the ShowValueEditorEventArgs.FocusedElementIndex property.

Gets the current node in the FilterControl’s tree of criteria.

A ClauseNode object that is the current node.

Allows you to specify a custom editor to be opened instead of the default one, specified by the Editor property.

A descendant identifying the custom editor that will be created and displayed instead of the default one.

Gets the index of the current operand value.

An integer that specifies the index of the current operand value.

Gets the current operand value.

An object that specifies the current operand value.

Gets the operation of the current node.

A ClauseType value that specifies the current operation.

The base class for objects that provide data for editor specific events.

Gets the currently processed editor.

A descendant that represents the currently processed editor.

The editor to select a font from a dropdown list.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Closes the popup window accepting the changes made.

Gets the editor’s class name.

A object identifying the class name of the current editor.

Gets an object which contains properties, methods and events specific to the control.

A object that contains a control’s settings.

Gets or sets the index of the selected item.

An integer value that specifies the index of the selected item.

Enumerates the comparison operators (Equal, Between, Less, etc.).

The format is applied to cells (or rows) whose values are between the and property values inclusive. Disable the option to make the condition exclusive.

The format is applied to cells (or corresponding rows) whose values match the FormatConditionRuleValue.Value1 property value.

The format is applied to cells (or corresponding rows) if the FormatConditionRuleValue.Expression evaluates to true.

The format is applied to cells (or corresponding rows) whose values are greater than the FormatConditionRuleValue.Value1 property value.

The format is applied to cells (or corresponding rows) whose values are greater or equal to the FormatConditionRuleValue.Value1 property value.

The format is applied to cells (or corresponding rows) whose values are less than the FormatConditionRuleValue.Value1 property value.

The format is applied to cells (or corresponding rows) whose values are less or equal to the FormatConditionRuleValue.Value1 property value.

The format is applied to all cells in the target column.

The format is applied to cells (or rows) whose values are not between the and property values inclusive. Disable the option to make the condition exclusive.

The format is applied to cells (or corresponding rows) whose values do not match the FormatConditionRuleValue.Value1 property value.

Enumerates value ranges relative to an average value.

The range that includes values above the average value.

The range that includes values below the average value.

The range that includes values that are above or equal to the average value.

The range that includes values that are below or equal to the average value.

Contains values that specify how the range’s maximum and minimum values are calculated when the FormatConditionRuleMinMaxBase.MaximumType and FormatConditionRuleMinMaxBase.MinimumType properties are set to Automatic.

Default is equivalent to ValueBased mode.

The range’s maximum and minimum values are the highest and lowest column values, respectively.

The range’s maximum value is the highest column value, but not less than 0. The range’s minimum value is the lowest column value, but not greater than 0.

Serves as a base for collections of style conditions.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Appends the specified style format condition to the collection.

A object or descendant to be added to the collection.

Copies the settings from the object passed as the parameter.

A object or descendant which represents the source of the operation.

Locks the by preventing change notifications from being fired, preventing visual updates until the EndUpdate method is called.

Occurs when the collection is changed.

When overridden in a derived class, performs a comparison of two objects of the same type and returns a value indicating whether one is less than, equal to or greater than the other.

The first object to compare. The second object to compare. An integer value indicating whether one is less than, equal to or greater than the other.

Indicates whether the current collection contains the specified style format condition.

A object or descendant which represents the style format condition to locate in the collection. true if the collection contains the specified style format condition; otherwise, false.

Unlocks the object after a call to the BeginUpdate method and causes an immediate visual update.

Returns the specified condition’s position within the collection.

A object or descendant to locate in the collection. A zero-based integer which represents the condition’s position within the collection. -1 if the condition doesn’t belong to the collection.

When overridden by descendant classes, indicates whether the control that owns the current collection is currently being initialized.

true if the control is being initialized; otherwise, false.

Provides indexed access to individual items within the collection.

An integer value specifying the item’s zero based index within the collection. If its negative or exceeds the last available index, an exception is raised. A object or descendant which resides at the specified position within the collection.

Gets a style format condition with the specified tag.

An object which contains information associated with the style format condition. A object or descendant which represents a style format condition within the collection whose StyleFormatConditionBase.Tag property’s value matches the tag parameter. null (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no style format condition is found.

Gets an item from the collection by its name.

A string value specifying the name of the desired item. A object with the required name. null (Nothing in Visual Basic) if there are no items with the specified name in the collection.

Removes the specified object from the collection.

A object to remove.

Enumerates comparison operators used to set the FormatConditionIconSetIcon.ValueComparison property.

The Greater Than operator.

The Greater Than or Equal To operator.

Enumerates triggers for the FormatConditionRuleDataUpdate format.

Allows you to implement a custom trigger for the format rule by handling the GridView.FormatRuleDataUpdateCustomTrigger event. End-users are not able to access and modify custom triggers at runtime (in the Conditional Formatting Rules Manager).

Activates a format when a value changes.

Activates a format when a value decreases.

Activates a format when a value increases.

A class that exposes an icon set for the format.

Initializes a new instance of a class.

Gets or sets the category name of the current icon set.

A value that specifies the category name of the current icon set.

Gets whether the current icon set contains icons.

true, if the current icon set contains one or more icons; otherwise; false.

Specifies an icon collection for the format.

An icon collection.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the name of the current icon set.

A value that specifies the name of the current icon set.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

A string that specifies the icon set’s range description.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Returns the text representation of the current icon set.

A value that specify the text representation of the current icon set.

Gets or sets the type of threshold values for the current icon set.

A value that specifies the type of threshold values for the icon set.

A single icon, which corresponds to a specific range in the format.

Initializes a new instance of a class.

Returns the text representation of the current object.

A string value that specifies the text representation of the current object.

Gets or sets a threshold value that defines the range to which the current icon corresponds.

A value that specifies a threshold of the target value range.

Gets or sets the comparison operator used to define the target range corresponding to the current object.

A value that specifies the comparison operator.

Applies a format using a two-color scale to display data distribution and variation.

Initializes a new instance of a class.

Creates a new instance of the class.

A new instance.

Gets or sets the color corresponding to the maximum threshold.

A value that specifies the color corresponding to the maximum threshold.

Gets or sets the color corresponding to the minimum threshold.

A value that specifies the color corresponding to the minimum threshold.

Gets or sets the name of the predefined color scale for the current conditional formatting rule.

The name of the predefined color scale for the current conditional formatting rule.

Applies a format using a three-color scale to display data distribution and variation.

Initializes a new instance of a class.

Creates a new instance of the class.

A new instance.

Gets or sets a value that specifies the midpoint of the target value range.

A value that specifies the midpoint of target the range.

Gets or sets the color corresponding to the midpoint of the target value range.

The color corresponding to the midpoint of the target value range.

Gets or sets the type of the midpoint of the target range.

The type of the midpoint of the target range.

Applies a format if a cell value is above or below the column’s average.

Initializes a new instance of a class.

Gets or sets the target range relative to a column’s average value.

The target range relative to a column’s average value.

Creates a new instance of the class.

A new object.

The base class for style formats that allow cells to be customized using the FormatConditionRuleAppearanceBase.Appearance property.

Initializes a new instance of a class.

Allows you to explicitly set the appearance settings (background and foreground colors and font settings) for target cells. This property’s settings take priority over the style specified by the FormatConditionRuleAppearanceBase.PredefinedName property.

An object that specifies appearance settings applied to target cells.

Gets or sets the name of a predefined or custom style applied to target cells.

A string that specifies the name of a predefined style.

The base class for classes that implement conditional formatting rules.

Gets or sets whether the format is repainted with an animation effect when a cell value changes. Animation effects are supported for specific format rules, only in Data Grid’s , and .

A value that specifies whether an animation effect is enabled for the format rule.

Copies settings from the specified object to the current object.

An object whose settings are to be copied to the current object.

Locks the by preventing change notifications from being fired, preventing visual updates until the EndUpdate method is called.

Gets or sets whether the condition is inclusive (the and property values are included in the interval).

or if the condition is inclusive; otherwise, .

Converts the specified object to the nullable decimal type.

The object to be converted to the nullable decimal type. The result of the conversion.

This method is overridden by descendants to create new class instances.

A new instance of a descendant.

Unlocks the object after a call to the BeginUpdate method and causes an immediate visual update.

Gets whether an animation effect is enabled for and supported by the format rule.

true if an animation effect is enabled for and supported by the format rule

For internal use.

Returns whether the current rule evaluates to “true” for input values provided by the specified valueProvider.

An object that provides values to test against the current rule. true if the current rule is true; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the current object is properly customized.

true if the object is properly customized; otherwise, false.

Returns the text representation of the current object.

The text representation of the current object.

Enumerates values indicating how the rule has been changed.

Data and UI settings have been updated.

Data has been updated.

No changes.

UI settings have been updated.

Applies a format if a value matches one of the specified values.

Initializes a new instance of a class.

Creates a new instance of the class.

A new object.

Gets or sets a list of constants.

An object that specifies a list of constants for the formatting rule.

Applies a format using a data bar.

Initializes a new instance of a class.

Gets or sets whether negative data bars are displayed in the direction opposite to the positive data bars.

true if negative data bars are displayed in the direction opposite to the positive data bars; otherwise, false.

Provides access to appearance settings for data bars that correspond to positive cell values.

An object that specifies appearance settings for positive data bars.

Provides access to appearance settings for data bars that correspond to negative cell values.

An object that specifies appearance settings for negative data bars.

Gets or sets the color of the vertical axis between positive and negative data bars.

A value that specifies the color of the vertical axis between positive and negative data bars.

Creates a new instance of the class.

A new instance.

Gets or set whether to draw the vertical axis between positive and negative data bars.

true if the axis is painted; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether to draw the vertical axis between positive and negative bars at the middle of the cell.

true, to draw the axis at the middle of the cel; false, to draw the axis at the position specified by the proportion of the minimum negative value to the maximum positive value.

Gets or sets the name of the predefined bar style.

A string value that specifies the predefined style name.

Gets or sets whether to display positive data bars in the right-to-left direction.

A value that specifies whether to display data bars in the right-to-left direction.

Gets or sets whether to display data bars within target cells without cell values.

true, if data bars are displayed within cells without cell values; false, if data bars are displayed along with cell values.

Highlights a cell with a custom icon and/or appearance settings for a limited time when a cell value changes. This format is only supported in Data Grid’s , and .

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Creates a new instance of the current class.

The created instance of the current class.

Gets or sets the time during which the format is applied.

The delay in milliseconds after which the format is cleared.

Allows you to display a custom image or a predefined icon.

An object that specifies an icon or image for the format.

Gets or sets when to activate the format.

A value that specifies when to activate the format.

Applies a format if a column’s DateTime value refers to a specific date and/or date interval relative to today. These days and intervals include Today, Yesterday, This week, Earlier this month, Prior to this year, etc.

Initializes a new instance of a class.

Creates a new instance of the class.

A new object.

Gets or sets the filter that identifies a target date or dates.

The filter that identifies a target date or dates.

Reapplies the conditional formatting rule, taking into account the current date.

Applies a format if cell values meet a specific expression.

Initializes a new instance of a class.

Creates a new instance of the class.

A new object.

Gets or sets a Boolean expression. When the expression evaluates to true, a format is applied to cells.

A string that specifies the Boolean expression.

For internal use.

Applies a format using an icon set.

Initializes a new instance of a class.

Creates a new instance of the class.

A new instance.

Gets or sets an icon set.

A value that specifies an icon set.

Gets whether the current icon set is properly customized.

true if the current icon set is properly customized; otherwise, false.

A base class for classes that implement conditional formatting rules based on minimum and maximum thresholds.

Initializes a new instance of a class.

Gets or sets how the range’s maximum and minimum values are calculated when the FormatConditionRuleMinMaxBase.MaximumType and FormatConditionRuleMinMaxBase.MinimumType properties are set to Automatic.

A value that specifies how the range’s maximum and minimum values are calculated in Automatic mode. The FormatConditionAutomaticType.Default value is equivalent to FormatConditionAutomaticType.ValueBased.

Creates a new instance of the class.

A new instance.

Returns the actual value of the FormatConditionRuleMinMaxBase.AutomaticType setting.

The actual value of the FormatConditionRuleMinMaxBase.AutomaticType setting.

Gets or sets the maximum of the target value range.

The maximum of the target value range.

Gets or sets whether the target range’s maximum is automatically calculated or specified manually (as a number or percentage).

A value that specifies how the maximum of the target range is defined.

Gets or sets the minimum of the target value range.

The minimum of the target value range.

Gets or sets whether the target range minimum is automatically calculated or specified manually (as a number or percentage).

A value that specifies how the minimum of the target range is defined.

Applies a format if a value is in the range of the highest or lowest column values.

Initializes a new instance of a class.

Creates a new instance of the class.

A new instance.

Gets or sets a cutoff value that specifies the count or percentage of column cells with the highest or lowest values.

An object that specifies a count or percentage of cells with the highest or lowest values.

Gets or sets the type of the FormatConditionRuleTopBottom.Rank value.

An object that specifies a type of the rank value.

Gets or sets whether the rule targets the highest or lowest column values.

An object that specifies the type of the target range.

Applies a format if a column’s value is unique or a duplicate.

Initializes a new instance of a class.

Creates a new instance of the class.

A new instance.

Gets or sets whether the format is applied to unique or duplicate column values.

A value that specifies whether the format is applied to unique or duplicate column values.

Applies a format if a column’s value meets a specified condition (Equal, Less, Between, etc.).

Initializes a new instance of a class.

Gets or sets the comparison operator (Equal, Between, Less, etc.).

The comparison operator.

Creates a new instance of the class.

A new object.

Gets or sets a Boolean expression to which target cells should match.

A string that specifies the Boolean expression.

Gets or sets the first constant that is compared with column values. Security note: Deserializing layout settings from untrusted resources may create security issues. Serializable System.Object properties that contain custom type values are not (de)serialized automatically. Review the following help topic for information on how to (de)serialize custom type values: Safe Deserialization.

A value that is compared with column values.

Gets or sets the second constant that is compared with column values. Security note: Deserializing layout settings from untrusted resources may create security issues. Serializable System.Object properties that contain custom type values are not (de)serialized automatically. Review the following help topic for information on how to (de)serialize custom type values: Safe Deserialization.

A value that is compared with the column’s values.

Enumerates value ranges relative to a certain value.

The lowest values.

The highest values.

Identifies values as unique or duplicate.

Duplicate column values.

Unique column values.

Enumerates how cutoff/minimum/maximum values are regarded and whether they are calculated automatically.

A cuttoff/minimum/maximum value is calculated automatically.

Cell values are compared with zero.

Cell values are compared with each other. The minimum cell value is treated as 0%, the maximum value is 100%.

The base class for objects that apply style formats to controls.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Copies settings from the specified object to the current object.

An object whose settings are copied to the current object.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

The field name of the column that provides values to test against the current formatting rule.

Gets or sets the text description of the format rule.

The text description of the format rule.

Gets or sets whether the current object is enabled.

true if the current object is enabled; otherwise, false.

Returns whether the current rule (FormatRuleBase.Rule) evaluates to “true” for input values provided by the specified valueProvider.

An object that provides values to test against the current rule. true if the current rule is true; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the current object is properly customized.

true if the object is properly customized; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the name of the current object.

The object’s name.

Gets or sets the style format rule, which defines the condition and appearance settings applied when the condition is true.

The style format rule.

Returns the FormatRuleBase.Rule object type-cast to the specified type.

The FormatRuleBase.Rule object type-cast to the specified type.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets whether subsequent format rules that target a specific cell should be ignored if the current format rule evaluates to true for this cell.

true if subsequent format rules that target a specific cell should be ignored if the current format rule evaluates to true for this cell; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets custom data associated with the current object. Security note: Deserializing layout settings from untrusted resources may create security issues. Serializable System.Object properties that contain custom type values are not (de)serialized automatically. Review the following help topic for information on how to (de)serialize custom type values: Safe Deserialization.

Custom data associated with the current object.

Returns the text representation of the current object.

The text representation of the current object.

A collection of objects that specify rules used to apply conditional formatting in data-aware controls.

An object that specifies a format rule. An object that specifies the column (row in a vertical grid) that contains values to be formatted.

Applies a format based on the specified condition and associates it with the specified column (row in a vertical grid).

A {TColumnType} object that specifies a column (row in a vertical grid) to which the format should be applied. A descendant. A {T} object that specifies a format.

Applies a format that uses a range of colors to illustrate data distribution. You can specify the minimum and maximum values and colors for them.

Applies a format that uses a range of colors to illustrate data distribution. You can specify the minimum, maximum, and midpoint values, and colors for them.

A {TColumnType} object that specifies a column (row in a vertical grid) to which the format should be applied. The color that corresponds to the minimum threshold. This value is assigned to the property. The color that corresponds to the midpoint of the target value range. This value is assigned to the property. The color that corresponds to the maximum threshold. This value is assigned to the property. A value that specifies whether the minimum value is automatically calculated or specified manually (as a number or percentage). This value is assigned to the property. A value that specifies whether the midpoint value is automatically calculated or specified manually (as a number or percentage). This value is assigned to the property. A value that specifies whether the maximum value is automatically calculated or specified manually (as a number or percentage). This value is assigned to the property. The minimum value of the target range. This value is assigned to the property. The midpoint of the target value range. This value is assigned to the property. The maximum value of the target range. This value is assigned to the property. A {T} object that specifies a format.

Applies a format to values above average.

A {TColumnType} object that specifies a column (row in a vertical grid) to which the format should be applied. The appearance settings applied to values above average. This value is assigned to the property. A {T} object that specifies a format.

Applies a format to values above or below average.

Applies a format based on the specified rule and appearance settings.

A {TColumnType} object that specifies a column (row in a vertical grid) to which the format should be applied. An object that specifies a rule. The appearance settings applied to the column (row in a vertical grid). This value is assigned to the property. A {T} object that specifies a format.

Applies a format to values below average.

A {TColumnType} object that specifies a column (row in a vertical grid) to which the format should be applied. The appearance settings applied to values below average. This value is assigned to the property. A {T} object that specifies a format.

Applies a format to cells with lowest values.

Applies a format that displays bars that illustrate cell values.

A {TColumnType} object that specifies a column (row in a vertical grid) to which the format should be applied. A {T} object that specifies a format.

This method is obsolete (use AddDateOccurringRule).

Applies a format to cells that contain specific dates.

A {TColumnType} object that specifies a column (row in a vertical grid) to which the format should be applied. The date to which the format should be applied. This value is assigned to the property. The appearance settings that should be applied to the column (row in a vertical grid). This value is assigned to the property. A {T} object that specifies a format.

Applies a format to duplicate values.

Applies a format to cells that match a criterion expression.

Applies a format that displays icons in cells.

A {TColumnType} object that specifies a column (row in a vertical grid) to which the format should be applied. The icons. This value is assigned to the property. A {T} object that specifies a format.

Adds a rule to the collection.

The rule that should be added to the collection.

Applies a format to cells with highest or lowest values.

A {TColumnType} object that specifies a column (row in a vertical grid) to which the format should be applied. The appearance settings that should be applied to the column (row in a vertical grid). This value is assigned to the property. A value that specifies the target range (highest or lowest). This value is assigned to the property. The number (as an absolute value or a percentage) of cells that should be formatted. This value is assigned to the property. A {T} object that specifies a format.

Applies a format to cells with highest values.

Applies a format to unique or duplicate values.

A {TColumnType} object that specifies a column (row in a vertical grid) to which the format should be applied. The appearance settings that should be applied to the column (row in a vertical grid). This value is assigned to the property. A value that specifies whether the format is applied to unique or duplicate values. This value is assigned to the property. A {T} object that specifies a format.

Applies a format to unique values.

Applies a format to cells that contain specific values.

A {TColumnType} object that specifies a column (row in a vertical grid) to which the format should be applied. The appearance settings that should be applied to the column (row in a vertical grid). This value is assigned to the property. The comparison operator (Equal, Between, Less, and so on). This value is assigned to the property. The first constant that is compared with column (row in vertical grid) values. This value is assigned to the property. The second constant that is compared with column (row in vertical grid) values. This value is assigned to the property. A {T} object that specifies a format.

Locks the event until the method is called.

Fires when the collection changes.

Unlocks the event after a method call.

Returns a rule at the specified position in the collection.

A value that specifies a position in the collection. An object that specifies a rule.

Determines whether the collection contains objects. For internal use.

true if the collection contains objects; otherwise, false.

Determines whether the collection contains rules that can be applied. For internal use.

true if the collection contains rules that can be applied; otherwise, false.

Returns the zero-based index of the specified rule in the collection.

An object to locate in the collection. An integer value that specifies the position of the rule in the collection.

Determines whether the collection is locked.

true if the collection is locked; otherwise, false.

Returns a rule at the specified position in the collection.

A value that specifies a position in the collection. A {T} object that specifies a rule.

Returns a rule by its name.

A string value that specifies a rule’s name. A rule’s property specifies the name. A {T} object that specifies a rule.

Returns a string that describes the current object.

A string that describes the current object.

Enumerates painting styles for selected and hot-tracked items in list box and pop up controls.

The same as the Skinned option.

Selected and hot-tracked items are painted skinned if a skinning painting scheme is applied. Otherwise, items are not skinned.

Selected and hot-tracked items are not skinned and painted using the default system color. In a control’s descendants, if item hot-tracking is enabled, selected and hot-tracked items are always in sync, and setting the BaseListBoxControl.HotTrackSelectMode property to SelectItemOnClick is not in effect.

Enumerates values that specify how list box items are selected when item hot-tracking is enabled.

If item hot-tracking is enabled, an item is selected when clicked. This option is not in effect if the BaseListBoxControl.HighlightedItemStyle property is set to HighlightStyle.Standard.

If item hot-tracking is enabled, an item is selected when hovering over it with the mouse.

The same as the HotTrackSelectMode.SelectItemOnHotTrack option plus the following. If item skinning is enabled via the BaseListBoxControl.HighlightedItemStyle option, the BaseListBoxControl.SelectedIndexChanged event is raised each time an item is hot-tracked. In HotTrackSelectMode.SelectItemOnHotTrack mode, the BaseListBoxControl.SelectedIndexChanged event is raised only when clicking the item.

Renders a UI from HTML-CSS markup. Can show data from a bound data context (a business object or data source item).

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets the active in-place editor defined in HTML markup by an ‘input’ tag with an embedded Repository Item.

The child active editor.

Gets or sets whether users can select the contents of HTML tags.

Specifies the initial value of the user-select CSS property for all HTML elements. The DefaultBoolean.True value sets this property to auto, the DefaultBoolean.False and DefaultBoolean.Default values set it to none.

Gets or sets whether the HtmlContentControl can be focused.

true if the control can be focused; otherwise, false.

Contains the control’s appearance settings.

The control’s appearance settings.

Gets or sets whether the HtmlContentControl, which is a container of child controls, enables a user to scroll to any child control placed outside the container’s visible boundaries.

true if the control displays scroll bars to scroll to child controls placed outside the container’s visible boundaries; false, if scroll bars are hidden.

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized MVVM command in the source, and binds this command to the target HTML element.

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. The unique ID of the target HTML element. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this HTML element.

Binds the parameterized MVVM command to the target HTML element.

The command to be bound to this HTML element. The unique ID of the target HTML element. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this HTML element.

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized MVVM command in the source, and binds this command to the target HTML element.

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. The unique ID of the target HTML element. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. The type of a ViewModel that stores a command. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this HTML element.

Returns information about visual elements located at a specified point.

Test point coordinates relative to the HtmlContentControl’s top-left corner. An object that contains information about visual elements located at the test point.

Closes the currently opened in-place editor and saves changes made by a user. This member is only in effect for in-place editors (Repository Items) added to the UI using the ‘input’ tag.

Allows you to specify custom display text for bound field values.

Allows you to assign custom in-place editors (Repository Items) to individual <input> tags. The event is not in effect for <input> tags used to embed external controls.

Allows you to specify custom in-place editors (Repository Items) for individual <input> tags in edit mode. The event is not in effect for <input> tags used to embed external controls.

Allows you to supply data to custom data fields.

Gets or sets the control’s data context (a business object or data source item).

The data context.

Fires immediately after the active in-place editor’s value is changed. This member is only in effect for in-place editors (Repository Items) added to the UI using the ‘input’ tag.

Fires when a user changes the active editor’s value — types or deletes a character, chooses a value from the dropdown list, etc. The event does not fire when you change the value in code.

Occurs when a user clicks any HTML element.

Occurs when a mouse button is pressed over an HTML element.

Occurs when a mouse pointer moves while over an HTML element.

Occurs when a mouse pointer leaves the bounds of an HTML element.

Occurs when a mouse pointer enters the bounds of an HTML element.

Occurs when a mouse button pressed over an HTML element is released.

Returns an HTML element with the specified ID.

The ID of an element to be retrieved. The element that has the specified ID.

Returns a list of HTML elements that are of the specified class.

The class of HTML elements to be retrieved. A list of HTML elements that are of the specified class.

Returns a list of HTML elements that have the specified tag.

The tag of HTML elements to be retrieved. A list of HTML elements that have the specified tag.

Sets focus to or removes focus from the specified element.

The target HTML element. true to focus an element; false to remove focus from the element.

Sets focus to or removes focus from the element with the specified ID.

The ID of the element to be focused. true to focus an element; false to remove focus from the element.

Forces the control to finish its initialization.

Performs an action on all or specific HTML elements.

An action to perform on HTML elements. An optional parameter that specifies a condition to narrow the set of target items.

Returns the rectangle that the control’s contents occupy.

The bounds of the control’s contents.

Returns the specified field’s value from the bound data object (HtmlContentControl.DataContext).

The name of a target field in the bound data object. The specified field’s value.

Fires immediately after an in-place editor is closed (it loses focus). The HiddenEditor event is only in effect for in-place editors (Repository Items) added to the UI using the ‘input’ tag.

Closes the currently opened editor and discards changes made in the edit box. This member is only in effect for in-place editors (Repository Items) added to the UI using the ‘input’ tag.

Gets or sets the source of images to display using <img> tags.

A source of images.

Gets the control’s HTML-CSS template.

The control’s HTML-CSS template.

For internal use.

A Boolean value.

Occurs when the control is redrawn. Allows you to paint the control when any rendering engine (DirectX or GDI+) is applied.

Saves changes made by a user. This member is only in effect for in-place editors (Repository Items) added to the UI using the ‘input’ tag.

Forces the control to invalidate its client area and immediately redraw itself.

Returns the text contents of all currently selected HTML elements. See this property for more information: AllowContentSelection.

The text contents of all currently selected HTML elements.

Occurs when the SelectedText property value changes. See this property for more information: AllowContentSelection.

Sets the specified field’s value in the bound data object (HtmlContentControl.DataContext).

The name of a target field in the bound data object. The field’s new value.

Activates an in-place editor bound to the specified field. This member is only in effect for in-place editors (Repository Items) added to the UI using the ‘input’ tag.

The field name to which the in-place editor is bound in HTML markup.

Fires when an in-place editor is about to be activated (created). The ShowingEditor event is only in effect for in-place editors (Repository Items) added to the UI using the ‘input’ tag.

Fires after an in-place editor is activated. The ShownEditor event is only in effect for in-place editors (Repository Items) added to the UI using the ‘input’ tag.

Gets or sets whether the DirectX Hardware Acceleration is enabled for the .

A value that specifies whether the DirectX Hardware Acceleration is enabled.

Fires when a user edits the active in-place editor’s value and attempts to move focus away from (close) the editor. The ValidatingEditor event is only in effect for in-place editors (Repository Items) added to the UI using the ‘input’ tag.

Allows you to show a popup window with a UI rendered from an HTML-CSS template. Can show data from a bound data context (a business object or data source item).

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

A container that will own the created object.

Activates the current window.

Contains the window’s appearance settings.

The window’s appearance settings.

Gets or sets a delay after which the HtmlContentPopup (opened as a popup window) is automatically closed if the HtmlContentPopup.HideAutomatically property is enabled.

A delay after which the HtmlContentPopup (opened as a popup window) is automatically closed.

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized MVVM command in the source, and binds this command to the target HTML element.

Binds the parameterized MVVM command to the target HTML element.

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized MVVM command in the source, and binds this command to the target HTML element.

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. The unique ID of the target HTML element. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. The type of a ViewModel that stores a command. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this HTML element.

Calculates the popup size required to fit its content without exceeding the maximum width.

The owner of this popup. The maximum allowed popup width. The optimal popup size required to fit the popup content.

Closes the window.

Closes the HtmlContentPopup object that was opened as a modal window, and sets the dialog result.

The dialog’s result.

Fires after the window is closed. This is a notification event.

Fires when the window is about to be closed. Allows you to cancel the close operation.

Allows you to specify custom display text for bound field values.

Fires before a popup is shown on-screen and allows you to modify the HTML-CSS template of this HtmlContentPopup component.

Gets or sets the window’s data context (a business object or data source item).

The data context.

Occurs when a user clicks any HTML element.

Occurs when a user double-clicks any HTML element.

Occurs when a mouse button is pressed over an HTML element.

Occurs when a mouse pointer moves while over an HTML element.

Occurs when a mouse pointer leaves the bounds of an HTML element.

Occurs when a mouse pointer enters the bounds of an HTML element.

Occurs when a mouse button pressed over an HTML element is released.

Fires when a window is hidden.

Makes the window invisible.

Gets or sets whether the HtmlContentPopup (opened as a popup window) is automatically closed after a specific delay (HtmlContentPopup.AutoHidingDelay).

A value that specifies whether the HtmlContentPopup (opened as a popup window) is automatically closed after a specific delay.

Gets or sets whether the HtmlContentPopup is hidden when a user clicks any element within this popup.

A value that specifies whether the HtmlContentPopup is hidden when a user clicks any element within this popup.

Gets or sets the source of images to display using <img> tags.

A source of images.

Gets the window’s HTML-CSS template.

The window’s HTML-CSS template.

Displays the HtmlContentPopup as a popup window within the specified bounds.

The window’s owner. The rectangle to fit the window.

Displays the HtmlContentPopup object as a modal window within the specified bounds.

The window’s owner. The rectangle to fit the window. The dialog’s result.

Gets or sets an object that stores custom data.

An object that stores custom data.

Gets or sets the component that controls the behavior and appearance of hints displayed for HTML elements.

An object that specifies hint settings.

The editor to display and edit hyperlinks and navigate to their targets.

Creates an instance of the control.

Gets the class name of the current editor.

The string identifying the class name of the current editor.

Occurs before hyperlink execution.

Contains settings specific to the hyperlink editor.

A object containing settings for the current editor.

Executes the command specified by the hyperlink editor as a new process.

Executes the specified command as a new process.

The object representing the command to execute.

Gets or sets the text representing the command for the hyperlink editor.

A string representing the command for the hyperlink editor.

The label that supports displaying text or its portion as a hyperlink. Allows you to use HTML tags to format text.

Initializes a new instance of a class with the default settings.

This property is not supported by the .

Provides access to appearance settings used to paint the .

An object that specifies the appearance settings used to paint the control.

Provides access to appearance settings used to paint the when it is disabled.

An object that specifies the appearance settings used to paint the control.

Provides access to appearance settings used to paint the when it is hovered.

An object that specifies the appearance settings used to paint the control.

Provides access to appearance settings used to paint the when it is pressed.

An object that specifies the appearance settings used to paint the control.

Gets or sets when links should be underlined.

A value that specifies when links should be underlined.

Gets or sets whether to display links within a as visited links.

true if links are displayed as visited links; otherwise, false.

Contains appearance settings that paint a .

Initializes a new instance of a class with the default settings.

Gets or sets the color used to display links within a disabled (when its Enabled property is set to false).

A color used to display disabled links.

Gets or sets the color used to display normal links.

An object that specifies the color used to display normal links.

Provides access to the appearance options.

An object that specifies the appearance options.

Gets or sets the color used to display links when the is pressed.

A color used to display links in the pressed state.

Gets or sets the color used to paint visited links.

A color used to paint visited links.

Contains appearance options that paint a .

Initializes a new instance of a class with the default settings.

Copies all settings from the options object passed as the parameter and assigns them to the current object.

An object whose settings are assigned to the current object.

Determines whether the specified object and the current object have the same property values.

An object to be compared with the current object. true if the current object has the same property values as the specified object; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether to use the HyperlinkLabelControlAppearanceObject.DisabledColor property value.

true, if the HyperlinkLabelControlAppearanceObject.DisabledColor property value is used; false, if the default color is used.

Gets or sets whether to use the HyperlinkLabelControlAppearanceObject.LinkColor property value.

true, if the HyperlinkLabelControlAppearanceObject.LinkColor property value is used; false, if the default color is used.

Gets or sets whether to use the HyperlinkLabelControlAppearanceObject.PressedColor property value.

true, if the HyperlinkLabelControlAppearanceObject.PressedColor property value is used; false, if the default color is used.

Gets or sets whether to use the HyperlinkLabelControlAppearanceObject.VisitedColor property value.

true, if the HyperlinkLabelControlAppearanceObject.VisitedColor property value is used; false, if the default color is used.

Lists the values that specify how an image is aligned relative to the label’s text.

The image is vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned at the center.

The image is vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned on the left.

The image is vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned on the right.

The image is horizontally aligned on the left and vertically aligned at the bottom.

The image is horizontally aligned on the left and vertically aligned at the center.

The image is horizontally aligned on the left and vertically aligned at the top.

The image isn’t aligned relative to the label’s text. The alignment of the image is specified by the label’s appearance settings (LabelControlAppearanceObject.ImageAlign).

The image is horizontally aligned on the right and vertically aligned at the bottom.

The image is horizontally aligned on the right and vertically aligned at the center.

The image is horizontally aligned on the right and vertically aligned at the top.

The image is vertically aligned at the top, and horizontally aligned at the center.

The image is vertically aligned at the top, and horizontally aligned on the left.

The image is vertically aligned at the top, and horizontally aligned on the right.

The combo box editor whose items can display custom images. The control also allows values from an enumeration to be displayed.

Creates an instance of the image combo box editor.

Gets the class name of the current editor.

The string identifying the class name of the current editor.

Gets or sets the editor’s value.

The object representing the edit value.

Returns the control’s popup window.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.PopupImageComboBoxEditListBoxForm object that represents the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

Gets settings specific to the image combo box editor.

The object containing settings for the current editor.

Gets or sets the selected item.

A selected item.

Locates the first item with the specified description and selects it.

A string value that specifies the item description.

Gets or sets the text displayed in the edit box.

The string displayed in the edit box.

Gets or sets the editor’s value.

The object representing the edit value.

The editor that displays images in a popup window.

Initializes a new control instance with default settings.

Closes the popup window.

Gets the class name of the current editor.

A object identifying the class name of the current editor.

Gets or sets an object representing an image stored by the image editor.

A value representing an image stored by the image editor.

Returns the control’s popup window.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.ImagePopupForm object that represents the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

Sets or gets the image displayed by the editor.

A object representing the image displayed by the editor.

Occurs after the value of the ImageEdit.Image property has been changed.

Gets an object containing settings specific to the image editor.

A object instance containing settings for the control.

Gets or sets an SVG image for an object to display.

An SVG image the object displays.

Gets or sets the colorization mode for the object’s SVG image.

Colorization mode.

Gets or sets the size of SVG images assigned to an object.

The SVG image size.

Gets a value representing the display representation of the editor’s BaseEdit.EditValue property.

A value standing for the display representation of the editor’s edited value.

The list box control that displays a list of items that a user can select. Can be populated with items from a data source.

Creates a new object.

Enables you to sort list items in custom order.

Enumerates possible locations for an image within a control.

The image is vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned in the center.

The image is vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned on the left.

The image is vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned on the right.

The same as MiddleLeft.

The image is centered vertically and horizontally. The control’s text is not displayed in this mode.

The image is vertically centered, and horizontally aligned on the left.

The image is vertically centered, and horizontally aligned on the right.

The image is vertically aligned at the top, and horizontally aligned in the center.

The image is vertically aligned at the top, and horizontally aligned on the left.

The image is vertically aligned at the top, and horizontally aligned on the right.

Stores available draw mode options for Step Progress Bar Item indicators.

Same as Full.

An indicator outline is visible, and the central indicator area is filled with the outline color.

Neither the indicator outline nor central area are visible. If assigned, an indicator icon is the only element visible in this mode.

An indicator outline is visible, and the central indicator area is empty.

Lists values that specify how the label is automatically resized to display its entire contents.

In Visual Studio 2002 and 2003, the same as the None option. In Visual Studio 2005 and more recent versions, the same as the Horizontal option.

The label is automatically resized to display its entire contents horizontally. The label’s size depends only on the length of the text and the font settings, the label cannot be resized by an end-user.

Disables the auto size mode. An end-user is allowed to change both the label’s width and height.

The label’s height is automatically changed to display its entire contents. In this instance, an end-user can change the label’s width while its height is automatically adjusted to fit the label’s text.

The label that supports formatted text, images, multi-line text strings and HTML formatting.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Gets or sets whether the label image is painted based on the label’s foreground color.

true if the label image is painted based on the label’s foreground color; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether HTML formatting is allowed.

true if HTML formatting is allowed; otherwise, false.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the label.

A object which contains the label’s appearance settings.

Provides access to the appearance settings applied when the current label is disabled.

A object that specifies the appearance settings applied when the current label is disabled.

Provides access to the appearance settings applied when the current label is hovered over with the mouse pointer.

A object that specifies the appearance settings applied when the current label is hovered over with the mouse pointer.

Provides access to the appearance settings applied when the current label is clicked.

A object that specifies the appearance settings applied when the current label is clicked.

Gets or sets whether the control displays the ellipsis character for truncated text.

true if the control displays the ellipsis character for truncated text; otherwise, false.

Supports the internal infrastructure. Use the LabelControl.AutoSizeMode property instead.

true if the editor’s width is changed to display the editor’s content in its entirety; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the direction in which the label grows to display its entire contents.

The direction in which the label grows to display its entire contents.

Gets or sets the label control’s background color.

A value that specifies the control’s background color.

Gets or sets the label’s background image. This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

An that represents the label’s background image.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

An value that specifies the position of an image on the control.

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command in the source and bind it to this .

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this .

Binds a command to this .

An Object that is the command bound to this . A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this .

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command of the specific type in the source and bind it to this .

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. The type of a ViewModel that stores a bindable command. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this .

Gets or sets the whose Execute(Object) method will be called when the Click event is invoked.

The command.

Occurs when the CanExecute(Object) status of the has changed.

Occurs after the value of the property has changed.

Gets or sets the parameter that is passed to the command specified by the Command property.

The parameter.

Occurs after the value of the property has changed.

Retrieves the size of a rectangular area into which the control can be fitted.

The custom-sized area for the control. A System.Drawing.Size value.

Returns the Y coordinate of the text base line.

An integer value that specifies the Y coordinate of the text base line.

Gets or sets a collection of images that can be inserted into the label using the image tag.

An image collection (DevExpress.Utils.ImageCollection or DevExpress.Utils.SvgImageCollection).

Occurs whenever an end-user clicks a hyperlink contained within the current .

Gets or sets a value that specifies how the image is aligned relative to the label’s text.

An value that specifies how the image is aligned relative to the label’s text.

Provides access to properties that allow you to set up raster and vector images for this .

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.LabelControlImageOptions object that provides access to image-related settings.

Gets or sets the indent between the image and text of the current .

An value specifying the indent between the image and text of the , in pixels.

Gets or sets the color of the label’s line.

A value that specifies the line’s color.

Gets the location of the LabelControl’s line relative to the text.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.LineLocation value that specifies the line location.

Gets or sets the orientation of the LabelControl’s line.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.LabelLineOrientation value that specifies the line’s orientation.

Gets or sets the paint style of the LabelControl’s line. This property is in effect when a label is painted using any paint theme, except skins.

A value that specifies the paint style of the LabelControl’s line.

Gets or sets whether a line is displayed when the label’s width extends the width of its text.

true to display the line when the label’s width extends the width of its text; otherwise, false.

Gets the label’s plain text, stripping out HTML tags.

A String value representing the label’s text without HTML tags.

Gets the actual auto-size mode.

A value.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether control’s elements are aligned to support locales using right-to-left fonts.

One of the values.

Gets or sets whether the ‘s line has a shadow. This property is in effect when a label is painted using any paint theme, except skins.

true if the ‘s line has a shadow; otherwise, false.

Starts the animation of an animated GIF file being displayed in the label.

Stops animation of an animated GIF file being displayed in the label.

Gets or sets whether an end-user can tab to the label.

true if tabbing moves focus to the label; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the label’s text.

A value that specifies the label’s text.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the label interprets an ampersand character (&) in its Text property to be an access key prefix character.

true if the label doesn’t display the ampersand character and underlines the character after the ampersand in its displayed text and treats the underlined character as an access key; false if the ampersand character is displayed in the label’s text.

Contains appearance settings used to paint a .

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Copies all settings from the appearance object passed as a parameter.

An object or its descendant that represents the source of the operation.

Duplicates this .

An Object that is this ‘s copy.

Copies the activated appearance settings of objects passed as the first parameter to the current object; properties that aren’t activated are set to values specified by the second parameter

An array of appearance objects that specifies the source of the operation. An object that specifies the default appearance settings.

Gets or sets the image to be displayed within the label when the control is disabled.

A object that is displayed when the control is disabled.

Gets or sets the index of the image to be displayed within the label when the control is disabled.

An integer value that represents a zero-based index of an image in the LabelControlAppearanceObject.ImageList collection.

Releases all resources used by the current appearance object.

This method supports the internal infrastructure and is not intended to be called directly from your code.

Gets the image to be displayed in a label control.

An object to be displayed in the label.

Gets the image to be displayed in the label, control according to its state.

The label control’s state. An image to be displayed.

Returns an image displayed in the label.

An object specifying an image displayed in the label.

Gets or sets the image to be displayed within the label when the control is hovered over.

A object that is displayed when the control is hovered over.

Gets or sets the index of the image to be displayed within the label when the control is hovered over.

An integer value that represents a zero-based index of an image in the LabelControlAppearanceObject.ImageList collection.

Stores the image that will be shown inside the .

The image that will be shown inside the .

Gets or sets the alignment of the image within the label.

A enumeration value that specifies the alignment of the image within the label.

Gets or sets the index of the image displayed within the label.

An integer value that specifies the zero-based index of the image displayed within the label.

Gets or sets the source of images to be displayed within the label.

An object that is an image collection providing images for the .

Provides access to the appearance object’s options.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.LabelControlAppearanceObject object containing the appearance options.

Gets or sets the image to be displayed within the label when the control is pressed.

A object that is displayed when the control is pressed.

Gets or sets the index of the image to be displayed within the label when the control is pressed.

An integer value that represents a zero-based index of an image in the LabelControlAppearanceObject.ImageList collection.

Resets all properties to their default values.

The Line view of the chart range control client.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

The scale factor.

Gets or sets whether anti-aliasing (smoothing) is applied to the line view of the chart range control client.

True to apply anti-aliasing to the line view of the chart range control client; False to disable anti-aliasing.

Specifies the width of a line in a .

An integer value specifying the line width (in pixels).

Gets or sets the color used to draw line markers.

A that defines the color used to draw line markers.

Gets or sets the size of markers for data points in a .

An integer value specifying the marker size, in pixels.

Gets or sets a value that specifies the visibility of point markers on a .

true to show markers for each data point; false to hide them.

A control that displays a list of items that a user can select. This control can be populated with items from a data source.

Creates a new object.

Enables you to sort list items in custom order.

Accesses the item collection, when the control is not bound to a data source.

A object representing items within the list box control.

Supplies data for the BaseListBoxControl.DrawItem event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A object that is a storage for pens, fonts and brushes used during painting. An object that stores appearance settings used to paint the item. This value is assigned to the ListBoxDrawItemEventArgs.Appearance property. A Rectangle structure that specifies the bounding rectangle of the item. This value is assigned to the ListBoxDrawItemEventArgs.Bounds property. An Object that is the value of the item. This value is assigned to the ListBoxDrawItemEventArgs.Item property. An integer value that specifies the index of the item. This value is assigned to the ListBoxDrawItemEventArgs.Index property. A DrawItemState enumeration value that specifies the state of the item. This value is assigned to the ListBoxDrawItemEventArgs.State property. A Boolean value that specifies whether the item background is colored according to the currently applied skin, or based on the specified appearance settings. This value is assigned to the ListBoxDrawItemEventArgs.AllowDrawSkinBackground property.

Gets or sets whether the item background is colored according to the currently applied skin.

true if the item background is colored according to the currently applied skin; otherwise, false. The default is true.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the item currently being processed.

A object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the item.

Gets the bounding rectangle of the item being painted.

A structure specifying the painted item’s boundaries.

Gets the index of the item being painted.

An integer value representing the zero-based index of the item being painted.

Gets the value of the processed item.

An object representing the value of the processed item.

Gets the state of the item being painted.

A enumeration member specifying the current state of an item being painted.

A method that handles the BaseListBoxControl.DrawItem event.

The event sender (typically the list box control). A object that contains data related to the event.

A text box editor with a dropdown panel that displays data in a simple table layout.

Creates an instance of the class.

Notifies the accessibility client applications of the specified event for the specified child control.

An event being fired. The identifier of the AccessibleObject. A child that fires the event.

Fires only when the editor SearchMode property equals AutoSearch. In this mode, the editor filters out data source records that do not match the currently entered text, and displays remaining records in the drop-down panel. The AutoSearch event is optional, it allows you to fine-tune the search. See the class description to learn more.

Fires when a search in mode completes.

Fires only when the SearchMode property equals AutoSuggest. In this mode, the editor runs the asynchronous Task assigned in the event handler to retrieve a list of drop-down panel items. See the class description for more information.

Fires after the LookUpEdit.AutoSuggest event is finished. Allows you to additionally customize the editor.

Provides the capability to perform custom painting of grid cells in the drop-down.

Provides the capability to perform custom painting of grid column headers in the drop-down.

Provides the capability to perform custom painting of vertical grid lines in the drop-down.

Provides the capability to perform custom painting of grid rows in the drop-down.

Occurs after the property has been changed.

Gets the class name of the current editor.

The string identifying the class name of the current editor.

Returns the value of the specified column for the currently selected row in the dropdown.

A object identifying the column whose value should be returned. An object representing the column’s value in the current row.

Returns the value of a specific column for the currently selected row in the dropdown.

A string identifying the field whose value should be returned. An object representing the column’s value in the current row.

Occurs when retrieving values for fields not found in the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DataSource.

Returns the control’s popup window.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.PopupLookUpEditForm object that represents the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

Returns a data source row corresponding to the currently selected edit value.

An object that represents a data source row corresponding to the currently selected edit value.

Gets whether the text in the edit box matches the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember field value of any row in the dropdown. This property is for internal use.

true if the text in the edit box matches the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember field value of any row in the dropdown; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the index of the selected row in the dropdown.

The zero-based index of the selected row in the editor’s dropdown. -1 if no row is currently selected, or the data source is not specified.

Occurs after a record(s) in the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DataSource has been changed.

Allows you to explicitly set the expression to filter lookup items.

Specifies settings specific to the current editor.

A object containing settings for the lookup editor.

Allows you to select items based on values in the data source field specified by the property.

Resets selection and caret position in the editor.

Occurs after a user selects an item in the editor’s popup. This event works in Multiple Item Selection mode only.

Occurs before a user selects an item in the editor’s popup. This event works in Multiple Item Selection mode only.

Allows you to post values that correspond to the selected item state to the data source field specified by the property.

Gets the text displayed in the edit box.

The text displayed in the edit box.

The base class for lookup editors.

The DefaultBoolean.Default value.

Gets or sets the lookup editor whose value determines the filter criteria applied to the popup data source of the current lookup editor.

The lookup editor whose value determines the filter criteria applied to the popup data source of the current lookup editor.

When implemented by a class, this method returns a data source row corresponding to the currently selected edit value.

An object that represents a data source row corresponding to the currently selected edit value.

Occurs when a new value entered into the edit box is validated.

Gets an object containing properties and methods specific to a lookup editor.

A object instance containing settings specific to a lookup editor.

Forces the control to invalidate its client area and immediately redraw itself and any child controls.

When this editor operates in AutoSearch Mode (the SearchMode property is set to “AutoSearch”), call this method to clear all cached suggestions and custom highlight regions.

true if suggestions and highlight regions were successfully cleared; otherwise, false.

When this editor operates in AutoSuggest Mode (the SearchMode property is set to “AutoSuggest”), call this method to clear all cached suggestions and custom highlight regions.

Sets the current editor text and triggers the AutoSearch event (LookUpEdit.AutoSearch or GridLookUpEdit.AutoSearch).

The new editor text. This value is passed to the event’s “Text” parameter. true if the editor should select its current text; otherwise, false. true if the event was successfully triggered and the auto-search occurred; otherwise, false.

Sets the current editor text and triggers the AutoSuggest event (LookUpEdit.AutoSuggest or GridLookUpEdit.AutoSuggest).

The new editor text. This value is passed to the event’s “Text” parameter. true if the editor should select its current text; otherwise, false. true if the event was succesfully triggered; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether to suppress the Invalid Value Type warning for all lookup editors in a WinForms application.

to suppress the warning when the editor is bound to a value of incompatible type; , to warn about incompatible type only once; , to warn about incompatible type only once.

Indicates that an operation is going on by continuously scrolling a block from left to right.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets the editor’s class name.

The string that represents the editor’s class name.

Gets an object which contains properties, methods and events specific to marquee progress bar controls.

A object that contains marquee progress bar settings.

Contains utility classes supporting editor masks.

Lists values that specify the type of automatic completion mode used by an editor.

When set to Default, the AutoCompleteType.Strong automatic completion mode is used.

The automatic completion feature is disabled.

When an end-user enters a character in an empty edit box for the first time, the editor automatically fills all the following placeholders with the default values. For placeholders that accept only numeric values, the ‘0’ character is the default. For placeholders that accept alpha characters, the “a” character is the default.

Each time an end-user types a character the editor determines if the following placeholder can be filled automatically. If only a specific character can be inserted in this position the editor automatically displays this character and moves the caret to the right of this character.

Contains settings that affect the functionality of an editor’s mask.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with settings from the specified MaskData object.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Controls.MaskData object whose settings are used to initialize the newly created object.

Occurs after a setting of the current object has been changed.

Copies the settings from the specified object to the current object.

A object whose settings are assigned to the current object.

Gets or sets the automatic completion mode used by the editor in the RegEx mask mode.

An value specifying the automatic completion mode used by the editor in the RegEx mask mode.

Gets or sets whether an editor makes a beep sound when an end-user tries to enter an invalid character.

true if the editor sounds a beep when an end-user tries to enter an invalid character; otherwise, false.

Occurs when a setting of the current object is about to be changed.

Locks the object by preventing visual updates until the EndUpdate method is called.

Gets or sets a character representing a placeholder within a masked editor.

A string whose first character is used as a placeholder.

Creates the default mask manager.

A MaskManager object that represents the default mask manager.

Gets or sets the culture whose settings are used by masks.

A object whose settings are used by masks.

Gets or sets a mask expression.

A string representing a mask expression.

Unlocks the object after a call to the BeginUpdate method and causes an immediate visual update.

Determines whether the current object has the same settings as the specified object.

A object to compare with the current object. true if the object specified by the parameter has the same settings as the current object; otherwise, false.

Gets the hash code (a number) that corresponds to the value of the current object.

The hash code for the current object.

For the Simple, Regular and RegEx mask types this property gets or sets whether an editor can lose focus when a value hasn’t been entered.

true if an editor can lose focus when a value has not been entered; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the mask type.

A value specifying the mask type used.

For the Simple, Regular and RegEx mask types this property gets or sets the character used as the placeholder in a masked editor.

The character used as the placeholder in a masked editor.

For the Simple and Regular mask types this property gets or sets whether constantly displayed mask characters (literals) are included in an editor’s value.

true if the constantly displayed mask characters are included in an editor’s value; otherwise, false.

For the RegEx mask type this property gets or sets whether placeholders are displayed in a masked editor.

true to display placeholders in a masked editor; otherwise false.

Returns the text representation of the current object.

A string that specifies the text representation of the current object..

Gets or sets whether to use mask settings to format the editor’s display text when the editor is not focused.

true to use mask settings to format the editor’s display text when the editor is not focused; false to use formatting settings specified by the property.

Lists values that specify the type of mask used by an editor.

Specifies that the editor uses a custom mask manager. To implement a custom mask manager which will deal with masks in a custom manner create a custom editor and override its CreateMaskManager method. This method should then supply a custom mask manager when the MaskProperties.MaskType property is set to Custom.

Specifies that the editor should accept date/time values and that the mask string must use the DateTime format syntax.

The DateTime mask mode with the caret automatic movement feature. After an end-user enters and completes a specific portion of a date/time value the caret automatically moves to the following part of the date/time value that can be edited.

Specifies that the mask feature is disabled.

Specifies that the editor should accept numeric values and that the mask string must use the Numeric format syntax.

Specifies that the mask should be created using full-functional regular expressions.

Specifies that the mask should be created using simplified regular expression syntax.

Specifies that the mask should use the simplified syntax.

Specifies that the editor should accept time span values.

Specifies that the editor should accept time span values. Supports the caret automatic movement feature.

Allows you to display and edit multi-line text.

Initializes a new control instance with default settings.

Appends the specified string as a new line to .

The new line.

Calculates the control height, in pixels, sufficient to display all lines of the text without the need to scroll it vertically.

An integer value that specifies the control height, in pixels, sufficient to display all text lines.

Gets the class name of the current editor.

A object identifying the class name of the current editor.

Gets or sets the lines of text within a memo edit control.

An array of strings containing the text of a memo editor.

Gets an object containing properties and methods specific to a memo editor.

A object instance containing settings for the control.

Gets or sets whether the control uses an optimized rendering mechanism.

true if the control uses an optimized rendering mechanism; otherwise, false.

The editor to edit multi-line text in a popup window.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Gets the class name of the current editor.

A object identifying the class name of the current editor.

Returns the control’s popup window.

A MemoExPopupForm object that represents the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

Gets or sets the text lines to be displayed in the dropdown window of an extended memo edit control.

An array of lines containing the text of a memo editor.

Gets an object containing settings specific to the extended memo editor.

A object instance containing settings for the extended memo editor.

The text editor that allows you to type a value or choose one of most recently used (MRU) values from a dropdown list.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Occurs before a new item is added to the MRU editor.

Gets the class name of the current editor.

A object identifying the class name of the current editor.

Returns the control’s popup window.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.PopupMRUForm object that represents the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

Gets an object containing settings specific to the MRU editor.

A object instance containing settings for the MRU editor.

Occurs before an item is removed from the editor’s MRU list.

Serves as a base for and classes.

Gets or sets whether the control adjusts its size automatically, to display its buttons in their entirety.

true if the control adjusts its size automatically to display its buttons in their entirety; otherwise, false.

Enables you to perform custom actions when end-users click navigator buttons.

Gets or sets the navigator buttons’ style.

A enumeration member specifying the style applied to the navigator buttons.

Gets the collection of custom buttons.

The collection of custom buttons.

Gets the minimum size that can be applied to the navigator.

A System.Drawing.Size object representing the minimum size of the rectangular region that can be occupied by the navigator.

Provides control over exceptional situations which might occur while navigating/editing records using the data navigator.

Gets or sets a value which specifies whether the navigator can display hints.

true if the navigator can display hints; otherwise false.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the user can move focus to a navigator using the TAB key.

true if the user can move focus to the control using the TAB key; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a value specifying the location of the text displayed within the navigator.

A enumeration member specifying the text location.

Gets or sets the string displayed within the control which identifies the current record and the total number of records.

A string displayed within the Navigator control.

Returns the object which contains internal information used to render the control.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.ViewInfo.NavigatorControlViewInfo object which contains internal information used to render the control.

An individual button displayed within the DataNavigator or ControlNavigator .

Creates a new object.

A NavigatorButtonHelper object implementing the button’s functionality.

Gets the button’s type.

A enumeration member specifying the button’s type.

Indicates whether data records are scrolled repeatedly when this button is held down.

true if data records are scrolled repeatedly when this button is held down; otherwise, false if one click on this button per record scrolled.

Tests whether the object should be persisted.

true if the object should be persisted; otherwise, false.

Serves as a base for the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

An integer value which specifies the zero-based index of the image within the source collection. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.ImageIndex property. true if the button is enabled and a user can perform actions on it; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.Enabled property. true if the button is visible; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.Visible property. A value which represents the text displayed when the mouse pointer is over the button. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.Hint property. An object that contains information which is associated with the button. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.Tag property.

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command in the source and bind it to this navigator button.

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this navigator button.

Binds the specific parameterized command to this navigator button.

An Object that is the command to be bound to this navigator button. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this navigator button.

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command of the target type in the source and bind it to this navigator button.

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. The type of a ViewModel that stores a bindable command. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this navigator button.

Gets the button’s type.

The NavigatorButtonType.Custom value.

Occurs when a user clicks this navigator button.

Gets or sets the whose Execute(Object) method will be called when the Click event is invoked.

The command.

Occurs when the CanExecute(Object) status of the has changed.

Occurs after the value of the property has changed.

Gets or sets the parameter that is passed to the command specified by the Command property.

The parameter.

Occurs after the value of the property has changed.

Gets or sets whether the button is enabled and an end-user can perform actions on it.

true if the button is enabled and an end-user can perform actions on it; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the button’s hint.

A value which represents the text displayed when the mouse pointer is over the button.

Gets or sets the index of the image to display within the button.

An integer value which specifies the zero-based index of the image within the source collection.

Gets the source of images to be displayed within the navigation buttons.

An object which represents the source of images.

Indicates whether data records are scrolled repeatedly when the button is held down.

Always false.

Gets or sets the data associated with the button.

An object that contains information which is associated with the button.

Gets or sets whether the button is visible.

true if the button is visible; otherwise, false.

Supplies data for the NavigatorBase.ButtonClick event.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

A descendant which represents the button clicked. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonClickEventArgs.Button property.

Gets the clicked button.

A descendant which represents the button clicked.

Gets or sets whether you have handled this event and no default action is required.

true to prohibit the button’s default action; false to perform the button’s default action after your event handler is executed.

A method that handles the NavigatorBase.ButtonClick event.

The event sender (typically the descendant). A object containing event data.

Serves as a base for and classes.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

A collection of buttons displayed within the control.

Gets the button at the specified index.

An integer value representing the button’s zero-based index. If negative or exceeds the maximum available index, an exception is raised. A object representing the button at the specified position within the collection.

Serves as the base for and classes.

Creates a new object.

An object implementing the INavigatorOwner interface to which the object belongs. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonsBase.Owner property.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the buttons’ owner.

A object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the buttons’ owner.

Gets or sets the time interval which passes between the moment when an end-user holds down the navigation button and the data records are scrolled repeatedly.

An integer value which specifies the time interval in milliseconds.

Locks the object by preventing visual updates until the EndUpdate method is called.

Returns a value representing a data navigator button.

A enumeration member specifying the button type. A object representing the navigator’s button. null (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no button is found.

Provides access to the collection of built-in buttons displayed in the DataNavigator control.

A object representing the collection of built-in buttons.

Specifies the control’s size.

The System.Drawing.Size object representing the control’s size.

Gets the collection of custom buttons.

A object, which is the collection of custom buttons.

Gets the source of the images that are displayed within the navigation buttons by default.

An object which contains the images displayed within the navigation buttons by default.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Simulates a mouse click action on the specified button.

A object that represents the navigation button.

Draws the text and buttons displayed in the data navigator.

A GraphicsInfoArgs object used to paint.

Specifies whether data records are scrolled repeatedly when the Next, NextPage, Prev or PrevPage button is held down.

true if data records are scrolled repeatedly when the navigation button is held down; otherwise, one click on the navigation button per record scrolled.

Unlocks the object after a call to the BeginUpdate method and causes an immediate visual update.

Returns the index of the button to which the specified point belongs.

A structure representing a point within the navigating control. An object representing the index of the button to which the specified point belongs. null (Nothing in Visual Basic) if the specified point does not belong to a button.

Gets the hint for the button located at the specified point.

Reserved for future use. A structure representing a point within the navigating control. A string value representing the text displayed when the mouse pointer is over the data navigator button which the specified point belongs to. String.Empty if the specified point does not belong to a button.

Gets or sets the source of images to be displayed within the navigation buttons.

An object which represents the source of images.

Redraws the control.

Gets the object that owns this button collection.

An object implementing the INavigatorOwner interface to which the button collection belongs.

Gets the control which owns the current collection.

A descendant which represent the control which owns the current collection.

Gets or sets the number of records by which the current record changes after the PrevPage or NextPage button has been pressed.

An integer value specifying a number of records.

Updates the buttons’ state and the text displayed within the control.

Contains values specifying the text location within the DataNavigator control.

The text is displayed on the left of the buttons, if the RightToLeft property value is false. Otherwise, the text is displayed on the right of the buttons.

The text is displayed between Prev and Next buttons of the DataNavigator control.

The text is displayed on the right of the buttons, if the RightToLeft property value is false. Otherwise, the text is displayed on the left of the buttons.

The text is not displayed.

Contains values specifying the type of buttons displayed in the data navigator control.

Inserts a new record after the last one.

Cancels edits to the current record.

Reserved for future use.

Sets the dataset to the edit state.

Posts edited record value to the associated data source.

Sets the current record to the first record in the data source.

Sets the current record to the last record in the data source.

Sets the current record to the next record in the data source.

When using the DataNavigator, changes the current record position in a data source by the DataNavigatorButtons.PageRecordCount property value upwards. In case of the ControlNavigator, changes the current record position in a data source by the count of visible onscreen records upwards.

Sets the current record to the previous record in the data source.

When using the DataNavigator, changes the current record position in a data source by the DataNavigatorButtons.PageRecordCount property value backwards. In case of the ControlNavigator, changes the current record position in a data source by the count of visible onscreen records backwards.

Deletes the current record and makes the next record the current record.

A custom button within navigator controls.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

The visual position of the current custom button within the combined list of the built-in and custom buttons. This value is assigned to the NavigatorCustomButton.Index property. An integer value which specifies the zero-based index of the image within the source collection. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.ImageIndex property. true if the button is enabled and a user can perform actions on it; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.Enabled property. true if the button is visible; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.Visible property. A value which represents the text displayed when the mouse pointer is over the button. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.Hint property. An object that contains information which is associated with the button. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.Tag property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

The visual position of the current custom button within the combined list of the built-in and custom buttons. This value is assigned to the NavigatorCustomButton.Index property. An integer value which specifies the zero-based index of the image within the source collection. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.ImageIndex property. true if the button is enabled and a user can perform actions on it; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.Enabled property. A value which represents the text displayed when the mouse pointer is over the button. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.Hint property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified visual position, image index and hint.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified visual position and image index.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified image index and hint.

An integer value which specifies the zero-based index of the image within the source collection. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.ImageIndex property. A value which represents the text displayed when the mouse pointer is over the button. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.Hint property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified image index.

An integer value which specifies the zero-based index of the image within the source collection. This value is assigned to the NavigatorButtonBase.ImageIndex property.

Gets or sets the visual position of the current custom button within the combined list of the built-in and custom buttons.

A zero-based value that specifies the visual position of the current custom button within the combined list of the built-in and custom buttons. -1 if the custom button is displayed at the end of this list.

A collection of custom buttons in navigator controls.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

A collection of buttons displayed within the control.

Adds a new custom button to the current collection.

The button added to the collection.

Adds an array of buttons to the current collection.

An array of button to be added to the current collection.

Returns the button at the specified index within the current collection.

An integer value representing the button’s zero-based index. If negative or exceeds the maximum available index, an exception is raised. The button at the specified position within the current collection.

Supplies data for the NavigatorBase.NavigatorException event.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets the navigator’s button which caused the exception when it was pressed.

The button which raised the exception.

A method that handles the NavigatorBase.NavigatorException event of data navigators.

The data navigator control. A object that contains event data.

The ‘s client that renders a lightweight chart with a numeric horizontal axis.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Provides access to the grid options of the numeric chart range control client.

A object containing grid options for the numeric chart client of the range control.

Provides access to the range settings of the numeric chart range control client.

A object that contains settings to customize the range of the numeric chart range control client.

Contains specific settings which define the representation of grid lines and labels in the numeric chart range control client.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Contains the common settings that define the range displayed by a numeric chart client of the range control.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets the maximum value of a numeric chart client range.

A value that is the maximum value of a range.

Gets or sets the minimum value of a numeric chart client range.

A value that is the minimum value of a range.

A ‘s client that supports numeric (integer, double, decimal or float) range selection.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets the end bound of the total range.

An object that is the end bound of the total range.

Gets or sets the start bound of the total range.

An object that is the start bound of the total range.

Gets or sets the ruler increment. This property also specifies the minimum increment for range selection.

An object that is the ruler increment.

An image combo box editor.

Creates an image combo box editor.

Displays images stored in bitmap, metafile, icon, JPEG, GIF, PNG or SVG format. The built-in editor allows users to perform basic edit operations (crop and straighten, adjust brightness, contrast and saturation, etc.)

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Returns information on the context button elements located at the specified point.

A System.Drawing.Point structure which specifies the test point coordinates relative to the control’s top-left corner. A DevExpress.Utils.ContextItemHitInfo object which comprises information about the context button elements located at the test point.

Stops the asynchronous image load initiated by the PictureEdit.LoadAsync method.

Fires when a context button is clicked.

Copies the image currently displayed by the to the clipboard.

Allows you to specify a tooltip shown when the mouse pointer hovers over a context button. This event is only raised for and objects.

Clears the and copies is last image to the clipboard.

Gets a value indicating whether the picture editor is focused.

true if the picture editor has focus; otherwise, false.

Gets the class name of the current editor.

A object identifying the class name of the current editor.

Gets or sets the editor’s value.

An object that is the editor’s value.

Gets the full path to the image that has been loaded using the “Open File” dialog.

The full path to the image that has been loaded using the “Open File” dialog.

Gets the horizontal scroll position, in coordinates of the viewport.

The horizontal scroll position, in coordinates of the viewport.

Gets the horizontal scrollbar.

A object which represents the horizontal scrollbar.

Sets or gets the image displayed by the editor.

A object representing the image displayed by the picture editor.

Occurs after the value of the PictureEdit.Image or PictureEdit.SvgImage property has been changed.

Fires when the Image Editor dialog is closed.

Fires when the Editor dialog is about to be opened. Allows you to customize the dialog and its graphic commands.

Allows you to execute actions when a user loads a file via the control’s context menu. You can handle this event to perform image preprocessing or to load images stored in unsupported formats.

Allows you to execute actions when a user saves the current image via the control’s context menu. You can handle this event to perform image preprocessing or to save the image to a custom image format.

Converts the source image coordinates to the viewport coordinates, taking into account the current zoom level and scroll position.

The source image coordinates to be converted. The viewport coordinates.

Loads the specified image, asynchronously. Security note: Downloading images passed as URLs to the LoadAsync method may create security issues. Review the following help topic and learn how to spot, analyze, and prohibit unwanted download requests: Suppress Control Requests to Download Data from External URLs

The path for the image to display in the . The task.

Fires when an asynchronous image load operation is completed, been canceled, or raised an exception.

Invokes the “Open File” dialog for the editor, allowing an end-user to load an image file.

Gets whether an asynchronous image load is in progress.

true if an asynchronous image load is in progress; otherwise, false.

A DirectX-compatible method that replaces the standard Control.Paint method.

Pastes the image stored in the clipboard to the .

Fires when the context menu is about to be displayed.

Gets an object containing properties and methods specific to the picture editor.

A object instance containing settings for the control.

Displays the Image Editor dialog, which allows users to perform basic edit operations on the image (crop, rotate, brightness and contrast adjustment, etc.).

The DialogResult.OK value if the image has been modified and saved by the PictureEdit control; The DialogResult.Cancel value if changes (if any) made in the editor have been discarded.

Displays the Take Picture dialog, which allows users to take snapshots from a connected webcam.

DialogResult.OK, if the snapshot is taken; DialogResult.Cancel, if no snapshot is taken.

Starts animation of an animated GIF file being displayed in the editor.

Stops animation of an animated GIF file being displayed in the editor.

Sets or gets the vector image displayed by the editor.

A DevExpress.Utils.Svg.SvgImage object representing the vector image displayed by the picture editor.

Gets or sets the colorization mode for the object’s SVG image.

Colorization mode.

Gets or sets the required size of the vector image.

A System.Drawing.Size structure that specifies the required size for rendering the vector image.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the user can tab to the picture editor.

true if the user can focus the picture editor using the TAB key; otherwise, false.

Fires when the Take Picture dialog is closed. Allows you to get the dialog result and captured image, and replace this image.

Fires when the Take Picture dialog is about to be displayed. Allows you to customize the dialog, and specify the camera device and resolution.

Gets a string value identifying the editor’s contents (a representation of the BaseEdit.EditValue property’s value).

A value identifying the editor’s contents.

Updates the position of the editor’s scroll bars, taking into account relevant properties.

Gets or sets whether or not this uses the DirectX Hardware Acceleration.

A DefaultBoolean enum value that specifies whether or not this control employs the DirectX Hardware Acceleration. To enable DirectX hardware acceleration, call the static WindowsFormsSettings.ForceDirectXPaint method and set UseDirectXPaint to DefaultBoolean.True.

Gets the vertical scroll position, in coordinates of the viewport.

The vertical scroll position, in coordinates of the viewport.

Converts the viewport coordinates to the source image coordinates, taking into account the current zoom level and scroll position.

The viewport coordinates to be converted. The source image coordinates.

Gets the vertical scrollbar.

A object which represents the vertical scrollbar.

Fires when the RepositoryItemPictureEdit.ZoomPercent property is changed.

The base class for dropdown editors that support the automatic search functionality.

Gets or sets the text used in an automatic search.

A string that specifies the text used in an automatic search.

Contains settings specific to the current editor.

A object that contains the editor’s settings.

Resets the selection and caret position in the editor.

Serves as the base for editors displaying popup windows.

Creates a new instance of the PopupBaseEdit class.

Indicates whether a mouse click should close this editor’s popup window.

A object representing the clicked control. A structure specifying the mouse pointer coordinates. true if the popup window should remain opened after clicking; otherwise, false.

Fires when the editor’s pop-up is about to be displayed.

Closes the popup window discarding the changes made.

Allows you to perform specific actions with respect to how the popup window was closed.

Closes the popup window accepting the changes made.

Enables you to specify whether the modifications performed within the editor’s popup window should be accepted by the editor.

Gets a value indicating whether the editor has input focus.

true if the editor or its popup window has focus; otherwise, false.

Gets the editor’s type name.

The ‘PopupBaseEdit‘ string always.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Returns the control’s popup window.

A PopupBaseForm object that represents the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Indicates whether a key should be processed by the editor or passed to its container control.

A object specifying the key combination. true if the key should be processed by the editor; otherwise, false

Gets a value indicating whether the popup window is open.

true if the popup window is open; otherwise, false.

Occurs after the editor’s popup window has been opened.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the current ‘s closing behavior.

A PopupCloseMode enumerator value that specifies the current ‘s closing behavior.

Gets settings specific to the popup editor.

The repository item containing settings specific to the popup editor.

Enables you to specify whether an attempt to close the popup window will succeed.

Enables you to specify whether an attempt to open the popup window will succeed.

Updates the editor’s value by copying a value from the editor’s popup window to BaseEdit.EditValue.

Opens the popup window.

Contains values specifying how a dropdown editor’s popup window was closed.

Specifies that the dropdown window was closed because an end-user clicked the editor’s dropdown button.

Specifies that the dropdown window was closed because an end-user pressed the ESC key or clicked the close button (available for , and controls).

Specifies that the dropdown window was closed because an end-user pressed a shortcut used to close the dropdown (the ALT+DOWN ARROW or RepositoryItemPopupBase.CloseUpKey).

Specifies that the dropdown window was closed because an end-user clicked outside the editor.

Specifies that the dropdown window was closed because an end-user selected an option from the editor’s dropdown.

The dropdown panel for the editor.

Creates an instance of the class.

Gets the manner in which the control is docked.

The DockStyle.None value always.

Gets the editor which displays the current popup control.

The object displaying the current popup control; null (Nothing in Visual Basic) if the popup control is not associated with an editor.

Provides access to the owning editor’s repository item.

A object containing settings of the editor whose popup window displays this control.

Gets or sets whether the user can focus this control using the TAB key.

false always.

Gets or sets whether the popup control is visible.

false always.

The editor that allows you to display any controls within its popup window. The popup window is created separately from the editor.

Creates an instance of the class.

Validates the editor.

A enumeration value that specifies how a dropdown editor’s popup window should be closed. true if the editor’s value is valid; otherwise, false.

Gets the editor type name.

The ‘PopupContainerEdit‘ string always.

Returns the control’s popup window.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.PopupContainerForm object that represents the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

Gets settings specific to the current object.

An object containing settings specific to the current editor.

Enables you to specify the textual representation of the editor’s value.

Fires before closing the popup window enabling you to modify the edit value.

Opens the popup window.

Contains values that specify how records are filtered within a grid lookup editor’s popup window. The selected mode is not in effect when the SearchMode property equals either AutoSearch or AutoSuggest.

Selects records that contain the specified sub-string. A search for rows is performed against the column specified by the editor’s Properties.DisplayMember property (RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember).

This option is equivalent to the StartsWith option for and controls in the following cases: 1) users cannot edit text in the text box (RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.TextEditStyle is not set to Standard), 2) users can edit text in the text box and the control automatically completes the entered text (RepositoryItemGridLookUpEdit.AutoComplete or RepositoryItemTreeListLookUpEdit.AutoComplete is enabled). Otherwise, this option is equivalent to the Contains option for the and controls. This option is equivalent to the StartsWith option for the control. This option is equivalent to the Contains option for the control. Users can use the Find Panel to search for keywords. You can use the ColumnViewOptionsFind.FindFilterColumns property to specify grid columns in which to search for keywords.

Selects records whose field values start with the specified string. A search for rows is performed against the column specified by the editor’s Properties.DisplayMember property (RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember).

Contains settings that allow you to customize the behavior of a peek panel, assigned to the control.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A object that owns the newly created object.

Copies all settings from the target object to this .

A object whose property values should be copied to this .

Gets or sets the display location for the assigned to this .

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TokenEditPopupPanelLocation enumerator value that is the display location for the assigned to this .

Resets all properties to their default values.

Gets or sets which end-user actions cause the flyout panel to be displayed.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TokenEditPopupPanelShowMode enumerator value that specifies which end-user actions cause the flyout panel to be displayed.

Gets or sets whether the assigned to the editor’s RepositoryItemTokenEdit.PopupPanel property should be displayed.

true if the assigned to the editor’s RepositoryItemTokenEdit.PopupPanel property should be displayed; otherwise, false.

Serves as a base for progress bar controls.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets the control’s background color.

The control’s background color.$

Gets or sets whether this control can be focused using the TAB key.

true if an end-user can focus the progress bar using the TAB key; otherwise, false.

The control that indicates the progress of lengthy operations.

Creates a new object.

Decreases the progress bar’s position by a specified value.

An integer value to be subtracted from the progress bar’s position.

Gets the editor’s class name.

The string value representing the editor’s class name.

Gets or sets the value representing the progress bar’s current position.

An object value representing the progress bar’s current position.

Increases the progress bar’s current position by a specified value.

An integer value to be added to the progress bar’s current position.

Changes the progress bar’s position by the RepositoryItemProgressBar.Step property value.

Gets or sets the progress bar position.

The progress bar’s current position.

Occurs after the value of the ProgressBarControl.Position property has been changed.

Gets an object containing properties, methods and events specific to progress bar controls.

A object containing progress bar settings.

Gets or sets whether the progress is reflected in the application button in the Windows Task Bar.

true if the progress is reflected in the application button in the Windows Task Bar; otherwise, false.

For internal use.

Contains data for the SearchControl.QueryIsSearchColumn and RepositoryItemSearchControl.QueryIsSearchColumn events.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets the processed column’s caption.

A value that specifies a caption.

Gets the processed field’s data type.

An object that specifies the type of data.

Gets the processed field’s name.

A value that specifies tha field’s name.

Gets or sets whether to search in the processed column.

true to search in the processed column; otherwise, false.

Combines multiple options (radio buttons) into a group that supports selecting one of several options.

Initializes a new control instance with default settings.

Gets or sets whether to automatically calculate the radio group’s size based on its contents.

true to automatically calculate the radio group’s size based on its contents; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the editor’s width is changed to display the control’s first item in its entirety. This property is in effect when the editor resides within a .

true if auto-size mode is enabled; otherwise, false.

Gets the current editor’s type name.

The ‘RadioGroup‘ string always.

Returns the bounding rectangle of the first item’s text.

The bounds of the first item’s text.

Gets the boundaries of the specified item.

A zero-based integer value which specifies the item’s index. A structure which represents the specified item’s boundaries.

Indicates whether a key should be processed by the editor or passed to its container control.

A object specifying the key combination. true if the key should be processed by the editor; otherwise, false

Gets an object providing properties specific to a radio group editor.

A object containing settings for the radio group editor.

Gets or sets the selected item’s index.

The selected item’s index in the RepositoryItemRadioGroup.Items collection; -1 if none selected.

Occurs when changing the index of the selected value in the radio group editor.

Gets or sets the text label associated with a radio group editor.

A value representing the text label associated with a radio group editor.

Supports range selection for any data.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets whether ranges are selected using an animation effect.

true if ranges are selected using an animation effect; false if animation is disabled.

Gets or sets whether the current selection can be dragged within the Viewport (client area).

true if the current selection can be dragged within the Viewport; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the range selection feature is enabled.

true if range selection is enabled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether changing the selected range via the RangeControl.SelectedRange property visually updates the control using an animation effect.

true if the control is updated using an animation effect when the RangeControl.SelectedRange property is changed; otherwise, false.

Scrolls the control so that the selected range is moved to as near the control’s center as possible.

true to scroll the control using an animation effect; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the object that visualizes its data within the RangeControl’s viewport.

An object that visualizes its data within the RangeControl’s viewport.

Provides access to range customization options exposed by the RangeControl.Client.

Range customization options exposed by the RangeControl.Client.

Gets or sets padding for the ‘s contents.

The RangeControl‘s padding.

Gets or sets whether the ‘s contents are faded when out of selected range.

true if the out-of-range contents are faded; otherwise, false.

Gets whether animation is in progress.

true if animation is in progress; otherwise, false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the normalized selected range.

A RangeControlNormalizedRange object that specifies the normalized selected range.

Gets or sets the control’s orientation.

A System.Windows.Forms.Orientation value.

A DirectX-compatible method that replaces the standard Control.Paint method.

Fires when the selected range is changed.

Selects a range from the ‘s minimum bound to its maximum bound.

Gets or sets the selected range.

A object that specifies the selected range’s bounds.

Gets or sets whether the selection is performed via thumbs, flags or both.

The RangeControlSelectionType value that specifies whether the selection is performed via thumbs, flags or both.

Gets or sets whether the graduations and labels are displayed.

true if the graduations and labels are displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the Zoom&Scroll Bar is displayed.

true if the Zoom&Scroll Bar is displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the DirectX Hardware Acceleration is enabled for the Range Control.

A DefaultBoolean enumerator value that specifies whether or not this control employs the DirectX Hardware Acceleration. The DefaultBoolean.Default value is equivalent to DefaultBoolean.True if the static WindowsFormsSettings.ForceDirectXPaint method was called, or to DefaultBoolean.False otherwise.

Gets or sets the maximum scale(zoom) factor.

A double value, greater than or equal to 1, that specifies the maximum scale factor.

Gets the minimum width of the visible range relative to the data total range.

A double value that is the minimum width of the visible range, in relative coordinates.

Gets or sets the current scale (zoom) factor.

A double value, greater than or equal to 1, that specifies the current scale factor.

Gets or sets the start position of the visible range, in relative coordinates.

A double value that is the start position of the visible range, in relative coordinates.

Gets or sets the width of the visible range relative to the data total range.

A double value that is the width of the visible range, in relative coordinates.

The base class for objects that can be embedded into the .

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets the format string used to format flag values.

The format string used to format flag values.

Gets or sets the string used to format ruler values.

A string used to format ruler values.

Gets or sets the parent for the current object.

The parent object.

Lists the values that specify the date-time measurement unit to which the chart’s gridlines and labels of the date-time chart client should be aligned.

Specifies a day as the date-time unit to which chart gridlines should be aligned.

Specifies an hour as the date-time unit to which chart grid lines should be aligned.

Specifies a millisecond as the date-time unit to which chart grid lines should be aligned.

Specifies a minute as the date-time unit to which chart grid lines should be aligned.

Specifies a month as the date-time unit to which chart grid lines should be aligned.

Specifies a second as the date-time unit to which chart gridlines should be aligned.

Specifies a week as the date-time unit to which chart grid lines should be aligned.

Specifies a year as the date-time unit to which chart grid lines should be aligned.

Lists the values that specify the time-span measurement unit to which the chart’s gridlines and labels of the time-span chart client should be aligned.

Specifies a day as the time-span unit to which chart gridlines should be aligned.

Specifies an hour as the time-span unit to which chart grid lines should be aligned.

Specifies a millisecond as the time-span unit to which chart grid lines should be aligned.

Specifies a minute as the time-span unit to which chart grid lines should be aligned.

Specifies a second as the time-span unit to which chart gridlines should be aligned.

The track bar with two sliders that allow a user to select a range of values.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets whether an end-user can drag the selected range with the mouse.

true if a user can drag the selected range with the mouse; otherwise, false.

Gets the editor’s class name.

A string that represents the editor’s class name.

Focuses the specified thumb.

The thumb to focus.

If the left slider has focus, this method moves the slider to the beginning of the track bar (). If the right thumb has focus, the method moves the slider to the left slider position.

If the right slider has focus, this method moves the slider to the end of the track bar (). If the left thumb has focus, the method moves the slider to the right slider position.

Gets an object which contains properties, methods and events specific to track bars.

A object that contains range track bar settings.

Gets or sets the editor’s value.

A object that represents the editor’s value.

Lists thumbs.

The thumb that ends the range.

The thumb that starts the range.

The control to rate specific content.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Occurs when the mouse pointer hovers over a rating scale item and allows you to display a unique hint for that item.

Returns the string value that names the ‘s type.

Return value: RatingControl.

Occurs when an end-user clicks a rating item in this .

Occurs when an end-user moves the mouse pointer away from the rating item area.

Fires when an end-user hovers over a rating item.

Provides access to the object that stores advanced settings.

A object that stores advanced settings.

Gets or sets the current rating.

A Decimal value that is the current rating.

Gets or sets whether a tooltip should be displayed when the mouse pointer is over the control.

true, to display tooltips; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the text label for this .

A String value that is the text label for this .

Contains classes representing repository items that store editor-specific settings.

The base class for objects that contain properties for check editors.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets whether HTML tags can be used to format the text of the control’s items.

true if HTML formatting is allowed; otherwise, false.

Copies properties of the source repository item to the current object.

The source repository item object.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the editor’s width is calculated automatically to fit the editor’s content.

true if the editor’s width is adjusted to fit the text width; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the style used to draw the check editor’s border.

A enumeration value identifying the style used to draw the check editor’s border.

Gets or sets the text label associated with a check editor.

A System.String value representing the text label associated with a check editor.

Gets or sets the horizontal alignment of the checkbox and text.

A value that specifies the horizontal alignment of the checkbox and text.

Gets the class name of the edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

A System.String object identifying the class name of the corresponding editor.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether a focus rectangle is drawn round the entire client region or around the caption text only.

true if a focus rectangle is around the entire client region; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the horizontal alignment of a check box glyph within a check editor.

A DevExpress.Utils.HorzAlignment enumeration value specifying the check box’s horizontal alignment.

Gets or sets the vertical alignment of a check box glyph within a check editor.

A enumeration value specifying the check box’s vertical alignment.

Gets or sets whether the check box is aligned at the center, top or bottom of the control.

A enumeration value specifying the check box’s vertical alignment.

Gets a value indicating whether the check editor functions like a radio button.

true if the check editor represents a radio button; otherwise, false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Contains appearance settings for the calendar visual elements in different states.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

The object that owns these appearance settings.

Specifies the Today, Clear, Ok, and Cancel button appearance settings in the normal state.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the Today, Clear, Ok, and Cancel button appearance settings when the mouse pointer hovers over them.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the Today, Clear, Ok, and Cancel button appearance settings when they are pressed.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the appearance of month headers if the calendar displays multiple months.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the appearance of day cells in the normal state.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the appearance of day cells in the disabled state.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the appearance of day cells when the mouse pointer hovers over them.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the appearance of holiday cells.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the appearance of day cells that do not belong to the current month.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the appearance of day cells in the pressed state.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the appearance of selected day cells.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the appearance of “special” day cells in the normal state.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the appearance of “special” day cells in the disabled state.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the appearance of “special” day cells when the mouse pointer hovers over them.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the appearance of “special” day cells that do not belong to the current month.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the appearance of “special” day cells in the pressed state.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the appearance of selected “special” day cells.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the “today” cell’s appearance settings.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the header appearance settings in the normal state. Use to specify the header visibility.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the header appearance settings when the mouse pointer hovers over it. These settings do not combine with settings in the normal state.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the header appearance settings when it is pressed. These settings do not combine with settings in the normal state.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Gets whether the owner control is being initialized.

true if the owner control is being initialized; otherwise, false.

Gets the owner control.

An object that specifies the owner control.

Specifies the week day abbreviation appearance settings.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Specifies the week number appearance settings.

An object that contains appearance settings.

Lists selection modes available for the end-user.

Multiple dates can be selected.

End-user is allowed to select a single date only.

Contains values that enumerate a Calendar Control’s display modes.

The classic calendar:

An Outlook 2016-inspired calendar style.

The appearance of the calendar is dependent on the current OS.

The calendar that supports the Acrylic and Reveal Highlight effects and allows you to mirror the appearance of the Windows 10 calendar.

The touch-aware date-editing UI: For a control, the control’s mask (see the RepositoryItemTextEdit.Mask inherited property) specifies which date-time columns are displayed in the dropdown calendar. To display time columns, enable the RepositoryItemDateEdit.CalendarTimeEditing option.

The Vista-style calendar:

Implements the basic functionality of the component.

Creates a new object with default settings.

Fires immediately after the repository item collection has been changed.

Provides access to the collection of repository items stored by the repository.

A object

Fires when changing repository item properties residing within the repository.

Enumerates values that specify the type of an editor’s property value.

A object that contains the string representations of the selected item values, separated by a comma (or a custom character) and a space character.

A object that contains the selected item values.

Contains values that specify whether an editor’s edit value or display text is exported, when the editor’s data is exported in XLS and CSV formats.

Either an editor’s value or display text is exported, depending on the editor’s type. For the ImageComboBoxEdit and LookUpEdit controls, their display text is exported. For other editors, their edit values (BaseEdit.EditValue), which sometimes match the display text, are exported.

An editor’s display text is exported.

An editor’s edit value is exported.

Contains values that specify the type of the editor’s property value.

A object that contains property values of selected items separated by the followed by the space character. Enables the multiple item selection.

ValueList if the editor’s property is specified. Value in other cases.

An object from the editor’s .

A List<object> object that contains selected items. Enables the multiple item selection.

Stores repository items to be shared between container controls and components (, , , , etc).

Creates a new class instance.

The owner which creates the persistent repository.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

An object which implements the interface.

Provides access to the collection of repository items stored in the repository.

A object that contains a collection of repository items.

This method supports the internal infrastructure and is not intended to be called directly from your code.

Contains data for the RatingControl.BeforeShowToolTip and RepositoryItemRatingControl.BeforeShowToolTip events.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

For internal use. For internal use.

Gets information about the hit point.

An object that contains information about the hit point.

Gets or sets tooltip content.

A value that specifies tooltip content.

Gets the rating value.

A rating value.

Serves as the base for all repository items.

Creates a new object.

Gets or sets the default action description of the repository item for use by accessibility client applications.

A string which specifies the default action description of the repository item for use by accessibility client applications.

Gets or sets the object’s description used by accessibility client applications.

The object’s description used by accessibility client applications.

Gets or sets the object’s name used by accessibility client applications.

The object’s name used by accessibility client applications.

Gets or sets the object’s accessible role.

The object’s accessible role.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the focus rectangle is displayed within the editor when it has focus.

true if the focus rectangle is displayed when the editor has focus; otherwise, false.

Gets a value which indicates whether the appearance settings used to paint the editor when it’s focused can be used.

true if the appearance settings used to paint the editor when it’s focused can be used; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether HTML tags can be used to format an editor’s text or text of the editor’s items.

A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format an editor’s text or text of the editor’s items.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets whether value scrolling via the Mouse Wheel is supported by the editor.

true if scrolling via the Mouse Wheel is supported by the editor; otherwise, false.

Gets appearance settings used to paint the editor when it is enabled.

A object that contains appearance setting used to paint the editor when it is enabled.

Gets appearance settings used to paint the editor when it is disabled.

A object which provides the appearance setting used to paint the editor when it’s disabled.

Gets appearance settings used to paint the current editor when it is focused.

A object which provides the appearance setting used to paint the editor when it’s focused.

Gets appearance settings used to paint the read-only editor.

A object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the read-only editor.

Copies settings from the repository item specified as a parameter.

A object whose settings are to be copied to the current object.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the editor’s height is calculated automatically to fit the editor’s content.

true if the editor’s height is calculated automatically to fit the editor’s content; otherwise, false.

Notifies the editor that the initialization has been started.

Locks the object by disallowing visual updates until the EndUpdate or CancelUpdate method is called.

Gets or sets the editor’s best fit width.

An integer value that specifies the editor’s best fit width, in pixels.

Gets or sets the editor’s border style.

A enumeration value specifying the editor’s border style.

Unlocks the object after it has been locked by the BeginUpdate method, without causing an immediate visual update.

Fires when clicking the editor.

Creates a copy of the current repository item.

A object (or its descendant) that is a copy of the current item.

Connects the repository item to the specified object.

An object representing the control to which the current repository item is connected.

Gets or sets the context menu for the editor.

A object representing the context menu for the editor.

Creates an editor whose type corresponds to the repository item’s type.

A descendant representing the editor whose type corresponds to this repository item’s type.

Initializes a new instance of the DevExpress.XtraEditors.Drawing.BaseEditorGroupRowPainter class.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Drawing.BaseEditorGroupRowPainter object used to paint the group rows in the XtraGrid.

This member supports the editor library’s internal infrastructure and is not intended to be used in your applications.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Drawing.BaseEditPainter descendant used to paint the editor.

This member supports the editors library’s internal infrastructure and is not intended to be used in your applications.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.ViewInfo.BaseEditViewInfo descendant containing the editor’s view information.

Enables custom display text to be provided for an editor.

Gets the default horizontal alignment of the editor’s content.

A enumeration value specifying the editor content’s default horizontal alignment.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Removes the connection between the repository item and the specified object.

An object representing the control from which the repository item is disconnected.

Provides access to the format settings applied to the editor’s display text. These settings are in effect when the editor does not have input focus.

A object containing the formatting settings applied to the control’s display text.

Fires when the editor is double clicked.

Fires when an object is dropped onto the editor.

Fires when a dragged object enters the editor’s area.

Fires when a dragged object leaves the editor’s area.

Fires repeatedly when dragging an object over the editor.

Gets whether the editor’s value can be changed.

Always true.

Provides access to the settings used to format the edit value when the editor has input focus.

A object containing the formatting settings applied to the edited value when the editor has input focus.

Gets the class name of the editor corresponding to the repository item.

A string value representing the class name of the editor.

Fires when the editor’s property changes.

Gets or sets the time interval between the moment when an end-user stops changing the editor’s value and the RepositoryItem.EditValueChanged event being raised.

An integer value which specifies the time interval in milliseconds.

Gets or sets the default time interval between the moment when an end-user stops changing the editor’s value and the RepositoryItem.EditValueChanged event being raised.

An integer value which specifies the time interval in milliseconds.

Gets or sets the RepositoryItem.EditValueChanged event’s firing mode.

An enumeration member which specifies when the editor’s RepositoryItem.EditValueChanged event should occur.

Fires when the editor’s value is about to be changed.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the edit control can respond to user actions. This property is supported for standalone editors.

true if the editor can respond to user actions; otherwise, false.

Notifies the editor that the initialization has been completed.

Unlocks the object after a call to the BeginUpdate method and causes an immediate visual update.

Fires when the editor receives focus.

Specifies whether the editor’s value or display text is exported when data is exported to XLS and CSV formats.

A enumeration value.

Enables you to format the editor’s value (change the editor’s value when the formatting mechanism is invoked).

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Returns the text representation of the specified value, formatted according to the specified settings.

A object that specifies formatting settings. A value to be formatted. A string that specifies the value’s formatted text representation.

Returns the text representation of the specified value formatted using the editor’s settings.

An object representing the value to be formatted. A string value representing the formatted textual representation of the value specified.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

An object that specifies the type of the current editor.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Returns a hash code.

The hash code for the current object.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Enables you to specify the cursor appearance when dragging this editor’s data.

Fires when the end-user requests help for the editor.

Gets or sets a collection of images that can be embedded in the editor’s display text or the display text of the editor’s items, using the image tag.

An image collection (DevExpress.Utils.ImageCollection or DevExpress.Utils.SvgImageCollection).

Indicates whether a particular key can activate the editor used as an inplace control.

A System.Windows.Forms.Keys enumeration value (or a bitwise combination) specifying the key combination to process. true if the key can activate the editor; otherwise, false.

Indicates whether the editor is currently in design mode.

true if the editor is in design mode; otherwise, false.

Gets a value indicating whether the control has been disposed of.

Gets whether the event is postponed.

true if the event is postponed; otherwise, false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Indicates whether the editor is being loaded.

true if the editor is being loaded, otherwise, false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets a value indicating whether the editor is immediately updated in response to changing its settings.

true if the editor cannot be updated until unlocked; otherwise, false.

Indicates whether the key is handled by the editor or the container control.

A object specifying the key to process. true if the key will be processed by the editor.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Fires when a key is pressed while the editor has focus.

Fires when a character key is pressed while the editor has focus.

Fires when a key is released while the editor has focus.

Fires when the editor loses focus.

Gets the number of objects connected to the current repository item.

An integer value representing the number of repository item connections.

This method supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be called from your code.

Provides access to the stand-alone editor’s look and feel settings. These settings are not in effect for the editor in a bar, ribbon, grid, etc.

A object that contains the editor’s look and feel settings.

Fires when the edit value is first changed since it was last validated.

Fires when a mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is over the editor.

Fires when the mouse pointer enters the editor’s area.

Fires when hot-tracking an editor element.

Fires when the mouse pointer leaves the editor’s area.

Fires when the mouse pointer moves over the editor’s area.

Fires when the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is over the editor.

Fires when the mouse wheel moves while the mouse pointer is within the editor.

Gets or sets the repository item name.

A string value representing the repository item name.

Set the NormalizeDisplayText property to true to correctly process diacritics when selecting rows from a dropdown window in the control.

Gets or sets the text that presents the editor’s null value (null, System.DBNull.Value and RepositoryItemDateEdit.NullDate - for ).

The string displayed in the edit box when the edit value equals null, System.DBNull.Value or RepositoryItemDateEdit.NullDate (for controls).

Gets the editor that owns the repository item.

A descendant that owns the repository item.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Converts an input value (entered by a user or assigned in code) to the value that the editor will store.

Gets or sets the popup window’s location.

A structure which specifies the location of the editor’s popup window.

Gets an object providing properties specific to all editors that can be used inplace within a container control.

A object providing settings common to all editors that can be used inplace, i.e. not standalone.

Fires immediately after a change to one of the editor’s properties.

Fires when the help is provided to accessibility applications.

Fires when dragging the editor’s data allowing you to specify whether dragging should be continued.

Provides the capability to specify whether the key pressed in the editor is processed by the editor or a container control (, , etc.) that displays this editor.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the editor’s value can be changed by end-users.

true if end-users can not modify editor’s value; otherwise, false.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

false always.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used in your applications.

Updates the according to current scale settings. This method is called automatically when the form’s runtime DPI settings differ from those in design-time.

An object with the scale properties.

Gets or sets a for the object.

A for the object.

For internal use.

Gets or sets the data associated with the repository item.

An object that contains the information which is associated with the repository item.

Returns a string that represents the current object.

A value which represents the repository item.

This method supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be called from your code.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets whether to substitute this editor with the single-line text editor in auto-filter rows.

Always false.

Allows you to specify whether the edit value is valid. This event does not occur if the editor’s CausesValidation property is disabled.

Serves as the base for repository items that provide settings for editors that represent a progress bar.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Copies settings of the specified repository item.

A object or its descendant that represents the source of the operation.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the progress bar’s height is changed according to the size of its contents.

true if the progress bar’s height is automatically changed to fit the size of its contents; otherwise false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the indicator’s end color.

A object that represents the end color of the gradient fill.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Gets or sets the maximum height of the progress block.

An integer value that specifies the maximum height of the progress block.

Gets or sets a value that specifies the direction of the progress indicator.

A enumeration value that specifies the direction of the progress indicator.

Gets or sets the amount of space around the progress block.

A System.Windows.Forms.Padding structure that specifies the amount of space around the progress block.

Gets or sets the progress indicator paint style.

The progress indicator paint style.

Gets an object that provides properties specific to the progress bar.

A object that provides settings specific to the progress bar.

Gets or sets whether the control displays the textual representation of the progress bar’s current position.

true, to display the text; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the indicator’s starting color.

A object that represents the starting color for gradient fill.

Gets or sets the orientation of the text within the ProgressBar control.

A value that specifies the orientation of the text within the ProgressBar control.

Represents the class which provides settings common to all spin editors.

Creates a new object.

Gets or sets the index of a button within the button collection which will open the editor’s dropdown window.

An Int32 value specifying the index of a button within the button collection which will open the editor’s dropdown window. The default is 0.

This property is not supported in descendants, except for the object. See RepositoryItemTimeEdit.AllowDropDownWhenReadOnly, to learn more.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the editor’s popup window.

Appearance settings used to paint the editor’s dropdown window.

Copies settings of the specified repository item.

A object representing the source of the operation.

Occurs when the ‘s pop-up window is completely closed.

Occurs when the editor’s pop-up window starts closing.

Gets or sets the key combination used to open and close the ‘s pop-up window.

A object specifying the key combination used to open and close the ‘s pop-up window.

Gets the class name of an editor corresponding to the current repository item.

A string value representing the class name of a corresponding editor.

Gets or sets the RepositoryItem.EditValueChanged event’s firing mode.

An enumeration member which specifies when the editor’s RepositoryItem.EditValueChanged event should be raised.

Occurs after the editor’s popup window has been opened.

This member is not supported.

A enumeration value specifying the border style of the editor’s popup window.

Gets or sets the minimum size of the editor’s dropdown window.

A System.Drawing.Size structure that specifies the dropdown window’s minimum size.

This member is not supported by the class.

Gets an object providing properties specific to the spin edit control.

A object representing settings specific to the spin edit control.

Enables you to specify whether an attempt to close the editor’s popup window will succeed.

Enables you to specify whether an attempt to open the editor’s popup window will succeed.

Gets or sets whether the popup window can be opened by clicking the edit box and whether a single or double click is required.

A value that specifies whether the ‘s pop-up window can be invoked by clicking the edit box.

Gets or sets whether the shadow is displayed for the editor’s dropdown window.

true, to display the shadow for the editor’s dropdown window; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a value specifying which editor button is the spin button used to increment or decrement the edited value.

An integer value representing the spin button’s zero-based index.

Gets or sets whether spin buttons are oriented vertically or horizontally.

A enumeration value that specifies whether spin buttons are oriented vertically or horizontally.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Not supported.

Returns always true

Serves as the base for repository items corresponding to BLOB editors.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Gets whether it is allowed to update popup width.

true if it is allowed to update popup width; otherwise, false.

Copies settings of the specified repository item to the current one.

A object representing the source of the operation.

Gets the editor content’s default horizontal alignment.

The HorzAlignment.Near value always.

Gets the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

A object identifying the class name of the corresponding editor.

Gets or sets the source of images used to indicate whether the editor contains data.

An object which represents the source of images that indicate whether a BLOB editor contains data.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Provides access to the editor’s mask settings.

A object which contains the editor’s mask settings.

Allows you to hide the default OK and Cancel buttons shown in popup menus of class descendants.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the editor’s popup window is sizeable.

true if the editor’s popup window is sizeable; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the size the editor’s popup window should have when first opened.

A System.Drawing.Size structure representing the size of the popup window on its first occurrence.

Gets or sets whether the initial popup width matches the editor or content width.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.PopupWidthMode enumeration value, such as ContentWidth or UseEditorWidth, that specifies whether the initial popup width matches the editor or content width.

Gets an object providing properties specific to a BLOB editor.

A object instance providing settings common to a BLOB editor.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether an identification icon is displayed within the editor’s edit region.

true if a BLOB editor displays an identification icon; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the style in which text is displayed in the BLOB editor’s edit box.

A enumeration value determining editing style.

For internal use.

A Boolean value.

Contains settings specific to a control.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

Gets or sets whether the can enter the Edit mode. If this setting is disabled, the control operates solely in Select mode.

true if the can enter the Edit mode; otherwise, false.

For internal use.

A Boolean value.

Copies all settings from the target to this object.

A object whose settings are to be copied to this object.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the current mode.

A enumerator value that specifies the current mode.

Gets whether the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.GoBack method will take effect if called.

true if the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.GoBack method will take effect if called; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.GoForward method will take effect if called.

true if the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.GoForward method will take effect if called; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.GoUp method will take effect if used at the moment.

true if the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.GoUp method will take effect if used at the moment; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether or not navigating to nodes within this Breadcrumb Edit Control requires an exact node caption match, including the letter cases.

true, navigating to nodes within this Breadcrumb Edit Control requires an exact node caption match; otherwise, false.

Returns the \ character that is the default path separator for a control.

Returns the editor type name.

Return value: BreadCrumbEdit.

Returns a collection that contains all nodes owned by this .

A ReadOnlyCollection that stores all s owned by this .

Gets the object that stores the complete navigation history for this .

A BreadCrumbHistory object that stores the complete navigation history for this .

Gets the position within a collection occupied by the currently used .

An Int32 value that is the position within a collection occupied by the currently used .

Navigates to the previous within the collection.

Navigates to the next object within the collection.

Navigates to the currently selected node’s parent node.

Occurs whenever a node’s drop-down list is hidden.

Provides access to a object that stores the navigation history for this .

A object that stores the navigation history for this .

Gets or sets the position of an image within the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.Images collection that should serve as the default glyph for all non-root nodes.

An Int32 value that is the position of an image within the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.Images collection that should serve as the default glyph for all non-root nodes.

Gets or sets the image collection assigned to this .

An Object that is the image collection assigned to this .

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

This property is not relevant for this class.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Occurs each time a new node is about to be added to the .

Occurs whenever a node owned by this changes.

Fires when a node from this ‘s RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.Nodes collection is clicked.

Occurs whenever an end-user clicks any node drop-down button within this .

Gets or sets the maximum row number a node’s drop-down list can occupy.

An Int32 value that is the maximum row number a node’s drop-down list can occupy.

Provides access to all nodes owned by this control.

A BreadCrumbNodeCollection that stores nodes owned by this control.

Gets the editor that owns this .

A that owns this .

Gets or sets the nodes sequence currently visible within this .

A String value that is the nodes sequence currently visible within this .

Occurs whenever a ‘s path was changed.

Occurs when a path to which the was about to navigate does not pass validation.

Gets or sets the character used to separate node values in a path string.

A String value that is the character used to separate node values in a path string.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Occurs when the editor needs to navigate to a dynamically populated node for the first time.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Resets the history of end-user navigation within this control.

Gets or sets the image used by this ‘s root node.

An Image that is this ‘s root node glyph.

Fires when the root node’s glyph is clicked.

Gets or sets the index of an image within the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.Images collection that should be used as a root node glyph.

An Int32 value that is the index of an image within the RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.Images collection that should be used as a root node glyph.

Gets or sets the last currently selected in this .

A object that is the last node currently selected in this .

Fires when this ‘s RepositoryItemBreadCrumbEdit.SelectedNode changes.

Occurs each time an end-user clicks empty space within this .

Sets a with the target index as the current history item.

An Int32 value that is the specific ‘s position within a parent collection.

Occurs after a node drop-down is shown completely.

Gets or sets whether the root glyph should be displayed.

true if the root glyph should be displayed; otherwise, false.

Fires when the User Action Menu is about to be displayed.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets whether or not all visible nodes in the ‘s drop-down menu nodes should be sorted by their captions.

true if nodes should be sorted by their captions; otherwise, false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

For internal use.

Occurs each time the has to navigate to an unknown node.

An object that contains settings specific to a control. Repository items allow you to embed editors into container controls (for instance, , , ).

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Gets or sets whether to allow users to focus buttons with the keyboard.

true to allow users to focus buttons with the keyboard; otherwise, false.

Copies properties of the source repository item to the current object.

The source repository item object.

Performs specific actions before control initialization.

Occurs when an editor button is clicked.

Occurs when an edit button is pressed within a button editor.

Returns the collection of buttons in the current button editor.

The object providing access to buttons for the button editor.

This member is not supported.

The value identifying the style to draw editor buttons.

Gets or sets the style used to draw editor buttons.

A enumeration value identifying the style to draw editor buttons.

Creates a default button in the button collection.

Allows you to apply custom painting to specific ‘s buttons.

Returns the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

The string identifying the class name of a corresponding editor.

Returns an editor which owns the current repository item object.

A control owning the current repository item.

Returns an object providing properties specific to the button edit control.

The object providing settings common to the current edit control.

Gets or sets whether the RepositoryItemButtonEdit.TextEditStyle property is automatically set to TextEditStyles.Standard, when the editor is displayed within a and .

true if the RepositoryItemButtonEdit.TextEditStyle property is automatically set to TextEditStyles.Standard, when the editor is displayed within a and ; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the style in which text is displayed and edited in the button editor.

The value determining the editing style.

Gets whether to substitute this editor with the single-line text editor in auto-filter rows.

Always true.

Represents a class which stores settings specific to a control.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Copies properties of the source repository item to the current object.

The source repository item object.

Gets the default alignment of the editor’s contents when the editor operates as an inplace control.

The HorzAlignment.Far value.

Gets or sets an edit mask

A string which specifies a mask expression.

Returns the class name of the edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

The string identifying the class name of a corresponding editor.

Returns the text representation of the specified value, formatted according to the specified settings.

A object that specifies formatting settings. A value to be formatted. A string that specifies the value’s formatted text representation.

Returns the editor which owns the current repository item object.

A control owning the current repository item.

This property is not supported by the class.

The Size.Empty value.

Gets or sets the maximum number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point when the dropdown is open.

The maximum number of digits displayed in the fractional part of the value.

Gets an object providing properties specific to the calc edit control.

The object providing settings for the calc edit control.

Gets or sets the value indicating whether the close button should be displayed in the dropdown window.

true if the close button is displayed in the dropdown; otherwise false.

Occurs after the value of the CalcEdit.Value property has been changed.

Represents the class which stores settings specific to the control.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Adds new items that represent elements of the specified enumeration to the editor drop-down, allowing you to specify whether enumeration constant names or integer values are assigned to the item values.

The type of the required enumeration. true if enumeration underlying integer values are assigned to the item values; otherwise, false.

Adds new items that represent elements of the specified enumeration to the editor drop-down.

The type of the required enumeration.

Adds new items that represent elements of the specified enumeration to the editor drop-down.

Adds new items that represent elements of the specified enumeration to the editor drop-down, allowing you to customize item descriptions.

A System.Converter delegate that generates item display captions.

Gets or sets whether HTML tags can be used to format the text of the control’s items.

A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text of the control’s items.

Gets or sets whether users can select multiple items simultaneously within the dropdown.

true to allow users to select multiple items within the dropdown; otherwise, false.

Gets whether it is allowed to update popup width.

true if it is allowed to update popup width; otherwise, false.

Copies settings from the specified object to the current object, allowing you to select whether data-related settings should be copied.

A source repository item object. true to copy data-related settings; otherwise, false.

Copies properties of the source repository item to the current object.

The source repository item object.

Forcibly nullifies the internal data adapter. Call this method before you dynamically provide a data source for the current repository item within a ShownEditor event handler.

Provides access to the settings applied to the context buttons displayed by the editor items.

A DevExpress.Utils.SimpleContextItemCollectionOptions object that comprises settings applied to the context buttons displayed by the editor items.

Provides access to the collection of context buttons displayed by editor items.

A ContextItemCollection object that represents the collection of context buttons.

Enables you to sort items in custom order.

Gets or sets the data source whose items are displayed in the control’s dropdown.

A data source whose items are displayed in the control’s dropdown.

Fires when assigning a new object to the RepositoryItemCheckedComboBoxEdit.DataSource property.

Gets or sets a field name in the bound data source whose contents are to be displayed by the control’s check items.

A string value specifying a field name in a data source.

Fires when assigning a new value to the RepositoryItemCheckedComboBoxEdit.DisplayMember property.

Allows you to manually paint items.

Gets or sets the number of visible items in the dropdown window.

An integer that specifies the number of visible items in the dropdown window.

Gets the class name of an editor corresponding to the current repository item.

The string identifying the class name of a corresponding editor.

Gets or sets whether the editor’s property returns a object that contains the selected item values or a object that contains the string representations of these values, separated by a comma (or a custom character) and a space character.

An enumeration value that specifies the type of the property value.

Gets or sets whether the check states of check items in the dropdown are automatically changed according to the new edit value.

A value that specifies check item synchronization mode.

Returns values of all currently checked items.

A object that stores values of all currently checked items.

Returns an object that specifies checked items.

An object that specifies the edit value. An object that specifies checked items.

Returns the text representation of the specified value, formatted according to the specified settings.

A object that specifies formatting settings. A value to be formatted. A string that specifies the value’s formatted text representation.

Enables you to disable specific items.

Returns items from the RepositoryItemCheckedComboBoxEdit.Items collection. In bound mode, this method populates the item collection before returning it.

A object that contains items.

Gets or sets the paint mode for the selected and hot-tracked items in the CheckedListBoxControl embedded in the dropdown window.

A value that specifies the paint mode for the selected and hot-tracked items.

Gets or sets whether item hot-tracking is enabled in the CheckedListBoxControl embedded in the dropdown window.

true if the item hot-tracking is enabled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets how items in the embedded CheckedListBoxControl are selected when item hot-tracking is enabled.

A value that specifies how items are selected.

Gets or sets whether the incremental search feature is enabled.

true if the incremental search feature is enabled; otherwise, false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets whether the height of items in the drop-down is automatically calculated to fit their entire content.

true if item height is automatically calculated; otherwise, false.

Fires after an item’s check state was changed.

Fires before an item’s check state changes and allows you to cancel the action.

Gets the collection of check items to be displayed in the dropdown.

A collection.

Gets or sets the maximum length of the text that can be displayed in the editor. This property is only in effect for in-place editors.

An integer value that specifies the maximum length of the text that can be displayed in the editor.

This property is not supported by the class.

Provides the capability to change the height of an individual item.

Gets or sets the control to display in the popup window. This member is not supported by the class.

A object.

This event is not supported by the class.

Updates the editor to reflect changes made to a data source.

Gets whether the RepositoryItemPopupContainerEdit.TextEditStyle property is automatically set to TextEditStyles.Standard, when the editor is displayed within a and .

true if the RepositoryItemPopupContainerEdit.TextEditStyle property is automatically set to TextEditStyles.Standard, when the editor is displayed within a and ; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the ‘Select All’ check item is visible.

A string that specifies the ‘Select All’ item’s caption.

Gets or sets whether the ‘Select All’ check item is visible.

true if the ‘Select All’ item is visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the character separating checked items in the edit value, and the resultant text displayed in the edit box.

A separator character.

Creates items in the dropdown to represent elements of the specified set of flags.

A object that specifies the enumeration type representing a bit field (set of flags).

Gets or sets the ‘Select All’ check item’s caption.

A string that specifies the ‘Select All’ item’s caption.

Gets or sets whether the ‘Select All’ check item is visible.

true if the ‘Select All’ item is visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the OK and Cancel buttons in the dropdown are visible.

true if the OK and Cancel buttons in the dropdown are visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether tooltips are displayed for dropdown items whose text is trimmed.

A value that specifies whether tooltips are displayed for items whose text is trimmed.

Gets or sets the sort order.

A SortOrder enumeration member that specifies the order.

Gets or sets whether changing a CheckedComboBoxEdit control’s edit value updates the check states of the control’s items.

true if the editor’s edit value and items in the dropdown are in sync; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the field name in the bound data source whose contents are assigned to item values.

A string value specifying a field name in the data source.

Fires when assigning a new value to the RepositoryItemCheckedComboBoxEdit.ValueMember property.

Represents a repository item which stores settings specific to a control.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Gets or sets whether the check editor supports three check states (‘Unchecked’, ‘Checked’ and ‘Indeterminate’) instead of two (‘Unchecked’ and ‘Checked’).

true if the supports three check states; false if the editor only supports two check states.

Copies the settings of a specific repository item to the current one.

A object representing the source of the operation.

Gets or sets the caption of the current .

A String value that is the caption of the current .

Provides access to options specific to the check box glyph (style, color, size).

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.CheckBoxOptions object that comprises options specific to the check box glyph (style, color, size).

Fires after the CheckEdit.Checked property has been changed.

Fires after the CheckEdit.CheckState property has been changed.

Gets or sets what the checkbox looks like.

A enumeration value specifying what the check box looks like.

Gets or sets the text representation of the RepositoryItemCheckEdit.ValueChecked value.

A string that specifies the text representation of the RepositoryItemCheckEdit.ValueChecked value.

Gets or sets the text representation of the RepositoryItemCheckEdit.ValueGrayed value.

A string that specifies the text representation of the RepositoryItemCheckEdit.ValueGrayed value.

Gets or sets the text representation of the RepositoryItemCheckEdit.ValueUnchecked value.

A string that specifies the text representation of the RepositoryItemCheckEdit.ValueUnchecked value.

Gets the class name of the edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

A object identifying the class name of the corresponding editor.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Converts the value passed as a parameter to the appropriate check state.

A expression (typically, the edited value) to be converted to the appropriate check state. A enumeration value representing the check state to be set.

Converts the check state value passed as a parameter to the appropriate edit value.

A enumeration value representing the check state to be converted to the appropriate edited value. A expression representing the edited value to be set for a check editor.

Gets or sets whether the read only is highlighted when hovered over with the mouse cursor.

true if the read only changes its appearance when hovered over with the mouse cursor; otherwise, false.

Occurs when a hyperlink within the current control’s caption is clicked.

Gets or sets the index of an image in the images collection for the checked state of the check box.

An integer value that specifies the zero-based index of an image in the images collection for the checked state of the check box.

Gets or sets the index of an image in the images collection for the indeterminate state of the check box.

An integer value that specifies the zero-based index of an image in the images collection for the indeterminate state of the check box.

Gets or sets the index of an image in the images collection for the unchecked state of the check box.

An integer value that specifies the zero-based index of an image in the images collection for the unchecked state of the check box.

Provides access to options specifying vector or raster glyphs for the check box in the checked, unchecked and indeterminate states.

A DevExpress.Utils.Drawing.CheckImageOptions object that comprises options specifying vector or raster glyphs for the check box in the checked, unchecked and indeterminate states.

Gets or sets the collection of images that specify the unchecked, checked and indeterminate states of the check box.

An object that represents the collection of images that specify the unchecked, checked and indeterminate states of the check box.

Gets a value indicating whether the check editor functions like a radio button.

true if the check editor represents a radio button; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the check box paint style applied when the editor’s check state is Indeterminate.

The check box paint style in the Indeterminate check state.

Gets or sets the image for the checked state of the check box.

A object that specifies the image displayed instead of the default check box in the checked state.

Gets or sets the image for the indeterminate state of the check box.

A object that specifies the image displayed instead of the default check box in the indeterminate state.

Gets or sets the image for the unchecked state of the check box.

A object that specifies the image displayed instead of the default check box in the unchecked state.

Gets an object providing properties specific to a check edit control.

A object instance providing settings specific to a check edit control.

Allows for custom conversion from the edit value to a check state (checked, unchecked and indeterminate).

Allows for custom conversion from the check state (checked, unchecked and indeterminate) to an edit value.

Gets or sets the index of a logical radio group to which the check editor belongs.

An integer value specifying the non-negative index of a logical radio group owning the check editor.

Gets or sets a value that corresponds to the checked state.

The value associated with the checked state.

Gets or sets a value that corresponds to the indeterminate state.

The value associated with the indeterminate state.

Gets or sets a value that corresponds to the unchecked state.

The value associated with the unchecked state.

Represents a collection of repository items.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified owner.

An object that is the owner of the created collection.

Adds the specified repository item to the end of the collection.

A descendant to be added to the collection. An integer value representing the added item’s zero-based index within the collection.

Creates a new repository item of the specified type and adds it to the end of the collection.

A string value specifying the repository item type by the corresponding editor type name. A descendant representing the new repository item.

Adds an array of repository items to the collection.

An array of descendants to be added to the collection.

Indicates whether the collection contains the specified repository item.

A descendant to locate in the collection. true if the collection contains the specified repository item; otherwise, false.

Returns the specified repository item’s position within the collection.

A descendant to locate in the collection. An integer value representing the item’s zero-based index. -1 if the collection doesn’t contain the specified repository item.

Provides indexed access to repository items.

An integer value representing the item’s zero-based index within the collection. A descendant representing the repository item located at the specified position.

Gets the repository item specified by its name.

A value specifying the name of the desired repository item. A descendant representing the repository item with the specified name. null (Nothing in Visual Basic) if the collection doesn’t contain the specified item.

Removes the specified repository item from the collection.

A descendant representing the repository item to remove.

Contains settings specific to a editor.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Copies properties of the source repository item to the current object.

The source repository item object.

Specifies the alignment of the preview color box within the control’s edit region.

A value specifying the alignment of the preview color box within the control’s edit region.

Occurs after the value of the ColorEdit.Color property has been changed.

Gets or sets whether a simple or advanced dialog is used to pick a custom color.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.ColorDialogType enumeration value, such as Simple or Advanced, that specifies whether a simple or advanced dialog is used to pick a custom color. The Default is Advanced.

Gets or sets the value indicating the type of display text describing the selected color.

The type of display text to represent the selected color.

Gets or sets an array of user-defined colors to display in the Custom panel of the dropdown window.

An array of user-defined colors to display in the Custom panel.

Gets the default alignment of the editor contents when the editor is inplace within a container control.

The HorzAlignment.Near value.

Gets the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

A string identifying the editor’s class name.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Returns the text representation of the specified value, formatted according to the specified settings.

A object that specifies formatting settings. A value to be formatted. A string that specifies the value’s formatted text representation.

Specifies how selected items are highlighted within the control’s popup window.

A value that specifies how selected items are highlighted.

Gets or sets a null color.

The null color.

This property is not supported by the class.

The Size.Empty value.

This property is not supported by the class.

The Size.Empty value.

Gets an object containing settings specific to the control.

The object containing settings for the current control.

Gets or sets whether the Automatic button is displayed in the Custom tab.

true if the Automatic button is displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether an end-user can select a custom color with a color pick dialog (the “Select Color” dialog).

true if a color pick dialog is enabled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the visibility of the Custom tab.

true if the Custom tab is visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the More Colors button is displayed in the Custom tab.

true if the More Colors button is displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the visibility of the System tab that displays colors from the System.Drawing.SystemColors enumeration.

true if the System tab is visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the visibility of the Web tab that displays colors provided by the System.Drawing.Color type.

true if the Web tab is visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a value specifying the type of value returned by the ColorEdit.EditValue property.

true if ColorEdit.EditValue stores the selected color as an integer; false if ColorEdit.EditValue stores it as a System.Drawing.Color structure.

Gets or sets the style in which text is displayed in the control’s edit box.

The value determining the editing style.

Represents a repository item that stores settings specific to a control.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Provides access to the appearance settings used to paint the hot-tracked cell border color.

An object that specifies the appearance settings used to paint the hot-tracked cell border color.

Provides access to the appearance settings used to paint the selected cell border color.

An object that specifies the appearance settings used to paint the selected cell border color.

Copies settings from the object passed as the parameter.

A object whose settings are copied to the current object.

Gets or sets the border color of the box displaying the “Automatic” color.

The border color of the box displaying the “Automatic” color.

Gets or sets the color considered the “Automatic” color, which is selected when an end-user clicks the Automatic button in the Custom tab.

The color considered the “Automatic” color.

Gets or sets the caption of the Automatic button displayed in the Custom tab in the control.

A string that is the caption of the Automatic button displayed in the Custom tab.

Contains settings that affect the appearance of the “Select Color” dialog.

A object that contains settings affecting the appearance of the “Select Color” dialog.

Fires after the “Select Color” dialog has been closed.

Fires when the “Select Color” dialog is about to be displayed.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets the editor’s class name.

A object identifying the class name of the current editor.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets the editor which owns the current repository item object.

A editor owning the current repository item.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Fires the RepositoryItemColorPickEdit.TooltipShowing event.

A object that contains data for the event.

Provides access to colors displayed in the Recent Colors group in the Custom tab.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.ColorPickEditControl.Matrix object that comprises colors displayed in the Recent Colors group in the Custom tab.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the visibility of the Web-Safe tab.

true if the Web-Safe tab is accessible to end-users; otherwise, false.

Provides access to colors displayed in the Standard Colors group in the Custom tab.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.ColorPickEditControl.Matrix object that comprises colors displayed in the Standard Colors group in the Custom tab.

Provides access to colors displayed in the Theme Colors group in the Custom tab.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.ColorPickEditControl.Matrix object that comprises colors displayed in the Theme Colors group in the Custom tab.

Gets or sets how color values are formatted in tooltips.

The display format of color values in tooltips.

Allows you to customize tooltips displayed when the mouse cursor hovers over colors in the Custom and Web-Safe palettes.

Represents a repository item which stores settings specific to controls.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Provides access to the appearance settings used to paint list items in the disabled state.

A object that specifies the appearance settings used to paint list items in the disabled state.

Provides access to the appearance settings used to paint hot tracked list items if items are not automatically selected when hot tracked.

An object specifying the appearance settings used to paint hot tracked list items if items are not automatically selected when hot tracked.

Provides access to the appearance settings used to paint list items in the selected state.

An object that specifies the appearance settings used to paint list items in the selected state.

Copies properties of the source repository item to the current object.

The source repository item object.

Gets or sets a value that specifies whether the auto completion feature is enabled.

true if the auto completion is enabled; otherwise, false.

Performs specific actions before control initialization.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the auto completion feature is case sensitive.

true if the auto completion feature is case sensitive, otherwise false.

Provides access to the settings applied to the context buttons displayed by the editor items.

A DevExpress.Utils.SimpleContextItemCollectionOptions object that comprises settings applied to the context buttons displayed by the editor items.

Provides access to the collection of context buttons displayed by editor items.

A ContextItemCollection object that represents the collection of context buttons.

Enables custom display text to be provided for editor items.

Allows you to assign custom HTML-CSS templates to combo box items.

Allows you to customize templated items dynamically.

Gets a value indicating whether the end-user can navigate through dropdown values by double clicking the edit box.

true if double-clicking the edit box cycles through combo box items; otherwise, false.

Provides the ability to custom paint the items displayed within the combo box editor’s drop down.

Occurs when drawing an item in the dropdown list.

Gets or sets the height of an item in the dropdown list.

The height of an item in the dropdown window, in pixels.

Gets or sets the number of items simultaneously displayed in the dropdown window.

The number of visible items in the dropdown window.

Gets the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

The string identifying the class name of a corresponding editor.

Notifies the editor that the initialization has been completed.

Returns the text representation of the specified value, formatted according to the specified settings.

A object that specifies formatting settings. A value to be formatted. A string that specifies the value’s formatted text representation.

Specifies how selected and hot-tracked items are highlighted within the control’s popup window.

A value that specifies how selected and hot-tracked items are highlighted.

Gets or sets, if the items from the dropdown menu can be hot tracked.

true if the Hot Track feature is enabled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the items in the dropdown are hot-tracked when the mouse pointer moves over them.

true if the items in the dropdown are hot-tracked; otherwise, false.

Occurs when a user clicks an element within an HTML-CSS template.

Occurs when a mouse pointer is over an element of an HTML-CSS template, and a mouse button is pressed.

Occurs when a mouse button pressed over an element of an HTML-CSS template is released.

Stores HTML and CSS-based templates used to render combo box items.

A collection of HTML and CSS-based templates used to render combo box items.

Gets or sets whether the height of items is automatically calculated to fit their entire content.

true if item height is automatically calculated; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets padding within list items.

A structure representing list item internal spacing characteristics.

Provides access to the collection of items displayed in the editor’s dropdown.

The collection of items displayed by the editor.

Allows you to change the height of specific items in the dropdown window.

Gets the editor which owns the current repository item object.

A control owning the current repository item.

Gets an object providing properties specific to the combo box editor.

The object providing settings specific to the combo box editor.

Occurs on changing the index of the selected value in the combo box editor.

Occurs after changing the index of the selected value in the combo box editor.

Gets or sets whether tooltips are displayed for items whose text is trimmed.

A value that specifies whether tooltips are displayed for items whose text is trimmed.

Gets or sets whether the items are sorted.

true to sort items; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the Ctrl key must be pressed when scrolling combo box items.

true if scrolling items requires the Ctrl key to be pressed; otherwise, false.

A repository item storing settings specific to a control.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Gets or sets whether animation effects are applied when switching between calendar views.

true if calendar views are switched using animation effects; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether it is possible to select the extra days that are displayed in the current month calendar, but belong to the previous or next month.

true if t is possible to select the extra days that belong to the previous or next month; otherwise, false.

Contains appearance settings used to paint the calendar’s elements and date cells in various states.

The calendar appearance settings.

Provides access to the appearance settings used to paint disabled dates in the editor’s drop-down.

An AppearanceObject that specifies appearance settings used to paint disabled dates in the editor’s drop-down.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the header panel in the dropdown calendar.

A object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the header panel in the dropdown calendar.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the highlighted header panel in the dropdown calendar.

A object, that contains the appearance settings used to paint the header panel’s text under the mouse pointer.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the text within the dropdown calendar.

A object that contains the appearance settings used to paint the text under the mouse pointer, within the editor’s dropdown.

Provides appearance settings used to paint week numbers.

An object that contains the corresponding appearance settings.

Copies source repository item properties to the current object.

The source repository item object.

Gets or sets whether an end-user can select a date in the dropdown calendar. Disable this setting to allow end-users to enter only the time portions of date-time values (see RepositoryItemDateEdit.CalendarTimeEditing).

true if an end-user can select a date in the calendar; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets that defines the culturally appropriate format for displaying dates and times.

A object that defines the culturally appropriate format for displaying dates and times.

Gets or sets whether an end-user can edit the time portion of a date value in the dropdown calendar.

A value that specifies whether an end-user can edit the time portion of a date value in the dropdown calendar.

Contains settings related to time editing within the DateEdit control’s dropdown calendar.

An object that contains settings related to time editing within the DateEdit control’s dropdown calendar.

Gets or sets the appearance of the calendar in the drop-down window.

A enumearation value that specifies the calendar appearance.

Gets or sets size of calendar cells in the control’s drop-down.

The calendar cell size, in pixels.

Gets or sets the ICalendarCellStyleProvider object that allows you to customize the appearance of certain dates.

The object that allows you to customize the appearance of certain dates.

Gets or sets the number of months displayed horizontally in the dropdown calendar.

The number of months displayed horizontally.

Occurs when drawing day cells in the dropdown calendar.

Allows you to provide custom week day abbreviations.

Allows week numbers to be customized.

Occurs after the value of the DateEdit.DateOnly property was changed.

Specifies how a responds to an attempt to enter an invalid date value.

A value specifying how to respond to an invalid date value.

Occurs after the value of the DateEdit.DateTime property has been changed.

Allows specific dates or date ranges to be disabled in the editor’s drop-down to prevent them from being selected by an end-user.

Allows you to assign an ICalendarDisabledDateProvider object that can disable certain dates to prevent them from being selected by an end-user.

An object that can disable certain dates to prevent them from being selected by an end-user.

Gets the format settings applied to the editor when it is not focused.

A object containing format settings.

Gets or sets whether to draw lines between calendar cells.

true if lines between calendar cells are visible; otherwise, false.

Provides the ability to custom paint day cells in the dropdown calendar.

Provides access to the settings used to format the edit value when the editor has input focus.

A object containing format settings.

Gets or sets an edit mask.

A string specifying a mask expression.

Gets the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

The string identifying the class name of a corresponding editor.

Gets or sets the first day of the week.

A enumeration value specifying the first day of the week.

Gets or sets whether Saturdays and Sundays are highlighted.

true to highlight Saturdays and Sundays; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether today’s date is highlighted in the editor’s drop-down.

A DefaultBoolean enumeration value that specifies whether today’s date is highlighted in the editor’s drop-down.

Gets or sets whether today’s date is highlighted in the editor’s drop-down when selected, or belongs to a selected range of dates.

true if today’s date is highlighted in the editor’s drop-down when selected, or belongs to a selected range of dates; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the editor’s maximum date.

The maximum allowed date.

Use the property instead.

A structure which represents the maximum allowed date.

Gets or sets the editor’s minimum date.

The minimum allowed date.

Use the property instead.

A structure that represents the minimum allowed date.

Gets or sets a value that is interpreted as the null date.

A value interpreted as the null date.

Gets or sets the date and time automatically selected in the editor’s drop-down if the edit value is set to null.

A DateTime object that specifies the date and time automatically selected in the editor’s drop-down if the edit value is set to null (Nothing in VB.NET).

This property is not supported by the class.

The Size.Empty value.

This property is not supported by the class.

The Size.Empty value.

Gets an object providing properties specific to the button edit control.

The object.

Gets or sets the number of months displayed vertically in the dropdown calendar.

The number of months displayed vertically.

Gets or sets whether a single date, or multiple dates can be simultaneously selected.

A enumeration value that specifies whether a single date, or multiple dates can be simultaneously selected.

Gets or sets whether the dropdown calendar contains the Clear button (this button is not supported in CalendarView.TouchUI mode).

true if the dropdown calendar contains the Clear button; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the visibility of month names for each month.

true if the month name is displayed above each month; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the visibility of buttons that let an end-user navigate between months.

A enumeration value that specifies the visibility of buttons that let an end-user navigate between months.

Gets or sets whether the OK button is displayed.

A enumeration value that specifies whether the OK button is displayed.

Gets or sets whether to display the Today button in the dropdown calendar (in Classic and Vista modes).

true if the Today button is visible; otherwise,false.

Gets or sets whether to display week numbers in the dropdown window.

true if the dropdown window displays week numbers; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the visibility of buttons that let an end-user navigate between years.

A enumeration value that specifies the visibility of buttons that let an end-user navigate between years.

Allows you to mark certain dates as “special” dates. These dates will be painted using the dedicated settings provided by the RepositoryItemDateEdit.AppearanceCalendar object.

An object that marks certain dates as “special”.

Gets or sets the width, in pixels, of the edit box in the control’s drop-down that allows end-users to edit the time portion of the edit value.

An integer value that specifies the width, in pixels, of the time portion edit box.

Fires when the Today button is clicked.

Gets or sets the date that is regarded as Today’s date.

The date that is regarded as Today’s date.

Gets or sets the step by which minutes increment in the touch-aware calendar. The value of 60 must be multiple of TouchUIMinuteIncrement.

The number by which minutes increment in the touch-aware calendar.

Gets or sets the step by which seconds increment in the touch-aware calendar. The value of 60 must be multiple of TouchUISecondIncrement.

The number by which seconds increment in the touch-aware calendar.

Gets or sets the initial date grouping View that is enabled when a date editor opens.

A VistaCalendarInitialViewStyle enumeration value that specifies the initial date grouping View that is enabled when a date editor opens.

Gets or sets which date grouping Views are available in Vista display mode.

A value that specifies which date grouping Views are available in Vista display mode.

Gets or sets whether the editor’s dropdown calendar looks and functions like the Date Editor in Windows Vista.

A value that specifies whether the editor’s dropdown calendar looks and functions like the Date Editor in Windows Vista.

Gets or sets whether the DateEdit control’s dropdown calendar contains a time editor for editing the time portion of the date-time value.

A value that specifies whether the dropdown calendar contains a time editor.

Contains settings that control the appearance and behavior of the time editor embedded into the DateEdit control’s dropdown calendar.

A object that contains appearance and behavior settings of the time editor embedded into the DateEdit control’s dropdown calendar.

Gets or sets the length of days of the week abbreviations.

The length of days of the week abbreviations.

Gets or sets a rule which determines the first week of the year.

A enumeration value which determines the first week of the year.

A repository item that stores core settings of the editor.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

If you add custom buttons to the Buttons collection, this property allows you to assign one of these buttons to open and close the editor drop-down menu. See the RepositoryItemPopupBase.ActionButtonIndex property for more details.

An index of a button inside the Buttons collection.

Gets or sets whether an editor can show its drop-down menu when read-only.

Specifies whether read-only editors can show their drop-down menus.

Occurs when the editor drop-down menu is closed. Allows you to identify what caused the menu to close. Equivalent to the DateTimeOffsetEdit.Closed event (see the link for more details).

Fires when the editor drop-down menu is closing and allows you to decide whether changes made by a user should be accepted. See the PopupBaseEdit.CloseUp event for an example.

Allows you to assign a hotkey that closes the editor drop-down menu.

A hotkey that closes the editor drop-down menu.

Gets or sets the active mask expression. This property is synchronized with the “MaskExpression” setting available through the RepositoryItemTextEdit.MaskSettings group.

The active mask expression.

Returns “DateTimeOffsetEdit”.

The editor class name.

Returns the display text of the target value, formatted according to the given settings.

Specifies format settings. A value to be formatted. The formatted display text.

Occurs after the editor shows its drop-down menu. Do not invoke any message boxes within this event handler.

This member is not supported.

Specifies the editor menu border style.

This property is not available for DateTimeOffsetEdit editors.

This property is obsolete (please remove the ‘Properties.’ string from the call).

Gets or sets whether a user can click an editor text box to open the drop-down menu, and whether a single or a double click is required. A single click opens the editor drop-down only when the RepositoryItemButtonEdit.TextEditStyle property equals TextEditStyles.DisableTextEditor.

Specifies whether users can click or double-click the editor to open its drop-down menu.

Gets or sets whether the editor drop-down menu should display a drop shadow.

true, to display a menu shadow; false, to hide it.

This property is not supported for DateTimeOffsetEdit editors.

If an editor drop-down menu is open and a user clicks another UI element on a form, this menu closes and the clicked element fires its Click event. If this property is enabled, the menu closes but the element’s Click event does not occur. This allows you to ensure that users do not accidentally click unwanted elements when they click outside an open drop-down menu to close it.

Specifies whether the editor should suppress mouse events when the menu is open.

For internal use.

Represents the class which stores settings specific to the control.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Copies properties and event handlers of the source repository item to the current object.

The source repository item object.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code. This property is not relevant for this class.

This property is not supported by the class.

A value.

This property is not supported by the class.

A value.

Gets the class name of an editor corresponding to the current repository item.

The string identifying the class name of a corresponding editor.

This property is not relevant for this class.

Gets the collection of items displayed in the dropdown.

A object.

This property is not supported by the class.

A object.

For internal use.

Gets or sets the maximum number of items in the editor’s MRU list.

An integer value that specifies the maximum number of items in the editor’s MRU list.

Gets or sets whether a FontEdit editor only displays the fonts that support the Regular font style.

A Boolean value that specifies whether a FontEdit editor only displays the fonts that support the Regular font style.

Gets or sets whether sample previews are displayed for symbol fonts in the dropdown.

true if sample previews are displayed for symbol fonts in the dropdown; otherwise, false.

This property is not supported by the class.

A value.

For internal use.

Represents the class which provides settings specific to a control.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Copies properties of the specified repository item.

A object representing the source repository item.

Gets or sets the manner in which the window for the process executed by the hyperlink editor should appear on-screen.

A value, specifying the manner in which the window for the process executed by the hyperlink editor should appear.

Gets or sets the caption string displayed in the edit box.

A string value specifying the hyperlink editor’s caption.

The method overrides the base RepositoryItemButtonEdit.CreateDefaultButton method to prevent it from creating a default button.

Gets the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

The string identifying the class name of a corresponding editor.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Returns the text representation of the specified value, formatted according to the specified settings.

A object that specifies formatting settings. A value to be formatted. A string that specifies the value’s formatted text representation.

Returns the foreground color of the link’s text.

A Color used to paint the link’s text.

Gets or sets the alignment of the image displayed within the edit box.

A enumeration member which specifies the image’s alignment.

Gets or sets the image displayed within the edit box.

A object which represents the image displayed within the edit box.

Gets or sets the alignment of the image displayed within the edit box.

A enumeration member which specifies the image’s alignment.

Gets or sets the foreground color of the editor’s display text.

The color of the editor’s display text.

Gets or sets whether the link text color is specified by parent appearance settings.

true if the link text color is specified by parent appearance settings; otherwise, false.

Occurs before hyperlink execution.

Gets or sets the image displayed within the edit box.

A object which represents the image displayed within the edit box.

Gets an object providing settings specific to the current control.

The object providing settings common to the current edit control.

Gets or sets the read-only status of the editor.

true if the end-user cannot modify the editor’s contents; otherwise false.

Gets or sets whether hyperlink functionality is activated a single or double click.

true if the hyperlink functionality is activated by single clicking; otherwise, the user needs to double click the edit box in order to execute the hyperlink command.

Gets or sets a shortcut to activate the hyperlink.

The shortcut used to activate the hyperlink functionality.

Gets or sets whether a click/double-click on the empty space in the edit box invokes the hyperlink’s functionality.

true if a click/double-click on the empty space invokes the hyperlink’s functionality; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the style in which text is displayed and edited in the editor.

The value determining the editing style.

When embedded in a container’s column/cell, allows cell text to be formatted using HTML tags. No editing is supported for these cells.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

This property is not supported by the class.

Assigns property values of the specified object to the corresponding properties of this object.

A object whose property values are copied to the current object.

This property is not supported by the class.

Gets or sets the window state to use when a browser is opened.

One of the enumeration values that indicates whether the process is started in a window that is maximized, minimized, normal (neither maximized nor minimized), or not visible.

This method is not supported by the class.

This property is not supported by the class.

Gets the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

The string identifying the class name of a corresponding editor.

This property is not supported by the class.

Gets whether the editor’s value or display text is exported when data is exported to XLS and CSV formats.

Always ExportMode.DisplayText.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

This property is not supported by the class.

For internal use.

This property is not supported by the class.

Fires when a hyperlink is clicked, and a browser is about to be opened.

This property is not supported by the class.

Provides access to properties specific to the control.

The object comprising properties specific to the control.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Always true.

For internal use.

This property is not supported by the class.

For internal use.

If the label contains a hyperlink, gets or sets whether a single or double click opens a browser.

true, to use a single click to open a browser; otherwise, false.

Gets the style in which text is displayed the editor.

Always TextEditStyles.DisableTextEditor.

For internal use.

This property is not supported by the class.

Represents a repository item which holds settings specific to controls.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Populates this with items generated from values of the specific enumeration. Allows generated items to store numeric enumeration values instead of enumeration constant names.

Populates this with items generated from values of the specific enumeration.

A type of enumeration whose values should be used to generate items.

Populates this with items generated from values of the specific enumeration.

Populates this with items generated from values of the specific enumeration and replaces default item descriptions.

A Delegate that encapsulates a method which replaces generated items’ captions.

Adds image items to the .

The image list to add to the .

Copies properties of the source repository item to the current object.

The source repository item object.

Gets or sets the casing mode according to which a will display the selected value.

A enumerator value that specifies the casing mode.

Initializes a new instance of the DevExpress.XtraEditors.Drawing.BaseEditorGroupRowPainter class.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Drawing.BaseEditorGroupRowPainter descendant used to paint the group rows in the XtraGrid.

Gets the alignment of the editor contents when the editor works as an inplace control.

The HorzAlignment.Near value.

Gets the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

The string identifying the class name of a corresponding editor.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Returns the text representation of the specified value, formatted according to the specified settings.

A object that specifies formatting settings. A value to be formatted. A string that specifies the value’s formatted text representation.

Gets or sets the alignment of item images.

The value that specifies the alignment of item images.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets the collection of items displayed in the dropdown window.

The collection of items for the image combo box editor.

Gets or sets the source of large images.

An object that is an image collection providing large images for the editor’s items.

Gets an object providing properties specific to the image combo box editor.

The object providing settings specific to the image combo box editor.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

true always.

Gets or sets the source of small images.

An object that is an image collection providing small images for the editor’s items.

Gets or sets the style in which text is displayed in the control’s edit box.

The value determining the editing style.

Represents a repository item which stores settings specific to an control.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Copies settings of the specified repository item to the current one.

A object representing the source of the operation.

Gets the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

A object identifying the class name of the corresponding editor.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Occurs after the value of the ImageEdit.Image property has been changed.

Gets or sets the alignment of the image within the image editor.

A enumeration value which specifies the image’s alignment.

Gets or sets how the editor stores the image pasted via the editor’s context menu.

A value representing how an image loaded via the editor’s context menu is stored in the edit value.

Gets an object providing properties specific to an image edit control.

A object instance.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the context menu is displayed when the dropdown window is right-clicked.

true if the context menu is displayed when the dropdown window is right-clicked.

Gets or sets a value specifying how the image is displayed within the image editor.

A enumeration value.

Gets or sets the colorization mode for the object’s SVG image.

Colorization mode.

Contains settings specific to a lookup editor.

Creates and initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets whether a custom value (a value that is not present in the lookup data source) that is entered in the edit box is accepted by the editor (when the value is validated and editor loses focus). This property supports ComboBox mode for the lookup editor.

A value that specifies if custom values are accepted by the editor. The DefaultBoolean.Default property value is equivalent to True.

Adds the checkbox selector column to the lookup.

Gets whether it is allowed to update popup width.

true if it is allowed to update popup width; otherwise, false.

Gets the header panel’s appearance settings.

A object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the column headers.

Copies properties of the source repository item to the current object.

The source repository item object.

Fires when the editor SearchMode property is set to AutoSearch. In this mode, the editor filters out data source records that do not match the currently entered text, and displays remaining records in the drop-down panel. The AutoSearch event is optional, it allows you to fine-tune the search. See the class description to learn more.

Gets or sets the visible column index against which an incremental search is performed in SearchMode.AutoComplete and SearchMode.OnlyInPopup modes.

The zero-based visible column index against which an incremental search is performed.

Fires when a search in mode completes.

Fires when you set the SearchMode property to AutoSuggest. In this mode, the editor runs the asynchronous Task assigned in the event handler to retrieve a list of drop-down panel items. See the class description for more information.

Fires after the AutoSuggest event is finished. Allows you to additionally customize the editor.

Changes the widths of columns in the dropdown, to best fit their contents.

The adjusted total width of the columns in the dropdown.

Specifies the maximum number or rows that are processed when invoking the “best-fit” functionality.

An integer value that specifies the maximum number of rows processed when invoking the “best-fit” functionality.

Gets or sets whether the end-user needs to type text matching the case when performing an incremental search.

true if an incremental search is case sensitive; otherwise false.

Gets or sets the name of the data source field that specifies whether the item is selected.

The name of the data source field that specifies whether the item is selected.

Provides access to the collection of columns displayed in the dropdown window.

A object specifying the columns displayed in the dropdown.

Provides the capability to perform custom painting of grid cells in the drop-down.

Provides the capability to perform custom painting of grid column headers in the drop-down.

Provides the capability to perform custom painting of vertical grid lines in the drop-down.

Provides the capability to perform custom painting of grid rows in the drop-down.

Occurs after the property has been changed.

Gets or sets the height of a row in the dropdown (in pixels).

The height of a single row.

Gets or sets the height of the dropdown (in rows).

The number of visible rows in the dropdown window.

Gets the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

The string identifying the class name of a corresponding editor.

Gets or sets whether the editor’s property returns a selected item, a list of selected items, or a string that combines property values of selected items.

The property type.

Gets or sets whether you can bind the LookUpEdit.EditValue property to a read-only property of a collection type. With this option enabled, the editor calls the collection’s methods to add and remove items.

True to use the collection’s methods to add and remove items.False to create a new collection each time the EditValue property is changed.Default is True if the EditValue property is bound to a read-only property of a collection type.

Finishes the initialization of the LookUp editor’s data source. Call this method when the form is loading, before you start to create columns or obtain column values.

Returns a data source row containing the specified RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember field value.

The value of the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember field for the row to be located. An object representing the data source record containing the specified value. null (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no record with the specified value in the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember field was found.

Returns a data source row containing the specified RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.ValueMember field value.

The value of the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.ValueMember field for the row to be located. An object representing the data source record containing the specified value. null (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no record with the specified value in the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.ValueMember field was found.

Searches for an object that represents the row containing the specified field values.

The value of the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.ValueMember field for the row to be located. An array of objects representing values for additional fields against whose values the search is performed. An array of strings specifying the names of the fields against whose values the search will be carried out. An object representing the data source record containing the specified value. null (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no record is found that matches the given search criteria.

Returns the visible index of the row in a data source that contains the specified value in the specified column.

A object that is the column whose values will be compared with the specified value to locate the required row. A value contained in the required row in the specified column. An integer value that is the row’s zero-based visible index in the data source. -1 if the row was not found.

Returns the visual index of the row in the dropdown that contains the specified value in the specified field.

A string that is the field whose values will be compared with the specified value to locate the required row. A value contained in the required row in the specified field. An integer value that is the row’s zero-based visual index in the dropdown. -1 if such a row is not found.

Gets the value contained in the specified row and column in the dropdown data source.

A object representing the column that contains the required value. An integer value specifying the row’s visual index in the dropdown list. An object representing the value contained in the specified row and column. null if the specified row or column is not found.

Gets the value contained in the specified row and field in the dropdown data source.

A string representing the field name that contains the required value. An integer value specifying the row’s visual index in the dropdown list. An object representing the value in the specified row and column. null if the specified row or field is not found.

Returns the text representation of the specified value, formatted according to the specified settings.

A object that specifies formatting settings. A value to be formatted. A string that specifies the value’s formatted text representation.

Returns a value of the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember field of the row containing the specified RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.ValueMember field value.

The value of the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.ValueMember field for the row to locate. The value of the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember field for the row located.null if no record with the specified value was found (System.DBNull.Value and the data source is a object).

Gets a value of the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember field by multiple key values.

The value of the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.ValueMember field for the row to be located. An array of objects representing values for additional fields against whose values the search is performed. An array of strings specifying names of additional fields against whose values the search is carried out. The value of the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember field for the row located. null if no record with the specified value was found.

Returns the value of the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.ValueMember field for the row whose RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember value matches the specified text.

A text representation of the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember field in the row to locate. The value of the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.ValueMember field for the row located,null if no record with the specified value was found (System.DBNull.Value when the data source is a object).

Returns a value of the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.ValueMember field of the row containing the specified RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember field value.

The value of the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DisplayMember field for the row to locate. The value of the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.ValueMember field for the row located.null if no record with the specified value was found (System.DBNull.Value when the data source is a object).

Gets the index of a specific row in the underlying data source.

A row’s visual position in the dropdown window. This index can be obtained via the RepositoryItemLookUpEdit.GetDataSourceRowIndex method. The index of a specific row in the underlying data source.

Occurs on retrieving values for fields not found in the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DataSource.

Gets or sets which functionality is invoked as a result of clicking a column header within the dropdown.

A value specifying how the editor acts after its column header is clicked.

Specifies how selected and hot-tracked items are highlighted within the control’s popup window.

A value that specifies how selected and hot-tracked items are highlighted.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the items in the popup window are hottracked when the mouse pointer passes over them.

true if the items in the popup window are hottracked when the mouse pointer passes over them; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the rows in the popup window are hot-tracked when the mouse pointer passes over them.

true if the rows in the popup window are hot-tracked when the mouse pointer passes over them; otherwise, false.

Occurs after a record(s) in the RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DataSource has been changed.

Gets or sets the maximum number of characters displayed in the edit box.

The maximum number of characters displayed in the edit box. The minimum value is 10.

Returns the width of the widest column value in pixels (taking the column’s caption into account). This overloaded method uses GraphicsCache for the sake of performance.

The graphics cache. The column being processed. The column width.

Returns the width of the widest column value in pixels (taking the column’s caption into account).

The graphics surface. The column being processed. The a column width.

Gets the editor which owns the current repository item object.

A control owning the current repository item.

Creates columns for all fields available in the lookup data source (RepositoryItemLookUpEditBase.DataSource).

Allows you to provide a custom filter criteria.

Gets or sets how data records in the popup window are filtered.

A enumerator value that specifies how data records in the popup window are filtered.

This property is not supported by the class.

The Size.Empty value.

Gets or sets the width of the dropdown window (in pixels).

The width of the dropdown window.

Allows you to select items based on values in the data source field specified by the property.

Removes the checkbox selector column from the lookup.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

true always.

Gets or sets whether to immediately apply the found value to the editor as a user types a query, or only highlight the found value in the drop-down window.

A enumeration value that specifies the search mode.

Gets or sets whether the LookUp selects the first found item in the drop-down list when the user presses Enter.

True to select the first found item in the drop-down list when the user presses Enter; otherwise, Default or False.

Occurs after a user selects an item in the editor’s popup. This event works in Multiple Item Selection mode only.

Occurs before a user selects an item in the editor’s popup. This event works in Multiple Item Selection mode only.

Gets or sets the character that separates selected items in the edit box.

A separator character.

Allows you to post values that correspond to the selected item state to the data source field specified by the property.

Gets or sets the visibility of column headers.

true if column headers are visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the visibility of vertical lines separating columns in the dropdown.

true if vertical lines separating columns are visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether to display OK and Cancel buttons in the popup.

true to display OK and Cancel buttons in the popup; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the column index against which data is sorted.

The zero-based column index against which data is sorted.

Gets or sets a value that specifies whether users can type in the lookup’s text box.

A TextEditStyles enumeration value.

Gets or sets whether the number of visible data rows limits the height of the dropdown window.

true if the height of the dropdown cannot be greater than the number of data rows; otherwise, false.

Represents the base class that contains settings common to lookup editors.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Gets whether it is allowed to update popup width.

true if it is allowed to update popup width; otherwise, false.

Copies settings of the specified repository item.

A object representing the source of the operation.

Gets or sets the “best-fit” mode for columns in the dropdown window.

A value that specifies the “best-fit” mode for columns in the dropdown window.

Gets or sets the name(s) of the foreign key field(s) by which the popup data source of the lookup editor is filtered. The field must be editable and accept new values (read-only fields are not supported).

The foreign key field name(s). The field must be editable and accept new values (read-only fields are not supported).

Gets or sets the source of data displayed in the dropdown window.

The source of data displayed in the dropdown.

Gets the default alignment of the editor’s contents when the editor operates as an inplace control.

The HorzAlignment.Near value.

Gets or sets the field whose values are displayed in the edit box.

The string identifying the field whose values are displayed in the edit box.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets a string that specifies a key field (or multiple key fields) used for business object identification (when a lookup editor is bound to a business object).

A string that specifies a key field or multiple key fields delimited by the ‘;’ character.

Gets the editor which owns the current repository item object.

A descendant that owns the repository item.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the dropdown window is sizeable.

true if the dropdown is sizeable; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the initial popup width matches the editor or content width.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.PopupWidthMode enumeration value, such as ContentWidth or UseEditorWidth, that specifies whether the initial popup width matches the editor or content width.

Occurs when a new value entered into the edit box is validated.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and cannot be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets whether the dropdown window’s footer region is visible.

true if the footer is visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the style in which text is displayed and edited in the editor.

A value determining the editing style.

Gets or sets whether the LookUp editor automatically detects data type issues and throws an exception.

true to throw an exception when data type issues occur; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether you should use the CTRL+UP-DOWN ARROW/CTRL+MOUSE WHEEL or UP-DOWN ARROW/MOUSE WHEEL combinations to scroll lookup records when the pop-up window is closed.

true if you need to hold down the CTRL key when you use the UP or DOWN ARROW/MOUSE WHEEL combinations; false if the CTRL key should not be pressed.

Gets or sets the field name whose values identify dropdown rows.

The string representing the field name whose values identify dropdown rows.

Contains settings specific to a editor.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Provides access to the appearance settings. Note that some appearance settings (e.g., BackColor) are not in effect since the control is skinned.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.ProgressBarAppearanceObject object that stores appearance settings.

Provides access to the appearance settings applied when the control is disabled.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.ProgressBarAppearanceObject object that stores appearance settings applied when the control is disabled.

Provides access to the appearance settings applied when the control is focused.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.ProgressBarAppearanceObject object that stores appearance settings applied when the control is focused.

Provides access to the appearance settings applied when the control is in a read-only state.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.ProgressBarAppearanceObject object that stores appearance settings applied when the control is in a read-only state.

Copies settings of the specified repository item.

A object or its descendant that represents the source of the operation.

Gets the editor’s class name.

The string that represents the editor’s class name.

Gets or sets the time period that it takes the progress block to move by one chunk across the progress bar.

An integer value that specifies the time period, in milliseconds, that it takes the progress block to move by one chunk across the progress bar.

Gets or sets the width, in pixels, of the progress block.

An value that specifies the width, in pixels, of the progress block.

Gets or sets whether the progress bar animation is paused.

true if the progress bar animation is paused; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the animation mode of the control.

A value that specifies the animation mode.

Gets an object that provides properties specific to the marquee progress bar.

A object that provides settings specific to the marquee progress bar.

Gets or sets whether the control’s animation is stopped.

true if the control’s animation is stopped; otherwise, false.

Represents a class which stores settings specific to a control.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether return characters can be inserted into text.

true if return characters are accepted and processed by a memo editor; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether a user can insert tab characters into text.

true if users can enter tabs in a memo editor using the TAB key; false if pressing the TAB key moves focus to another control.

Copies the settings of a repository item.

A object representing the source object.

Gets a value indicating whether the autoheight feature is enabled.

Always false .

Gets the class name of the edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

A object identifying the class name of the corresponding editor.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Gets or sets the number of lines to be displayed in a memo editor when it acts as an in-place control.

An integer value specifying the number of lines displayed by an in-place memo editor.

Provides access to the editor’s mask settings.

A object which contains the editor’s mask settings.

For internal use.

This property isn’t used.

Gets an object providing properties specific to a memo edit control.

A object instance providing settings common to a memo edit control.

Gets or sets whether the control displays the horizontal and/or vertical scroll bar.

A enumeration value that specifies whether the control displays the horizontal scroll bar, the vertical scroll bar, both, or has no scroll bars.

For internal use.

This property is not supported by the class.

Gets or sets whether the editor automatically wraps words to the beginning of the next line when necessary.

true if the editor automatically wraps words to the beginning of the next line; otherwise, false.

Represents a repository item which stores settings specific to a control.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether a user can insert return characters into text.

true if return characters typed within the dropdown window are accepted and processed by an extended memo editor; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether a user can insert tab characters into the editor’s text.

true if tab characters typed within the dropdown window are accepted and processed by an extended memo editor; otherwise, false.

Copies settings of the specified repository item to the current one.

A object representing the source of the operation.

Gets the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

A object identifying the class name of the corresponding editor.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Gets an object providing properties specific to an extended memo edit control.

A object instance.

Gets or sets a value indicating which scrollbars are displayed within the editor’s dropdown window.

A enumeration value indicating whether 0, 1 or 2 are displayed within the dropdown window.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the text is automatically wrapped at the right margin of the editor’s dropdown window.

true if an editor always wraps text at the right margin.

Represents a class which stores settings specific to a control.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Occurs before an item is added to the MRU editor.

Gets or sets whether close (‘x’) buttons are displayed within dropdown MRU items, allowing an end-user to delete items.

true if close (‘x’) buttons are displayed within dropdown MRU items; otherwise, false.

Copies the settings of a specific repository item to the current one.

A object representing the source of the operation.

Gets or sets a value that specifies whether the auto completion feature is enabled.

true if the auto completion is enabled; otherwise, false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code. This property is not relevant for this class.

Gets the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

A object identifying the class name of the corresponding editor.

Gets or sets a value that specifies whether the popup window is displayed immediately after an end-user has typed a character in the edit box.

true if the popup window is displayed immediately after an end-user has typed a character in the edit box; otherwise, false.

Gets the collection of items displayed by the current MRU editor.

A MRUEditItemCollection object representing a collection of items displayed by the editor.

Loads the RepositoryItemMRUEdit.Items collection with data from the specified stream.

A Stream object that contains items to be loaded.

Loads items from the specified XML file to the RepositoryItemMRUEdit.Items collection.

A string that specifies the full path to the XML file that stores items to be loaded.

Gets or sets the maximum number of items displayed in the editor’s dropdown list.

An integer value specifying the maximum number of items contained by the MRU editor.

Gets an object providing properties specific to a MRU edit control.

A object instance providing settings common to a MRU edit control.

Occurs before an item is removed from the MRU edit.

Saves items from the RepositoryItemMRUEdit.Items collection to a stream.

A stream to which data is saved.

Saves items stored in the RepositoryItemMRUEdit.Items collection to the specified XML file, using the specified encoding.

A string that specifies the full path to the XML file to which data is saved. An object that specifies the text encoding to use.

Saves items stored in the RepositoryItemMRUEdit.Items collection to the specified XML file, using the default encoding.

A string that specifies the full path to the XML file to which data is saved.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether to invoke the RepositoryItem.Validating event when pressing the ENTER key.

true if the RepositoryItem.Validating event is fired when the ENTER key is pressed; otherwise, false

Represents a repository item which provides settings specific to an image combo box control.

Creates a repository item for an image combo box editor.

Represents a repository item which stores settings specific to a control.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Gets or sets whether the pictures being edited are changed using animation. This property is not in effect for in-place editors.

True if the pictures being edited are changed using animation; False if not; Default uses the WindowsFormsSettings.AnimationMode global setting.

Gets or sets whether to dispose of the control’s image when the control is disposed of.

true to dispose of the current image when the control is disposed of; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether a focus rectangle is displayed within the focused picture editor.

true if a focus rectangle is displayed in the focused picture editor; otherwise, false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets whether it is allowed to scroll pictures using the mouse wheel.

A enumeration value that specifies whether it is allowed to scroll pictures using the mouse wheel.

Gets or sets whether an image can be scrolled by dragging it with the mouse. This feature is in effect when scroll bars are enabled via the RepositoryItemPictureEdit.ShowScrollBars property.

true if an image can be scrolled by dragging it with the mouse; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether users can use the mouse wheel and touch gestures to zoom pictures.

true if users can use the mouse wheel and touch gestures to zoom pictures; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether it is allowed to zoom pictures using the mouse wheel.

A enumeration value that specifies whether it is allowed to zoom pictures using the mouse wheel.

Copies the settings of a specific repository item to the current one.

A object representing the source of the operation.

Gets a value indicating whether the auto height feature is enabled.

false always.

Gets or sets the caption displayed in the control and settings used to paint the caption.

A PictureEditCaption object that specifies the caption itself and settings used to paint it in the control.

Fires when a context button is clicked.

Provides access to the settings applied to the context buttons displayed in the control, and panels containing these buttons.

A ContextItemCollectionOptions object that comprises settings applied to the context buttons displayed in the control, and panels containing these buttons.

Provides access to the collection of context buttons displayed in the control.

A ContextItemCollection object that represents the collection of context buttons displayed in the control.

Fires when the CheckContextButton.Checked, TrackBarContextButton.Value or RatingContextButton.Rating property value changes.

Allows you to specify a tooltip shown when the mouse pointer hovers over a context button. This event is only raised for and objects.

Gets or sets the height of the picture editor when it works as an inplace control.

An integer value specifying the height in pixels of an inplace picture editor.

Gets the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

A object identifying the class name of the corresponding editor.

Gets or sets whether the LOD (Level-of-detail) algorithm is used to optimize the display of large images.

true if the LOD (Level-of-detail) algorithm is used to optimize the display of large images; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets an image displayed when an error occurs during an asynchronous image load.

The image displayed when an error occurs during an asynchronous image load.

Provides access to properties that allow you to assign and customize an image displayed when an error occurs during an asynchronous image load.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.PictureEditImageOptions object that stores properties that allow you to assign and customize an image displayed when an error occurs during an asynchronous image load.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Returns how the picture is aligned in the control.

An enumeration value that specifies how the picture is aligned in the control.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Occurs after the value of the PictureEdit.Image property has been changed.

Fires when the Image Editor dialog is closed.

Fires when the Editor dialog is about to be opened. Allows you to customize the dialog and its graphic commands.

Allows you to execute actions when a user loads a file via the control’s context menu. You can handle this event to perform image preprocessing or to load images stored in unsupported formats.

Gets or sets an image displayed during an asynchronous image load.

An image displayed during an asynchronous image load.

Provides access to properties that allow you to assign and customize an image displayed during an asynchronous image load.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.PictureEditImageOptions object that stores properties that allow you to assign and customize an image displayed during an asynchronous image load.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Fires when an asynchronous image load operation is completed, been canceled, or raised an exception.

Gets or sets a custom filter for the Open File dialog.

The Open File dialog’s custom filter. If this property is set to an empty string, the dialog uses a default filter.

Gets or sets the index of the filter currently selected in the Open File Dialog. See this property description for more information: .

Contains settings that customize the Image Editor dialog.

The object that contains settings for the Editor dialog’s customization.

Provides access to settings that enable masked mode and allow you to customize the masked mode behavior.

An object whose settings allows you to enable masked mode and customize the masked mode behavior.

Gets or sets the amount of space, in pixels, between the control’s borders and its content.

A object that contains inner indents between the control’s borders and its content.

Gets or sets the alignment of the image within the picture editor.

A enumeration value specifying the image alignment.

Gets or sets how an image is scaled.

A value that specifies how an image is scaled.

Gets or sets how the editor stores the image pasted via the editor’s context menu.

A value representing how an image loaded via the editor’s context menu is stored in the edit value.

Fires when the context menu is about to be displayed.

Gets an object providing properties specific to a picture edit control.

A object instance providing settings common to a picture edit control.

Gets or sets a custom filter for the Save File dialog.

The Save File dialog’s custom filter. If this property is set to an empty string, the dialog uses a default filter.

Gets or sets the index of the filter currently selected in the Save File Dialog. See this property description for more information: .

Gets or sets whether the context menu contains a command that allows an end user to take a picture from a webcam.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Controls.CameraMenuItemVisibility enumeration value that specifies whether the context menu contains a command that allows an end user to take a picture from a webcam.

Gets or sets whether the control’s context menu contains the Edit command that invokes the Image Editor. The Image Editor allows users to perform basic edit operations and then save the result back to the PictureEdit control.

DefaultBoolean.True if the Edit menu command is available; DefaultBoolean.Default or DefaultBoolean.False if the Edit menu item is hidden.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the context menu is displayed when the picture editor is right-clicked.

true if the context menu is displayed when the editor is right-clicked; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether scroll bars that allow an end-user to scroll the image are enabled.

true if scroll bars that allow an end-user to scroll the image are enabled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the picture editor’s context menu contains zoom-related commands.

A value that specifies if the picture editor’s context menu contains zoom-related commands.

Gets or sets how the image changes size within the picture editor.

The displayed image’s size mode.

This field is obsolete (the control no longer detects if in-place image editors are bound to large byte arrays, and does not show related warnings. Note that operations with “byte[]” images can consume a significant amount of resources and may lead to a severe performance penalty).

Gets or sets the colorization mode for the object’s SVG image.

Colorization mode.

Gets or sets the required size of the vector image.

A System.Drawing.Size structure that specifies the required size for rendering the vector image.

Fires when the Take Picture dialog is closed. Allows you to get the dialog result and captured image, and replace this image.

Fires when the Take Picture dialog is about to be displayed. Allows you to customize the dialog, and specify the camera device and resolution.

Gets or sets whether the is painted grayed out when it’s in the disabled state.

true if the control is painted grayed out when it’s in the disabled state; otherwise, false

Gets or sets the factor that adjusts the default zoom speed via the mouse wheel.

A value that specifies the factor that adjusts the default zoom speed via the mouse wheel. The default is 1.

Gets or sets the factor that adjusts the default zoom speed via the mouse wheel. This property is obsolete. Use the RepositoryItemPictureEdit.ZoomAcceleration property instead.

A value that specifies the factor that adjusts the default zoom speed via the mouse wheel. The default is 1.

Gets or sets whether the CTRL modifier key should be pressed to zoom pictures with the mouse wheel.

A ZoomingOperationMode enumeration value that specifies how zooming can be performed using the mouse wheel.

Gets or sets the zoom percentage of the displayed image.

An integer value that specifies the zoom percentage of the displayed image. The default is 100.

Fires when the RepositoryItemPictureEdit.ZoomPercent property is changed.

Serves as the base for repository items that provide settings for editors with popup windows.

Creates an instance of the class.

Gets or sets a value specifying which editor button will open the editor’s dropdown window.

A zero-based integer specifying the button by its index within the RepositoryItemButtonEdit.Buttons collection.

Gets or sets whether an editor’s dropdown can be displayed when the editor is in the read-only state.

A value that specifies if an editor’s dropdown can be displayed in the read-only state.

Gets appearance settings used to paint the editor’s popup window.

A object with appearance settings used to paint the editor’s popup window.

Copies settings from the repository item specified as a parameter.

A descendant representing the repository item whose settings should be copied to the current repository item.

Fires when the editor’s pop-up is about to be displayed.

Allows you to perform specific actions with respect to how the popup window was closed.

Enables you to specify whether changes are saved or discarded when closing the popup window.

Gets or sets the key combination used to open and close the pop-up window.

A object specifying the key combination used to open and close the popup window.

Fires when a context button is clicked.

Provides access to the settings applied to the context buttons displayed by editor items.

A DevExpress.Utils.SimpleContextItemCollectionOptions object that comprises settings applied to the context buttons.

Provides access to the collection of context buttons displayed by editor items.

A DevExpress.Utils.ContextItemCollection object that represents the collection of context buttons.

Fires when the CheckContextButton.Checked, TrackBarContextButton.Value or RatingContextButton.Rating property value changes.

Creates a default button when the editor is initialized.

Allows you to customize the context buttons for individual items.

Gets the owning editor’s type name.

The ‘PopupBaseEdit‘ string always.

Gets the editor which owns the current repository item object.

A editor owning the current repository item.

Occurs after the editor’s popup window has been opened.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the popup window’s border style.

A enumeration value specifying the popup window’s border style.

Gets or sets the minimum size for the associated dropdown window.

A System.Drawing.Size structure that specifies the dropdown window’s minimum size.

Sets the popup window’s initial size.

A Size value.

Gets or sets the popup window’s width.

An integer value specifying the width of the editor’s popup window.

Gets or sets whether the popup window’s contents are displayed during resize operations.

A ResizeMode enumeration value that specifies whether the popup window’s contents are displayed during resize operations. The ResizeMode.Default value is equivalent to LiveResize.

Gets an object providing properties specific to the popup control.

The object providing settings specific to the popup control.

Enables you to specify whether an attempt to close the editor’s popup window will succeed.

Enables you to specify whether an attempt to open the editor’s popup window will succeed.

Gets or sets whether the popup window can be opened by clicking the edit box and whether a single or double click is required.

A enumeration value.

Gets or sets whether the popup window’s shadow is displayed.

true to display the popup window’s shadow; otherwise, false.

Allows you to suppress mouse events when clicking outside an open popup menu.

true, to suppress mouse events; otherwise, false.

Contains settings that are common to the descendants of the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Copies the settings of the specified repository item.

A object representing the source of the operation.

Gets or sets whether the popup window is displayed immediately after an end-user has typed a character in the edit box.

true if the popup window is displayed immediately after an end-user has typed a character in the edit box; otherwise, false.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and cannot be used directly from your code.

For internal use.

Gets the editor which owns the current repository item.

The control which owns the current repository item.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the dropdown window is sizeable.

true if the dropdown is sizeable; otherwise, false.

For internal use.

Represents a repository item that provides settings for editors.

Creates and initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets whether it is allowed to update popup width.

true if it is allowed to update popup width; otherwise, false.

Copies settings and event handlers from the repository item specified as a parameter.

A descendant representing the repository item whose settings are to be copied to the current item.

Obsolete. Gets or sets whether to close the popup window when another form is opened.

true if the dropdown is closed when another form is opened; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the current dropdown control must be closed when: 1) clicking on a control within another form; 2) clicking outside its bounds, and at the same time, within another non-DevExpress popup window that belongs to the current dropdown control.

true if the dropdown control is closed on a click outside its bounds; otherwise, false.

Gets the alignment of the editor content when the editor works inplace within a container control.

The HorzAlignment.Near value always.

Gets the corresponding editor’s type name.

The ‘PopupContainerEdit‘ string always.

Gets or sets whether this editor automatically focuses a control in its popup window when this window opens. A focused control is the one with the smallest TabIndex property value.

true to automatically focus a control in the popup; otherwise, false.

Returns the text representation of the specified value, formatted according to the specified settings.

A object that specifies formatting settings. A value to be formatted. A string that specifies the value’s formatted text representation.

Gets or sets the control to display in the popup window.

A control to display in the popup window.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether end-users can resize the popup window.

true to allow popup window resizing; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the initial popup width matches the editor or content width.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.PopupWidthMode enumeration value, such as ContentWidth or UseEditorWidth, that specifies whether the initial popup width matches the editor or content width.

Gets an object containing properties, methods and events specific to the control.

The object containing settings for the current control.

Enables you to specify the display text for the editor.

Fires when closing the popup window, enabling you to specify the editor’s value based on the state of controls residing within the popup.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the close button is displayed within the popup window.

true to display the close button; otherwise, false

Gets or sets whether the text box is visible and enabled.

A enumeration value specifying text box availability.

Gets or sets whether the accociated popup control’s minimum size is specified by its MinimumSize property.

true if the popup control’s minimum size is specified by the control’s MinimumSize property; false if the minimum size is specified by the editor’s RepositoryItemPopupBase.PopupFormMinSize property.

Represents a repository item which stores settings specific to a control.

Creates a new object.

Gets or sets whether the progress indicator reflects changes using animation. This property is not in effect for in-place editors.

True if the progress indicator reflects changes using animation; False if not; Default uses the WindowsFormsSettings.AnimationMode global setting.

Not supported.

false always.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the editor when it’s enabled.

An object that provides the appearance setting used to paint the editor when it’s enabled.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the editor when it’s disabled.

An object that provides the appearance setting used to paint the editor when it’s disabled.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the current editor when it’s focused.

A DevExpress.Utils.AppearanceObject object which provides the appearance setting used to paint the editor when it’s focused.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the read-only editor.

A DevExpress.Utils.AppearanceObject object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the read-only editor.

Copies settings of the specified repository item.

A object representing the source of the operation.

Gets the default horizontal alignment of the editor’s content.

A enumeration value specifying the editor content’s default horizontal alignment.

Gets the class name of the control corresponding to the current repository item.

A string value representing the class name of a corresponding editor.

Gets or sets the delay, in milliseconds, between flashes in the flow animation.

An integer value that specifies the delay, in milliseconds, between flashes in the flow animation.

Gets or sets the time, in milliseconds, that it takes the flash to move through the progress indicator in flow animation.

An integer value that specifies the duration, in milliseconds, of the flash movement in flow animation.

Gets or sets whether the progress indicator is displayed using flow animation.

true if the progress indication is displayed using flow animation; otherwise, false.

Obsolete. Use the RepositoryItemProgressBar.FlowAnimationDuration property instead.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Gets or sets the control’s maximum value.

An integer value representing the maximum value.

Gets or sets the control’s minimum value.

An integer value representing the minimum value.

Gets or sets whether to present the current position as a relative value between the RepositoryItemProgressBar.Minimum and RepositoryItemProgressBar.Maximum and format it as a percentage. The RepositoryItemBaseProgressBar.ShowTitle property must be set to true.

true to present the current position as a relative value; false to present the current position as an absolute value.

Occurs after the value of the ProgressBarControl.Position property has been changed.

Gets an object providing properties specific to the ProgressBarControl.

A object providing settings specific to the progress bar.

Gets or sets a value by which a call to the ProgressBarControl.PerformStep method increases the control’s current position.

An integer value by which the progress bar’s position changes.

Represents a repository item which stores settings specific to controls.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Populates this with items generated from values of the specific enumeration and replaces default item descriptions.

A Type of enumeration, whose values should be used to generate items. A Delegate that encapsulates a method which replaces generated items’ captions.

Populates this with items generated from values of the specific enumeration.

A Type of enumeration, whose values should be used to generate items.

Populates this with items generated from values of the specific enumeration.

Populates this with items generated from values of the specific enumeration and replaces default item descriptions.

A Delegate that encapsulates a method which replaces generated items’ captions.

Gets or sets whether the RadioGroup.SelectedIndex and EditValue properties can be out of sync when handling the EditValueChanged event.

true if the RadioGroup.SelectedIndex and EditValue properties can be out of sync when handling the EditValueChanged event; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether value scrolling via the Mouse Wheel is supported by the editor.

true if scrolling via the Mouse Wheel is supported by the editor; otherwise, false.

Copies properties of the source repository item to the current object.

A object whose settings are assigned to the current object.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether the editor’s height is calculated automatically to fit the editor’s content.

true if the editor’s height is calculated automatically to fit the editor’s content; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the indent between the columns of items. This property is in effect if RepositoryItemRadioGroup.ItemsLayout is set to Column (as well as Default), and RepositoryItemRadioGroup.ItemHorzAlignment is set to Near.

An integer value that specifies the indent between the columns of items.

Gets or sets the number of columns displayed within the radio group editor. This property is in effect in Column layout mode (see RepositoryItemRadioGroup.ItemsLayout).

An integer value indicating the number of columns.

Gets the default alignment of the editor’s contents when the editor operates as an inplace control.

The HorzAlignment.Near value.

Gets the owning editor’s type name.

The ‘RadioGroup‘ string always.

Gets or sets whether the focus rectangle is painted around the radio group when the radio group is focused and no radio item is selected.

true if the focus rectangle is painted around the radio group when the radio group is focused and no radio item is selected; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the horizontal distance between adjacent radio items in Flow layout mode (see RepositoryItemRadioGroup.ItemsLayout).

The horizontal distance between adjacent radio items in Flow layout mode.

Gets or sets the vertical distance between radio items in Flow layout mode (see RepositoryItemRadioGroup.ItemsLayout).

The vertical distance between radio items in Flow layout mode.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Gets or sets the horizontal alignment of a radio box glyph within a radio group editor.

A enumeration value specifying the radio box’s horizontal alignment.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or set whether items are aligned at the near edge of the control or justified.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.RadioItemHorzAlignment enumeration value that specifies whether items are aligned at the near edge of the control or justified.

Gets the collection of items displayed by the current radio group editor.

The object representing the collection of items displayed by the editor.

Gets or sets how items are arranged.

A value that specifies how items are arranged.

Gets or set whether items are aligned at the top edge of the control or justified.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.RadioItemVertAlignment enumeration value that specifies whether items are aligned at the top edge of the control or justified.

Gets the editor that owns the repository item.

A control that owns the repository item.

Gets or sets the amount of empty space between the control’s bounds and radio items.

A value that specifies the amount of empty space around radio items.

Gets an object providing properties specific to the radio group editor.

The object providing settings specific to the radio group editor.

Occurs on changing the index of the selected item in the radio group editor.

Contains settings specific to a editor.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets whether value scrolling via the Mouse Wheel is supported by the editor.

true if scrolling via the Mouse Wheel is supported by the editor; otherwise, false.

Gets the editor’s class name.

A string that represents the editor’s class name.

Gets or sets a value by which the position of the left or right slider changes when the user presses the PageUp or PageDown key or the / method is called.

An integer value.

Gets or sets a value by which the position of the left or right slider changes when the user uses arrow keys or the / method is called.

An integer value.

Gets or sets the string used to format the tooltip displaying the minimum and maximum values of the current range.

A string value used to format the tooltip displaying the minimum and maximum values of the current range.

Provides access to advanced settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

Gets or sets whether this ‘s text can be formatted using HTML tags.

A DefaultBoolean enumerator value that specifies whether or not this ‘s text can be formatted using HTML tags.

Copies all the settings from the target to this .

A whose properties are to be cloned to this .

Gets or sets whether the height should be calculated automatically.

true if the height should be calculated automatically; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether this should be automatically sized.

true if this should be automatically sized; otherwise, false.

Occurs when the mouse pointer hovers over a rating scale item and allows you to display a unique hint for that item.

Gets or sets the this ‘s border style.

Gets or sets an image, displayed by a item when this item is checked (selected).

An Image displayed by a item when this item is checked (selected).

Returns the textual representation of the type of the editor that owns this object.

Return value: RatingControl.

Gets or sets whether partly checked glyphs are enabled.

A value that specifies the rating precision.

Gets or sets the value assigned to the first item.

A Decimal value assigned to the first item.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how this should be printed.

Gets or sets the regular rating glyph.

An Image displayed by rating items in their regular state.

Gets or sets the image displayed by hovered items within this .

An Image displayed by hovered items within this .

Gets or sets whether this measures its rating in the opposite direction.

true if this measures its rating in the opposite direction; otherwise, false.

Fires whenever an end-user clicks a rating item within this .

Gets or sets the number of rating items within this .

An Int32 value that is the number of rating items within this .

Gets or sets the distance between neighboring rating items.

An Int32 value that is the distance between neighboring rating items.

Occurs when the mouse pointer leaves the rating item’s bounds.

Occurs when an end-user hovers a rating item within this .

Gets or sets this ‘s padding.

A Padding structure that specifies the distance between the borders and this control’s content.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the rating items’ alignment within the .

A HorzAlignment enumerator value that specifies the rating items’ alignment within the .

Gets or sets the rating item positioning within this .

An DevExpress.Utils.Drawing.ItemLocation enumerator value that specifies the rating item positioning within this

Gets or sets the rating items’ orientation within the .

An enumerator value that specifies the rating items’ orientation within the .

Gets or sets whether the text assigned to the RatingControl.Text property should be visible.

true if the text assigned to the RatingControl.Text property should be visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether a tooltip should be displayed when the mouse pointer is over the control.

true, to display tooltips; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the ‘s text position relative to the rating items.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.RatingTextLocation enumerator object that specifies the ‘s text position relative to the rating items.

Gets or sets the distance between the ‘s rating items and this control’s text.

An Int32 value that specifies the distance between the ‘s rating items and this control’s text.

Gets or sets the difference in two neighboring rating items’ values.

A Decimal value that is the difference in two neighboring rating items’ values.

An item in an editor container’s repository used to create a .

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

This property is not supported by the class.

Gets or sets whether a search is automatically performed on typing text.

true if a search is automatically performed on typing text; otherwise, false.

Copies settings of the specified repository item to the current one.

A object or its descendant that represents the source of the operation.

Starts the control’s runtime initialization.

Provides access to the collection of buttons in the current .

The SearchControlButtonCollection object that represents the collection of objects.

Gets or sets an ISearchControlClient object whose data is filtered using the .

An DevExpress.Utils.ISearchControlClient object whose data is filtered using the .

Creates the default buttons (Search, Clear and MRU).

Gets the class name of an editor corresponding to the current repository item.

The string identifying the class name of a corresponding editor.

Ends the control’s runtime initialization.

This property is not supported by the class.

Gets or sets the comparison operator (Equals, Starts With, and so forth) used to compare the attached control’s items with the query in the search box. This property is only in effect if the is attached to a .

An enumeration value that specifies a comparison operator.

Gets or sets the delay for a search performed automatically on typing text.

A System.Int32 value that specifies the delay for an automatically performed search.

This property is not supported by the class.

Gets or sets whether the text specified by the RepositoryItemTextEdit.NullValuePrompt property is displayed when the editor contains an empty string.

true if the text is displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets the editor that owns the current repository item object.

A editor that owns the current repository item.

This property is not supported by the class.

Allows you to specify columns in the attached data control where the should search for data.

Allows users to choose data fields to search in. This property is in effect when the RepositoryItemSearchControl.ShowSearchByButton property is true.

The list of data fields for users to choose from.

Gets or sets whether the Clear Button is displayed in the

true if the Clear Button is displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the mode in which the Search and Clear buttons are displayed.

A ShowDefaultButtonsMode enumeration value that specifies the mode in which the Search and Clear buttons are displayed.

Gets or sets whether the dropdown button that invokes a list of most recently used search requests is displayed.

true if the dropdown button that invokes a list of most recently used search requests is displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or set whether the Search Button is displayed in the .

true if the Search Button is displayed; otherwise, false.

Allows users to choose data fields to search in. This property is in effect when the RepositoryItemSearchControl.SearchByMembers property contains the fields to search in.

true, to allow users to choose data fields to search in; otherwise, false.

This property is not supported by the class.

Contains settings specific to a control.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Gets or sets whether the sparkline reflects changes to the chart values using animation. This property is not in effect for in-place editors.

True if the sparkline reflects changes to the chart values using animation; False if not; Default uses the WindowsFormsSettings.AnimationMode global setting.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Copies settings of the specified repository item.

A object or its descendant that represents the source of the operation.

Overrides the RepositoryItem.AutoHeight property to hide it.

Always false.

Gets or sets the data source for the control.

A System.Object class descendant which represents a datasource for a sparkline.

Gets the class name of an editor corresponding to the current repository item.

The string identifying the class name of a corresponding editor.

Gets or sets the name of a data field containing the sparkline’s edit value.

A string value specifying a field name in the data source.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Specifies the internal space between the editor’s content and its edge, in pixels.

A value.

Gets or sets the name of a data field containing values for sorting sparkline data points.

A string value specifying a field name in the data source.

Specifies how data points are sorted.

A enumeration value.

Gets or sets the name of a data field containing values for sparkline data points.

A string value specifying a field name in the data source.

Provides access to the range settings.

A object that specifies range settings for the control.

Gets or sets the view used to represent sparkline data.

A class descendant.

Represents a repository item which stores settings specific to a control.

Creates a new object.

Copies settings of the specified repository item to the current one.

A object representing the source of the operation.

Gets the default horizontal alignment of the editor contents when the editor works inplace within a container control.

A enumeration member specifying the default horizontal alignment of the editor’s contents.

Gets or sets an edit mask.

A string which specifies a mask expression.

Gets the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

A string value representing the class name of a corresponding editor.

Gets or sets the unit value by which the editor’s value changes when a user clicks a spin button or presses the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key.

A decimal value that specifies the unit value.

Gets or sets whether a user can input decimal or integer numbers only.

true to allow users to enter decimal values; false to allow users to enter integer values only.

Gets or sets the editor’s maximum value.

A decimal value representing the editor’s maximum value.

Gets or sets the editor’s minimum value.

A decimal value representing the editor’s minimum value.

Gets an object providing properties specific to the spin editor.

A object providing settings specific to the spin editor.

Occurs after the value of the SpinEdit.Value property has been changed.

Represents a repository item which contains settings specific to editors.

Creates a new object with default settings.

Gets or sets whether the context image is changed using animation. This property is not in effect for in-place editors.

True if the context image is changed using animation; False if not; Default uses the WindowsFormsSettings.AnimationMode global setting.

Gets or sets whether this can colorize its icons.

A enumerator value that specifies whether or not this can colorize its icons. The DefaultBoolean.Default value is identical to DefaultBoolean.False.

Gets or sets whether value scrolling via the Mouse Wheel is supported by the editor.

true if scrolling via the Mouse Wheel is supported by the editor; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether end users can reset the editor’s value to null with the keyboard.

A value that specifies if end-users can set the editor’s value to a null reference.

Copies properties of the source repository item to the current object.

The source repository item object.

Gets or sets whether the masked editor should play a system error sound when a user enters an invalid character (for example, a literal in an editor with a Numeric mask). This property replaces the property in v20.2 and newer.

true, to play a system error sound when a user enters an invalid character; false, to ignore it.

Occurs before the editor’s context menu is displayed.

Gets or sets the character casing applied to the editor’s content.

A enumeration value specifying the character casing applied.

Gets or sets a custom image displayed at the editor’s edge, specified by the RepositoryItemTextEdit.ContextImageAlignment property.

A custom image displayed at the editor’s edge.

Gets or sets the alignment of an image displayed by this editor.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.ContextImageAlignment enumerator value that specifies the alignment of an image displayed by this editor.

Provides access to all properties that allow you to assign and customize a custom image displayed at the editor’s edge.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.ContextImageOptions object that stores all properties that allow you to assign and customize a custom image displayed at the editor’s edge.

Allows you to highlight or custom paint strings within the control’s text. This event is supported in Advanced mode (see RepositoryItemTextEdit.UseAdvancedMode).

Allows you to dynamically supply custom auto-complete text suggestions each time a user types a new word in the text box. This event is in effect in advanced mode when the AutoCompleteSource option is set to CustomSource, and the AutoCompleteMode option is set to SuggestSingleWord.

Allows you to specify the height of a line of text in Advanced Mode.

Shows the Mask Editor dialog at runtime. Users can utilize this dialog to apply standard or custom masks to this editor.

The optional parameter that allows you to use a custom value in the preview section of the “Create New Mask…” dialog. true if a user chose a new mask type or format, false if mask settings were not changed.

Gets the corresponding editor’s type name.

The ‘TextEdit‘ string always.

Allows you to manually control user edits, and modify them according to your custom logic.

The Action of the CustomTextMaskInputArgs type that allows you to track and modify user changes, and set up final editor text. The tag passed to the Action (assigned to the CustomTextMaskInputArgs.Tag property). If not set, the BaseEdit.Tag property value is used.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Gets or sets whether the selection is hidden when moving focus to another control.

true if the selection in the editor is hidden when moving focus to another control; otherwise, false.

Specifies the editor’s input mask. From v20.2, use the property to specify an input mask.

A object that comprises the editor’s mask settings.

Gets or sets the amount of space around the text box embedded in the .

A System.Windows.Forms.Padding structure that specifies the amount of space around the editor’s text box.

Provides access to settings that allow you to create input masks. This property replaces the property beginning with v20.2. See the following help topic for more information: Input Masks.

Gets or sets the maximum number of characters an end-user can enter into the editor.

A positive integer specifying the maximum number of characters end-users can enter. 0 to disable the text length limit.

Gets or sets the maximum number of characters in the automatically generated tooltip displayed for an in-place editor.

The maximum length of the automatically generated tooltip for an in-place editor. The default is 500.

Gets or sets a grayed out hint displayed when the editor’s value is null or empty. This property is in effect for standalone editors and for editors embedded in toolbars and Ribbon controls. Not supported for in-place editors embedded in grid and tree list controls. Not supported for read-only editors.

A string that specifies the text displayed grayed out when the edit value is empty.

Gets or sets whether the editor displays a prompt when its value is not specified (equals String.Empty).

true if the editor displays a prompt when its value is not specified (equals String.Empty); otherwise, false.

Gets an editor which owns the current repository item.

A control that owns the current repository item.

Gets or sets the padding. The MemoEdit does not fully support this property, use the MaskBoxPadding property instead.

A System.Windows.Forms.Padding structure that specifies the amount of space between the editor’s text and the border.

Gets or sets the password character that appears instead of actual characters.

A character that appears instead of actual characters.

Gets an object providing properties specific to the text edit control.

The object providing settings common to the current edit control.

Reverts all properties to their default values, and removes an active input mask.

Tests whether the MaskSettings object should be serialized. This member supports the internal .NET infrastructure and does not need to be called from your code.

Gets or sets conditions under which this editor should display its null value text (see the NullValuePrompt property).

Specifies conditions under which this editor should display its null value text.

Gets or sets whether the focused editor displays a prompt when its value is not specified.

true if the focused editor displays a prompt when its value is not specified; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the read-only editor displays a prompt when its value is not specified.

true if the read-only editor displays a prompt when its value is not specified; otherwise, false.

Occurs when either the UP or DOWN ARROW key is pressed or the mouse wheel is rotated.

Gets or sets the text (value) padding within the editor.

The text (value) padding within the editor.

Switches the editor to Advanced Mode. This mode supports new caret and selection animations, emojis, and embedded labels. You can set up properties from the RepositoryItemTextEdit.AdvancedModeOptions group to choose which Advanced Mode features are enabled.

Specifies whether Advanced Mode is on. The Default value is identical to False.

Gets or sets whether the editor uses an Input Mask to format its display value when not focused. This property replaces the property beginning with v20.2.

true, if the editor should use the same mask for display and edit modes; false to use the input mask exclusively for the edit mode.

Gets or sets whether the is grayed out in the read only mode.

true if the is grayed out in read only mode; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether password mode is active and the system password character is used to mask the editor’s text.

true if password mode is active and the system password character is used to mask the editor’s text; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether to raise the RepositoryItem.Validating event on pressing the ENTER key.

true to raise the RepositoryItem.Validating event on pressing the ENTER key; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the native Excel format string used to format the editor’s value when exporting to XLSX. This property is in effect in WYSIWYG export mode.

A string value, representing the XLSX format string.

Stores settings specific to a time editor.

Creates a new object.

Gets or sets the index of a button within the button collection which will open the editor’s dropdown window.

An Int32 value specifying the index of a button within the button collection which will open the editor’s dropdown window. The default is 0.

Gets or sets whether an editor’s dropdown can be displayed when the editor is in the read-only state.

A value that specifies if an editor’s dropdown can be displayed in the read-only state. The default value is DefaultBoolean.Default.

Copies settings of the specified repository item to the current one.

A object representing the source of the operation.

Allows you to perform specific actions with respect to how the popup window was closed.

Occurs when the editor’s dropdown window starts closing.

Gets or sets the key combination used to open and close the editor’s dropdown window.

A object specifying the key combination used to open and close the editor’s dropdown window.

This property is not supported by the class.

Always true.

Gets or sets the edit mask.

A string which specifies a mask expression.

Gets the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

A string value representing the class name of a corresponding editor.

Notifies the editor that the initialization has been completed.

Returns the text representation of the specified value, formatted according to the specified settings.

A object that specifies formatting settings. A value to be formatted. A string that specifies the value’s formatted text representation.

Gets or sets a value specifying the manner in which the hour is displayed.

A enumeration member specifying the hour format.

Occurs after the editor’s popup window has been opened.

This member is not supported.

A enumeration value specifying the border style of the editor’s dropdown window.

Gets or sets the minimum size of the editor’s dropdown window.

A System.Drawing.Size structure that specifies the dropdown window’s minimum size.

This member is not supported by the class.

Gets an object providing properties specific to a time edit control.

A object providing settings common to a time edit control.

Enables you to specify whether an attempt to close the editor’s popup window will succeed.

Enables you to specify whether an attempt to open the editor’s popup window will succeed.

Gets or sets whether the popup window can be opened by clicking the edit box and whether a single or double click is required.

A enumeration value.

Gets or sets whether the shadow is displayed for the editor’s dropdown window.

true, to display the shadow for the editor’s dropdown window; otherwise, false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the style in which text is displayed in the time editor’s edit box.

A enumeration member specifying the editing style.

Gets or sets whether users use spin buttons or tiles in the drop-down panel to edit the time.

A value that specifies how users edit the time.

Gets or sets a value specifying the format of the value displayed by a TimeEdit.

A enumeration member specifying the format of the time value.

Gets or sets the maxmum time value that can be specified using the touch-aware dropdown window.

A structure that specifies the maximum time value.

Gets or sets the step by which minutes increment in the touch-aware time-editing UI . The value of 60 must be multiple of TouchUIMinuteIncrement.

The number by which minutes increment in the touch-aware time-editing UI.

Gets or sets the minimum time value that can be specified using the touch-aware dropdown window.

A structure that specifies the minimum time value.

Gets or sets the step by which seconds increment in the touch-aware time-editing UI . The value of 60 must be multiple of TouchUISecondIncrement.

The number by which seconds increment in the touch-aware time-editing UI.

For internal use.

Represents a repository item that stores settings specific to the control.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets whether it is allowed to edit days in the time interval.

true if it is allowed to edit days in the time interval; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether it is allowed to edit hours in the time interval.

true if it is allowed to edit hours in the time interval; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether it is allowed to edit milliseconds in the time interval.

true if it is allowed to edit milliseconds in the time interval; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether it is allowed to edit minutes in the time interval.

true if it is allowed to edit minutes in the time interval; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether you can edit seconds in the time interval.

true if you can edit seconds in the time interval; otherwise, false.

Copies settings from the specified repository item to the current one.

A object or its descendant that represents the source of the operation.

Gets or sets the custom control to be displayed in the ‘s drop-down panel.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.CustomTimeSpanDropDownControl class descendant that serves as the custom control to be displayed in the ‘s drop-down panel.

Gets the class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

The editor’s class name.

Gets or sets whether the event fires when the value changes or after a delay.

A value that specifies whether the event fires when the edit value changes or after a delay.

Returns the text representation of the specified value, formatted according to the specified settings.

A object that specifies formatting settings. A value to be formatted. A string that specifies the value’s formatted text representation.

Gets or sets the maximum number of days in the time interval.

An integer value that specifies the maximum number of days in the time interval.

Gets or sets the maximum number of hours of the time interval.

An integer value that specifies the maximum number of hours of the time interval.

Gets or sets the maximum number of milliseconds of the time interval.

An integer value that specifies the maximum number of milliseconds of the time interval.

Gets or sets the maximum number of minutes of the time interval.

An integer value that specifies the maximum number of minutes of the time interval.

Gets or sets the maximum number of seconds of the time interval.

An integer value that specifies the maximum number of seconds of the time interval.

Gets or sets the maximum value of the TimeSpanEdit.TimeSpan property.

A <,> enumeration value that specifies the maximum value of the TimeSpanEdit.TimeSpan property.

Gets or sets the minimum number of days in the time interval.

An integer value that specifies the minimum number of days in the time interval.

Gets or sets the minimum number of hours of the time interval.

An integer value that specifies the minimum number of hours of the time interval.

Gets or sets the minimum number of milliseconds of the time interval.

An integer value that specifies the minimum number of milliseconds of the time interval.

Gets or sets the minimum number of minutes of the time interval.

An integer value that specifies the minimum number of minutes of the time interval.

Gets or sets the minimum number of seconds of the time interval.

An integer value that specifies the minimum number of seconds of the time interval.

Gets or sets the minimum value of the TimeSpanEdit.TimeSpan property.

A <,> enumeration value that specifies the minimum value of the TimeSpanEdit.TimeSpan property.

Gets or sets a value that is interpreted as the null value assigned to the TimeSpanEdit.TimeSpan property when TimeSpanEdit.EditValue is set to null or any value that cannot be converted to the TimeSpan type.

The value regarded as the null value.

Gets the editor that owns the repository item.

A control that owns the repository item.

Gets or sets whether users use spin buttons or tiles in a drop-down panel to edit the time span.

A enumeration value that specifies how the time interval can be edited.

The class name of an edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code. This property is not relevant for this class.

Represents a repository item which stores settings specific to a control.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets whether smooth slide animation for toggling states is enabled.

true if smooth slide animation for toggling states is enabled; otherwise, false.

Copies settings of the specified repository item.

A object or its descendant that represents the source of the operation.

This property is not supported by the control.

Gets or sets the editor’s total width relative to the width of the editor’s thumb.

The total width of the editor divided by the thumb width.

Gets the class name of the edit control corresponding to the current repository item.

A System.String object identifying the class name of the corresponding editor.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Converts a specific edit value to a boolean value.

An Object that is the value to be checked. true if the target value corresponds to the “checked” state; false if the value corresponds to the “unchecked” state or is not identified.

Converts a boolean value to the corresponding edit value.

true, to retrieve the edit value when the editor is “checked”; otherwise, false. An Object that is the edit value associated with the required boolean value.

Gets or sets the text displayed when the editor’s state is Off.

A string displayed when the editor’s state is Off.

Gets or sets the text displayed when the editor’s state is On.

A string displayed when the editor’s state is On.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets whether the text is visible.

true if the text is visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the width of the editor’s thumb (in pixels).

The thumb width.

Fires when the control’s state is changed.

Gets or sets the custom edit value associated with the “unchecked” editor state.

An Object that is the custom edit value associated with the “unchecked” editor state.

Gets or sets the custom edit value associated with the “checked” editor state.

An Object that is the custom edit value associated with the “checked” editor state.

Provides access to the control’s settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

Populates the editor with tokens created based on values of an enumeration.

The type of an enumeration that is used to create tokens. true, to skip enumeration constants without explicitly assigned integer values; otherwise, false. true, to skip enumeration constants that are bit combinations of other constants; otherwise, false.

Populates the editor with tokens created based on values of an enumeration. Allows the created tokens to store the enumeration’s underlying integer constants instead of named constants.

The type of an enumeration that is used to create tokens. true if the created tokens should store the enumeration’s underlying integer constants; false if tokens should store named constants.

Populates the editor with tokens created based on values of an enumeration.

The type of an enumeration that is used to create tokens.

Populates the editor with tokens created based on values of an enumeration.

An enumeration that is used to create tokens.

Populates the editor with tokens created based on values of an enumeration. Allows the created tokens to store the enumeration’s underlying integer constants instead of named constants.

true if the created tokens should store the enumeration’s underlying integer constants; false if tokens should store named constants. An enumeration that is used to create tokens.

Provides access to appearance settings that allow you to customize the drop-down list appearances for this .

An object that stores appearance settings which allow you to customize the drop-down list appearances for this .

Copies all settings from the target to this object.

A RepositoryItem whose settings should be copied to this .

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code. Use the RepositoryItemTokenEdit.AutoHeightMode instead to set whether the should automatically expand based on its current content.

Gets or sets the control’s auto-hide mode.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TokenEditAutoHeightMode enumerator value that specifies the control’s auto-hide mode.

Fires before the drop-down window is shown.

Fires before this control’s popup menu is shown. Allows you to customize items within this menu.

Occurs before the peek panel assigned to this is displayed.

Gets or sets whether only one or multiple tokens can be selected (checked) simultaneously within this control.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TokenEditCheckMode enumerator value that specifies whether only one or multiple tokens can be selected simultaneously within this control.

Gets or sets whether checked tokens within the related control should be deselected when the editor loses focus.

true if checked tokens within the related control should be deselected when the editor loses focus; otherwise, false.

Fires after the drop-down window is closed and gets the reason for closure.

Fires when the drop-down window is about to be closed and allows you to get and update the selected token.

Occurs each time a token needs to be displayed and allows you to manually draw its background.

Allows you to re-draw the default token glyph.

Allows you to re-paint the token text area.

Gets or sets the custom drop-down control for this .

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.CustomTokenEditDropDownControlBase class descendant that serves as the custom drop-down control for this .

Gets or sets an object that stores Tokens.

An Object that stores Tokens.

Stores the default drop-down list capacity, equal to 7 lines.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Stores the default number of lines (4) a can be expanded to. If a Token Edit needs more than 4 lines to display its content, vertical scroll bar appears. To modify this line count, use the RepositoryItemTokenEdit.MaxExpandLines property.

Gets or sets whether a ‘s token should be deleted if an end-user clicks this token’s image.

A enumerator value that specifies whether a ‘s token should be deleted if an end-user clicks this token’s image.

If the Token Edit is connected to a data source, this property specifies which data source field stores visible Token captions.

The name of the data source field that stores Token captions.

Gets or sets the maximum number of drop-down menu items for this .

An Int32 value that is the maximum number of drop-down menu items for this .

Gets or sets the way this ‘s drop-down list is displayed.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TokenEditDropDownShowMode enumerator value that specifies the way this ‘s drop-down list is displayed.

Gets or sets whether an end-user can manually enter and validate any desired text within this .

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TokenEditMode enumerator value that specifies whether an end-user can manually enter and validate any desired text within this .

Gets the editor’s textual representation.

Return value: TokenEdit.

Gets or sets the character used to separate the TokenEdit.EditValue property value into multiple text blocks.

A Char value that is used to separate the TokenEdit.EditValue property value into multiple text blocks.

Gets or sets the type of this ‘s edit value.

A enumeration value that specifies the type of this ‘s edit value.

Forces the control to finish its initialization.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Gets or sets the maximum number of lines this can occupy. This property is ignored if the editor is used in-place.

An Int32 value that is the maximum number of lines this can occupy.

Gets or sets the maximum tokens number this control can simultaneously display.

An Int32 value that is the maximum tokens number this control can simultaneously display.

Gets or sets the initial number of rows displayed by this .

An Int32 value that is the initial number of rows displayed by this .

Returns a that owns this .

A that owns this .

Fires after the drop-down window is opened.

Gets or sets how items within this ‘s popup are filtered.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TokenEditPopupFilterMode enumerator value that specifies how items within this ‘s popup are filtered.

Gets or sets the assigned to this .

An IFlyoutPanel object assigned to this .

Provides access to the set of properties that specify the peek panel behavior.

A object that stores the set of properties that specify the peek panel behavior.

Gets or sets whether this ‘s drop-down list should display a size grip.

true if this ‘s drop-down list should display a size grip; otherwise, false.

Fires when a user enters a new value into a Token Edit that is connected to a data source. Allows you to validate entered values and call data source API to save valid records.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Fires before the drop-down window is closed and allows you to cancel the action.

Fires before the drop-down window is opened and allows you to cancel the action.

Occurs when a user clicks the Remove button in the TokenEdit drop-down menu.

Occurs whenever a token is added or removed to (from) the .

Provides access to the additional separators collection that are used along with the default separator (the RepositoryItemTokenEdit.EditValueSeparatorChar property) to break the text into separate blocks that are converted into tokens.

A object that stores this ‘s separators.

Gets or sets whether this control’s drop-down list should be displayed.

true if this control’s drop-down list should be displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the drop-down window is shown when the user clicks within the edit box.

or if the TokenEdit shows its drop-down window when the user clicks the edit box; otherwise, .

Gets or sets whether items within this control’s drop-down list should display the ‘remove’ icon.

true if items within this control’s drop-down list should display the ‘remove’ icon; otherwise, false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Always false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Always false.

Gets or sets whether token glyphs should be displayed.

true if token glyphs should be displayed; otherwise, false.

Occurs after a new token was successfully added to this .

Occurs when a new token is about to be added to this .

Occurs when an end-user checks or unchecks a token within the corresponding .

Fires when a user clicks a token.

Occurs when an end-user double clicks a token within this .

Gets or sets the location of token icons relative to token captions.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TokenEditGlyphLocation enumerator value that specifies the location of token icons relative to token captions.

Fires whenever a user focuses a token.

Occurs when an end-user hovers a token within this .

Fires when a token loses mouse focus.

Gets or sets whether or not the RepositoryItemTokenEdit.Tokens collection supports automatic population.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TokenEditTokenPopupateMode enumerator value that specifies whether or not the RepositoryItemTokenEdit.Tokens collection supports automatic population.

Occurs after a token is removed from this .

Fires when a token is about to be removed from this .

Gets a collection of tokens.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TokenEditTokenCollection object that stores this control’s tokens.

Gets or sets whether this Token Edit Control should be painted using the read-only appearance settings.

true if this Token Edit Control should be painted using the read-only appearance settings; otherwise, false.

Validates the text entered in the editor.

Allows you to perform the custom validation on text currently entered in this control.

Gets or sets a set of validation rules for this .

TokenEditValidationRules enumerator values that specify validation rules for this TokenEdit.

If the Token Edit is connected to a data source, this property specifies which data source field stores unique Token values.

The name of a data source field that stores Token values.

Contains settings specific to a editor.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets the vertical alignment of the control when the auto-size feature is disabled.

A value that specifies the control’s vertical alignment.

Gets or sets whether value scrolling via the Mouse Wheel is supported by the editor.

true if scrolling via the Mouse Wheel is supported by the editor; otherwise, false.

Copies the settings of the specified repository item.

A object or its descendant that represents the source of the operation.

Gets or sets a value which specifies whether the editor’s height is automatically calculated to fit its content.

Always false.

Gets or sets whether the track bar’s size is automatically calculated based on its look and feel settings.

true to allow a track bar to automatically calculate its size; otherwise, false.

Fires after the value of the RepositoryItemTrackBar.AutoSize property has been changed.

Allows you to provide custom tooltips for the thumb(s).

This property is not supported by the class.

A object.

Gets or sets the distance between a tick and its label.

An Int32 value that is the distance between a tick and its label.

This property is not supported by the class.

A object.

Gets the editor’s class name.

The string that represents the editor’s class name.

Returns a brick object that contains information on how the current editor should be printed.

Gets or sets whether the selected range is highlighted.

true if the selected range is highlighted; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether this track bar should be reversed.

true if this track bar should be reversed; otherwise, false.

Provides access to appearance settings used to paint the current ‘s labels.

An ApperanceObject that stores appearance settings for the current ‘s labels.

Provides access to the collection of labels used within the current .

A TrackBarLabelCollection that stores all labels used within the current .

Gets or sets a value to be added to or subtracted from the current value when you use the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys and the TrackBarControl.MoveLargeLeft orTrackBarControl.MoveLargeRight methods.

An integer value that specifies the large change.

Gets or sets the editor’s maximum value.

An integer value which specifies the maximum value for the track bar.

Gets or sets the editor’s minimum value.

An integer value which specifies the minimum value for the track bar.

This property is not supported by the class.

A string.

Gets or sets a value that specifies the orientation of the track bar.

A value that specifies the orientation of the track bar.

Fires when a user changes the trackbar’s value using the mouse or keyboard.

Gets or sets whether the current ‘s labels are visible.

true if the current ‘s labels are visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether hidden ticks should display their labels.

true if hidden ticks should display their labels; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the track bar shows the current value in a tooltip when a user moves a thumb.

true if the track bar shows the current value in a tooltip when a user moves a thumb; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a value to be added to or subtracted from the current value when you use the ARROW keys, mouse wheel and TrackBarControl.MoveLeft/TrackBarControl.MoveRight methods.

An integer value that specifies the small change.

Gets or sets the way end-users can move this track bar’s thumb backwards or forwards with a specific ‘small change’ value.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.SmallChangeUseMode enumerator value that specifies the way end-users can move this track bar’s thumb backwards or forwards by a specific ‘small change’ value.

Gets or sets a value that specifies the delta between ticks drawn on a track bar.

An integer value that specifies the delta between ticks.

Gets or sets a value which specifies the location of tick marks within a track bar.

A value that specifies the location of tick marks within a track bar.

Fires after the value of the TrackBarControl.Value property has been changed.

Represents the class which stores settings specific to the control.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

This member supports the internal infrastructure and cannot be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets if the RepositoryItemZoomTrackBar.Middle property is in effect.

true if the RepositoryItemZoomTrackBar.Middle property is in effect; otherwise, false.

Copies the settings of the specified repository item.

A object or its descendant that represents the source of the operation.

Occurs after the ZoomTrackBar control’s pressed button has been released.

Occurs immediately after the ZoomTrackBar control’s button has been pressed.

Labels are not supported in s.

Gets the class name of an editor corresponding to the current repository item.

The string identifying the class name of a corresponding editor.

Labels are not supported in s.

Gets or sets the value set to the middle tick.

An Int32 value that is the value set to the middle tick.

Gets or sets the paint style of the control’s scroll thumb.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.ScrollThumbStyle value.

Labels are not supported in s.

Gets or sets the neighborhood around the middle tick where the thumb, when dragged, automatically snaps to the middle tick value.

An integer value that specifies the neighborhood around the middle tick where the thumb, when dragged, automatically snaps to the middle tick value.

This property is not supported by the class.

An integer value.

This property is not supported by the class.

A value.

Enumerates values that specify how users edit the time (time span) in the and controls.

The control displays spin buttons that allow users to edit the time (time span).

The control displays tiles in a drop-down panel that allow users to edit the time (time span).

Represents the range of values.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

An integer value that specifies the minimum limit of the range. This value is assigned to the TrackBarRange.Minimum property. An integer value that specifies the maximum limit of the range. This value is assigned to the TrackBarRange.Maximum property.

Gets the object whose minimum and maximum limits of the range are equal to 0. To determine whether the object is empty, use the TrackBarRange.IsEmpty property.

Determines whether the current object has the same settings as that of the specified object.

A object to compare with the current object. true if the object specified by the parameter has the same settings as that of the current object; otherwise, false.

Gets the hash code (a number) that corresponds to the value of the current object.

An integer value representing the hash code for the current object.

Gets whether the minimum and maximum limits of the range are equal to 0.

true if the minimum and maximum limits of the range are equal to 0; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the maximum limit of the range.

An integer value that specifies the maximum limit of the range.

Gets or sets the minimum limit of the range.

An integer value that specifies the minimum limit of the range.

Returns a human-readable string that represents the object.

A value that represents the object.

A control that allows a user to search and filter data in the attached control.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

Clears the filter criteria.

Gets or sets an object through which a search is performed.

An object through which a search is performed.

Returns the class name of the current editor.

The string identifying the class name of the current editor.

Gets an object which contains properties, methods and events specific to the .

A object that contains settings for the .

Allows you to specify columns in the attached data control where the should search for data.

Fires when the ‘s text is submitted. Handle the event to get or set the search text and condition.

Sets the filter criteria.

A string value that is the filter criteria.

Enumerates values that specify when an editor shows a prompt.

Enables all options.

A prompt is displayed when the editor is focused and not focused. Disable this option to only display the prompt when the editor is not focused.

A prompt is displayed when the editor is in the read-only and editable states. Disable this option to only display the prompt when the editor is editable.

A prompt is displayed when the editor’s value equals String.Empty or null (Nothing in VB). Disable this option to only display the prompt when the editor’s value equals null (Nothing in VB).

Disables all options. A prompt is only shown for an editable, not focused editor whose value equals null (Nothing in VB).

A button that can display text and image. Supports DevExpress Application Skins.

Creates a new object.

Gets or sets whether the button can be focused.

true if the button can be focused; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the current icon should be painted with the button’s fore color.

A DefaultBoolean enumerator value that specifies whether the current ‘s icon should be painted with the button’s fore color.

Gets or sets whether the current ‘s caption can be formatted using HTML-tags.

true if the current ‘s caption can be formatted using HTML-tags; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the control’s size is automatically calculated based on its contents.

true if the control’s size is automatically calculated; otherwise, false.

This member is not supported for the control. Use the SimpleButton.AutoWidthInLayoutControl property instead.

A Boolean value.

Gets or sets whether the control’s width is changed to display the control’s content in its entirety. This property is in effect when the control resides within a .

true if auto-size mode is enabled; otherwise, false.

Calculates the button size required to fit its content, but not exceeding the maximum and minimum values.

A System.Drawing.Size object specifying the button size that best fits its content, but does not exceed the maximum and minimum values.

Allows you to draw the button manually.

Gets the ‘s view information.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.ViewInfo.SimpleButtonViewInfo object that provides view information on all elements.

Retrieves the size of a rectangular area into which the control can be fitted.

The custom-sized area for the control. A System.Drawing.Size value.

Gets or sets the alignment of the image displayed within the button.

A enumeration member specifying the image alignment.

Gets or sets the button’s image.

The button’s image.

Gets or sets the alignment of the image displayed within the button.

A enumeration member which specifies the image’s alignment.

Gets or sets the index of the image displayed on the button.

An integer value representing the zero-based index of the image displayed on the button.

Gets or sets the source of images to be displayed within the button.

An object that is the source of images to be displayed within the button.

Specifies the image alignment relative to the button.

A value that specifies the alignment of the button’s image.

Provides access to all properties that allow you to assign and customize an icon for this .

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.SimpleButtonImageOptions object that stores all properties that allow you to assign and customize an icon for this .

Gets or sets how the button’s image is aligned relative to the button’s text.

An enumeration value that specifies how the button’s image is aligned relative to the button’s text.

Gets or sets the ditance between the button’s image and text. This property is in effect if the button’s image is aligned relative to the text.

An integer value that specifies the distance, in pixels, between the button’s image and text.

A DevExpress.Utils.DxImageUri object that specifies the uniform resource identifier of the image to be displayed in the current button.

Gets or sets whether the dotted focus rectangle is displayed within the when it has focus.

The value that specifies whether the dotted focus rectangle is displayed within the when it has focus.

Starts the animation of an animated GIF file being displayed in the button.

Stops animation of an animated GIF file being displayed in the button.

Gets or sets the text string displayed within the button control.

A string value representing the button’s caption.

Visualizes data in a highly condensed way, allowing end users to understand and compare values from different sources.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Gets or sets data provided for the control.

An array of values.

Gets the class name of the current editor.

A string that is the class name of the current editor.

Provides access to the editor-specific properties of the control.

A object.

The editor to edit numeric values using spin buttons.

Creates a new object with default settings.

Gets the editor’s class name.

The string value representing the editor’s class name.

Gets or sets the editor’s value.

An object representing the editor’s value.

Gets an object containing properties, methods and events specific to the spin edit control.

A object containing spin editor settings.

Gets or sets the text displayed in the control’s edit box.

A string value representing the text displayed in the control’s edit box.

Gets or sets a spin editor’s value.

A decimal value representing the editor’s value.

Occurs after the value of the SpinEdit.Value property has been changed.

Visualizes a linear process and highlights its current stage.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets whether the control recognizes HTML tags in Content Blocks’, descriptions and captions.

DefaultBoolean.True if you can use HTML tags to format item descriptions and captions; DefaultBoolean.Default or DefaultBoolean.False if HTML tags are displayed as regular text characters.

Use the StepProgressBar.Appearances property instead.

This property is hidden. Use the StepProgressBar.Appearances property instead.

Provides access to a number of properties that allow you to set up global appearance settings common to all s and their content blocks. You can override these appearances in individual elements. See the class description for the examples.

An object that stores item appearance settings.

Gets or sets whether this control automatically adjusts its size to fit the total size of its content.

true if the control automatically scales depending on its content; otherwise, false.

Begins the StepProgressBar initialization.

This property is not intended to be used.

Returns the minimum size of the control required to show all of its items. The result includes offsets from each of the control’s borders.

The minimum control size required to display the control content.

Returns the Hit Info object that allows you to determine which Step Progress Bar element is located under the test point.

Coordinates of the test point. The Hit Info object related to the test point.

Specifies the width of all connectors (lines that connect neighboring items). See the class description for information on other available connector settings.

The connector line width.

Allows you to choose one of nine predefined positions where the control should place its items.

The alignment position.

Allows you to custom draw an item’s connector.

Allows you to custom draw an item’s content blocks.

Allows you to custom draw indicators.

Gets or set the distance between the content block caption, description, and image.

The indent between content block elements.

Gets or sets the control dock style.

The control dock style.

Gets or sets whether the control should draw connectors between neighboring items. See the class description for information on other available connector settings.

true, to draw connector lines; otherwise, false.

Finishes the Step Progress Bar initialization.

Returns an item with the given index inside the StepProgressBar.Items collection.

The item index within the StepProgressBar.Items collection. The item that occupies a given position.

Retrieves the size of a rectangular area that fits the control.

The custom-sized area for a control. The size that fits the control.

Gets or sets a collection of images that you can embed into captions/messages/tooltips in the control using the image HTML-inspired tag.

An or that contains images.

Gets or sets an image collection ( or ) assigned to this control. Once an image collection is assigned, you can use the ImageIndex or SvgImageIndex properties inside ImageOptions property sections to assign icons stored in these collections to elements.

An image collection that stores element images.

The distance between neighboring items. This value can change dynamically depending on the actual control size and selected StepProgressBar.LayoutMode.

Gets or sets the outline width of item indicators. The outline width is zero if the item DrawMode (see StepProgressBarIndicatorOptions.ActiveStateDrawMode and StepProgressBarIndicatorOptions.InactiveStateDrawMode properties) equals None. See the class description for information on other available indicator settings.

The outline width.

Gets the distance between the item indicator and content blocks on both indicator sides.

The distance between item indicator and content blocks.

Gets or sets whether the control is flipped horizontally (or vertically, if its StepProgressBar.Orientation is Vertical).

true if the control is flipped; otherwise, false.

Occurs when users click on the step progress bar item’s hyperlink.

Provides access to settings that affect all items owned by this control. You can override these global settings for individual items: use the StepProgressBarItem.Options property.

Occurs when an item’s Progress property is changed.

Stores objects owned by this control.

Gets or sets the item arrangement strategy.

Specifies the way the control arranges its items.

Gets or sets text that displays when it has no items.

Text that displays when it contains no items.

Allows you to choose between vertical and horizontal control orientation.

The control orientation mode.

A DirectX-compatible event that replaces the standard Control.Paint event.

Indicates the progress style of items.

Gets or sets the scrollbar style. Step Progress Bar displays a scroll bar when its LayoutMode setting is Fixed, and there is not enough space to display all of the control items.

The scrollbar style.

When the StepProgressBar.LayoutMode property equals “Fixed”, items can be displayed outside the current visible region. The control displays a scroll bar that allows users to access these items. The ScrollToItem method allows you to scroll the control up or down to make a specific item visible.

An item that should be visible in the current client area of a control.

Switches all items to the Active state.

Gets the last active (selected) item.

The last active item.

Fires when the selection moves to another item.

Gets or sets the last active (selected) control item. Items are addressed by their xref:StepProgressBar.Items collection indexes. When you activate an item, the control automatically activates all items that preceed it. Set to -1 to deactivate all control items.

The Items collection index of the last active (selected) item, or -1 if there are no active items.

Selects this item, and all items that preceed it.

The last selected item.

Moves the selection one item further.

Moves the selection one item back.

Gets or sets whether to add a glow effect to the indicators and connectors.

Specifies whether to apply the glow effect to active elements, inactive elements, or both active and inactive elements.

For internal use.

Unselects (deactivates) all control items.

Gets or sets whether this control employs DirectX Hardware Acceleration.

DefaultBoolean.True if the control uses the DirectX rendering. DefaultBoolean.False if the control uses regular GDI rendering. DefaultBoolean.Default if the control uses the rendering engine selected for the entire project.

Contains settings that affect all items owned by this Step Progress Bar. To override these settings for individual items, use the StepProgressBarItem.Options property.

Gets or sets the maximum width of text strings in both content blocks. If a content block has a text string that is wider than this property value, the string is clipped. Note that the total width of a content block can be larger than the MaxTextWidth property value since content blocks can also display images.

The maximum content block text width.

Gets or sets the minimum width of text strings in both content blocks. If your items dynamically change content block text, set this property to match the widest text string. This way, you can force these items to remain static and prevent them from flickering.

The minimum width of text strings in item content blocks.

Stores item indicator settings. These settings can be accessed on both control (StepProgressBar.ItemOptions.Indicator) and item (StepProgressBar.Options.Indicator) levels.

Gets or sets the indicator draw mode. This mode is in effect when the item is in the Active state.

The indicator draw mode.

Gets or sets the indicator image. This image is displayed only when the item is in the Active state.

Provides access to properties that allow you to set up raster or vector images.

Gets or sets whether transparent pixels around the indicator’s image are trimmed.

True or Default if the transparent pixels around the image are trimmed; otherwise, False.

Gets or sets the indicator draw mode. This mode is in effect when the item is in the Inactive state.

The indicator draw mode.

Gets or sets the indicator image. This image is displayed only when the item is inactive.

Provides access to properties that allow you to set up raster or vector images.

Gets or sets the item indicator diameter.

The item indicator diameter.

An item that visualizes a progress milestone or step. A control stores progress items in the StepProgressBar.Items collection.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

The StepProgressBarItem.ContentBlock2 caption.

Provides access to appearance settings for this item.

Stores item appearance settings.

Provides access to the first content block of this item.

The item’s first content block.

Provides access to the second content block of this item.

The item’s second content block.

Returns the next item.

The next item. null if the current item is the last item.

Returns the previous item.

The previous item. null if the current item is the first item.

Returns the current item state.

true if the item is active (selected); otherwise, false.

Indicates whether the item is the first item in the step progress bar items collection.

true if the item is the first item in the step progress bar items collection; otherwise, false.

Indicates whether the item is the last item in the step progress bar items collection.

true if the item is the last item in the step progress bar items collection; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the item name.

The item name.

Provides access to properties that allow you to override global item settings specified in the StepProgressBar.ItemOptions section.

An object that stores item settings.

Gets or sets the current progress towards this item.

The progress towards this item. A value between 0 and 100.

Occurs when a specific item’s Progress property is changed.

Gets or sets whether this item is active (selected). To activate an item, you can also use StepProgressBar.SelectedItemIndex, StepProgressBar.SelectItem(StepProgressBarItem), and StepProgressBar.SelectNext() / StepProgressBar.SelectPrevious() properties and methods.

Specifies whether this item is active (selected).

Occurs when the item state changes from Active to Inactive, or vice versa.

Gets or sets a custom object associated with the current item.

The custom object associated with the item.

A content block displayed on either side of a ‘s indicator.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

An item that owns this content block.

Allows you to assign a vector or raster image that this content block shows when a parent item is Active.

Provides access to image-related settings.

Provides access to content block appearance settings. See the class description for information on how to set up item appearance settings at different levels.

Stores content block appearance settings.

Gets or sets the content block caption.

The content block caption.

Gets or sets the content block description.

The content block description.

Disposes of this object and releases all the resources it occupies.

Allows you to assign a vector or raster image that this content block shows when a parent item is Inactive.

Provides access to image-related settings.

Returns whether this content block has no content.

true if this block does not have a caption, description, or image; otherwise, false.

Returns a string representing the current object.

A String value that represents the current object.

Supplies data for the event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Gets if the hyperlink is displayed in the content block’s caption (Caption).

true if the hyperlink is displayed in the content block’s caption (Caption); otherwise, false.

Gets if the hyperlink is displayed in the content block’s description (Description).

true if the hyperlink is displayed in the content block’s description (Description); otherwise, false.

Specifies the item that contains the hyperlink.

Returns the item that contains the hyperlink.

Gets the clicked hyperlink’s content block.

The clicked hyperlink’s content block.

Stores item settings. These settings affect one individual item (if you access them from the StepProgressBarItem.Options property), or all items owned by this control (StepProgressBar.ItemOptions).

Gets or sets the distance (in pixels) between the end of connector lines, and the item indicator outline.

The gap between connectors and outline.

Provides access to settings that affect item indicator(s).

Stores settings that affect item indicator(s).

Lists values that specify whether to add a glow effect to active elements, inactive elements, or both active and inactive elements.

Apply the glow effect to active elements.

Apply the glow effect to active and inactive elements.

Apply the glow effect to inactive elements.

Do not apply the glow effect.

Allows you to manage appearance settings and paint styles of multiple editors and controls in a centralized way. This component is deprecated.

Creates a new object.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified container.

The which contains the created style controller.

Provides the appearance settings used to paint target controls and editors in the normal state.

The appearance settings used to paint the target controls and editors in the normal state.

Provides the appearance settings used to paint target editors when they are disabled.

The appearance settings used to paint target editors when they are in the disabled state.

Provides the appearance settings used to paint the popups of target dropdown editors.

The appearance settings used to paint the popups of target dropdown editors.

Provides the appearance settings used to paint the popup window’s header panel for target and controls.

The appearance settings used to paint the popup window’s header panel for target DateEdit and LookUpEdit controls.

Provides the appearance settings used to paint a target editor when it is focused.

The appearance settings used to paint a target editor when it is focused.

Provides the appearance settings used to paint target editors when they are in the read-only state.

The appearance settings used to paint read-only editors.

Performs specific actions before control initialization.

Locks the object by preventing visual updates until the EndUpdate method is called.

Gets or sets the bound controls’ border style.

The enumerator.

Gets or sets the button style for target editors with embedded buttons.

The button style for editors with embedded buttons.

Performs specific actions after the control has been initialized.

Unlocks the object after a call to the BeginUpdate method and causes an immediate visual update.

Allows you to customize the look and feel settings for target controls.

A object.

Gets or sets the popup border style of target dropdown editors.

The popup border style of target dropdown editors.

Fires immediately after any property value has been changed.

Serves as a base for classes that implement style conditions.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A enumeration value which specifies the comparison operation. This value is assigned to the StyleFormatConditionBase.Condition property. A which identifies the current style condition object. This value is assigned to the StyleFormatConditionBase.Tag property. A DevExpress.Utils.AppearanceDefault object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the elements which match the specified format condition. This value is assigned to the StyleFormatConditionBase.Appearance property. A which represents the first comparison value. This value is assigned to the StyleFormatConditionBase.Value1 property. A which represents the second comparison value. This value is assigned to the StyleFormatConditionBase.Value2 property. A value which represents a column whose values are used in conditional formatting.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A enumeration value which specifies the comparison operation. This value is assigned to the StyleFormatConditionBase.Condition property. A which identifies the current style condition object. This value is assigned to the StyleFormatConditionBase.Tag property. A object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the elements which match the specified format condition. This value is assigned to the StyleFormatConditionBase.Appearance property. A which represents the first comparison value. This value is assigned to the StyleFormatConditionBase.Value1 property. A which represents the second comparison value. This value is assigned to the StyleFormatConditionBase.Value2 property. A value which represents a column whose values are used in conditional formatting.

Gets or sets the appearance settings used to paint the elements (e.g., cells in the XtraGrid) that match the specified format condition.

A object that provides the appearance settings used to paint the elements that match the specified format condition.

Provides access to appearance settings used to paint the descriptions of the items that match the current format condition.

An object that stores appearance settings used to paint the descriptions of the items that match the current format condition.

Copies the settings from the object passed as the parameter.

A object or descendant which represents the source of the operation.

Checks whether the specified value in the specified column and data row matches the current style condition.

An object that represents a column. An object that represents the tested value. An object that refers to a target row. true if the specified value in the specified column and row matches the current style condition; otherwise, false.

This method is obsolete. Use the CheckValue overload that takes the row parameter.

Gets the collection that owns the current style condition object.

A object representing the collection which owns the current object.

Gets or sets the comparison operation used by the style condition object.

A enumeration value which specifies the comparison operation.

Gets or sets whether the current condition is in effect.

true if the current condition is in effect; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the Boolean expression. When it evaluates to true, the StyleFormatConditionBase.Appearance is applied to data. The Expression property is in effect when the StyleFormatConditionBase.Condition property is set to FormatConditionEnum.Expression.

A string that specifies the Boolean expression.

Gets a value indicating whether the current style format condition is enabled.

true if the StyleFormatConditionBase.Condition property isn’t set to the FormatConditionEnum.None value; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the object’s name.

A value that represents the object’s name.

Gets or sets a value which identifies the current style condition object.

A which identifies the current style condition object.

Returns the text representation of the current object.

A text representation of the current object.

Gets or sets the first comparison value. Security note: Deserializing layout settings from untrusted resources may create security issues. Serializable System.Object properties that contain custom type values are not (de)serialized automatically. Review the following help topic for information on how to (de)serialize custom type values: Safe Deserialization.

A which represents the comparison value.

Gets or sets the second comparison value. Security note: Deserializing layout settings from untrusted resources may create security issues. Serializable System.Object properties that contain custom type values are not (de)serialized automatically. Review the following help topic for information on how to (de)serialize custom type values: Safe Deserialization.

A which represents the comparison value.

Lists modifier keys that you can suppress.

Suppress the Alt key.

Suppress the Ctrl key.

Control for the BarManager.SuppressModifierKey property. None for the BarEditItem.SuppressModifierKey property.

Do not suppress keys.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Copies all settings from the object passed as the parameter and assigns them to the current object.

The object whose settings are assigned to the current object.

Returns a string representing the current object.

A String value that represents the current object.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Copies all settings from the object passed as the parameter and assigns them to the current object.

The object whose settings are assigned to the current object.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Copies all settings from the object passed as the parameter and assigns them to the current object.

The object whose settings are assigned to the current object.

Gets or sets whether the row automatically adjusts its height to display its entire content.

true if the row automatically adjusts its height to fit its contents; otherwise, false.

The single-line text editor.

Initializes a new class instance with default settings.

Appends the specified string to .

A string to append to the edit value (text).

Gets or sets the editor’s background color.

The editor’s background color.

This property isn’t used.

A text block.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Gets a value indicating whether the previous edit operation can be undone.

true if the previous edit operation can be undone; otherwise, false.

Clears the text and sets the propety to null (Nothing in Visual Basic).

Hides a drop-down list with auto-complete suggestions.

Copies the current selection to the Clipboard.

Allows you to highlight or custom paint strings within the control’s text. This event is supported in Advanced mode (see RepositoryItemTextEdit.UseAdvancedMode).

Allows you to supply custom auto-complete text suggestions dynamically each time a user types a new word in the text box. This event is in effect in advanced mode when the AutoCompleteSource option is set to CustomSource, and the AutoCompleteMode option is set to SuggestSingleWord.

Allows you to specify the height of a line of text in Advanced Mode.

Moves the current selection in the text box to the Clipboard.

Clears text box selection.

Gets the editor’s class name.

The ‘TextEdit‘ string

For internal use.

A Boolean value.

Retrieves the character that is closest to the specified location within the control.

The location (relative to the control’s top left corner) from which to find the nearest character. The character closest to the specified location.

Retrieves the index of the character closest to the specified location.

The location (relative to the control’s top left corner) from which to find the nearest character. The zero-based index of the character closest to the specified location.

Retrieves the index of the first character of a given line.

The zero-based index of the target displayed line. The zero-based index of the first character in the specified line.

Retrieves the index of the first character of the current line.

The zero-based index of the first character in the current line.

Retrieves the index of the displayed line that contains the specified character.

The zero-based index of the target character. The zero-based number of the displayed line in which the character index is located.

Retrieves a point (relative to the control’s top left corner) at which the specified character is displayed.

The index of the character for which to retrieve the location. The character’s location relative to the control’s top left corner.

For internal use.

A Boolean value.

Gets whether the editor is active.

true if the editor is active; otherwise, false.

For internal use.

A Boolean value.

Returns a value indicating whether a particular key will be processed by the editor or passed to its container.

A enumeration value which specifies the key to process. true if the pressed key will be processed by the editor; otherwise, false.

This member supports the internal editors library infrastructure and is not intended to be used from your code.

true if a container needs to focus the editor; otherwise, false.

Gets the text box that provides text editing functionality, or null (Nothing in VB.NET) if the editor is in Advanced Mode.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TextBoxMaskBox object that represents the editor’s text box.

A DirectX-compatible event that replaces the standard Control.Paint event. Occurs when the control is redrawn.

Replaces the current selection in the text box with the contents of the Clipboard.

Gets an object containing this editor’s settings.

A object containing this editor’s settings.

Supplies data for the event.

Resets selection and caret position in the editor.

Clears the selection.

Scrolls the editor’s content to the current caret position.

For internal use.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Selects the specified number of characters in the text box starting from the point specified.

An integer value specifying the selection’s start point in the text box. An integer value specifying the number of characters to select in the text box.

Selects all text within the text box.

Gets or sets a value that indicates the selected text in the editor.

A string value representing the selected text.

Gets or sets the number of characters selected in the text box.

An integer value specifying the number of characters selected in the text box.

Gets or sets the starting point of text selected in the text box.

An integer value specifying the starting point of text selected in the text box.

Invokes a drop-down list with auto-complete suggestions.

Occurs when either the UP or DOWN ARROW key is pressed or the mouse wheel is rotated.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the user can focus this control using the TAB key.

true if the user can focus the editor using the TAB key; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the text displayed in the edit box.

A value which specifies the editor’s text.

Undoes the last edit operation in the text control.

Forces the control to update its text highlight and custom painting that you perform with the TextEdit.CustomHighlightText and RepositoryItemTextEdit.CustomHighlightText events.

Exposes settings that toggle individual features of the TextEdit Advanced Mode. See this property for more information about this mode: RepositoryItemTextEdit.UseAdvancedMode.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

A repository item that owns this object.

Gets or sets whether an editor should use updated caret animations when in Advanced Mode. See this property for more information about this mode: RepositoryItemTextEdit.UseAdvancedMode.

Specifies whether update caret animation effects are enabled.

Gets or sets whether an editor should use updated selection animations when in Advanced Mode. See this property for more information about this mode: RepositoryItemTextEdit.UseAdvancedMode.

Specifies whether updated selection animation effects are enabled.

Copies all settings from the target TextEditAdvancedModeOptions class instance.

The object whose settings should be copied.

Gets or sets a custom collection of auto-complete suggestions. This property is in effect in advanced mode when the AutoCompleteSource option is set to CustomSource.

The TextEdit’s custom string collection source.

Gets or sets text auto-completion mode. This property is in effect if the RepositoryItemTextEdit.UseAdvancedMode option is enabled.

The text completion behavior of the TextEdit.

Gets or sets the source of auto-complete suggestions. This property is in effect if the RepositoryItemTextEdit.UseAdvancedMode option is enabled.

The auto-complete source type.

Gets or sets the caption of the embedded editor label. TextEdit-based editors can have embedded labels only when in Advanced Mode. See this property for more information about this mode: RepositoryItemTextEdit.UseAdvancedMode.

The embedded editor label’s caption.

Gets the appearance settings of the embedded caption. This property is in effect if the property is enabled.

An object that contains the appearance settings.

Gets or sets the selection color. This property is in effect if the property is enabled.

The selection color.

Gets the appearance settings of the embedded caption. This property is in effect if the property is enabled.

An object that contains the appearance settings.

Gets or sets whether to enable keyboard shortcuts for the editor. This property is in effect if the RepositoryItemTextEdit.UseAdvancedMode option is enabled.

true to enable keyboard shortcuts; otherwise, false.

Converts this TextEditAdvancedModeOptions object to a string.

The converted TextEditAdvancedModeOptions object.

Gets or sets whether an editor uses the DirectX Hardware Acceleration. DirectX is required to support some of the unique editor features available when this editor is in Advanced Mode. See this property for more information about this mode: RepositoryItemTextEdit.UseAdvancedMode.

Specifies whether the editor uses the DirectX or traditional GDI renderer.

Enumerates values that specify auto-complete mode for text editors.

The editor automatically completes the first entered word in the edit box. The editor uses the first matching suggestion from a source of suggestions.

Text auto-completion is disabled.

The editor displays a drop-down list with suggestions when a user types the first word in the edit box.

The editor uses a combination of the Append and Suggest options — it automatically completes the first word in the edit box, and displays a drop-down list with suggestions.

The editor displays a drop-down list with custom suggestions every time a user types a new word in the edit box. The editor automatically sets the AutoCompleteSource option to CustomSource in SuggestSingleWord mode. Use the CustomizeAutoCompleteSource event, or AutoCompleteCustomSource collection to specify the custom auto-complete suggestions.

Contains data for the TextEdit.CustomHighlightText and RepositoryItemTextEdit.CustomHighlightText events.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Highlights or custom paints a text block at a specified position.

A zero-based start index of the target text block. The length of the text block. Allows you to specify display settings or a custom painter for the text block.

Highlights a text block at a specific position using custom foreground and background colors.

A zero-based start index of the target text block. The length of the text block. A custom foreground color used to paint the text block. A custom background color to paint the text block.

Highlights a text block at a specified position using a custom foreground color.

A zero-based start index of the target text block. The length of the text block. A custom foreground color used to paint the text block.

Highlights or custom paints all text blocks that have the specified content.

A string that identifies target text blocks to highlight or custom paint. Allows you to specify display settings or a custom painter for the text blocks. An object that specifies text comparison settings used to locate target text blocks.

Highlights all text blocks that have specified content using custom foreground and background colors.

A string that identifies target text blocks. A custom foreground color used to paint the text block. A custom background color used to paint the text block. An object that specifies text comparison settings used to locate target text blocks.

Highlights all text blocks that have the specified content using a custom foreground color.

A string that identifies target text blocks to be highlighted or custom painted. A custom foreground color used to paint text blocks. An object that specifies text comparison settings used to locate target text blocks.

Highlights or custom paints whole words.

The text of target words. Allows you to specify display settings or a custom painter for the target words. An object that specifies text comparison settings used to locate target words.

Highlights whole words using custom foreground and background colors.

The text of target words. A custom foreground color to paint the target words. A custom background color to paint the target words. An object that specifies text comparison settings used to locate target words.

Highlights whole words using a custom foreground color.

The text of target words. A custom foreground color used to paint the target words. An object that specifies text comparison settings used to locate target words.

Gets the zero-based index of the currently processed text line for multi-line text. Returns 0 for single-line text.

The zero-based index of the currently processed text line.

Gets the currently processed text/text line (for multi-line text).

The currently processed text/text line.

Gets the position of the currently processed text line within the editor’s text.

A zero-based index of the currently processed text line within the editor’s text.

Contains data for the event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Gets the caret position in the current line.

The caret position in the current line.

Allows you to specify custom auto-complete suggestions for the current word (EditingWord).

An array of custom auto-complete suggestions.

Gets the current word that the user is typing.

The word the user is typing.

Gets or sets whether to display custom suggestions (CustomSource) in the drop-down list as is, or to filter this list to display only those items in the drop-down that start with the current word being edited (EditingWord).

true to display the custom suggestion list as is; false to filter the custom suggestion list to display only those items that start with the current word being edited (EditingWord).

Gets the current line index (in a multi-line text editor).

The zero-based index of the current line.

Gets the text displayed in the current line.

The current line’s text.

The control that manages Windows UI-inspired tiles. Using this component, you can create both static and animated live tiles in your applications.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

Gets or sets whether the disabled state of the is indicated in a specific manner.

true if the disabled state of the is indicated in a specific manner; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets if a s runtime dragging is enabled.

true if a s runtime dragging is enabled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether drag-and-drop of tiles between groups is enabled.

true if drag-and-drop of tiles between groups is enabled; false if an end-user can only drag tiles within the same group.

Gets or sets whether glyphs in tiles should be painted using the tile foreground colors.

true if glyphs in tiles should be painted using the tile foreground colors; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether s within the current are highlighted during s drag-and-drop.

true if s within the current are highlighted during s drag-and-drop; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets if HTML text formatting is enabled for all tile items within the current .

A enumerator value that indicates if HTML text formatting is enabled for all tile items within the current . The DefaultBoolean.Default value acts the same as the DefaultBoolean.True value.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets if the item hover feature is enabled.

true if items hover feature is enabled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets if s within the current can be selected.

true if s within the current can be selected; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether or not a selection border should be drawn around the currently selected tile.

true if a selection border should be drawn around the currently selected tile; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether or not smooth pixel scrolling is enabled for this .

true if pixel scrolling is enabled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether this should play initial animation the first time it is displayed.

true if this should play initial animation the first time it is displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets an object that specifies appearance settings used to highlight s within the current .

A GroupHighlightingProperties object that contains appearance settings used to highlight s within the current .

Provides access to appearance settings used to customize s’ captions.

An AppearanceObject that contains appearance settings used to customize s’ captions.

Provides access to appearance settings applied to all tile items within the current .

An that contains corresponding appearance settings.

Provides access to appearance settings used to paint the current caption.

An AppearanceObject that contains appearance settings used to paint the current caption.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the background image for this .

An Image displayed as the ‘s background.

Occurs before a layout is restored from storage (a stream, xml file or the system registry).

Locks the object by preventing visual updates of the object and its elements until the EndUpdate method is called.

Gets or sets the style of the current ‘s border.

A enumerator value that specifies the style applied to the tile control’s border.

Returns information on the tile control elements located at the specified point.

A structure which specifies the test point coordinates relative to the ‘s top-left corner. A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TileControlHitInfo object which contains information about the grid elements located at the test point.

Gets or sets the maximum number of medium-sized tiles that can be placed simultaneously in a single row within a vertically oriented .

An Int32 value that is the maximum number of medium-sized tiles that can be placed simultaneously in a single row within a vertically oriented .

Fires when a context button is clicked.

Allows you to customize context buttons for individual tiles.

Provides access to the settings applied to the context buttons displayed in the tiles, and panels containing these buttons.

A ContextItemCollectionOptions object that comprises settings applied to the context buttons displayed in the tiles, and panels containing these buttons.

Provides access to the collection of context buttons displayed in the tiles.

A ContextItemCollection object that represents the collection of context buttons displayed in the tiles.

Allows you to specify a tooltip shown when the mouse pointer hovers over a context button. This event is only raised for and objects.

Returns the default tile padding.

The 12, 8, 12, 8 padding structure.

Gets or sets the horizontal and vertical distance in pixels that an end-user must drag a before the drag operation starts.

A Size structure that specifies the horizontal and vertical distance in pixels that an end-user must drag a before the drag operation starts.

Gets or sets whether the TileControl.ItemDoubleClick event is raised.

true if the TileControl.ItemDoubleClick event is raised; otherwise, false.

Fires after the dragged tile item is released.

Unlocks the object after a call to the BeginUpdate method and causes an immediate visual update.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets font options for all s within the current . This property is now obsolete. Use the TileControl.AppearanceItem property instead.

A Font object that specifies font options for all tiles within the current .

Gets or sets a color used to paint a s’ text content. This property is now obsolete. Use the TileControl.AppearanceItem property instead.

A Color object used to paint a s’ text content.

Gets all currently checked tiles that belong to this .

A List structure that contains all currently checked tiles that belong to this .

Returns the exact size of the target in pixels.

A whose size is to be obtained. A Size structure that is the size of the target tile.

Returns the exact size of the target tile style in pixels.

A enumerator value whose exact size is to be obtained. A Size structure that is the size of the target tile style.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Returns a group with the specified name (TileGroup.Name).

A string that specifies the name of the group to be located. A with the specified name. null if no matching group is found.

Returns a group with the specified caption (TileGroup.Text).

A string that specifies the caption of the group to be located. A with the specified caption. null if no matching group is found.

Provides access to a collection of s used by the current .

A TileGroupCollection object that stores s used by the current .

Gets the object that controls drag-and-drop and mouse operations on the .

A TileControlHandler object that controls drag-and-drop and mouse operations on the .

Gets or sets the horizontal alignment of ‘s groups.

A enumerator value that specifies the horizontal alignment of ‘s groups.

Gets or sets a collection of images that you can embed into captions/messages/tooltips in the control using the image HTML-inspired tag.

An or that contains images.

Gets or sets a collection of images to be displayed in s.

An Object that stores a collection of s glyphs.

Gets or sets a space that visually detaches neighboring s.

An Int32 value specifying a space that visually detaches neighboring s.

Gets or sets a space that visually detaches neighboring s.

An Int32 value specifying a space that visually detaches neighboring s.

Gets if the animation is currently paused.

true if the animation is currently paused; otherwise, false.

Gets if the current tile control is locked by the TileControl.BeginUpdate method call.

true if the current tile control is locked by the TileControl.BeginUpdate method call; otherwise, false.

Gets a value indicating whether the ‘s elements are aligned to support locales using right-to-left fonts.

true if the ‘s elements are aligned to support locales using right-to-left fonts; otherwise, false.

Provides access to appearance settings applied to all tile items when they are in their normal state. This property is obsolete. Use the TileControl.AppearanceItem property instead.

An that contains corresponding appearance settings.

Provides access to appearance settings applied to all tile items when they are hovered over. This property is obsolete. Use the TileControl.AppearanceItem property instead.

An that contains corresponding appearance settings.

Provides access to appearance settings applied to all tile items when they are selected. This property is obsolete. Use the TileControl.AppearanceItem property instead.

An that contains corresponding appearance settings.

Gets or sets the background image position for all s within the current .

A enumerator value that specifies the background image position for all s within the current .

Gets or sets the background images stretch mode common to s within the current .

A TileItemImageScaleMode enumerator value that specifies the background images stretch mode for all s within the current .

Gets or sets whether borders of all tile items are visible.

A value that specifies whether tile item borders are visible.

Fires when a ‘s check state is changed.

Gets or sets the way s within the current can be checked by an end-user.

A enumerator value specifying the way s within the current can be checked by an end-user.

Fires when a user clicks a tile.

Gets or sets the frame animation effect applied to all within the current .

A TileItemContentAnimationType enumerator value specifying the frame animation effect applied to all within the current .

Occurs when an end-user double-clicks a within the current .

Occurs after a tile that was dragged at runtime lands on its final position.

Gets or sets the way s’ glyphs are aligned within parent items.

A TileItemContentAlignment enumerator value that specifies the way s’ glyphs are aligned within parent items.

Gets or sets the way s’ glyphs are stretched within parent items.

A TileItemImageScaleMode enumerator value that specifies the way s’ glyphs are stretched within parent items.

Gets or sets the common padding for all s within the current .

A System.Windows.Forms.Padding structure that specifies the common padding for all s within the current .

Fires when a user presses a tile.

Gets or sets the dimension of a medium .

The dimension of a medium , in pixels.

Gets or sets common settings for all s within the current terms to display their text content.

A TileItemContentShowMode enumerator value that indicates how s’ text content is displayed.

Gets or sets whether this operates in regular or adaptive layout mode.

A TileControlLayoutMode enumerator value that specifies whether this operates in regular or adaptive layout mode.

Occurs after a layout whose version doesn’t match the current layout version has been loaded from a stream, xml file or system registry.

Provides access to the ‘s look and feel settings.

A object that specifies look and feel settings for the current .

Gets or sets the maximum s ID.

An Int32 value that is the maximum s ID.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Updates the Tile Control.

Provides access to settings that are in use when this is in Adaptive Layout Mode.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TileControlAdaptiveLayoutOptions object that stores settings that are in use when this is in Adaptive Layout Mode.

Provides access to advanced layout TileControl settings.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TileControlOptionsLayout object that stores advanced layout TileControl settings.

Gets or sets the tile arrangement algorithm.

The value specifying the tile arrangement algorithm.

A DirectX-compatible method that replaces the standard Control.Paint method.

Gets or sets the current ‘s offset in pixels.

An Integer value specifying the current ‘s offset in pixels.

Loads the layout stored in the specific registry key. Security note: Deserializing layout settings from untrusted resources may create security issues. Review the following help topic for additional information: Safe Deserialization.

A String value specifying the registry key which contains the layout to be loaded. If the specified key doesn’t exist, an exception is raised.

Loads the layout stored in the specific stream. Security note: Deserializing layout settings from untrusted resources may create security issues. Review the following help topic for additional information: Safe Deserialization.

A Stream object which contains the layout to be loaded. If the specified stream doesn’t exist, an exception is raised.

Loads the layout stored in the specific XML file. Security note: Deserializing layout settings from untrusted resources may create security issues. Review the following help topic for additional information: Safe Deserialization.

A String value specifying the path to the XML file which contains the layout to be loaded. If the specified file doesn’t exist, an exception is raised.

Resumes all animation effects.

Fires after any within the current was clicked with the right mouse button.

Gets or sets the maximum number of items rows within the current .

An Integer value specifying the maximum number of items rows within the current .

Saves the current layout to a registry.

A String value specifying the registry key in which the layout should be stored. If an empty string is specified, an exception is raised. true if saving was successful; otherwise, false.

Saves the current layout to a stream.

A Stream object in which the layout should be stored.

Saves the current layout to an XML file.

A String value specifying the path to the file in which the layout should be stored. If an empty string is specified, an exception is raised.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the time required to show/hide a ‘s scroll buttons when they are hovered over/not hovered with the mouse.

An Int32 value, specifying the tile control scroll buttons’ fade time (in milliseconds).

Gets or sets which visual elements will be used when a ‘s workspace is being scrolled.

A enumerator value specifying the scrolling elements used.

Gets or sets the currently selected within a .

A TileItem object that is currently selected within a .

Fires when a tile item selection occurs for the first time or item selection jumps from one to another.

Gets or sets the s’ borders color when navigating through tiles using keyboard arrows at runtime.

A Color object used to paint s’ borders when navigating through tiles using keyboard arrows at runtime.

Gets or sets whether captions are displayed for the current .

true if captions are displayed for the current ; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the current ‘s caption is displayed.

true if the current ‘s caption is displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether tooltips are shown for tiles.

true if tooltips are shown; otherwise, false.

Fires after an end-user starts dragging a tile item.

Pauses all s animation effects until resumed.

Gets or sets the tooltip controller component that controls the appearance, position and content of tooltips displayed by tiles of the .

A object which controls the appearance and behavior of tooltips displayed by tiles of the .

Gets or sets whether the DirectX Hardware Acceleration is enabled for this Tile Control.

Gets or sets the vertical alignment of ‘s groups.

A enumerator value that specifies the vertical alignment of ‘s groups.

Returns detailed info about this .

A TileControlViewInfo object that contains detailed info about this .

Exposes members that specify how a tile item glyph is arranged relative to text content.

Aligns text according to the TileItem.ImageAlignment and places the icon below it.

Acts as the TileControlImageToTextAlignment.None value disabling an image-to-text grouping.

Aligns text according to the TileItem.ImageAlignment and places the icon to the left.

Disables image-to-text grouping.

Aligns text according to the TileItem.ImageAlignment and places the icon to the right.

Aligns text according to the TileItem.ImageAlignment and places the icon above it.

Exposes members that specify a ‘s scroll mode.

Default scrolling mode. For the , the Default value is equivalent to None, while the interprets the Default value as ScrollBar.

Prevents any visual scrolling elements from being displayed. content scrolling is still available via mouse scroll (PC users) or sliding the control (touch-input devices users).

Sets a to display scroll bars when scrolling is enabled.

Sets a to display scroll buttons when scrolling is enabled.

Displays a thin solid scroll bar painted right above the control’s client area.

A base class with arguments for events that draw tiles.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Gets appearance settings for the painted tile.

Appearance settings for the painted tile.

Gets or sets tile bounds.

Tile bounds.

Gets an object that stores the most used pens, fonts, and brushes.

An object that stores the most used pens, fonts, and brushes.

Draws the processed tile element in its default appearance.

Gets the default bounds of the selection rectangle.

The default bounds of the selection rectangle.

Gets the default color of the selection rectangle.

The default color of the selection rectangle.

Gets the default thickness of the selection rectangle.

The default thickness of the selection rectangle.

Draws the tile background in its default appearance.

Draws the tile border in its default appearance.

Draws the tile check mark in its default appearance.

Draws tile content in its default appearance.

Draws the overlay for the disabled state in its default appearance.

Draws the overlay for the hovered state in its default appearance.

Paints the specified HTML template inside the processed tile element. The context parameter allows you to assign an object that transfers mouse events to template elements.

A template to draw. The object that transfers mouse events from a control to a template instance. This allows you to switch visual states (regular, hovered, pressed, and others) of template elements. Sets up properties of the object.

Paints the specified HTML template inside the processed tile element.

A template to draw. Sets up properties of the object.

Gets or sets whether to skip the default painting.

true to skip the default painting; otherwise, false.

Gets the disabled state of the processed tile.

true if the tile is disabled; otherwise, false.

Gets the hovered state of the processed tile.

true if the tile is hovered; otherwise, false.

Gets the selection state of the processed tile.

true if the tile is selected; otherwise, false.

Gets the processed tile.

The processed tile.

Gets whether the tile should display a background.

true if the tile should display a background; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the tile should display a border.

true if the tile should display a border; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the tile should display a check mark.

true if the tile should display a check mark; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the tile should display content.

true if the tile should display content; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the tile should display a disabled overlay.

true if the tile should display a disabled overlay; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the tile should display a hovered overlay.

true if the tile should display a hovered overlay; otherwise, false.

Implements the functionality of tile groups.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

Gets the tile control to which the current group belongs.

An object implementing the ITileControl interface to which the group belongs.

Returns a tile item with the specified name (TileItem.Name).

A string that specifies the name of the item to be located. A with the specified name. null if no matching item is found.

Returns a tile item with the specified text (TileItem.Text).

A string that specifies the text of the item to be located. A with the specified text. null if no matching item is found.

Returns detailed info about this .

A TileGroupViewInfo object that contains detailed info about this .

Provides access to a collection of s used by the current .

A TileItemCollection object that stores s used by the current .

Gets or sets the current ‘s name.

A String value that specifies the current ‘s name.

Gets or sets the site associated with the current .

A System.ComponentModel.ISite object associated with the current .

Gets or sets the data associated with a object.

An Object containing the information associated with a object.

Gets or sets the current ‘s caption.

A String value that is the current ‘s caption.

Gets or sets whether the current is visible.

true if the current is visible; otherwise, false.

A collection of objects.

Initializes a new instance of the with specific settings.

A TileControl that owns the created.

Adds a new into a .

A to be added. An Int32 value indicating the position at which the new element was added.

Gets if the specific presents within the current .

A TileGroup object to be tested. true if the specific presents within the current ; otherwise, false.

Gets the position of the specified in the current group collection.

A whose index is to be obtained. A zero-based Int32 value that is the index of the in the current group collection.

Adds a new into a and places it at the specific position.

An Int32 value indicating the position to which the inserted group will be placed. A TileGroup object to be inserted.

Provides indexed access to individual items in the .

A zero-based integer specifying the desired group’s position within the . If it’s negative or exceeds the last available index, an exception is raised. A TileGroup object that is contained within the current .

Provides access to the s in the current collection by their names.

A String value that is the name of a to be obtained. A object with the specific name.

Gets the object that owns this group collection.

An object implementing the ITileControl interface to which the group collection belongs.

Removes the specific from the current .

A to be removed.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Provides the functionality of tile items.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

Gets or sets the object’s description used by accessibility client applications.

The object’s description used by accessibility client applications.

Gets or sets the object’s name used by accessibility client applications.

The object’s name used by accessibility client applications.

Gets or sets the object’s accessible role.

The object’s accessible role.

Gets or sets whether the Tile Animation is enabled for this .

true if the Tile Animation is enabled for this ; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether glyphs for this should be painted using the item’s foreground color.

A value that specifies if this item’s glyphs should be painted using the item’s foreground color.

Gets or sets if HTML text formatting is enabled for the current .

A enumerator value that indicates if HTML text formatting is enabled for the current . The DefaultBoolean.Default value acts the same as the DefaultBoolean.True value.

Gets or sets whether a “press” animation effect on a click is allowed for the .

true, if a “press” animation effect on a click is allowed for the item, false, if animation is disabled

Provides access to appearance settings applied to the tile item when it is in a normal state. This property is obsolete. Use the TileItem.AppearanceItem property instead.

An that contains corresponding appearance settings.

Provides access to appearance settings applied to the tile item when it is hovered over. This property is obsolete. Use the TileItem.AppearanceItem property instead.

An that contains corresponding appearance settings.

Provides access to appearance settings used to paint the current .

An that contains corresponding appearance settings.

Provides access to appearance settings applied to the tile item when it is selected. This property is obsolete. Use the TileItem.AppearanceItem property instead.

An that contains corresponding appearance settings.

Gets or sets the current ‘s background image.

An Image object, set as the current ‘s background.

Gets or sets the current ‘s background image position.

A enumerator value that specifies the current ‘s background image position.

Gets or sets the appearance ‘s background image.

A enumerator value that specifies the position of the current ‘s background image.

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command in the source and bind it to this .

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this .

Binds the specific parameterized command to this .

Uses the command selector to find an appropriate parameterized command of the target type in the source and bind it to this .

An Expression that selects the appropriate command from the source object. An Object (typically, a ViewModel) where the commandSelector looks for the required command. A Func delegate that passes the specific Object to the command as a parameter. The type of a ViewModel that stores a bindable command. An IDisposable object. Disposing of this object unbinds the command from this .

Gets or sets whether the current ‘s border is visible.

A value that specifies whether the TileItem’s border is visible.

Gets or sets if the current is checked.

true if the current is checked; otherwise, false.

Fires after the current ‘s check state was changed.

Gets or sets the whose Execute(Object) method will be called when the Click event is invoked.

The command.

Occurs when the CanExecute(Object) status of the has changed.

Occurs after the value of the property has changed.

Gets or sets the parameter that is passed to the command specified by the Command property.

The parameter.

Occurs after the value of the property has changed.

Gets or sets the animation effect used to display all s within the current .

A TileItemContentAnimationType enumerator value specifying what animation effect will be used to display all s within the current .

Gets a tile control to which the current belongs.

An object implementing the ITileControl interface to which the tile item belongs.

Gets a that is currently displayed within a .

A TileItemFrame object that is currently displayed within the specified . null if tile item contains no frames.

Gets or sets the currently displayed ‘s index.

An Int32 value that indicates the currently displayed ‘s index.

Provides access to a collection of s used by the current .

A TileItemElementCollection object that contains the s used by the current .

Gets or sets whether the item is enabled.

true if the item is enabled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the TileItem.ItemDoubleClick event for this is raised.

A DefaultBoolean enumerator value that specifies whether the TileItem.ItemDoubleClick event for this is raised.

Gets or sets a period of time that elapses before one is changed to another.

An Int32 value specifying a period of time that elapses before one is changed to another.

Gets a collection of frames used by the current .

A TileItemFrameCollection object that is a collection of frames used by the current .

Gets a that owns the current .

A TileGroup that owns the current .

Get or sets the current ‘s ID.

An Int32 value that is the current ‘s ID.

Gets or sets the current tile item’s icon.

An Image object that is the current tile item’s icon.

Gets or sets the current ‘s icon position.

A enumerator value that specifies the current ‘s icon position.

Gets or sets the index of the image within the TileControl.Images collection that should serve as the ‘s glyph.

An Int32 value indicating an index of the image within the TileControl.Images collection that should serve as the ‘s glyph.

Provides access to properties that allow you to set up raster and vector images for this .

An DevExpress.Utils.ImageOptions object that provides access to image-related settings.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the way a ‘s glyph is stretched within the item.

A enumerator value that specifies the way a ‘s glyph is stretched within the item.

Gets or sets a tile item’s TileItem.Text‘ position relative to the item’s icon. This property is obsolete. Use the TileItemElement.ImageToTextAlignment instead.

A TileControlImageToTextAlignment that specifies a tile item’s TileItem.Image position relative to the item’s TileItem.Text.

Gets or sets the distance between the tile item’s glyph and text when grouped. This property is now obsolete. Use the TileItemElement.ImageToTextIndent property instead.

An Int32 value that specifies the distance between the tile item’s glyph and text when grouped.

Obsolete. Please use the TileItem.ItemSize property instead.

Fires when a user clicks the current tile.

Occurs when an end-user double-clicks the current .

Gets the info associated with this .

A TileItemViewInfo object that contains detailed info about this .

Fires when a user presses the current tile.

Gets or sets the size of the .

A TileItemSize enumerator value that specifies the size of the .

Gets or sets the current ‘s name.

A String value specifying the current ‘s name.

Slides from the currently displayed to the next frame in the TileItem.Frames collection.

Called each time this is clicked.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Called automatically each time an end-user presses this .

Called automatically each time an end-user right clicks this .

Provides access to collections of rows, columns, and spans that specify a layout table where you can arrange tile elements.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TileItemTableLayoutOptions object that specifies options that affect the table layout of tile elements.

Gets or sets the padding for the current .

A System.Windows.Forms.Padding structure that specifies the padding for the current .

Raises the TileItem.ItemClick event.

Raises the TileItem.RightItemClick event.

Removes the object assigned to the current tile item.

Fires after the current was clicked with the right mouse button.

Gets or sets the number of rows that occupy the current large or wide .

An Int32 value specifying the number of rows that occupy the current large or wide .

Forces the current tile item to display a specific .

A to be displayed. A Boolean value indicating whether the frame should be displayed using the frame animation.

Gets or sets the site associated with the current .

A System.ComponentModel.ISite object associated with the current .

Starts the frame animation for this from its first frame.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Stops the Tile Frame Animation for the current .

Gets or sets a for the current tile item.

A object associated with the current tile item.

Gets or sets the data associated with a object.

An Object containing the information associated with a object.

Gets or sets the first text block’s content within the current .

A String value specifying the first text block’s content within the current .

Gets or sets the second text block’s content within the current . This property is now obsolete. Use the TileItemElement.Text instead.

A String value specifying the second text block’s content within the current .

Gets or sets the second text block’s alignment for the current . This property is obsolete. Use the TileItemElement.TextAlignment instead.

A enumerator value specifying corresponding alignment settings.

Gets or sets the third text block’s content within the current . This property is now obsolete. Use the TileItemElement.Text instead.

A String value specifying the third text block’s content within the current .

Gets or sets the third text block’s alignment for the current . This property is obsolete. Use the TileItemElement.TextAlignment instead.

A enumerator value specifying corresponding alignment settings.

Gets or sets the fourth text block’s content within the current . This property is now obsolete. Use the TileItemElement.Text instead.

A String value specifying the fourth text block’s content within the current .

Gets or sets the fourth text block’s alignment for the current . This property is obsolete. Use the TileItemElement.TextAlignment instead.

A enumerator value specifying corresponding alignment settings.

Gets or sets the first text block’s alignment for the current . This property is obsolete. Use the TileItemElement.TextAlignment instead.

A enumerator value specifying corresponding alignment settings.

Gets or sets the specifics that determine how the current ‘s text content will be displayed.

A TileItemContentShowMode enumerator value that indicates how the current ‘s text content is displayed.

Gets or sets whether the item is visible.

true if the item is visible; otherwise, false.

Exposes the appearance settings used to paint items in the and in different visual states.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

A DevExpress.Utils.AppearanceDefault object containing the default appearance settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified appearance settings.

An whose settings will be copied to the created object.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

An object that implements the DevExpress.Utils.IAppearanceOwner interface and will own the created appearance object.

Applies a DevExpress.Utils.AppearanceDefault object for the desired visual state to the current tile or element.

A DevExpress.Utils.AppearanceDefault object that should be applied for the desired visual state to the current tile or element.

Applies appearance settings used by the specific tile or tile element for the desired visual state to the current tile or element.

An used by the specific tile or element that should be applied to the current tile or tile element.

Applies appearance settings used by the specific tile or tile element for all visual states to the current tile or element.

A object used by the specific tile or element that should be applied to the current tile or tile element.

Releases all resources used by a object of the specific .

Returns the appearance object contained within the collection by its name.

A String value that specifies the name of the appearance object. The object with the specified name.

Specifies appearance settings used to paint a when it is hovered.

An object containing appearance settings used to paint a tile item when it is hovered.

Specifies appearance settings used to paint a in its regular visual state.

An object containing appearance settings used to paint a tile item in its regular visual state.

Specifies appearance settings used to paint a when an end-user clicks this item and does not release it.

An AppearanceObject that stores appearance settings applied to pressed TileItems.

Specifies appearance settings used to paint a when it is selected.

An object containing appearance settings used to paint a tile item when it is selected.

Returns the textual representation of the .

A value, which is the textual representation of the .

Exposes members that specify check options of tile items.

Allows an end-user to check multiple tile items in a single .

Disables checking tile items within a .

Allows an end-user to check only one tile item within a at a time.

A method for handling events that take a object as a parameter.

The event source that identifies the TileItem that fires the event. A object that contains data for the event.

A collection with objects.

Initializes a new instance of the with specific settings.

A object that owns the item collection created.

Adds the specified item to the current collection.

An ITileItem object to be added to the collection. A zero-based index of the item in the collection.

Gets if the specific presents within the current .

A TileItem object to be tested. true if the specific presents within the current ; otherwise, false.

Disposes of the current collection.

Returns an enumerator that iterates through the collection.

An IEnumerator object that can be used to iterate through the collection.

Gets the position of the specified in the current item collection.

A whose index is to be obtained. A zero-based Int32 value that is the index of the in the current item collection.

Inserts new into the current and places it at a specific position.

An Int32 value indicating the position at which the new item should be placed. A to be added.

Provides indexed access to individual items in the .

A zero-based integer specifying the desired item’s position within the . If it’s negative or exceeds the last available index, an exception is raised. A TileItem object that is contained within the current .

Provides access to the s in the current collection by their names.

A String value that is the name of a to be obtained. A object with the specific name.

Gets a that owns the current .

A TileGroup object that owns the current .

Removes the specified from the current .

A to be deleted.

Exposes members to specify tile content alignment.

Content appears vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned at the center.

Content appears vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned on the left.

Content appears vertically aligned at the bottom, and horizontally aligned on the right.

Default content alignment.

Indicates that manual text alignment, based on the TileItemElement.TextLocation coordinates, should be used.

Content is horizontally and vertically aligned at the center.

Content appears vertically aligned at the center, and horizontally aligned on the left.

Content appears vertically aligned at the center, and horizontally aligned on the right.

Content appears vertically aligned on the top, and horizontally aligned at the center.

Content appears vertically aligned on the top, and horizontally aligned on the left.

Content appears vertically aligned on the top, and horizontally aligned on the right.

Supplies data for the TileControl.StartItemDragging and TileControl.EndItemDragging events.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Gets or sets a tile item that fired an event which takes the object as a parameter.

A object that fired an event which takes the object as a parameter.

Gets the to which a being dragged is about to be placed.

A TileGroup in which the current Tile is about to be placed.

A method for handling events that take a object as a parameter.

The event source that identifies the TileItem that fires the event. A object that contains data for the event.

Provides the base class for creating and using tile item elements.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Returns the actual image from the object

Actual image from the object.

Gets or sets the side of the anchor element at which this should appear.

An AnchorAlignment enumerator value that specifies the side of the anchor element at which this should appear.

Gets or sets an AnchorElement, relative to which this is aligned.

An AnchorElement, relative to which this is aligned.

Gets or sets the index of an AnchorElement within the same TileItem.Elements collection as the TargetElement.

An Int32 value that is the index of an AnchorElement to which this TargetElement is anchored.

Gets or sets the distance between this TargetElement and the AnchorElement to which it is anchored.

An Int32 value that is the distance between this TargetElement and the AnchorElement to which it is anchored.

Gets or sets the anchor offset for this .

A Point structure that is the anchor offset for this .

Gets or sets whether the current should be animated during the Tile Animation.

true if the current should be animated during the Tile Animation; otherwise, false.

Provides access to appearance settings used to paint the current ‘s

A TileItemAppearances object that stores appearance settings used to paint the current ‘s

Copies the content and content settings of the specific to the current one.

A whose content and settings should be copied to the current element.

Copies the specific content and content settings of the target to the current one.

A whose content and settings should be copied to the current element. true if text content should be copied; otherwise, false. true if a glyph should be copied; otherwise, false.

Returns a copy of this element.

A object that is this element’s copy.

Gets a tile element collection to which the current belongs.

A TileItemElementCollection that owns the current .

Gets or sets the index of the column in the layout table where the current tile element should be placed.

The zero-based index of the table column that the element should appear within.

Gets or sets this ‘s height.

An Int32 value that is this ‘s height.

Gets or sets a glyph for the current .

An Image object that is the current ‘s glyph.

Gets or sets the glyph position for the current .

A TileItemContentAlignment enumerator value that specifies the glyph position for the current .

Gets or sets whether this should draw a border around its image.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TileItemElementImageBorderMode enumerator value that specifies whether this should draw a border around its image.

Gets or sets the color of a border drawn around this ‘s image.

The Color of the border drawn around this ‘s image.

Gets or sets an index of the image used as the current ‘s glyph.

An Int32 value indicating the index of the image used as the current ‘s glyph.

Gets or sets the ‘s graphic content’s position.

A Point structure that is the glyph’s position.

Provides access to properties that allow you to set up raster and vector images for this .

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TileItemElementImageOptions object that provides access to image-related settings.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the way a glyph is stretched within the current .

A enumerator value that specifies the way a glyph is stretched within the current .

Gets or sets the image size for this .

A Size structure that is the image size for this .

Gets or sets an ‘s text position relative to the element’s icon.

A TileControlImageToTextAlignment that specifies a tile item element’s TileItemElement.Image position relative to the item element’s TileItemElement.Text.

Gets or sets the distance between a tile item element’s glyph and text when grouped.

An Int32 value that specifies the distance between tile item’s glyph and text when grouped.

Gets or sets the uniform resource identifier of the image in the DX Image Gallery displayed in the current element. A specific version of the addressed image is automatically chosen based on the app context (the current skin and required image size).

A DevExpress.Utils.DxImageUri object that specifies the uniform resource identifier of the image to be displayed in the current element.

Gets or sets the maximum width this ‘s text can occupy.

An Int32 value that is the maximum width this ‘s text can occupy.

Gets or sets the index of the row in the layout table where the current tile element should be placed.

The zero-based index of the table row that the element should appear within.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets whether this should be stretched across the entire tile.

true if this should be stretched across the entire tile; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether this should be vertically stretched across the entire tile.

true if this should be vertically stretched across the entire tile; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets a text content for the current .

A String value that is the current ‘s text content.

Gets or sets the alignment of the ‘s text content.

A TileItemContentAlignment enumerator value specifying the alignment of the ‘s text content.

Gets or sets the ‘s text content’s position.

A Point structure that is the text content’s position.

Returns the text content of the current .

A String value that is the current ‘s text content.

Gets or sets whether the current ‘s image should be animated during the Tile Animation.

true if the current ‘s image should be animated during the Tile Animation; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the current ‘s caption should be animated during the Tile Animation.

true if the current ‘s caption should be animated during the Tile Animation; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets this ‘s width.

An Int32 value that is this ‘s width.

Gets or sets the Z-order of the current element.

The Z-order of the current element.

A collection with objects.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

An object that implements the INotifyElementPropertiesChanged interface and will own the created collection.

Adds a specific to the current .

A TileItemElement object to be added to the current . An Int32 value that is the index of the added . Returns -1 if no element has been added.

Copies the specific element collection to the current .

A that should be copied to the current .

Locks the , preventing change notifications (and visual updates) from being raised by the object until the EndUpdate or CancelUpdate method is called.

Unlocks the object after it has been locked by the BeginUpdate method, without causing an immediate visual update.

Determines whether this contains the target element.

A to be checked. true if this contains the target element; otherwise, false.

Unlocks the object after a call to the BeginUpdate method and causes an immediate visual update.

Gets a position of the target within the current .

A TileItemElement whose index is to be obtained. An Int32 value that is the position of the target within the current .

Adds a specific to the current and places it at the predefined position.

An Int32 value that is the position inside the parent a newly added will occupy. A TileItemElement object to be added to the current .

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets if this is currently locked by the TileItemElementCollection.BeginUpdate method call.

true if a tile control is currently locked by the TileItemElementCollection.BeginUpdate method call; otherwise, false.

Returns a child object that occupies the target within the current .

An Int32 value that is the position of the element to be obtained within the current . A TileItemElement object that occupies the target position within the current .

Gets an object that implements the INotifyElementPropertiesChanged interface and owns the current .

An INotifyElementPropertiesChanged object that owns the current tile elements collection.

Deletes a specific from the current .

A TileItemElement to be removed.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Contains data for events that occur for s.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

Gets or sets a that caused firing a related event.

A that caused firing a related event.

Implements the functionality of tile frames.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

Gets or sets if the current frame’s background should be animated when the frame is displayed.

true if the current frame’s background should be animated when the frame is displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets if the current frame’s glyphs should be animated when the frame is displayed.

true if the current frame’s glyphs should be animated when the frame is displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets if the current frame’s text content should be animated when the frame is displayed.

true if the current frame’s text content should be animated when the frame is displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the animation effect used to display the current .

A TileItemContentAnimationType enumerator value specifying what animation effect will be used to display the current .

Provides access to appearance settings for this .

An AppearanceObject that stores appearance settings for this .

Gets or sets the current ‘s background image.

An Image object, set as the current ‘s background.

Provides access to a collection of s used by the current .

A TileItemElementCollection object that contains the s used by the current .

Gets or sets the current tile item frame’s icon.

An Image object that is the current tile item frame’s icon.

Gets or sets a period of time that will elapse before the current is changed to the next one.

An Int32 value specifying a period of time that will elapse before the current is changed to the next one.

Gets or sets the data associated with a object.

An Object containing the information associated with a object.

Gets or sets the first text block’s content within the current . This property is now obsolete. Use the TileItemElement.Text instead.

A String value specifying the first text block’s content within the current .

Gets or sets the second text block’s content within the current . This property is now obsolete. Use the TileItemElement.Text instead.

A String value specifying the second text block’s content within the current .

Gets or sets the third block’s content within the current . This property is now obsolete. Use the TileItemElement.Text instead.

A String value specifying the third text block’s content within the current .

Gets or sets the fourth text block’s content within the current . This property is now obsolete. Use the TileItemElement.Text instead.

A String value specifying the fourth text block’s content within the current .

Gets or sets if the current should display its own TileItemFrame.BackgroundImage.

true if the current should display its own TileItemFrame.BackgroundImage; false to display the previous frame’s image.

Gets or sets if the current should display its own glyphs.

true if the current should display its own glyphs; false to display the previous frame’s glyphs.

Gets or sets if the current should display its own text content.

true if the current should display its own text content; false to display the previous frame’s context.

A collection of objects.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified owner.

An object that is the owner of the created collection.

Adds a new into a .

A to be added. An Int32 value indicating the position into which the new frame was added.

Clones all settings from the target to this .

A target object whose settings are to be copied to this .

Gets if the specific presents within the current .

A TileItemFrame object to be tested. true if the specific presents within the current ; otherwise, false.

Returns the position of the specific within the current .

A TileItemFrame object whose position within the current collection is to be obtained. A zero-based Int32 value specifying the desired frame’s position within the collection. Returns -1 if the frame doesn’t belong to the current collection.

Adds the specific into the current and places it at the desired position.

An Integer value indicating the newly added ‘s position within the . A TileItem to be inserted.

Provides indexed access to individual items in the .

A zero-based integer specifying the desired frame’s position within the . If it’s negative or exceeds the last available index, an exception is raised. A TileItemFrame object that is contained within the current .

Gets the collection’s owner.

A ITileItem object that is the collection’s owner.

Deletes a specific from the current .

A TileItemFrame to be deleted.

Exposes members that specify a glyph’s stretch mode.

Acts as the TileItemImageScaleMode.NoScale value.

An image is displayed in its original size and arranged according to the TileItem.ImageAlignment property.

A glyph is stretched in order to fit within the area of a tile item.

A glyph is stretched horizontally. Its height remains unchanged.

A glyph is stretched vertically. Its width remains unchanged.

Zooms an image proportionally so that it’s displayed within the client area in its entirety.

Zooms an image proportionally, allowing its smaller side (width or height) to be displayed in its entirety. The image is centered, so the larger side (height or width) will not be displayed in its entirety.

Contains members that label different Tile sizes.

The default Tile size (equal to the TileItemSize.Wide size).

A rectangular tile whose side dimensions are twice as large as the TileControl.ItemSize property value.

A square Tile with its dimensions equal to the TileControl.ItemSize property value.

A rectangular Tile with its side dimensions equal to half of the TileControl.ItemSize property value.

A rectangular Tile twice as long as a TileItemSize.Medium Tile.

An editor that allows end users to display and edit time.

Creates a new object.

Closes the editor’s popup window discarding the changes made.

Occurs when the control’s pop-up window is completely closed and allows you to specify exactly how it was closed.

Closes the popup window accepting the changes made.

Allows you to accept or discard the modified control’s value after the pop-up window is closed.

Gets the editor’s class name.

The string value identifying the editor’s class name.

Returns the control’s popup window.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.TouchPopupTimeEditForm object that represents the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

Occurs after the control’s pop-up window is completely displayed.

Gets an object containing properties, methods and events specific to the time editor.

A object containing time editor settings.

Occurs when the current attempts to close its pop-up window.

Occurs when the control attempts to open its pop-up window.

This method is not supported for controls.

Displays the ‘s pop-up window.

Gets the text string representing the edited time value.

A string value representing the editor’s value.

Gets or sets the currently edited time value.

A object representing the edited time value.

The ‘s client that renders a lightweight chart with a time-span horizontal axis.

Creates a new object.

Provides access to the grid options of the time-span chart range control client.

A object that contains grid options for the range control’s time-span chart client.

Provides access to the range settings of the time-span chart range control client.

A object that contains settings to customize the range of the time-span chart range control client.

Contains specific settings which define the representation of grid lines and labels in the time-span chart range control client.

Creates a new object.

Gets or sets the time-span measurement unit to which the chart’s gridlines and labels should be aligned.

A enumeration value that represents the measurement unit to which the chart’s gridlines and labels should be aligned.

Specifies the measurement unit to which selection thumbs of the range control are snapped.

A enumeration value that represents the alignment interval of selection thumbs.

Contains the common settings that define the range displayed by a time-span chart client of the range control.

Creates a new object.

Gets or sets the end bound of a time-span chart client range.

A time-span value that is the range end bound.

Gets or sets the start bound of a time-span chart client range.

A value that is the range start bound.

The editor to display and edit time intervals.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets the editor’s class name.

A string value representing the editor’s class name.

Gets or sets the editor’s value (time span).

An object representing the editor’s value (time span).

Returns the control’s popup window.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.Popup.TimeSpanEditDropDownForm object that represents the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

Gets an object which contains properties, methods and events specific to the time span editor.

A object that comprises the settings for the time span editor.

Gets the DateTime representation of the time interval.

The DateTime representation of the time interval.

Gets or sets the editor’s value (time span).

A object representing the editor’s value (time span).

A check editor that uses a movable bar to edit Boolean values.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets the editor’s class name.

A System.String object identifying the class name of the current editor.

Gets or sets the editor’s edit value, which specifies the editor’s check state.

The editor’s edit value.

Gets or sets the control’s check state.

true if the control is checked; otherwise, false.

Fires when the ToggleSwitch.IsOn property value changes.

Gets an object containing properties, methods and events specific to the control.

A object instance containing settings for the control.

This property is not supported by the class.

Inverts the state of the control.

Fires when the control’s state is changed.

The text editor that applies custom validation to the entered text and transforms text blocks which passed this validation to tokens.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the default settings.

Focuses this ‘s text box.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.RepositoryItemTokenEdit.BeforePopup

Occurs before the peek panel assigned to this is displayed.

Gets which control’s element is located at the specific position.

A Point structure that specifies the target position. An DevExpress.XtraEditors.ViewInfo.TokenEditHitInfo enumerator value that specifies which control’s element is located at the specific position.

Gets which token element is located at the specific position.

An Int32 value that is the X-axis coordinate of the target location. An Int32 value that is the Y-axis coordinate of the target location. An DevExpress.XtraEditors.ViewInfo.TokenEditHitInfo enumerator value that specifies which control’s element is located at the specific position.

Gets the currently checked token within this .

A TokenEditToken that is the currently checked token within this .

Returns the object that contains all currently checked tokens within this .

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TokenEditCheckedItemCollection object that contains all currently checked tokens within this TokenEdit.

Checks the token with the specified value in your TokenEdit control.

An Object that is the value of the token that will be checked.

Returns this .

A TokenEdit object that is this itself.

DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.RepositoryItemTokenEdit.Closed

Closes the drop-down window.

Forces the ‘s pop-up to close in a specific mode.

A PopupCloseMode enumerator value that specifies the mode in which the ‘s pop-up is closed.

Moves focus away from this ‘s text box and optionally removes the last entered text.

true if the last entered text should be removed; otherwise, false.

DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.RepositoryItemTokenEdit.CloseUp

Allows you to re-draw the default token glyph.

Allows you to re-paint the token text area.

Gets whether the token editor or its pop-up form has focus.

true if the token editor or its pop-up form has focus; otherwise, false.

Returns the textual representation of the class.

Return value: TokenEdit.

Returns the text currently displayed in the .

A String value that is the currently displayed in the text.

Explicitly initializes this Token Edit Control‘s drop-down menu.

Returns the control’s popup window.

An object that is the control’s popup window. null (Nothing in VB) if the popup window has not been opened yet.

Returns a TokenEditSelectedItemCollection object that contains all tokens currently visible within the editor.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TokenEditSelectedItemCollection object that contains all tokens currently visible within the editor.

Returns the object that contains the internal information used to render this .

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.ViewInfo.TokenEditViewInfo object that contains the internal information used to render the editor.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Checks whether there are any tokens currently displayed within the ‘s edit box.

true if there are any tokens currently displayed within the ‘s edit box; otherwise, false.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Checks whether or not this is currently focused.

true if this is currently focused; otherwise, false.

Gets whether the editor’s popup is currently open.

true if the editor’s popup is currently open; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the ‘s text box currently has focus.

true if the ‘s text box currently has focus; otherwise, false.

Gets the text box that provides text editing functionality.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TokenEditMaskBox object that is the editor’s text box.

DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.RepositoryItemTokenEdit.Popup

When the RepositoryItemTokenEdit.DropDownShowMode property is set to Outlook, the drop-down menu width is calculated according to the widest token available. The PopupAutoWidthCalculationLimit property allows the Token Edit to check only first N tokens when it calculates the required menu width. This limitation speeds up the calculation process and improves the control performance.

The number of tokens whose widths the editor should check before it chooses the required drop-down menu width.

Provides access to an object that stores the main settings.

A object that stores the main settings.

DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.RepositoryItemTokenEdit.QueryCloseUp

DevExpress.XtraEditors.Repository.RepositoryItemTokenEdit.QueryPopUp

Hides a token with the specified value from the TokenEdit control’s textbox.

An Object that is the value of the token that will be hidden.

Occurs when a user clicks the Remove button in the TokenEdit drop-down menu.

Scrolls this up or down to the target token.

A TokenEditToken to which this should be scrolled.

Gets the collection that contains all tokens currently visible within the editor.

A DevExpress.XtraEditors.TokenEditSelectedItemCollection object that contains all tokens currently visible within the editor.

Occurs whenever the list of currently selected tokens changes.

Selects an item with specified value.

An Object that is the value of the token that should be selected.

Displays the drop-down assigned to this .

Gets or sets whether this can be focused by sequentially pressing the Tab keyboard key. Always equal to true.

Always true (this can always be focused using the Tab key).

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Occurs when a token in this changed its checked state.

Gets or sets the first visible token row within this .

An Int32 value that is the number of the first visible token row within this .

Unchecks the token with the specified value in your TokenEdit control.

An Object that is the value of the token that needs to be unchecked.

Validates the text entered in this .

Allows you to perform the custom validation on text currently entered in this control.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

The token.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

The token value. Token values must be unique. This value is assigned to the property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

The token description. This value is assigned to the property. The token value. Token values must be unique. This value is assigned to the property.

Gets or sets the description.

The token description.

Gets the hash code (a number) that corresponds to the value of the current object.

The hash code for the current object.

Returns a string representing the current object.

A String value that represents the current object.

Gets or sets the value. Token values must be unique.

The token value. Token values must be unique.

Enumerates values that specify the type of the value.

The property returns System.Enum values, which are selected tokens.

The property returns a ComponentModel.BindingList object that contains selected tokens.

The property returns a System.String value that contains the selected tokens separated with a comma.

Displays a scale with tick marks. Users can drag a thumb to change the current value.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets whether the track bar’s size is automatically calculated, based on its look and feel settings.

true to allow a track bar to automatically calculate its size; otherwise, false.

Fires after the value of the RepositoryItemTrackBar.AutoSize property has been changed.

Gets or sets the track bar’s background image.

An that represents the background image.

Fires after the value of the TrackBarControl.BackgroundImage property has been changed.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

An value that specifies the position of an image on the control.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Allows you to provide custom tooltips for the thumb(s).

Calculates the minumum height of the editor.

The minimum height of the editor, in pixels.

Occurs when a label within the current needs to be displayed.

Decreases the value.

true to decrease the value by ; false to decrease the value by .

Gets the editor’s class name.

The string that represents the editor’s class name.

Gets or sets the editor’s value.

An object that represents the editor’s value.

Gets or sets the font used to display the editor’s contents.

A object that specifies the font used to display the editor’s contents.

Gets the foreground color of the TrackBarControl.

Always SystemColors.WindowText.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Retrieves the size of a rectangular area into which the control can be fitted.

The custom-sized area for the control. A System.Drawing.Size value.

Gets or sets the Input Method Editor (IME) mode of the control.

One of the values.

Fires after the value of the TrackBarControl.ImeMode property has been changed.

Increases the value.

true to increase the value by ; false to increase the value by .

Gets or sets the inplace type of editor.

A enumeration member specifying the inplace editor type .

Scrolls the trackbar to the lower end of the range.

Scrolls the trackbar to the upper end of the range.

Moves the thumb to the left by the value.

Moves the thumb to the right by the value.

Moves the thumb to the left by the value.

Moves the thumb to the right by the value.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

A object.

Gets an object which contains properties, methods and events specific to track bars.

A object that contains track bar settings.

Fires the sequence of the TrackBarControl.CustomLabel events for every tick within a .

Fires when a user changes the trackbar’s value using the mouse or keyboard.

Overrides the BaseEdit.Text property.

A string value that represents the text displayed by the editor.

Fires after the value of the TrackBarControl.Text property has been changed.

Returns a string that represents the TrackBarControl.

A string that represents the TrackBarControl.

Gets or sets the editor’s value.

An integer value that specifies the editor’s value.

Fires after the value of the TrackBarControl.Value property has been changed.

Contains values that specify which date grouping Views are available in Windows Vista display mode.

Combines the following views: MonthView, QuarterView, YearView, YearsGroupView and CenturyView.

A century view:

Combines the following views: MonthView, YearView, YearsGroupView and CenturyView.

A month view:

A year view by quarters:

A 12-years view:

A year view by months:

Contains values that specify how a control indicates data operations performed in a background thread.

The same as the WaitAnimationOptions.Indicator option.

Background operations are indicated within a dedicated indicator button. For the , these operations are indicated within the Header Panel Button.

Background operations are indicated within a special panel displayed above a control.

Exposes members common to dialogs and message boxes, whose event arguments derive from this class.

Initializes a new instance of the XtraBaseArgs class with the specified settings.

A UserLookAndFeel object that should be applied to the owner. The window that owns this XtraBaseArgs object. The owner caption. Buttons displayed by the owner. The index of the default owner button. The default button is focused when the owner shows on-screen. Additionally, if the AutoClose settings are specified, this button will be considered as clicked when the timer expires. Specifies whether the owner supports HTML-inspired Text Formatting. The system sound played when the owner is shown on-screen.

Gets or sets whether the shown object supports HTML-inspired Text Formatting.

Specifies whether HTML tags are accepted.

Gets or sets whether the or trims the caption to accommodate the contents.

true, if the control trims the caption to accommodate the contents; false, if the control stretches and attempts to show the entire caption.

Provides access to settings that allow the shown object (XtraMessageBox, XtraInputBox, etc.) to automatically close after a certain delay.

Provides access to auto-close settings.

Gets or sets the alignment mode for buttons of this dialog or message.

The button alignment mode.

Gets or sets the padding for buttons of this message or dialog.

The button padding.

Gets or sets buttons that the shown object (XtraMessageBox, XtraInputBox, etc.) has.

An array of owner buttons.

Gets or sets the shown object (XtraMessageBox, XtraInputBox, etc.) caption.

The owner caption.

Gets or sets the distance between the dialog (message box) content and borders.

The distance between borders and dialog (message box) content.

Gets or sets the index of a button from the Buttons collection that is a default button. A default button is initially focused and is considered clicked when user presses Enter or the auto-close timer expires (see ).

The index of a default button.

Returns the owner LookAndFeel object.

The owner LookAndFeel.

Occurs when a user clicks any element within an HTML template.

Occurs when a mouse button is pressed, and the mouse pointer is over an HTML element.

Occurs when a mouse pointer moves while over an element of an HTML-CSS template.

Occurs when a mouse pointer leaves the bounds of an element within an HTML-CSS template.

Occurs when a mouse pointer enters the bounds of an element within an HTML-CSS template.

Occurs when a mouse button pressed over an element of an HTML-CSS template is released.

Gets or sets or . can display images from this collection.

An object that is an image collection.

Returns the HTML-CSS template applied to this message or dialog.

The custom message or dialog template.

Gets or sets the LookAndFeel object applied to the owner.

The LookAndFeel object applied to the owner.

Gets or sets the system sound played when the owner appears on-screen.

The system sound played.

Gets or sets the owner of this XtraBaseArgs object.

The owner of this XtraBaseArgs object.

Provides access to a Form embedded into a shown object.

A message box that can display any control (e.g., a UserControl) in its client area.

Gets or sets whether a dialog is painted using its own look and feel settings, which are specified by the lookAndFeel parameter of specific XtraDialog.Show method overloads. This property is ignored if the lookAndFeel parameter is set to use a skinning paint scheme.

true, if the dialog is painted using its own look and feel settings; false, if the default look and feel settings are used.

Gets or sets whether the HTML Text Formatting feature is enabled by default for dialog captions.

true if the HTML text formatting feature is enabled for dialog captions; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the buttons are aligned on the left, right, or in the center.

A value the specifies whether the buttons are aligned on the left, right, or in the center.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object whose properties specify the dialog’s look and feel. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object whose properties specify the dialog’s look and feel. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons should be displayed in the dialog. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object whose properties specify the dialog’s look and feel. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons should be displayed in the dialog. One of the values that specifies the default button for the dialog. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object whose properties specify the dialog’s look and feel. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons should be displayed in the dialog. One of the values that specifies the default button for the dialog. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object whose properties specify the dialog’s look and feel. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object whose properties specify the dialog’s look and feel. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object whose properties specify the dialog’s look and feel. An object that serves as the dialog’s top-level window and owner. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object whose properties specify the dialog’s look and feel. An object that serves as the dialog’s top-level window and owner. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. An array of values that specify which buttons should be displayed in the dialog. The zero-based index of the default button. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object whose properties specify the dialog’s look and feel. An object that serves as the dialog’s top-level window and owner. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. An array of values that specify which buttons should be displayed in the dialog. One of the values that specifies the default button for the dialog. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object whose properties specify the dialog’s look and feel. An object that serves as the dialog’s top-level window and owner. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons should be displayed in the dialog. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object whose properties specify the dialog’s look and feel. An object that serves as the dialog’s top-level window and owner. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons should be displayed in the dialog. One of the values that specifies the default button for the dialog. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object whose properties specify the dialog’s look and feel. An object that serves as the dialog’s top-level window and owner. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons should be displayed in the dialog. One of the values that specifies the default button for the dialog. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

Displays an with the specified settings.

An XtraDialogArgs object that allows you to dynamically customize the displayed dialog. A enumerator value that specifies what dialog button an end-user has clicked.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons should be displayed in the dialog. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons should be displayed in the dialog. One of the values that specifies the default button for the dialog. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified control, caption, buttons and default button.

Invokes a dialog with the specified control, caption and buttons.

A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons should be displayed in the dialog. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified control and caption.

A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog displaying the specified control in its client area.

A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object that serves as the dialog’s top-level window and owner. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object that serves as the dialog’s top-level window and owner. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. An array of values that specify which buttons should be displayed in the dialog. The zero-based index of the default button. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified owner, control, buttons and default button.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object that serves as the dialog’s top-level window and owner. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons should be displayed in the dialog. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified settings.

An object that serves as the dialog’s top-level window and owner. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons should be displayed in the dialog. One of the values that specifies the default button for the dialog. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified owner, control, caption, buttons and default button.

An object that serves as the dialog’s top-level window and owner. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons should be displayed in the dialog. One of the values that specifies the default button for the dialog. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified owner, control, caption and buttons.

Invokes a dialog with the specified control, caption and owner.

An object that serves as the dialog’s top-level window and owner. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. A string that specifies the dialog’s caption. One of the values.

Invokes a dialog with the specified owner and control.

An object that serves as the dialog’s top-level window and owner. A control to be displayed in the dialog’s client area. One of the values.

Arguments that should be passed to the method to customize the shown .

Initializes a new XtraDialogArgs class instance.

An object that specifies look and feel settings. An IWin32Window object that provides look and feel settings for the dialog box. A Control object that specifies the dialog box content. The text in the title bar. An array of values that specifies which buttons to display in the input box. An integer value that specifies the default button’s index in the buttons array. True to parse HTML tags; False to display the plain text; Default to use the static (Shared in VB) XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText property. A value that specifies the system sound played when the input box is shown.

Initializes a new XtraDialogArgs class instance.

An IWin32Window object that provides look and feel settings for the dialog box. A Control object that specifies the dialog box content. The text in the title bar. An array of values that specifies which buttons to display in the input box. An integer value that specifies the default button’s index in the buttons array.

Gets or sets a control that specifies the dialog box content.

A Control object that specifies the dialog box content.

A skinable dialog with one editor () and OK/Cancel buttons to accept or reject the current value of this editor.

Gets or sets whether input boxes use the default or custom look and feel settings.

true if input boxes use the custom look and feel settings; false if the default look and feel settings are used.

Members of this enumeration allow you to specify what buttons an dialog should display.

The “OK” button for messages.

The set of “OK” and “Cancel” buttons for messages.

The set of “Yes” and “No” buttons for messages.

Gets or sets whether the buttons are aligned on the left, right, or in the center.

A value the specifies whether the buttons are aligned on the left, right, or in the center.

Displays an input box with the specified settings.

An object that comprises dialog box settings. The entered value, or null (Nothing in VB.NET) if nothing was entered.

Displays an with the given parameters.

The text string displayed above an editor. The caption of the message window. The initial editor value. Specifies editor buttons. The value entered by a user, or null if no value was entered.

Displays an input box with the specified title, prompt, and default response.

The text above the editor. The text in the title bar. The text that is the editor’s default value. The entered value, or null if nothing was entered.

Displays an with the given parameters.

The owner of the displayed Input Box. The text string displayed above an editor. The caption of the message window. The initial editor value. Specifies editor buttons. The value entered by a user, or null (Nothing in VB.NET) if no value was entered.

Displays an input box with the specified title, prompt, and default response.

An IWin32Window object that shares its look-and-feel settings with this Input Box. The text above the editor. The text in the title bar. The text that is the editor’s default value. The entered value, or null if nothing was entered.

Displays an input box with the specified settings.

An object that specifies the input box settings. The returned value’s type. The value entered by a user, or null (Nothing in VB.NET) if nothing was entered.

Displays an input box with the specified settings.

The text string displayed above an Input Box editor. The Input Box window caption. The initial editor value. Specifies Input Box buttons. The type of a value requested from users. The value entered by a user, or null if nothing was entered.

Displays an input box with the specified title, prompt, and default response. You can also specify the returned value’s type.

The text above the editor. The text in the title bar. The editor’s default value. The returned value’s type. The value entered by a user, or null if nothing was entered.

Displays an input box with the specified settings.

The owner of this Input Box. The text string displayed above an editor. The title of this Input Box. The initial editor value. Specifies buttons displayed by this Input Box. The type of a value requested from users. The value entered by a user, or null if nothing was entered.

Displays an input box with the specified title, prompt, and default response.

An IWin32Window object that shares its look-and-feel settings with this Input Box. The text above the editor. The text in the title bar. The editor’s default value. The returned value’s type. The value returned by a user, or null if nothing was entered.

Arguments that should be passed to the method to customize the shown .

Initializes a new XtraInputBoxArgs class instance.

An object that specifies look and feel settings. An IWin32Window object that provides look and feel settings for the dialog box. The text above the editor. The text in the title bar. The editor’s default value. An array of values that specify which buttons to display in the input box. An integer value that specifies the default button’s index in the buttons array. True to parse HTML tags; False to display the plain text; Default to use the static (Shared in VB) XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText property. A value that specifies the system sound played when the input box is shown.

Initializes a new XtraInputBoxArgs class instance.

An IWin32Window object that provides look and feel settings for the dialog box. The text above the editor. The text in the title bar. The editor’s default value.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code. Use the property instead to choose input box buttons.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the default response for the dialog box.

An Object that represent the default response.

Gets or sets a custom editor for the dialog box.

A object that represents a custom editor for the dialog box.

Gets or sets the text to display in the dialog box.

A string value that specifies the text to display in the dialog box.

The message box that supports title bar skinning.

Gets or sets whether the message box is painted using its own look and feel settings.

true if the message box is painted using its own look and feel settings; false if the default look and feel settings are used.

Gets or sets whether the HTML text formatting feature is enabled by default in message boxes, displayed using the XtraMessageBox.Show method.

true if the HTML text formatting feature is enabled by default in message boxes; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether message box buttons are center, left or right aligned. This is a static (Shared in VB) property.

A enumeration value, such as Center, Left or Right, that specifies how message box buttons are aligned. The default is Center.

Provides access to custom icons.

A <,,> object that stores custom icons.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the registry path used to store and property values in the registry.

The registry path.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. The text to display in the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. The text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the caption of the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. The text to display in the message box. The message box’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format a message box’ text and caption. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. The text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the caption of amessage box. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies which icon to display in the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. The text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the caption of a message box. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies which icon to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies the default button for the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified look and feel settings, text, caption, buttons, icon and default button.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. A string value that specifies the text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the message box’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies which icon to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies the default button for the message box. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified look and feel settings, text, caption, buttons and icon.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified look and feel settings, text, caption and buttons.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified look and feel settings, text and caption.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified look and feel settings and text.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. A string value that specifies the text to display in the message box. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. An object that serves as the top-level window and owner of a dialog box. The text to display in the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. An object that serves as the top-level window and owner of a dialog box. The text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the caption of a message box. An array of values that specify which buttons to display in the message box. The displayed in the message box. The zero-based index of the default button. One of the values that specifies a system-alert level. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified look and feel settings, owner, text, caption, buttons, icon, default button and plays the sound that corresponds to the specified system-alert level.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. An object that serves as a dialog box’s top-level window and owner. A string value that specifies the text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the message box’s caption. An array of values that specify which buttons to display in the message box. The displayed in the message box. The zero-based index of the default button. One of the values that specifies a system-alert level. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. An object that serves as the top-level window and owner of a dialog box. A string value that specifies the text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the caption of a message box. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. An object that serves as the top-level window and owner of a dialog box. The text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the caption of a message box. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies which icon to display in the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. An object that serves as the top-level window and owner of a dialog box. The text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the caption of a message box. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies which icon to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies the default button for the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified look and feel settings, text, caption, buttons, icon and default button.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. An object that serves as a dialog box’s top-level window and owner. A string value that specifies the text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the message box’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies which icon to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies the default button for the message box. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified look and feel settings, owner, text, caption, buttons and icon.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. An object that serves as a dialog box’s top-level window and owner. A string value that specifies the text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the message box’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies which icon to display in the message box. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified look and feel settings, owner, text, caption and buttons.

A object whose properties specify the look and feel of the message box. An object that serves as a dialog box’s top-level window and owner. A string value that specifies the text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the message box’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified look and feel settings, owner, text and caption.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified look and feel settings, owner and text.

Displays an with the specified settings.

An XtraMessageBoxArgs object that allows you to dynamically customize the displayed dialog. A enumerator value that specifies which message box button an end-user has clicked.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

The text to display in the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

The text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the caption of a message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

The text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the caption of a message box. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

The text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the caption of the message box. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies which icon to display in the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

The text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the message box’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies which icon to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies the default button for the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified text, caption, buttons, icon and default button.

A string value that specifies the text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the message box’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies which icon to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies the default button for the message box. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified text, caption, buttons and icon.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified text, caption and buttons.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified text and caption.

A string value that specifies the text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the message box’s caption. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified text.

A string value that specifies the text to display in the message box. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

An object that serves as the top-level window and owner of a dialog box. A string value that specifies the text to display in the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

An object that serves as the top-level window and owner of a dialog box. The text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the caption of a message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

An object that serves as the top-level window and owner of a dialog box. The text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the caption of a message box. An array of values that specify which buttons to display in the message box. The displayed in the message box. The zero-based index of the default button. One of the values that specifies a system-alert level. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified owner, text, caption, buttons, icon, default button and plays the sound that corresponds to the specified system-alert level.

An object that serves as a dialog box’s top-level window and owner. A string value that specifies the text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the message box’s caption. An array of values that specify which buttons to display in the message box. The displayed in the message box. The zero-based index of the default button. One of the values that specifies a system-alert level. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

An object that serves as the top-level window and owner of a dialog box. The text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the caption of a message box. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

An object that serves as a dialog box’s top-level window and owner. The text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the message box’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies which icon to display in the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified settings.

An object that serves as the top-level window and owner of a dialog box. The text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the caption of a message box. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies which icon to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies the default button for the message box. A value that specifies whether HTML tags can be used to format the text and caption of a message box. See XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText to learn more. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified owner, text, caption, buttons, icon and default button.

An object that serves as a dialog box’s top-level window and owner. A string value that specifies the text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the message box’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies which icon to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies the default button for the message box. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified owner, text, caption, buttons and icon.

An object that serves as a dialog box’s top-level window and owner. A string value that specifies the text to display in the message box. A string value that specifies the message box’s caption. A value that specifies which buttons to display in the message box. One of the values that specifies which icon to display in the message box. One of the values.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified owner, text, caption and buttons.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified owner, text and caption.

Displays the XtraMessageBox with the specified owner and text.

An object that serves as a dialog box’s top-level window and owner. A string value that specifies the text to display in the message box. One of the values.

Gets or sets whether the message box width is restricted based on the available working area, and the text is automatically wrapped. This is a static property.

true if the message box width is restricted based on the available working area, and the text is automatically wrapped; otherwise, false. The default is false.

Gets or sets whether all XtraMessageBoxes should retrieve element paddings from skins.

Specifies whether all XtraMessageBoxes should retrieve element paddings from skins.

Arguments that should be passed to the method to customize the shown .

Initializes a new XtraMessageBoxArgs class instance.

An object that specifies look and feel settings. An IWin32Window object that provides look and feel settings for the dialog box. The text in the message box. The text in the title bar. An array of values that specify which buttons to display in the input box. The icon in the title bar. An integer value that specifies the default button’s index in the buttons array. True to parse HTML tags; False to display the plain text; Default to use the static (Shared in VB) XtraMessageBox.AllowHtmlText property. A value that specifies the system sound played when the input box is shown.

Initializes a new XtraMessageBoxArgs class instance.

An IWin32Window object that provides look and feel settings for the dialog box. The text in the message box. The text in the title bar. An array of values that specify which buttons to display in the input box. The icon in the title bar. An integer value that specifies the default button’s index in the buttons array.

Gets a new instance of the class.

A new instance of the object.

Occurs when an closes.

Gets or sets padding for the “Do not show this message again“ checkbox.

Checkbox padding.

Gets or sets the text displayed next to the “Do not show this message again“ checkbox.

The text displayed next to the “Do not show this message again“ checkbox.

Gets or sets whether the “Do not show this message again“ checkbox is shown in an .

true if the “Do not show this message again“ checkbox is shown in an XtraMessageBox; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether to use GDI+ to render strings. For internal use.

true to use GDI+ to render strings; otherwise, false.

For internal use.

Fires when a hyperlink is clicked.

Gets or sets an icon. The icon is displayed in the message body.

An object that specifies the message box icon.

Gets or sets padding for an icon.

Message box icon padding.

Occurs before an is created.

Gets or sets a registry key used to store the and property values in the registry.

The registry key.

Gets or sets a registry path used to store the and property values in the registry.

The registry path.

Gets or sets the message box text.

A String value that specifies the message box text.

Gets or sets text padding within an .

Text padding.

Gets or sets whether to use GDI+ to render strings.

true to use GDI+ to render strings; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether message boxes that utilize this XtraMessageBoxArgs object should retrieve content paddings from the current DevExpress skin.

Specifies whether to retrieve message box paddings from skins. The Default value means the behavior is inherited from the global XtraMessageBox.UseSkinPaddings property.

Supplies data for the event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

An object that defines the .

Saves and property values to the registry.

Supplies data for the and events.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

A that defines an .

Gets or sets the value that corresponds to the button the user chose in an .

A enum value that is a button the user chose in an XtraMmessageBox.

Gets the current ‘s settings through its object.

A object that defines the .

Gets or sets whether the user checked the Do not show this message again checkbox and whether to show the again.

true, if the user did not check the checkbox and the XtraMessageBox is shown again; false, if the user checked the checkbox and suppressed the XtraMessageBox.

Supplies data for the event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

An object that defines the .

Restores the and property values from the registry if these values are available.

Forcibly shows an an end user suppressed. Use this method when an end user checked the “Do not show this message again“ checkbox and closed the message.

true, to show an with the “Do not show this message again“ checkbox checked; false, to show an with the “Do not show this message again“ checkbox unchecked.

The slider with the ‘+’ and ‘-‘ buttons.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Occurs after the ZoomTrackBar control’s pressed button has been released.

Occurs immediately after the ZoomTrackBar control’s button has been pressed.

Calculates the editor’s minimum height.

The editor’s minimum height, in pixels.

Gets the editor’s class name.

A object identifying the class name of the current editor.

Gets an object which contains properties, methods and events specific to the control.

A object that contains a control’s settings.

Contains classes that provide information about the grid control, grid levels and implement the functionality for summaries, styles and style conditions.

Lists values specifying comparison operators used when applying conditional styles.

The style is applied to cells (or rows) whose values are between the and property values exclusive. Enable the option to make the condition inclusive.

The style is applied to cells (or corresponding rows) whose values match the StyleFormatConditionBase.Value1 property value.

The style is applied to cells (or corresponding rows) if the StyleFormatConditionBase.Expression evaluates to true.

The style is applied to cells (or corresponding rows) whose values are greater than that specified by the StyleFormatConditionBase.Value1 property.

The style is applied to cells (or corresponding rows) whose values are greater or equal to the StyleFormatConditionBase.Value1 property value.

The style is applied to cells (or corresponding rows) whose values are less than that specified by the StyleFormatConditionBase.Value1 property.

The style is applied to cells (or corresponding rows) whose values are less or equal to the StyleFormatConditionBase.Value1 property value.

The style is not applied to any cell.

The style is applied to cells (or rows) whose values are not between the and property values inclusive. Enable the option to make the condition exclusive.

The style is applied to cells (or corresponding rows) whose values do not match the StyleFormatConditionBase.Value1 property value.

Contains classes which implement the main functionality of the PivotGridControl.

Lists values that identify buttons displayed within filter popup toolbars.

All toolbar buttons.

The Incremental Search button that controls whether the incremental searching feature is enabled or not. This feature allows end-users to locate an item in the drop-down by typing the item’s initial characters. Corresponding property: PivotGridOptionsFilterPopup.AllowIncrementalSearch.

The Invert Filter button that inverts the checked state for all filter items.

The Multi-Selection button that controls whether end-users are allowed to select only a single item or multiple items. Corresponding property: PivotGridOptionsFilterPopup.AllowMultiSelect.

No toolbar buttons are displayed.

The Radio Mode button that controls whether end-users are allowed to check only a single item or multiple items. Corresponding properties: PivotGridOptionsFilterPopup.IsRadioMode, PivotGridFieldOptionsEx.IsFilterRadioMode.

The Show New Field Values button controls the visibility of field values that have appeared in the datasource after the field’s filtering was configured. Corresponding properties: PivotGridFieldBase.ShowNewValues, PivotGridGroup.ShowNewValues.

The Show Only Available Items button that controls the visibility of filter items that cannot be displayed because of filtering applied to other fields. Corresponding property: PivotGridOptionsFilterBase.ShowOnlyAvailableItems. Note that this option is not available for Group Filters.

Contains classes that encapsulate splash forms.

The base class for splash forms displayed using the component.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets the color of the glow effect for the current splash form displayed in the active state.

A Color structure that specifies the color of the glow effect for the current splash form.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Closes the current or after a specified delay. Allows you to select a form that should be subsequently activated.

An Int32 value that is the number of milliseconds that elapses before the splash form is closed. A Form object that should be activated after the splash form is closed.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the color of the glow effect for the current splash form displayed in the inactive state.

A Color structure that specifies the color of the glow effect for the current splash form.

When overridden, the method allows you to process commands received from a via the SplashScreenManager.SendCommand method.

An enumeration value that identifies the received command. The received command’s parameter.

Contains properties controlling the form’s appearance. These settings are in effect when the form is displayed on its own, without using the component.

A object that contains form appearance settings.

Displays the current form as a non-modal dialog window.

Displays the current form as a modal dialog box.

A value that is the return value of the displayed dialog box

Contains classes that support the SplashScreenManager’s infrastructure.

Contains settings to customize splash screens via the SplashScreenManager.ShowFluentSplashScreen method.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets the appearance settings used to paint the text in the left footer region.

The appearance settings used to paint the text in the left footer region.

Gets or sets the appearance settings used to paint the text in the right footer region.

The appearance settings used to paint the text in the right footer region.

Gets or sets the appearance settings used to paint the subtitle.

The appearance settings used to paint the subtitle.

Gets or sets the appearance settings used to paint the title.

The appearance settings used to paint the title.

Copies settings from the specified object to the current object.

The object whose settings are copied to the current object.

Disposes of the current object.

Gets or sets the text displayed in the left footer region. If this parameter is not specified (null), the left footer displays the value of the AssemblyCopyright attribute (see your project’’s AssemblyInfo.cs/AssemblyInfo.vb file).

The text displayed in the left footer region.

Gets or sets the loading indicator kind.

The loading indicator kind.

Contains settings to specify and customize a raster or vector logo image.

An object that provides settings to specify and customize a raster or vector logo image.

Gets or sets the opacity level of the splashscreen’s background. This setting is supported if the application runs under Windows 10 Version 1803 (OS build 17134) or newer. On older Windows versions, the splashscreen fills its background with a non-trasparent color specified by the OpacityColor property.

The opacity level (between 0 and 255) of the splashscreen’s background.

Gets or sets the background color. If this parameter is set to Color.Empty, the actual background color is Color.Black.

The background color.

Gets or sets the text displayed in the right footer region.

The text displayed in the right footer region. If this parameter is not specified (null), the right footer displays the value of the AssemblyFileVersion attribute (see your project’’s AssemblyInfo.cs/AssemblyInfo.vb file).

Gets or sets the subtitle. If this parameter is not specified (null), the subtitle region displays the value of the AssemblyCompany attribute (see your project’s AssemblyInfo.cs/AssemblyInfo.vb file).

The subtitle.

Gets or sets the title. If this parameter is not specified (null), the title region displays the value of the AssemblyTitle attribute (see your project’s AssemblyInfo.cs/AssemblyInfo.vb file).

The title.

Image animation options in an Overlay Form.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Gets the time required to rotate image 360 degrees.

The time required to rotate image 360 degrees, in milliseconds.

Gets the number of frames required to rotate image 360 degrees.

The number of frames required to rotate image 360 degrees.

A handle for an Overlay Form.

Closes the Overlay Form.

Specifies an action executed when the Overlay Form is closed.

An action executed when the Overlay Form is closed.

Allows you to specify the control that should be focused when the Overlay Form is closed.

A handle of the control that should be focused when the Overlay Form is closed. true if the control is successfully specified; otherwise, false.

Allows you to specify the control that should be focused when the Overlay Form is closed.

The control that should be focused when the Overlay Form is closed. true if the control is successfully specified; otherwise, false.

Represents a set of options that specify a line wait indicator in an Overlay Form.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

The number of dots. The dot size. The distance between dots.

Determines whether two object instances are equal.

The object to compare with the current object. true if the specified object is equal to the current object; otherwise, false.

Determines whether two object instances are equal.

The object to compare with the current object. true if the specified object is equal to the current object; otherwise, false.

Serves as a hash function.

A hash code for the current object.

Gets the distance between dots.

A value that specifes the distance between dots.

Gets the number of dots.

A value that specifies the number of dots.

Gets the size of dots.

A value that specifies the size of dots.

Represents a set of options that specify an Overlay Form

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

Gets or sets whether the wait indicator is a rotating image or dots arranged in a line.

A value that specifies the wait indicator.

Gets or sets the background color.

The background color.

Gets or sets an object used to paint a form.

An object that implements a custom paint logic.

Gets the default options.

An object that specifies the default options.

Gets or sets whether the Overlay Form receives focus and disables user input on the overlapped control.

true if the Overlay Form disables user input on the overlapped control; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether to use the fade-in effect to show the form.

true, to use the fade-in effect; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether to use the fade-out effect to close the form.

true, to use the fade-out effect; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the foreground color.

The foreground color.

Gets or sets a custom rotating image.

A custom rotating image.

Gets or sets the size of the predefined rotating image.

The image size.

Gets or sets the number of dots, their size, and distance between them in a line wait indicator.

A value that specifies the number of dots, their size, and distance between them.

Gets or sets the form opacity.’

The form opacity. 0 corresponds to total transparency; 1, to the normal state.

Gets or sets the rotation period and the number of frames in a single rotation.

An object that specifies the rotation period and the number of frames in a single rotation.

Gets or sets the name of the skin applied to the form.

The skin name.

Gets or sets the delay before the form is shown.

The delay before the form is shown.

Gets or sets whether DirectX is used to render an Overlay Form.

true, to use DirectX; false, to use GDI+; null to use the default engine. The default engine is DirectX if the Use DirectX option is enabled in the Project settings; otherwise, the default engine is GDI+.

Enumerates values that specify whether the form under the wait form is enabled.

The form under the wait form is disabled.

The form under the wait form is enabled.

Contains values that specify how a is displayed, as a form or as an image.

Displays a splash form.

Displays the default or custom image specified in SplashScreen.SplashImageOptions. Fade effects are not supported in Image display mode.

Contains appearance settings for splash forms.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings. This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

A parent form for a splash form. true, to use the fade-in effect when a splash form is displayed; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the SplashFormProperties.UseFadeInEffect property. true, to use the fade-out effect when a splash form is closed; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the SplashFormProperties.UseFadeOutEffect property. The time in milliseconds that should elapse before the splash form is actually displayed onscreen. If a close command is sent to the splash form during this time, the splash form will not be displayed. This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code. true, to use the glow effect when displaying a splash form; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the SplashFormProperties.AllowGlowEffect property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings. This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

A parent form for a splash form. true to use a fade-in effect when a splash form is displayed; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the SplashFormProperties.UseFadeInEffect property. true, to use a fade-out effect when a splash form is closed; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the SplashFormProperties.UseFadeOutEffect property. The time in milliseconds that should elapse before the splash form is actually displayed onscreen. If a close command is sent to the splash form during this time, the splash form will not be displayed. This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class and allows you to enable and disable fade-in and fade-out effects.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings. This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

A parent form for a splash form. An Image object. true, to use the fade-in effect when a splash form is displayed; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the SplashFormProperties.UseFadeInEffect property. true, to use the fade-out effect when a splash form is closed; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the SplashFormProperties.UseFadeOutEffect property. An ICustomImagePainter object that implements a custom drawing procedure. This object is assigned to the SplashFormProperties.CustomImagePainter property. The time in milliseconds that should elapse before the splash form is actually displayed onscreen. If a close command is sent to the splash form during this time, the splash form will not be displayed. This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code. true, to use the glow effect when displaying a splash form; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the SplashFormProperties.AllowGlowEffect property. The delay, in milliseconds, that should elapse before the splash form is actually closed. This value is assigned to the SplashFormProperties.ClosingDelay property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings. This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

A parent form for a splash form. An Image object. true, to use a fade-in effect when a splash form is displayed; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the SplashFormProperties.UseFadeInEffect property. true, to use a fade-out effect when a splash form is closed; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the SplashFormProperties.UseFadeOutEffect property. An ICustomImagePainter object that implements a custom drawing procedure. This object is assigned to the SplashFormProperties.CustomImagePainter property. The time in milliseconds that should elapse before the splash form is actually displayed onscreen. If a close command is sent to the splash form during this time, the splash form will not be displayed. This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings. This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

A parent form for a splash form to be displayed. An Image object. true to use a fade-in effect when a splash form is displayed; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the SplashFormProperties.UseFadeInEffect property. false to use a fade-out effect when a splash form is closed; otherwise, false. This value is assigned to the SplashFormProperties.UseFadeOutEffect property.

Gets or sets whether the splash form is displayed using the glow effect.

true if the splash form is displayed using the glow effect; otherwise, false.

Creates and returns a copy of the current object.

A copy of the current object.

Gets or sets the delay, in milliseconds, before the splash form is closed.

An integer value that specifies the delay, in milliseconds, before the splash form is closed.

Gets or sets an object that implements a custom drawing procedure.

An ICustomImagePainter that implements a custom drawing procedure.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

An Image object.

Gets the parent form for a splash form to be displayed. This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

The parent form for a splash form to be displayed.

Gets the handle of the parent window.

An IntPtr structure that identifies the handle of the parent window.

Gets or sets whether to use a fade-in effect when a splash form is being opened.

true to use a fade-in effect when a splash form is being opened; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether to use a fade-out effect when a splash form is being closed.

true to use a fade-out effect when a splash form is being closed; otherwise, false.

Enumerates values that specify the screen position where a splash screen/wait indicator is displayed.

A splash screen/wait form is displayed at the center of the screen.

The position is not specified explicitly. If the main application form is not yet displayed, the splash form is shown at the center of the screen. If the main application form is already displayed, the splash form is centered relative to the active form. If the parentForm parameter of a method that shows a wait form is specified, the wait form is centered relative to the parent form.

To specify the position, use the SplashScreenManager.SplashFormLocation property or the location parameter of a method that shows the splash form.

The default splash screen managed by the component.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets whether custom controls can be added to the when SplashScreen.ShowMode is set to ShowMode.Image.

true if custom controls can be added to the when SplashScreen.ShowMode is set to ShowMode.Image; otherwise, false.

Get or sets if the is resized to fit its SplashScreen.SplashImage when displayed in Image mode.

true if the is resized to fit its SplashScreen.SplashImage when displayed in Image mode; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether to display the splash screen as a form or as the form’s image specified by .

A enumeration value that specifies whether to display the splash screen as a form or as the form’s image.

Gets or sets an image displayed as a splash screen. The image is displayed if is set to .

An Image to be displayed in the ShowMode.Image display mode.

Provides access to options that specify an image displayed as a splash screen. The image is displayed if is set to .

An ImageOptions object that specifies the splash screen image.

Allows you to create and show splash screens and wait forms.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

The type of a splash form to be displayed. A object used to initialize the SplashScreenManager.Properties property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specific settings.

The type of splash form to be displayed. The splash form’s arrangement. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual). A object used to initialize the SplashScreenManager.Properties property. A ParentFormState enumeration value that specifies whether the parent form is enabled while the splash form is displayed.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specific settings.

The type of splash form to be displayed. The splash form’s arrangement. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown. A object used to initialize the SplashScreenManager.Properties property.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specific settings.

A Form relative to which the displayed splash form is positioned. This parameter is in effect when displaying s. The type of a splash form to be displayed. true, to use the fade-in effect when opening the form; otherwise, false. true, to use the fade-out effect when closing the form; otherwise, false. The splash form’s arrangement. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual). true, to use the glow effect when displaying the form; otherwise, false.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specific settings.

A Form relative to which the displayed splash form is positioned. This parameter is in effect when displaying s. The type of a splash form to be displayed. true, to use the fade-in effect when opening the form; otherwise, false. true, to use the fade-out effect when closing the form; otherwise, false. The splash form’s arrangement. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual). The time in milliseconds that should elapse before the splash form is actually displayed onscreen.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specific settings.

A Form relative to which the displayed splash form is positioned. This parameter is in effect when displaying s. The type of splash form to be displayed. true to use the fade-in effect when opening the form; otherwise, false. true to use the fade-out effect when closing the form; otherwise, false. The splash form’s arrangement. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual).

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A Form relative to which the displayed splash form is positioned. This parameter is in effect when a is displayed. The type of splash form to be displayed. true, to use the fade-in effect when opening the form; otherwise, false. true, to use the fade-out effect when closing the form; otherwise, false. true, to use the glow effect when displaying the splash form; otherwise, false.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A Form relative to which the displayed splash form is positioned. This parameter is in effect when a is displayed. The type of splash form to be displayed. true, to use the fade-in effect when opening the form; otherwise, false. true, to use the fade-out effect when closing the form; otherwise, false. An integer value that specifies the delay, in milliseconds, before the form is closed.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A parent form for the created splash form. The type of a splash form to be displayed. true to use the fade-in effect when opening the form; otherwise, false. true to use the fade-out effect when hiding the form; otherwise, false.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A UserControl contained on the Form, against which the splash form is centered. The type of splash form to be displayed. true, to use the fade-in effect when opening the form; otherwise, false. true, to use the fade-out effect when closing the form; otherwise, false. A ParentType enumeration value specifying whether the parent is a Form or UserControl. true, to use the glow effect when displaying the splash form; otherwise, false.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A UserControl that owns the newly created . A Type enumerator value specifying the type of splash form to be displayed. true to use the fade-in effect when opening the form; otherwise, false. true to use the fade-out effect when closing the form; otherwise, false. A ParentType enumerator, specifying whether the parent is a Form or UserControl.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specific settings.

A UserControl contained on the Form, against which the splash form is centered. The type of splash form to be displayed. true, to use the fade-in effect when opening the form; otherwise, false. true, to use the fade-out effect when closing the form; otherwise, false. The splash form’s arrangement. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual). A ParentType enumeration value specifying whether the parent is a Form or UserControl. true, to use the glow effect when displaying the splash form; otherwise, false.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A UserControl that owns the newly created . A Type enumerator value specifying the type of splash form to be displayed. true to use the fade-in effect when opening the form; otherwise, false. true to use the fade-out effect when closing the form; otherwise, false. The splash form’s arrangement. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual). A ParentType enumerator, specifying whether the parent is a Form or UserControl.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A UserControl contained on the Form, against which the splash form is centered. The type of splash form to be displayed. true, to use the fade-in effect when opening the form; otherwise, false. true, to use the fade-out effect when closing the form; otherwise, false. The splash form’s arrangement. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual). The Type of the parent object. The parent should be either a Form or a UserControl. Otherwise, ArgumentException is thrown. true, to use the glow effect when displaying the splash form; otherwise, false.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A UserControl contained on the Form, against which the splash form is centered. The type of splash form to be displayed. true, to use the fade-in effect when opening the form; otherwise, false. true, to use the fade-out effect when closing the form; otherwise, false. The splash form’s arrangement. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual). The Type of the parent object. The parent should be either a Form or a UserControl. Otherwise, ArgumentException is thrown.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A UserControl contained on the Form, against which the splash form is centered. The type of splash form to be displayed. true, to use the fade-in effect when opening the form; otherwise, false. true, to use the fade-out effect when closing the form; otherwise, false. The Type of the parent object. The parent should be either a Form or a UserControl. Otherwise, ArgumentException is thrown. true, to use the glow effect when displaying the splash form; otherwise, false.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

Gets or sets whether a splash form’s parent is activated on closing the splash form.

true if a splash form’s parent is activated on closing the splash form; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether a ‘s parent is activated on closing the .

true if a WaitForm’s parent is activated on closing the WaitForm; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the type of the splash form to be displayed by the .

A TypeInfo object that specifies the type of the splash form to be displayed by the .

Gets or sets the apartment state of the splash screen’s thread.

A System.Threading.ApartmentState enumeration value that specifies the apartment state.

Closes the wait form or splash screen. Throws an exception if no splash form is opened.

Closes the wait form or splash screen.

true to raise an exception if no splash form is opened; otherwise, false. true to block the current thread until the splash form is closed; otherwise, false.

Closes the wait form or splash screen. For internal use.

true to raise an exception if no splash form is opened; otherwise, false. An integer value that specifies the amount of time (in milliseconds) that should elapse before the splash form is closed. A form that is activated after the splash form is closed. This parameter is only in effect if the closingDelay parameter is greater than 0. true to block the current thread until the splash form is closed; otherwise, false. For internal use.

Closes the wait form or splash screen after a delay.

Closes the wait form or splash screen after a delay. Allows you to select the form that should be subsequently activated, and suppress the exception raised if no splash form is opened.

Closes the displayed wait form or splash screen. Allows you to suppress the exception raised if no splash form is opened.

true to raise an exception if no splash form is opened; otherwise, false.

Closes the Overlay Form with the specified handle.

An IOverlaySplashScreenHandle object specifying the handle of the Overlay Form to close.

Closes the that was displayed using the SplashScreenManager.ShowWaitForm method.

Gets or sets the delay, in milliseconds, before the splash form is closed.

An integer value that specifies the delay, in milliseconds, before the splash form is closed.

Returns the default that allows you to interact with the currently displayed splash forms.

A that is the default splash screen manager.

Gets whether a splash form has been created, but not yet displayed. The splash form will be displayed a short time (pending time) after it has been created, provided that it is not closed during this time.

A Boolean value that specifies whether a splash form has been created, but not yet displayed.

Hides the splash image that has been displayed via the SplashScreenManager.ShowImage method.

Closes the currently displayed splash image after a specific delay and allows you to specify a form that should be subsequently selected.

An Int32 value that is the number of milliseconds that elapses before the splash image is closed. A Form object that should be activated after the splash form is closed.

Forces the splash form to be redisplayed.

Gets whether a or is being currently displayed.

true if a or is being currently displayed; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the name of the palette used to colorize vector images.

A value that specifies the name of the palette used to colorize vector images.

Contains properties controlling a form’s appearance.

A object that contains appearance settings for splash forms.

Registers a custom skin to be applied to a splash form.

A SkinBlobXmlCreator object that contains skin data.

Registers custom skins from the specified assembly to be applied to a splash form.

An Assembly object that specifies the assembly containing custom skins to be applied to a splash form.

Sends a command to the currently active splash form.

An enumeration value that identifies the command to be sent to the currently active splash form. The command’s parameter.

Sets the active ‘s caption to the specified value.

A string that is the new value for the active ‘s caption.

Sets the active ‘s description to the specified value.

A string that is the new value for the active ‘s description.

Displays a Windows 10-inspired splash screen (features an Acrylic material effect - a partially transparent texture).

An object that contains the splash screen’s settings. The event handler to perform custom painting. The splash screen’s owner. A value that specifies whether to use the fade-in effect when the splash screen is being opened. A value that specifies whether to use the fade-out effect when the splash screen is being closed. true to throw an exception if another splash form has already been opened; false to suppress this exception. A value that specifies how the form is positioned. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual).

Displays a Windows 10-inspired splash screen (features an Acrylic material effect - a partially transparent texture).

A string displayed in the title region. If this parameter is not specified (null), the title region displays the value of the AssemblyTitle attribute (see your project’s AssemblyInfo.cs/AssemblyInfo.vb file). A string displayed in the subtitle region. If this parameter is not specified (null), the subtitle region displays the value of the AssemblyCompany attribute (see your project’s AssemblyInfo.cs/AssemblyInfo.vb file). A string displayed in the left footer. If this parameter is not specified (null), the left footer displays the value of the AssemblyCopyright attribute (see your project’s AssemblyInfo.cs/AssemblyInfo.vb file). A string displayed in the right footer. If this parameter is not specified (null), the right footer displays the value of the AssemblyFileVersion attribute (see your project’s AssemblyInfo.cs/AssemblyInfo.vb file). The opacity level for the splashscreen’s background. This setting is supported if the application runs under Windows 10 Version 1803 (OS build 17134) or newer. On older Windows versions, the splashscreen fills its background with a non-trasparent color (the ‘opacityColor’ parameter). The background color. If the opacityColor parameter is set to Color.Empty, the actual background color is Color.Black. The loading indicator kind to use. The object to specify the logo image and its settings. The event handler to perform custom painting. The splash screen’s owner. A value that specifies whether to use the fade-in effect when the splash screen is being opened. A value that specifies whether to use the fade-out effect when the splash screen is being closed. true to throw an exception if another splash form has already been opened; false to suppress this exception. A value that specifies how the form is positioned. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual).

Creates and displays a splash form (wait form or splash screen) of the specified type.

The type of the object that specifies the splash form to be displayed. You can pass the type of a or descendant. true if the manager uses a fade-in effect when it shows the splash form; otherwise, false. true if the manager uses a fade-out effect when it closes the splash form; otherwise, false.

Creates and displays a splash form (wait form or splash screen) of the specified type.

The type of the object that specifies the splash form to be displayed. You can pass the type of a or descendant.

Creates and displays a splash form (wait form or splash screen) of the specified type.

The splash form’s parent form. The wait form is centered relative to the parent. The parent form is activated when the splash form is closed. If the parent form is not specified, the manager shows the wait form over the active (top-level) form or activates the main application form. The type of the object that specifies the splash form to be displayed. You can pass the type of a or descendant. true if the manager uses a fade-in effect when it shows the splash form; otherwise, false. true if the manager uses a fade-out effect when it closes the splash form; otherwise, false. The position where the splash form is displayed. to display the wait form over the parent form (the splash screen - over the active form) or in the center of the screen if the main application form is not yet displayed. to specify the splash form’s upper-left corner coordinates in the location parameter. The screen coordinates of the splash form’s upper-left corner (if the startPos parameter is set to ). if the parent form is disabled while the wait form is displayed; otherwise, . This parameter is only in effect when a wait form is displayed.

Creates and displays a splash form (wait form or splash screen) of the specified type.

The splash form’s parent form. The wait form is centered relative to the parent. The parent form is activated when the splash form is closed. If the parent form is not specified, the manager shows the wait form over the active (top-level) form or activates the main application form. The type of the object that specifies the splash form to be displayed. You can pass the type of a or descendant. true if the manager uses a fade-in effect when it shows the splash form; otherwise, false. true if the manager uses a fade-out effect when it closes the splash form; otherwise, false. true to throw if another splash form is already displayed; false to suppress the exception. The position where the splash form is displayed. to display the wait form over the parent form (the splash screen - over the active form) or in the center of the screen if the main application form is not yet displayed. to specify the splash form’s upper-left corner coordinates in the location parameter. The screen coordinates of the splash form’s upper-left corner (if the startPos parameter is set to ). if the parent form is disabled while the wait form is displayed; otherwise, . This parameter is only in effect when a wait form is displayed.

Creates and displays a splash form (wait form or splash screen) of the specified type.

The splash form’s parent form. The wait form is centered relative to the parent. The parent form is activated when the splash form is closed. If the parent form is not specified, the manager shows the wait form over the active (top-level) form or activates the main application form. The type of the object that specifies the splash form to be displayed. You can pass the type of a or descendant. true if the manager uses a fade-in effect when it shows the splash form; otherwise, false. true if the manager uses a fade-out effect when it closes the splash form; otherwise, false. true to throw if another splash form is already displayed; false to suppress the exception. The position where the splash form is displayed. to display the wait form over the parent form (the splash screen - over the active form) or in the center of the screen if the main application form is not yet displayed. to specify the splash form’s upper-left corner coordinates in the location parameter. The screen coordinates of the splash form’s upper-left corner (if the startPos parameter is set to ). true if the manager uses a glow effect to display the splash form; otherwise, false.

Creates and displays a splash form (wait form or splash screen) of the specified type.

The splash form’s parent form. The wait form is centered relative to the parent. The parent form is activated when the splash form is closed. If the parent form is not specified, the manager shows the wait form over the active (top-level) form or activates the main application form. The type of the object that specifies the splash form to be displayed. You can pass the type of a or descendant. true if the manager uses a fade-in effect when it shows the splash form; otherwise, false. true if the manager uses a fade-out effect when it closes the splash form; otherwise, false. true to throw if another splash form is already displayed; false to suppress the exception. The position where the splash form is displayed. to display the wait form over the parent form (the splash screen - over the active form) or in the center of the screen if the main application form is not yet displayed. to specify the splash form’s upper-left corner coordinates in the location parameter. The screen coordinates of the splash form’s upper-left corner (if the startPos parameter is set to ). The time delay (in milliseconds) before the splash form is displayed. If the method is called at this time, the splash form is not displayed. if the parent form is disabled while the wait form is displayed; otherwise, . This parameter is only in effect when a wait form is displayed.

Creates and displays a splash form (wait form or splash screen) of the specified type. For internal use.

The splash form’s parent form. The wait form is centered relative to the parent. The parent form is activated when the splash form is closed. If the parent form is not specified, the manager shows the wait form over the active (top-level) form or activates the main application form. The type of the object that specifies the splash form to be displayed. You can pass the type of a or descendant. true if the manager uses a fade-in effect when it shows the splash form; otherwise, false. true if the manager uses a fade-out effect when it closes the splash form; otherwise, false. true to throw if another splash form is already displayed; false to suppress the exception. The position where the splash form is displayed. to display the wait form over the parent form (the splash screen - over the active form) or in the center of the screen if the main application form is not yet displayed. to specify the splash form’s upper-left corner coordinates in the location parameter. The screen coordinates of the splash form’s upper-left corner (if the startPos parameter is set to ). The time delay (in milliseconds) before the splash form is displayed. If the method is called at this time, the splash form is not displayed. For internal use. if the parent form is disabled while the wait form is displayed; otherwise, . This parameter is only in effect when a wait form is displayed. true if the manager uses a glow effect to display the splash form; otherwise, false.

Creates and displays a splash form (wait form or splash screen) of the specified type. For internal use.

The splash form’s parent form. The wait form is centered relative to the parent. The parent form is activated when the splash form is closed. If the parent form is not specified, the manager shows the wait form over the active (top-level) form or activates the main application form. The type of the object that specifies the splash form to be displayed. You can pass the type of a or descendant. true if the manager uses a fade-in effect when it shows the splash form; otherwise, false. true if the manager uses a fade-out effect when it closes the splash form; otherwise, false. true to throw if another splash form is already displayed; false to suppress the exception. The position where the splash form is displayed. to display the wait form over the parent form (the splash screen - over the active form) or in the center of the screen if the main application form is not yet displayed. to specify the splash form’s upper-left corner coordinates in the location parameter. The screen coordinates of the splash form’s upper-left corner (if the startPos parameter is set to ). The time delay (in milliseconds) before the splash form is displayed. If the method is called at this time, the splash form is not displayed. For internal use. if the parent form is disabled while the wait form is displayed; otherwise, . This parameter is only in effect when a wait form is displayed.

Creates and displays a splash form (wait form or splash screen) of the specified type. For internal use.

The splash form’s parent form. The wait form is centered relative to the parent. The parent form is activated when the splash form is closed. If the parent form is not specified, the manager shows the wait form over the active (top-level) form or activates the main application form. The type of the object that specifies the splash form to be displayed. You can pass the type of a or descendant. true if the manager uses a fade-in effect when it shows the splash form; otherwise, false. true if the manager uses a fade-out effect when it closes the splash form; otherwise, false. true to throw if another splash form is already displayed; false to suppress the exception. The position where the splash form is displayed. to display the wait form over the parent form (the splash screen - over the active form) or in the center of the screen if the main application form is not yet displayed. to specify the splash form’s upper-left corner coordinates in the location parameter. The screen coordinates of the splash form’s upper-left corner (if the startPos parameter is set to ). The time delay (in milliseconds) before the splash form is displayed. If the method is called at this time, the splash form is not displayed. For internal use.

Creates and displays a splash form (wait form or splash screen) of the specified type.

The splash form’s parent form. The wait form is centered relative to the parent. The parent form is activated when the splash form is closed. If the parent form is not specified, the manager shows the wait form over the active (top-level) form or activates the main application form. The type of the object that specifies the splash form to be displayed. You can pass the type of a or descendant. true if the manager uses a fade-in effect when it shows the splash form; otherwise, false. true if the manager uses a fade-out effect when it closes the splash form; otherwise, false. true to throw if another splash form is already displayed; false to suppress the exception. The position where the splash form is displayed. to display the wait form over the parent form (the splash screen - over the active form) or in the center of the screen if the main application form is not yet displayed. to specify the splash form’s upper-left corner coordinates in the location parameter. The screen coordinates of the splash form’s upper-left corner (if the startPos parameter is set to ). The time delay (in milliseconds) before the splash form is displayed. If the method is called at this time, the splash form is not displayed.

Creates and displays a splash form (wait form or splash screen) of the specified type.

The splash form’s parent form. The wait form is centered relative to the parent. The parent form is activated when the splash form is closed. If the parent form is not specified, the manager shows the wait form over the active (top-level) form or activates the main application form. The type of the object that specifies the splash form to be displayed. You can pass the type of a or descendant. true if the manager uses a fade-in effect when it shows the splash form; otherwise, false. true if the manager uses a fade-out effect when it closes the splash form; otherwise, false. true to throw if another splash form is already displayed; false to suppress the exception. The position where the splash form is displayed. to display the wait form over the parent form (the splash screen - over the active form) or in the center of the screen if the main application form is not yet displayed. to specify the splash form’s upper-left corner coordinates in the location parameter. The screen coordinates of the splash form’s upper-left corner (if the startPos parameter is set to ).

Creates and displays a splash form (wait form or splash screen) of the specified type.

Creates and displays a wait form of the specified type.

A object that specifies a user control. The manager displays the wait form over the form that contains the specified control. This parameter is only in effect for wait forms. The type of the object that specifies the wait form to be displayed. You can pass the type of a descendant. true if the manager uses a fade-in effect when it shows the splash form; otherwise, false. true if the manager uses a fade-out effect when it closes the splash form; otherwise, false. The position where the splash form is displayed. to display the wait form over the parent form (the splash screen - over the active form) or in the center of the screen if the main application form is not yet displayed. to specify the splash form’s upper-left corner coordinates in the location parameter. The screen coordinates of the splash form’s upper-left corner (if the startPos parameter is set to ). if the parent form is disabled while the wait form is displayed; otherwise, . This parameter is only in effect when a wait form is displayed.

Creates and displays a wait form of the specified type.

Displays a splash form that contains a vector image. Allows you to draw custom graphics over the splash image, and enable fade-in and fade-out effects.

Creates a splash form with a vector image inside and displays this form after the specified delay. Allows you to draw custom graphics over the splash image, manually arrange it, and enable fade-in and fade-out effects.

An SvgImage to be drawn. true, to use the fade-in effect when the image appears on-screen; otherwise, false. true, to use the fade-out effect when the image hides; otherwise, false. Use the SplashScreenManager.HideImage method to hide a splash form image. The splash form’s arrangement. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual). An ICustomImagePainter object that implements a custom drawing procedure. The time in milliseconds that should elapse before the splash form is actually displayed on-screen. If a close command is sent to the splash form during this time, the splash form will not be displayed.

Displays a splash form that contains a vector image. Allows you to draw custom graphics over the splash image, manually arrange it, and enable fade-in and fade-out effects.

Displays a splash form that contains a vector image. Allows you to manually arrange this splash form.

Displays a vector image as a splash form with optional fade-in and fade-out effects.

Displays a vector image with an optional fade in effect.

An SvgImage to be drawn. true, to use the fade-in effect when the image appears on-screen; otherwise, false.

Displays a splash form that contains a vector image. Allows you to draw custom graphics over the splash image, resize the image, and enable fade-in and fade-out effects.

Creates a splash form with a vector image inside and displays this form after the specified delay. Allows you to draw custom graphics over the splash image, resize and manually arrange it, and enable fade-in and fade-out effects.

An SvgImage to be drawn. A Size structure that is the image size. true, to use the fade-in effect when the image appears on-screen; otherwise, false. true, to use the fade-out effect when the image hides; otherwise, false. Use the SplashScreenManager.HideImage method to hide a splash form image. The splash form’s arrangement. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual). An ICustomImagePainter object that implements a custom drawing procedure. The time in milliseconds that should elapse before the splash form is actually displayed on-screen. If a close command is sent to the splash form during this time, the splash form will not be displayed.

Displays a splash form that contains a vector image. Allows you to draw custom graphics over the splash image, resize and manually arrange it, and enable fade-in and fade-out effects.

Displays a splash form that contains a vector image. Allows you to manually arrange this splash form, resize the image, and enable fade-in and fade-out effects.

Displays a vector image as a splash form, centering the image against your application’s main form. Allows you to disable fade-in and fade-out effects for the image.

Resizes an image and shows it as a splash form with an optional fade-in effect.

An SvgImage to be drawn. A Size structure that is the image size. true, to use the fade-in effect when the image appears on-screen; otherwise, false.

Resizes the target vector image and shows it as a splash form.

An SvgImage to be drawn. A Size structure that is the image size.

Displays a vector image as a splash form, centering the image against your application’s main form.

An SvgImage to be drawn.

Displays an image as a splash form, centering the image against your application’s main form. Allows you to disable fade-in and fade-out effects for the image and draw custom graphics over the splash image.

An Image to be displayed as a splash form. true to use the fade-in effect when the image opens; otherwise, false. true to use the fade-out effect when the image closes; otherwise, false. An ICustomImagePainter object that implements a custom drawing procedure.

This method supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

An Image to be displayed as a splash form. true, to use the fade-in effect when the image appears on-screen; otherwise, false. true, to use the fade-out effect when the image hides; otherwise, false. Use the SplashScreenManager.HideImage method to hide a splash form image. The splash form’s arrangement. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual). An ICustomImagePainter object that implements a custom drawing procedure. The time in milliseconds that should elapse before the splash form is actually displayed onscreen. If a close command is sent to the splash form during this time, the splash form will not be displayed. This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Creates a splash form containing the specified image and displays it after a delay. Allows you to manually position the splash form, disable fade-in and fade-out effects for the image and draw custom graphics over the splash image.

An Image to be displayed as a splash form. true to use the fade-in effect when opening the image; otherwise, false. true, to use the fade-out effect when the image closes; otherwise, false. The splash form’s arrangement. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual). An ICustomImagePainter object that implements a custom drawing procedure. The time in milliseconds that should elapse before the splash form is actually displayed onscreen. If a close command is sent to the splash form during this time, the splash form will not be displayed.

Displays an image as a splash form, allowing you to manually position it against your application’s main form. Allows you to disable fade-in and fade-out effects for the image and draw custom graphics over the splash image.

An Image to be displayed as a splash form. true to use the fade-in effect when opening the form; otherwise, false. true to use the fade-out effect when closing the form; otherwise, false. The splash form’s arrangement. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual). An ICustomImagePainter object that implements a custom drawing procedure.

Displays an image as a splash form, allowing you to manually position it. Allows you to disable fade-in and fade-out effects for the image.

Displays an image as a splash form, centering the image against your application’s main form. Allows you to disable fade-in and fade-out effects for the image.

An Image to be displayed as a splash form. true to use the fade-in effect when the image opens; otherwise, false. true to use the fade-out effect when the form closes; otherwise, false.

Displays an image as a splash form, centering the image against your application’s main form.

An Image to be displayed as a splash form. true to use the fade-in effect during the image’s opening; otherwise, false.

Displays an image as a splash form, centering the image against your application’s main form.

An Image to be displayed as a splash form.

Shows an Overlay Form with the specified options over the specified control.

A Control that should be overlapped by an Overlay Form. An OverlayWindowOptions object that specifies the Overlay Form options, such as the loading image, fade animation and colors. A handle for the shown Overlay Form. Use this handle to close the Overlay Form.

Shows an Overlay Form with the default options over the specified control.

A Control that should be overlapped by an Overlay Form. A handle for the Overlay Form shown. Use this handle to close the Overlay Form.

Displays a skin-aware splash screen with the specified SVG logo image. The current skin determines the background and font settings splash screen elements.

The logo image in SVG format. The display size of the SVG image. A string displayed in the title region. If this parameter is not specified (null), the title region displays the value of the AssemblyTitle attribute (see your project’s AssemblyInfo.cs/AssemblyInfo.vb file). A string displayed in the subtitle region. If this parameter is not specified (null), the subtitle region displays the concatenation of the “Version “ string and the value of the AssemblyFileVersion attribute (see your project’s AssemblyInfo.cs/AssemblyInfo.vb file). A string displayed in the footer. If this parameter is not specified (null), the footer displays the concatenation of the AssemblyCopyright attribute value (see your project’s AssemblyInfo.cs/AssemblyInfo.vb file) and the “All Rights Reserved.” string. The text displayed above the progress bar. The splash screen’s owner. A value that specifies whether to use the fade-in effect when the splash screen is being opened. A value that specifies whether to use the fade-out effect when the splash screen is being closed. true to throw an exception if another splash form has already been opened; false to suppress this exception. A value that specifies how the form is positioned. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual).

Displays a skin-aware splash screen with the specified raster logo image. The current skin determines the background and font settings of the splash screen’s elements.

The logo image. A string displayed in the title region. If this parameter is not specified (null), the title region displays the value of the AssemblyTitle attribute (see your project’s AssemblyInfo.cs/AssemblyInfo.vb file). A string displayed in the subtitle region. If this parameter is not specified (null), the subtitle region displays the concatenation of the “Version “ string and the value of the AssemblyFileVersion attribute (see your project’s AssemblyInfo.cs/AssemblyInfo.vb file). A string displayed in the footer. If this parameter is not specified (null), the footer displays the concatenation of the AssemblyCopyright attribute value (see your project’s AssemblyInfo.cs/AssemblyInfo.vb file) and the “All Rights Reserved.” string. The text displayed above the progress bar. The splash screen’s owner. A value that specifies whether to use the fade-in effect when the splash screen is being opened. A value that specifies whether to use the fade-out effect when the splash screen is being closed. true to throw an exception if another splash form has already been opened; false to suppress this exception. A value that specifies how the form is positioned. Coordinates at which the splash form is shown (if the startPos parameter is set to Manual).

Displays a skin-aware splash screen. The current skin determines the background and font settings of the splash screen’s elements.

Creates and displays a , whose type is specified by the SplashScreenManager.ActiveSplashFormTypeInfo property.

This member supports the internal infrastructure, and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

Gets or sets the screen coordinates at which a splash form ( or ) will be displayed.

A Point structure specifying the screen coordinates at which a splash form ( or ) will be displayed.

Gets or sets the arrangement of a splash form ( or ).

A SplashFormStartPosition enumerator value specifying the arrangement of a splash form ( or a ).

Blocks the current thread until the active splash form is closed.

Enumerates values that specify the wait indicator in an Overlay Form.

A rotating image. The actual image depends on the skin.

Dots arranged in a line.

Contains the classes that maintain the XtraTabControl’s infrastructure.

Contains classes that implement a custom header button feature for a tab control.

A custom header button for tab controls.

Initializes a new instance.

The predefined button type. The button caption. Displayed when kind is Clear, Delete, DropDown, Ellipsis, Glyph, Minus, Ok, Plus, Redo, Search, Separator or Undo. The button width. true if the button is enabled; otherwise, false. true if the button is visible; otherwise, false. Image display options. The button’s appearance options. The button’s appearance options in the hovered state. The button’s appearance options in the pressed state. The button’s appearance options in the disabled state. The button’s tooltip. The button’s tag. The button’s super tooltip.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A ButtonPredefines enumeration value that specifies the surface icon of a button. A String value that is the button caption. An Int32 value that is the button width. true if the button is enabled; otherwise, false. true if the button is visible; otherwise, false. An EditorButtonImageOptions object that stores image-related properties. An assigned to this button. A String value that is the button hint. An Object that can be used to identify different buttons. A that is the button super tip.

Initializes a new instance with the specified settings.

A value that specifies a button’s kind. This parameter initializes the EditorButton.Kind property. A string value that specifies a button’s caption. This parameter initializes the EditorButton.Caption property. An integer value that specifies a button’s width. This parameter initializes the EditorButton.Width property. true if a button is enabled; otherwise, false. This parameter initializes the EditorButton.Enabled property. true if a button is visible; otherwise, false. This parameter initializes the EditorButton.Visible property. An value that specifies a button’s image alignment. This parameter initializes the EditorButton.ImageLocation property. A button’s image. This parameter initializes the EditorButton.Image property. An that specifies a button’s appearance. This parameter initializes the EditorButton.Appearance property. A string value that specifies a button’s tooltip. This parameter initializes the EditorButton.ToolTip property. An object value that specifies a button’s tag. This parameter initializes the EditorButton.Tag property. A object that specifies a button’s extended tooltip. This parameter initializes the EditorButton.SuperTip property. true if image transparency is supported; otherwise, false. This parameter initializes the EditorButton.EnableImageTransparency property.

Initializes a new class instance with the specified kind.

A value that specifies a kind of button. This parameter initializes the EditorButton.Kind property.

Gets a collection that owns the custom header button.

A object that is the collection that owns the current custom header button.

Gets a custom header button’s index within the collection.

An integer value that is the ‘s index within the collection.

The property is not supported.

A custom header button collection for tab controls.

Initializes a new class instance.

Adds a custom button to the current button collection.

A object that is the button that will be added. An integer value that is a custom button’s index in the collection.

Adds an array of custom buttons to the current button collection.

A object array that consists of the buttons to be added.

Copies buttons from the specified object to the current object.

The object that is the source button collection.

Locks this and prevents any visual updates for buttons in this collection. Call the CustomHeaderButtonCollection.EndUpdate method to unlock the collection and redraw its buttons.

Cancels the UI lock caused by the CustomHeaderButtonCollection.BeginUpdate method.

Occurs when the current custom header buttons collection is changed.

Gets a value that specifies if a custom header button belongs to the current collection.

A object to locate in the collection. true if a custom header button belongs to the current collection; otherwise, false.

Unlocks the and redraws its buttons to reflect all modifications that have been made while the collection was locked. To lock a collection and prevent its buttons from excessive redraws, call the CustomHeaderButtonCollection.BeginUpdate method.

Gets the specified button’s position in the current .

The object to locate. The zero-based index of the button in the .

Inserts a custom header button to the at the specified index.

An integer value that is an index at which the custom header button is inserted. A object that is the custom header button to be inserted.

Gets a button from the button collection at the specified position.

The zero-based index of the button to return. A object at the specified position in the current collection.

Returns the current object’s text representation.

A string value that specifies the text representation of the current object.

Gets the number of visible buttons in a button collection.

The number of visible buttons in a button collection.

Enumerates values that specify whether Close buttons are displayed in individual tab pages, the tab control’s header, or in both.

The default behavior determined by controls. For a , the Close button within the tab control’s header is displayed as specified by the control’s HeaderButtonsShowMode property. Close buttons in individual pages are hidden. For a in a , the Default option is equivalent to ClosePageButtonShowMode.InActiveTabPageHeaderAndOnMouseHover.

Close buttons are displayed in the tab control’s header, and within the active page. The visibility of the Close button within the tab control’s header is specified by the control’s HeaderButtonsShowMode property.

A Close button is displayed in the active page. The Close button in the control’s header is hidden.

Close buttons are displayed within an active tab, and within an inactive tab when the mouse is hovered over it. The visibility of the Close buttons within the tab control’s header is specified by the HeaderButtonsShowMode property.

Close buttons are displayed in all pages. The Close button in the control’s header is hidden.

Close buttons are displayed in all pages and in the control’s header. The visibility of the Close button within the tab control’s header is specified by the control’s HeaderButtonsShowMode property.

The Close button is displayed in the tab control’s header, as specified by the control’s HeaderButtonsShowMode property.

Provides data for the TabbedView.CustomDrawHeaderButton event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

An object that provides access to the drawing surface. An object that performs paint operations. An object that contains information about the button being drawn.

Gets the rectangle that specifies the bounds of the header button.

A rectangle that specifies the bounds of the header button.

Gets the button that is being drawn.

An object that specifies the button that is being drawn.

Provides access to the object that contains information about the button being drawn.

An object that contains information about the button being drawn.

Provides the appearance settings used to paint the elements in a tab page.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Locks the object by preventing visual updates until the EndUpdate method is called.

Fires after the object’s settings have been changed.

Releases all the resources used by the current object.

Unlocks the object after a call to the BeginUpdate method and causes an immediate visual update.

Gets appearance settings of the tab page(s).

An object that contains appearance settings of the tab page(s).

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the header which corresponds to the currently active page.

An object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the header of the active page.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the header which corresponds to a disabled page.

An object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the header of a disabled page.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the page header over which the mouse pointer is currently hovering.

An object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the hot-tracked page header.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the page’s client region.

An object which represents the appearance settings used to paint the page’s client region.

Restores all the appearance settings and usage options back to their default values and thus stops tab pages from using these appearance settings.

Tests whether the object should be persisted.

true if the object should be persisted; otherwise, false.

Provides members that indicate which tab headers should display their Pin Buttons.

A Default value. Acts identically to the PinPageButtonShowMode.InActiveTabPageHeaderAndOnMouseHover value.

Only an active tab page header should display a Pin Button.

Only active and hovered tab headers should display a pin button.

All existing tab headers should display a pin button.

Lists values that specify the manner in which tab buttons are shown within a tab header panel.

The Close button is always displayed within the page header panel. The Prev and Next buttons are displayed when the XtraTabControl.MultiLine property is set to false.

The option is equivalent to the TabButtonShowMode.WhenNeeded option.

Tab buttons are always hidden.

Tab buttons are automatically shown when the tab control’s width is insufficient to display all the page headers.

Provides data for the TabbedView.CustomDrawTabHeader event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with specified settings.

An object that provides access to the drawing surface. An object that performs paint operations. An object that contains information about the tab being drawn. An object that contains information about the row being drawn. An object that contains information about the page being drawn.

Gets the rectangle that specifies the bounds of the tab header.

A rectangle that specifies the bounds of the tab header.

Provides access to the drawing surface and a cache of pens, fonts, and brushes.

An object that provides access to the drawing surface and a cache of pens, fonts, and brushes.

Gets an object that contains information about the tab being drawn.

An object that contains information about the tab being drawn.

Draws the visual element according to the default algorithm.

Draws the visual element’s background according to the default algorithm.

Draws the visual element’s buttons according to the default algorithm.

Draws the visual element’s icon according to the default algorithm.

Draws the visual element’s text according to the default algorithm.

Paints the required HTML template inside an element that raised this event. The context parameter allows you to assign an object that transfers mouse events to template elements.

Paints the required HTML template inside an element that raised this event.

A template to draw. Sets up required properties of the DxHtmlPainterArgs object.

Provides access to the drawing surface.

An object that provides access to the drawing surface.

Gets or sets whether the event is handled and prevents the default draw operation from being performed.

true, to prevent the default draw operation from being performed; otherwise, false.

Provides access to the object that performs paint operations.

An object that performs paint operations.

Provides access to the object that contains information about the page being drawn.

An object that contains information about the page being drawn.

Provides access to the object that contains information about the row being drawn.

An object that contains information about the row being drawn.

Lists values that specify the position of the tab headers in a tab control.

The tab headers are located along the bottom of the tab control.

The tab headers are located along the left side of the tab control.

The tab headers are located along the right side of the tab control.

The tab headers are located along the top of the tab control.

Contains values that specify if and when a control’s TabMiddleClick event fires.

The default behavior. For the , this option is equivalent to None.

A TabMiddleClick event fires on pressing the middle mouse button over a tab (before the button is released).

A TabMiddleClick event fires on clicking the middle mouse button over a tab (after the button is released).

A TabMiddleClick event does not fire.

Lists values that specify the orientation of the tab headers in a tab control.

The default behavior determined by controls. For an , the orientation of the tab headers depends upon the XtraTabControl.HeaderLocation property’s value. If the tab headers are located across the bottom or top of the tab control, they are horizontally oriented. Otherwise, if the tab headers are located along the left or right side of the tab control, they are vertically oriented. For a in a , the Default option is equivalent to Horizontal.

The tab headers are horizontally oriented.

The tab headers are vertically oriented.

Provides data for the XtraTabControl.Selecting and XtraTabControl.Deselecting events.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

An object that represents the current page. An integer value that specifies the index of the page. A Boolean value that specifies whether the event must be canceled. A value that identifies the action being performed on a tab page.

Gets or sets whether the event must be canceled.

true if the event must be canceled; otherwise, false.

Represents the method for handling events which take a object as a parameter.

An object that fires the event. A object that contains data for the event.

Provides data for the XtraTabControl.HotTrackedPageChanged and XtraTabControl.SelectedPageChanged events.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

An object which represents the tab page previously processed. This value is assigned to the TabPageChangedEventArgs.PrevPage property. An object which represents the tab page currently being processed. This value is assigned to the TabPageChangedEventArgs.Page property.

Gets the tab page currently being processed.

An object which represents the tab page currently being processed.

Gets the previously processed tab page.

An object which represents the tab page previously processed.

Represents a method that will handle the XtraTabControl.HotTrackedPageChanged and XtraTabControl.SelectedPageChanged events.

The event sender. Identifies the tab control that raised the event. A object that contains event data.

Provides data for the XtraTabControl.SelectedPageChanging event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

An object that represents the old page. An object that represents the new page.

Gets or sets whether the event must be canceled.

true if the event must be canceled; otherwise, false.

Represents the method for handling events which take a object as a parameter.

An object that fires the event. A object that contains data for the event.

Provides data for the XtraTabControl.Selected and XtraTabControl.Deselected events.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

A object that represents the current page. An integer value that specifies the index of the page. A object that represents the action being performed on the page.

Gets the action being performed on a tab.

A value that identifies the action being performed on a tab.

Gets the currently processed page.

A object that represents the currently processed page.

Gets the index of the current page.

An integer that specifies the index of the current page.

Represents the method for handling events which take a object as a parameter.

An object that fires the event. A object that contains data for the event.

Lists values that specify the alignment of the images displayed within page headers.

Images are centered within page headers and the header’s caption is hidden.

Images are positioned on the right side of page headers.

Images are positioned on the left side of page headers.

The images are not displayed within page headers.

Contains classes that provide information to the XtraTabControl’s events.

Provides data for the XtraTabControl.CloseButtonClick event.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified settings.

null if the TabControl’s Close button has been clicked. Otherwise, this refers to the page whose Close button has been clicked. This value is assigned to the ClosePageButtonEventArgs.PrevPage property. The page whose Close button has been clicked. This value is assigned to the Page property.

Returns null if the TabControl’s Close button has been clicked. Otherwise, this property returns the same value as the Page property.

An object.

Provides data for the XtraTabControl.CustomHeaderButtonClick event.

Initializes a new class instance with the specified button and page.

A value that is a clicked button. The parameter initializes the CustomHeaderButtonEventArgs.Button property. A object that is an active tab page. The parameter initializes the CustomHeaderButtonEventArgs.ActivePage property.

Gets an active tab page within the tab control.

An IXtraTabPage object that is an active tab page.

Gets the currently processed custom header button.

A object that is the currently processed custom header button.

The method for handling the XtraTabControl.CustomHeaderButtonClick event, which takes a object as a parameter.

The event source. Identifies the tab control that raised the event. A object that contains event data.

Provides data for the XtraTabControl.HeaderButtonClick event.

Initializes a new class instance with the specified button and page.

A currently processed button. The parameter initializes the HeaderButtonEventArgs.Button property. A currently processed page. The parameter initializes the HeaderButtonEventArgs.ActivePage property.

Gets an active tab page within the tab control.

An IXtraTabPage object that is an active tab page.

Gets the currently processed header button.

A TabButtons item that is the currently processed header button.

Gets or sets whether the XtraTabControl.HeaderButtonClick event has been handled, and no default processing is required.

true if the default event processing is not required; otherwise, false.

The method for handling the XtraTabControl.HeaderButtonClick event, which takes a object as a parameter.

The event source. Identifies the tab control that raised the event. A object that contains event data.

Displays tabbed pages where you can place other controls.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Gets or sets whether all icons within the current should be painted in the pages’ foreground colors.

true if all icons within the current should be painted in the pages’ foreground colors; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether or not tabs recognize HTML tags in their captions.

true if tabs can format their captions by using HTML tags; otherwise, false.

Gets the appearance settings used to paint the XtraTabControl.

A object which provides the appearance settings used to paint the tab control.

Provides access to the properties that control the appearance of all the tab pages in the XtraTabControl.

A object which provides appearance settings for all the tab pages.

Gets or sets the background color of the tab control’s client region.

A structure which specifies the background color of the tab control’s client region.

Starts the tab control’s initialization.

Locks the , preventing visual updates of the object and its elements until the EndUpdate or CancelUpdate method is called.

Gets or sets the tab control’s border style.

A enumeration value specifying the tab control’s border style.

Gets or sets the border style of all the tab pages.

A enumeration value specifying the border style of all the tab pages.

Returns information about the XtraTabControl elements located at the specified point.

A structure which specifies test point coordinates relative to the tab control’s top-left corner. A DevExpress.XtraTab.ViewInfo.XtraTabHitInfo object that contains information about the tab elements located at the test point.

Returns the tab control’s size, calculated from the size of its page.

A System.Drawing.Size structure which represents the size of a tab page’s client region. A System.Drawing.Size structure which represents the tab control’s size, calculated from the size of its page.

Unlocks the object after it has been locked by the BeginUpdate method, without causing an immediate visual update.

Occurs when the Close button displayed within the XtraTabControl’s header is clicked.

Gets or sets whether Close buttons are displayed in individual tab pages and the tab control’s header.

A value that specifies the display mode for Close buttons.

Gets the collection of controls owned by the current control. This property supports the internal infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code.

A NoSerializationControlCollection object.

Allows you to custom paint header buttons (XtraTabControl.CustomHeaderButtons).

Allows you to custom paint tabs.

Occurs when a custom header button is clicked.

Provides access to the custom header button collection in the current tab control.

The object providing access to custom header buttons for the tab control.

Occurs after a page has been deselected.

Occurs when a page is about to be deselected, and allows cancellation of the operation.

Gets the bounds of the tab page’s client region.

A structure which represents the bounding rectangle of the tab page’s client region.

Ends the tab control’s initialization.

Unlocks the object after a call to the BeginUpdate method and causes an immediate visual update.

Gets or sets the index of the tab page whose header is the first visible header onscreen.

A zero-based integer which specifies the index of the tab page whose header is the first visible header onscreen.

This property is not supported by the class.

Gets or sets the control’s foreground color.

A structure that represents the control’s foreground color.

Gets or sets whether the page headers should be automatically stretched to fill the empty space in a tab row.

A enumeration value which specifies whether the tab headers should be automatically stretched to fill the empty space in a tab row.

Occurs when a built-in header button is clicked.

Gets the options that specify which tab buttons can be displayed within the header panel.

A set of DevExpress.XtraTab.TabButtons flags that specify the visibility of tab buttons.

Gets or sets a value specifying whether and when Close, Next and Prev buttons are displayed in the tab control’s header.

A value that specifies whether and when tab buttons are displayed within the header.

Gets or sets the position of the tab headers.

A enumeration member which specifies the position of the tab headers.

Gets or sets the orientation of the tab headers.

A enumeration member which specifies the orientation of the tab headers.

Fires after the hot-tracked page header has been changed.

Gets or sets the hot-tracked tab page.

An object which represents the tab page currently hot-tracked.

Gets or sets a collection of images that you can embed into captions/messages/tooltips in the control using the image HTML-inspired tag.

An or that contains images.

Gets or sets the source of the images that can be displayed within page headers.

A that is an image collection providing images for page headers.

Gets a value indicating whether the tab control is currently being initialized.

true if the tab control is being initialized; otherwise, false.

Updates a tab control.

Provides access to the settings which control the tab control’s look and feel.

A object whose properties specify the tab control’s look and feel.

Makes the header of the specified page visible on-screen if it’s currently invisible.

An object which represents the tab page.

Gets or sets the maximum width of tab headers.

An integer value that is the maximum width of tab headers. 0 if the width of tab headers is not limited.

Gets or sets whether more than one row of tab headers can be displayed.

A value which specifies whether more than one row of tab headers can be displayed.

Gets the bounding rectangle of a tab page’s client region.

A structure which represents the bounding rectangle of the tab page’s client region.

Gets or sets the alignment of the image displayed within the page header.

A enumeration member which specifies the image’s alignment.

This member is not supported.

A value specifying the name of the paint style applied to the tab control.

Gets or sets whether right-to-left mirror placement is turned on.

A enumeration value that specifies whether right-to-left mirror placement is turned on.

Occurs after a page has been selected.

Fires when the tab change animation completes.

Fires after a new XtraTabControl page has been selected.

Allows you to prevent a specific tab page from being activated.

Gets or sets the currently selected tab page.

An object which represents the tab page currently selected.

Gets or sets the index of the currently selected tab page.

A zero-based integer which specifies the index of the selected tab page.

Occurs when a specific page is about to be selected, and allows cancellation of the operation.

Gets or sets whether a focus frame is displayed around the selected page header.

A enumeration member which specifies whether a focus frame is displayed around the selected page header.

Gets or sets whether the page headers are displayed.

A enumeration member which specifies whether the page headers are displayed.

Gets or sets whether the tab control can display tooltips.

A enumeration member which specifies whether the tab control can display tooltips.

Fires when an end-user presses the middle mouse button over a tab. To ensure that this event fires, set the XtraTabControl.TabMiddleClickFiringMode property to MouseDown or MouseUp.

Gets or sets if and when the XtraTabControl.TabMiddleClick event fires.

A value that specifies if and when the XtraTabControl.TabMiddleClick event fires.

Provides access to the tab control’s page collection.

An object which represents a collection of tab pages within a tab control.

Gets or sets the default width for all tab page headers.

An integer value that specifies the default width for tab page headers.

This property isn’t used.

Gets or sets the tooltip controller component that controls the appearance, position and content of the hints displayed for a tab control.

The component which controls the appearance and behavior of the hints displayed for the tab control.

Provides access to parameters of the tab switch animation.

An DevExpress.XtraTab.XtraTabControlTransition object that specifies parameters of the tab switch animation.

Gets or sets whether the XtraTabControl uses the non-default painting mode.

true if the XtraTabControl control uses the non-default painting mode; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the control is painted grayed out, when it’s in the disabled state.

true if the control is painted grayed out, when it’s in the disabled state; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether mnemonic characters are used to activate tab pages.

true if mnemonic characters are used to activate tab pages; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets an object which specifies the tab control’s painting style.

A DevExpress.XtraTab.Registrator.BaseViewInfoRegistrator object or descendant which specifies the tab control’s painting style.

Represents a single tab page.

Initializes a new instance of the class with default settings.

Gets or sets whether the current ‘s icon should be painted in the page’s foreground color.

true if the current ‘s icon should be painted in the page’s foreground color; otherwise, false.

This member overrides the property.

A bitwise combination of the values.

Provides access to the properties that control the tab page’s appearance.

A object which provides the appearance settings for the tab page’s elements.

Gets or sets whether the auto-size feature is enabled. This property is not supported by the class.

true if the auto-size feature is enabled; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the auto-size mode. This property is not supported by the class.

A value.

Gets or sets the background color of the tab page’s client region.

A structure which specifies the background color of the tab page’s client region.

Specifies the background image for the control. This property is not supported by the class. Use the BackgroundImage property of the PageAppearance.PageClient object instead.

A value.

This member is not supported by the class.

This member overrides the property.

A enumeration member which specifies the position and manner in which a control is docked.

Gets or sets whether a tab page can be selected.

true if a tab page is enabled and can be selected by an end-user or via code; otherwise, false.

This property is not supported by the class.

Gets or sets the foreground color of the tab page’s client region.

A structure which specifies the foreground color of the tab page’s client region.

Gets or sets the image displayed within the tab page’s header.

A object which represents the image displayed within the tab page’s header.

Gets or sets the index of the image displayed within the tab page’s header.

A zero-based integer value specifying the index of an image within the XtraTabControl.Images list.

Provides access to settings that allow you to set up raster and vector icons for this .

An DevExpress.XtraTab.XtraTabPageImageOptions object that stores image-related options.

Gets or sets padding for the image displayed in the page’s header.

A System.Windows.Forms.Padding value that specifies padding for the image.

Gets the source of images which provides images for tab pages.

An which provides images for tab pages.

Gets or sets the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the control relative to the upper-left corner of its container.

A structure which represents the upper-left corner of the control relative to the upper-left corner of its container.

Provides access to look-and-feel settings of the current object.

A object that stores look-and-feel settings.

Gets or sets the maximum width of the current tab header.

An integer value that is the maximum width of the current tab header. 0 if the maximum width of the tab header is specified by the XtraTabControl.MaxTabPageWidth property.

Gets or sets whether a tab page can be selected.

true if a tab page is enabled and can be selected by an end-user or via code; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the tab page is visible.

true if the tab page is visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the page contains a Close button.

A value that specifies whether a Close button is displayed in the tab.

Gets or sets the control’s height and width.

A System.Drawing.Size object that represents the control’s height and width, in pixels.

Starts the animation of an animated GIF file being displayed in the page’s header.

Stops animation of an animated GIF file being displayed in the tab page’s header.

Gets or sets a for the current tab page’s header.

A object associated with the current tab page.

Gets the tab control to which the tab page belongs.

An object or descendant which owns the tab page.

Gets or sets the tab order of the control within its container.

A zero-based integer value specifying the control’s index within the set of controls included in the tab order.

Gets or sets the header width for the current tab page.

An integer value that specifies the width of the current tab page’s header.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether an end-user can focus this page using the TAB key.

true if an end-user can focus the page using the TAB key; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the tab page caption.

A value which specifies the text displayed within the page header.

Gets or sets a regular tooltip for the tab page.

A value which specifies the regular tooltip for the tab page.

Gets or sets the type of the tooltip icon to display in a regular tooltip.

A enumeration value.

Gets or sets a regular tooltip’s title.

A string that specifies a regular tooltip’s title.

This member supports the .NET Framework infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code. To specify the tab page’s visibility use the XtraTabPage.PageVisible property instead.

true if the tab page is visible; otherwise, false.

Represents a tab control’s page collection.

Initializes a new instance of the class with the specified owner.

An object or descendant which represents the tab control that will own the new page collection. This value is assigned to the XtraTabPageCollection.TabControl property.

Creates a new tab page with default settings and appends it to the collection.

An object which represents the new tab page.

Appends the specified page to the collection.

An object which represents the new page.

Creates a new tab page with the specified text and appends it to the collection.

A value which specifies the page’s text. An object which represents the new page.

Appends an array of objects to the collection.

An array of objects to append to the collection.

Removes all objects from the instance.

true, to release all resources used by the tab pages; otherwise, false.

Fires after the page collection has been changed.

Indicates whether the collection contains the tab page specified.

An object to locate in the collection. true if the collection contains the specified tab page; otherwise, false.

Returns the specified page’s position within the collection.

An object which represents the page to be located. An integer value representing the specified page’s zero-based index. -1 if the collection doesn’t contain the specified page.

Adds the specified page to the collection at the specified position.

An integer value representing the zero-based index at which the specified page should be inserted. If it’s negative or exceeds the number of elements within the collection an exception is thrown. An object which represents the inserted page.

Creates a new page with default settings and adds it to the collection at the specified position.

An integer value representing the zero-based index at which the specified page should be inserted. If it’s negative or exceeds the number of elements within the collection an exception is thrown.

Gets the tab page at the specified position within the collection.

An integer value representing the zero-based index of the page. If it’s negative or exceeds the number of elements, an exception is raised. An object which represents the tab page at the specified position.

Moves the page to another position within the collection.

A zero-based integer specifying the position within the collection to move the page to. An object which represents the tab page to move.

Removes the specified tab page from the collection.

An object which represents the tab page to be removed from the collection. true, to release all resources used by the tab page; otherwise, false.

Removes the specified tab page from the collection.

An object which represents the tab page to be removed from the collection.

Gets the tab control which displays the pages in this collection.

An object or descendant which represents the tab control that owns this page collection.

Copies all items contained within this to a separate array.

An array of objects owned by this .

Contains classes that encapsulate Wait Forms.

Represents a control showing an await message to a user.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Gets or sets the acceleration for the wait indicator visual elements.

A value that specifies the acceleration for the wait indicator visual elements.

Gets or sets the number of wait indicator visual elements.

An integer value that specifies the number of wait indicator visual elements.

Gets or sets a custom image for the wait indicator visual elements.

An object that specifies a custom image for the wait indicator visual elements.

Gets or sets the speed for the wait indicator visual elements.

A value that specifies the speed for the wait indicator visual elements.

Gets or sets the amount of space, in pixels, between the wait indicator and text.

An integer value that specifies the amount of space, in pixels, between the wait indicator and text.

Contains appearance settings used to customize the appearance of the control’s ProgressPanel.Caption.

A that contains settings to customize the appearance of the control’s ProgressPanel.Caption.

Contains appearance settings used to customize the appearance of the control’s ProgressPanel.Description.

A that contains settings to customize the appearance of the control’s ProgressPanel.Description.

Gets or sets whether the panel’s height is calculated automatically based on the currently applied skin.

true if the panel’s height is calculated automatically based on the currently applied skin; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the panel’s width is automatically adjusted to fit all the text.

true if the panel’s width is automatically adjusted to fit the entire text; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the length, in pixels, of the bar wait indicator.

An integer value that specifies the length, in pixels, of the bar wait indicator.

Gets or sets the thickness, in pixels, of the bar wait indicator.

An integer value that specifies the thickness, in pixels, of the bar wait indicator.

Gets or sets whether the bar wait indicator moves with a uniform velocity or with acceleration.

A DevExpress.Utils.Animation.MotionType enumeration type that specifies whether the bar wait indicator moves with a uniform velocity or with acceleration.

Gets or sets the control’s border style.

A enumeration value specifying the control’s border style.

Gets or sets the control’s caption.

A string that specifies the control’s caption.

Gets or sets the vertical distance between the ProgressPanel.Caption and ProgressPanel.Description.

An integer value that is the vertical distance between the caption and description.

Gets or sets the alignment of the caption, description and wait indicator relative to the panel.

A enumeration value that specifies the alignment of the caption, description and wait indicator relative to the panel.

Gets the ProgressPanel.Caption property’s default value, which can be localized.

Gets the ProgressPanel.Description property’s default value, which can be localized.

Gets or sets the control’s description.

A string that specifies the control’s description.

Gets or sets the number of animation frames.

An integer value that specifies the number of animation frames.

Gets or sets the time between animation frames, in special units.

An integer value that specifies the time between animation frames, in special units.

Retrieves the size of a rectangular area into which the control can be fitted.

The custom-sized area for the control. A System.Drawing.Size value.

Gets or sets the horizontal distance between the control’s left edge and the image

An integer value that is the horizontal distance between the control’s left edge and the image

Gets the size of the control’s image.

A Size of the control’s image.

Gets or sets the height, in pixels, of elements composing the line wait indicator.

An integer value that specifies the height, in pixels, of elements composing the line wait indicator.

Gets or sets the shape of elements comprising the line wait indicator.

A DevExpress.Utils.Animation.LineAnimationElementType enumeration value that specifies the shape of elements comprising the line wait indicator.

Gets of sets the diameter, in pixels, of the circle wait indicator.

An integer value that specifies the diameter, in pixels, of the circle wait indicator.

Gets or sets whether the control’s ProgressPanel.Caption is visible.

true if the control’s ProgressPanel.Caption is visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets whether the control’s ProgressPanel.Description is visible.

true if the control’s ProgressPanel.Description is visible; otherwise, false.

Gets or sets the horizontal distance between the image and text (caption plus description).

An integer value that is the horizontal distance between the image and text (caption plus description)

Returns the object which contains internal information used to render the control.

A DevExpress.XtraWaitForm.ProgressPanelViewInfo object which contains internal information used to render the control.

Gets or sets the wait animation’s type.

The wait animation’s type.

Contains values that specify a form’s Z-order relative to other forms.

A form is displayed topmost.

A form is displayed above its parent.

Specifies a form’s default position relative to other forms. Currently, Default is equivalent to AboveParent.

This option applies the old algorithm that keeps a form above its parent.

A small form, designed to display the progress of a lengthy operation. The form’s display is managed by the component.

Initializes a new instance of the class.

Sets the ‘s caption to the specified value.

A string that is the new value for the ‘s caption.

Sets the ‘s description to the specified value.

A string that is the new value for the ‘s description.

Gets or sets above which windows the current is displayed.

A enumerator value that specifies above which windows the current is displayed.

This property is obsolete. Use the WaitForm.ShowOnTopMode property instead.